prircetoit REG. 0CT1B8I THEQLOG ’ V Division.. P* L- D 3 3 /Section. . H *7 \ Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/japanesegrammar00hoff_0 JAPANESE GRAMMAR. A BY J. J. HOFFMANN, MBMBBK OP THE ROYAL ACADEMY OP 9C1BNOE9, ETC. BTC. PI BLISHED BY COMMAND OF HIS MAJESTY’S MINISTER EUR COLONIAL AFFAIRS. PRINTED BY A. W. SYTHOFF WITH THE GOVERNMENT CHINESE AND JAPANESE TYPES LEIDEN 1868. SOLD BY E. J. BRILL AND A. W. SYTHOFF. This work is published in Dutch also under the title of JAPANSCHE SPRAAKLEER DOOR J. J. HOFFMANN. LEIDEN 1868. HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONORABLE J. J. ROCHUSSEN L. L. D. MINISTER OF STATE, LATE GOVERNOR OF DUTCH EAST INDIA, LATE MINISTER FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF THE COLONIES IN GRATITUDE FOR THE LIBERAL AND ENLIGHTENED MANNER IN WHICH HE HAS PATRONIZED THE STUDY OF THE CHINESE AND JAPANESE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE THIS WORK IS VERY RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED BY HIS EXCELLENCY’S MOST OBEDIANT SERVANT THE AUTHOR "pROPERT PRINCETON htG. SEP I boo THEOLOGICAL PREFACE. The Grammar of the Japanese language, which accompanied with this Preface, is simultaneously published in the English and in the Dutch languages, is an original work, not a remodelling or an imitation of any other works of that stamp at present existing. As the result of a many years’ study of the Japanese literature, it describes the written or book language, as it really exists in^ its ancient, as well as in its modern forms. It also contains the author’s own observations on the domain of the spoken language, which his intercourse with native Japanese in France, in England and especially in the Netherlands has afforded him ample opportunities to make ; opportunites , which have been the more valuable to him , in as much as that they brought him m contact with people belonging to the most civilized and the most learned, as well as with those of the inferior classes of Japanese society. Thence he derives the right , even though he has never actually tredden the soil of Japan, to embrace the spoken language in the range of his observations, and to treat it in connection with the written language. The author is convinced that, all he has quoted from Japanese writings, whatever their character, is genuine: he relies upon it himself, and trusts that the experience of others, unprejudiced, will find that it is so. With regard to the manner in which he has conceived the language, and in all its phenomena treated it analytically and synthetically, he believes it to be in consonance with the spirit of this language , simple and natural , and , — his daily experience confirms this, — thoroughly practical. PREFACE. This method of his , was made known in general outline ten years ago , when he published the Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst door Mr. J. H. honker CUR- tius, and the seal of approbation was affixed to it by the judgement of scholars, whereas Mr. s. r brown, who, in 1803, published the very important contribu- tion : Colloquial Japanese or conversational sentences and dialogues in English and Japanese , not only founded his Introductory remarks on the Grammar, on the Author’s method, but with a few exceptions, followed it in its whole extent. The Grammar, now published, to lay claim to completeness, ought to be followed by a treatise on the Syntax, the materials for which are prepared. It will be published as a separate work, and be of small compass. By these aids, initiated in the treatment of the language, the student may, with profit, make use of the Japanese-Dutch-English Dictionary, for the publi- cation of which the author has prepared all the materials necessary, and by so doing he will have at his disposal the most important means of access to the Japanese literature. Leiden, May 1868. THE AUTHOR. CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. Page. ^ 1 . Connection of the Japanese with the Chinese lauguage. — The necessity of uniting to the study of the Japanese, that of the Chinese language 1 • ^ 2. On the writing of the Japanese 2. ^ 3. Introduction of the written and the spoken language of China into Japan 3. ✓ 4. Application of the Chinese writing, to the writing of the Japanese language 4. 5. The Japanese writing proper. a. The Kata-kdna 6. b. The Fira-gana 6. ✓ 6. The Japaucse phonetic system 7. A. Systematic arrangement of the 47 sounds, expressed by Chinese and Japanese Kana- signs 7. B. The Irova in Chinese characters and in Kata-kdna signs 9. 7. Repetition of syllables. — Stenographic signs. — Steps 11. 8. Remarks on the Japanese system of sounds, and the expression of it with our letters.. . . 12. 9. Doubling of consonants by assimilation 18. 10. Accent and rhythm 20. 11. The Japanese running-hand Fira-gana. Page. a. The Irova in Fira-gana 22. b. Synopsis of the Fira-gdua-ch aracters most in use 22. ^12. AVrit^, or book language 29. A. Exclusively Chinese 29. Chinese dialects in Japan 30. ^ Chinese text with Japanese translation. . . 32. B. Books written in the Japanese language . 34. C. Style, a. Old Japanese 35. b. New Japanese 38. 13. Language spoken. — General conversational language and dialects 39. Epistolary style 42. 14. On the parts of speech 42. 15. Glance at the arrangement and connection of words in Japanese 44. ETYMOLOGY, NATURE AND INFLECTION OF WORDS. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. § 1. The root 49. § 2. Radical or primitive word 49. § 3. Radical in composition . . 49. CONTENTS. Page. A. Coordination 50. B. Subordination 50. I. Genitive subordination 50. II. Objective subordination. 1 . direct 50. 2 . indirect 50. III. The radical form, as definition before adjectives 50. Euphonic modification 50. § 4. Gender 51. A. Gender logically included in particular names 51. B. 1 . Gender indicated by the prefixes 0 and Me 51. 2. Gender expressed by Ono and Meno . 52. 3. By Ko and Me, old- Japanese Ki and Mi 52. C. Application of the ideas of male and fe- male to objects without sex 53 . / i). Chinese expressions for the distinction of sex 53. § 5. Number . . 53. A. Singular 53. B. I. Plural expressed by repetition of the noun 54. II. Plural expressed by nouns used ad- jectively which signify a quantity. generality 55. 1. Japanese forms 55. 2. Chinese forms 50. III. The plural expressed by collective words as Ra , Tomo ( domo ) , Gara , Bara, Nami, Tat si, Siu , Gat a and Naclo , used as suffixes 56. IV. Plural expressed by adverbs, which unite the idea of multitude to the pre- dicate verb, Mina, Nokarazu , Ko/o- gotoku 59 § 0. Isolating of the noun by the suffix t\, va; wa ; /<, ba 00 . § 7. Declension 01. 1. Nominative. Vocntivc 01 . 02 . 03. Page. 1. Ga , no index of the subject 04. 2. Genitive suffixes No, Na and Tsu . 00. IV. Dative and Terminative. The suffix Ye (ye) 67. The suffix Ni, as sign of the a. Dative or Ablative 08. b. Local .* 68. c. Modal 09. d. Casual and Instrumental 09. e. Dative of the person 69. /. Dative of the thing 69. y. Terminative 70. V. To, Kite, Be 70. VI. Ablative, characterized by Yori or by Kara 71. CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS. § 8 . I. Qualifying nouns, which serve as pro- nouns 74. A. For „I” 74. B. For the person spoken to 74. Particular names of human relations to distinguish the person concerned 77. II. Pronouns proper, formed from the adverbs of place Wa , A , Ka , Ko , Yo , So , Da (Do), Idzu 79. a. Immediate compounds with Wa 80. b. Immediate compounds of the other ad- verbs of place with Ko (ku), Tsi , Tsira and Tsutsi 80. c. Da-ga , Wa-ga 82. d. Pronouns possessive, formed from ra- dical words indicating place, by suf- fixing No 83. e. Substantive pronouns, formed from ad- verbs of place , by suffixing Re 85. I ) IT tire, 2) Art, Or(, 3) Kart, 4) Kora. 86 . 5) Sore , 0) 87. 7) Tare (Dare), Tore (Dore) , tdznrt. 88 . III. Determinative and rcllcctivc pronouns... 89. II. Accusative III. Genitive. . . CONTENTS. Page. A. 1. Otwre , onodzukara 89. 2. Mi, Midzukara, Waga-mi 89. B. Expressions borrowed from the Chi- nese: 1. Sin , 2. Zi-sin, 3. Zi-bun, 4. Zi-sen 93. IV. Expressions of reciprocity: Tagai ni, Ai. 95. V. Pronouns indefinite: Fito , Aru-fito, Mo- no. — Dare mo and Nani mo followed by a verb negative. . 95. VI. Relative pronoun Tokoro..... 97. VII. Interrogative pronouns derived from Ta or To, vulgo Da ox Do 97. 1. Nani, what? 98. 2. Ika, how? 101. Interrogative pronouns with the suffix , mo 102. VIII. Arrangement of the personal pronouns in the conversational language 102. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. j 9. Distinction between the attributive and pre- dicate forms 105. I. The adjective in the written lan- g u a g e. A. Joined to a noun substantive. 105. B. Adjectives in ki. 1. a. Ki, termination of the adjective, used as attributive 105. b. Adjectives in ki, used as nouns concrete 106. 2. The termination ku , as adverbial form. The same, isolated by the suffix va. 106. 3. a. Si, form of the adjective, as pre- dicate 106. b. As such, superseded by Kari.. . . 107. 4. Sa, forming nouns abstract 107. 5. List of adjectives in ki 107. 6. Examples showing the use of the forms cited 110. II. The adjective according to the spo- ken language 112. Pngc. Examples, showing the use of the forms 112. Derivative adjectives. § 10. Adjectives in karii l ind garu § 11. n „ am.. i 12. V „ ntiru , na and tiirit $ 13. Derivative adjectives in ka § 14. n n i) yaka § 15. n r. n held or hold .... $ 16. V rt n siki § 17. n n n kit-nki § 18. r> n V rd-siki § 19. n n n beki § 20. n n n naki § 21. Adjectives with the negative prefix Na , or the Chinese Fu § 22. Adjectives with a previous definition .... § 23. Definition of adjectives by adverbs, which denote the presence of a quality in full degree § 24. Definition of adjectives by adverbs, which denote the presence of a quality in a higher degree. Absolute comparative... § 25. The relative or real comparative. 1. Attribution of a quality in equal de- gree 2. Attribution of a quality in a higher ^:giee § 26. The absolute superlative § 27. The relative superlative § 28. Expression of the excess of a quality. . 113. 114. 114. 116. 117. 119 119. 124. 125. 127. 127. 128. 129. 130. 130. 131. 132. 134. 135. 136. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 29. The ancient Japanese cardinal numbers . . 137. 5 30. The Chinese cardinal numbers 141. § 31. The ordinal numerals 142. § 32. The iterative numerals 143. ) 33. The doubling or multiplying numerals... 144. § 34. The sort numbers 144. § 35. The distributive numbers 145. § 36. The fractional, or broken numbers 146, CONTENTS. Page. § 37- Numeral substantives 147. I. Japanese numeratives 148. II. Chinese numeratives 149. Notation of time. § 38. Enumeration of years 154. § 39. Chronological notation of years 155. 1. after the cycle 155. 2. after the years of governments 156. § 40. Enumeration of years by year-names . . . . 157. § 41. Division of the solar year 158. § 42. Enumeration of months 159. § 43. Enumeration of the days 160. § 44. Notation of hours 162. Measures, weights and coins. § 45. Measures of length 166. § 46. Superficial measures 168. § 47. Measures of capacity 168. § 48. Weights 169. § 49. Iron, copper and bronze coins 171. § 50. Silver coins 171. § 51. Gold coins 172. CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 52. I. Adverbs proper 173. II. Improper adverbs, or adverbial expres- sions 173. Page. 1. Nouns 173. 2. Verbs in the gerund 173. Distribution of adverbs according to their signification 173. § 53. Adverbs of quality 173. §54. „ „ degree 174. §55. „ „ circumstance 176. §56. „ „ place aud space 177- §57. „ „ time 178. §58. „ „ manner 181. § 59. „ connecting propositions 182. Alphabetical synopsis of the adverbs cited. 182. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. (POSTPOSITIONS.) § 60. Retrospect of the inflexions 185. § 61. Distinction of the words expressive of re- lation 185. § 62. Nouns, used as expressive of relation.... 1S6. § 63. Verbs in the gerund, used as words ex- pressive of relation 192. A. With a previous accusative 192. B. With a previous local, or dative.... 193. Alphabetical synopsis of the words expres- sive of relation treated 195. CONTENTS. Tati'. 224. 227. Page. I CHAPTER YU. TUE VERB. § 64. Voices of the verb 197. § 65. Moods 197. § 66. Tenses 7 198. § 67- Person and Number 198. $ 68. The verbal root 198. § 69. The imperative mood 199. § 70. Closing-form of tbc verb 200. § 71. The substantive and attributive form .... 201. §72. Gerund. 1. Origin of the form 202. 2. Modifications introduced by the spoken language 203. Examples of the use of the gerund 205. § 73. The verbal root in the Local (subjunc- tive form) 205. § 74. The concessive form expressed by mo or tomo 1 206. expressed by domo or \edomo 20S. § 75. The form of the Future 208. I. The simple Future 208. Etymology of this form 209. Examples of the nse of the forms cited . 211. The certain Future of the written language 212. II. The periphrastic Future. A. of the written language , formed by 1. ..avail, arame , ran 212. 2. ..naramii, narame , naran . . . 213. 3. . . aranan — arinan 213. 4. ..suran 213. 5. ..masi 213. B. The periphrastic Future of the spo- ken language 214. §76. The suppositive form 215. § 77. The continuativc verbal form (an , iri, ori , uri ) 217. § 78. I. ..te ari, ,.te ori, ..ie iri 218. II. ../ari, ..tarn 219. Forms of the past tense. § 79. ..tari, ..tarn, ..ta 220. § 80. . . eri , ..esi, .. era , . . ereba 222. § 81. . . ki, . .si, . . ken § 82. . . keri , . . best , . . Teem , . . Iceran § S3. ..tari-ki, ..tari-si, ..tari- fern, . . te-ki , . . te-si , . . ten 228 § 84. [. . ni] , . .mi, . . nan ; [. . nun] , . . nuru , . . nureba , . . nuran 229. § 85. . . tni, ..t stitsii ; ..tsur)i, u, eba, fut. an. 231 § 86. Synopsis of the inflected forms 233. § 87. Causative or Factive verbs in si or se . 234 § 88. Causative verbs in sime 238. The passive form. § 89. Its derivation and signification 240. 1. Passive verbs of the first class 240. II- » >, n second „ 241. 111. „ * „ third „ .... 242. § 90. On the government of the passive verb.. 245. Examples of the use of the passive forms. 245. The negative form of the Japanese verb. §91. I. Theory of the Derivation 247. Examples of the formation of nega- tive verbs • • 248. II. Inflection of the negative verbs 249. § 92. Coutiuuative form of the negative verb.. 250. § 93. Form of the forbidding Imperative 251. § 94. Forms of the negative preterit 252. § 95. Forms of the negative future . 253. Examples of the use of the negative forms. 254. Verbs expressing the being, the becoming and the causing to be. § 96. dr)i, u, to be 260. § 97. Or)i, u, to dwell 263 § 98. 1, lie, Iru, to be in 264 § 99. Conjugation of nondeflecting verbs in i.. 265 Synopsis of nondeflecting verbs in i. . . 265 § 100. I. Ni, Nite, Nan, to be 269. II. Nar)i , u, to be 270. III. Nar)e , u , eru, uru, to become... 271. IV. Nas)i, u, to cause to be 273 § 101. Mas)i , u, 1. to abide; 2. to be 274 § 102. Samuravi, Sorai, Soro 276. § 103. S)i, u, uru, to do 279 I. Use of the root-form si 279 CONTENTS. Page. II. Si, acting as verb 280. Synopsis of the conjugational forms of si 281. Compounds with si 282. III. On the government of S)i, u, uru , to do 285. j 104. Besi, Beki, Beku , may, can, shall... 291. I. Derivation and signification 291. II. Iuflectional forms of Besi 292. III. On the government of Besi 293. IV. 1. Yolcus)i, u, uru, to be able... 294. 2. Atavdz)i, u, not to be able.. . . 295. V. Aliete , Aete , daring 295. VI. Too-sen iar)i, u, it should be. . . . 29G. j 105. The desiderative verbs, formed by Ta , disirous 296. § 106. Verbs expressing the leaving off of an action 297. I. formed by Maid 297. II. „ „ Yami 298. III. „ „ Simavi 298. § 107. The adverbial form of a verb 299. § 108. The derivative form men 300. $ 109. Nasi, Na/ci , Nalcu, not to exist 301. I. The root Na 301. II. Nasi, A Nai, there is not 302. III. Nald, A Nai, the adjective form. 303. IV. Nalcu, the adverbial form 304. V. Verbs compounded with Nalcu. . . . 305. 1. Nalcu si, Naku-se, 2. Nakari, 3. Nalceri , 4. Naku-nari. Synopsis of the inflectional forms and derivatives of Na)si, lei, ku 307. Remarks on the compound verbs. . 110. 1. Verbs compounded with substantives. 309. II. Verbs compounded with verbs 309. APPENDIX. Distinctive verbs and verbal forms expressive of courtesy. Page. § 112. The honorary passive form 312. §113. I. Tamavi, A Tamed 314 II. Tamavari, TJke-tamavari 315. § 114. Mdtsuri, to attend 316. Distinctive verbs expressing § 115. Being. Famberi, Moosi 317 • § 116. Doing. Si, Ilad, Asobasi. 318. § 117- Seeing, Showing. Mi , Mise , Hai-ken etc. 319. § 118. Saying. Ivi, Ii-masi, Nori-tamai , Oose , Kikase, Moosi 319. § 119. Giving. Age, Sasdge , Kvdasare , Tsuke, Torasime , Torase , Yari 321. § 120. Going and Coming. Meuri, Mairare , Mairase , Mairasare , Ide , Agari , Ma- kati, Tsika-dzuki 323. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 121. Classification of the Jap. conjunctions.. 326 A. Coordiuative conjunctions § 122. I. Copulative conjunctions 327. § 123. II. Disjunctive conjunctions 329 § 124. III. Adversative conjunctions 331. § 125. IV. Conclusive conjunctions 334 § 126. V. Explanatory conjunctions 335. B. Subordinative conjunctions. § 127. I. Conjunctions of place and time. .. 336. § 128. II. Conjunctions of quality and manner. 338. § 129. III. Conjunctions of causality. a. Conjunctions of an actual cause. 339 b. Conjunctions of a possible cause (Conditional conjunctions) 341. § 180. IV. Conjunctions of the purpose 343 § 131. V. Conjunctions of concession 344. § 132. The relative comparative of propositions. 346. Alphabetical synopsis of the conjunctions treated. 348. $ 111. General observation 311. INTRODUCTION. 1. CONNECTION OF THE JAPANESE WITH THE CHINESE LANGUAGE. — THE NECES- SITY OF UNITING TO THE STUDY OF THE JAPANESE, THAT OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE. In its general character, it is true, the Japanese is cognate to the Mongolian and Mandju languages, but with regard to its development, it is quite original, and it has remained so notwithstanding the later admixture of Chinese words, since it rules these as a foreign element, and subjects them to its own con- struction. In the Japanese language, as it is now spoken and written, two elements, the Japanese and Chinese alternate continually and. by so doing, form a mixed language which, in its formation, has followed the same course as, for instance, the English in which, the more lately adopted Romance element, which forms a woof only, in like manner, is governed grammatically by the Anglo-Saxon. In the study of the Japanese language the distinction of the two elements, is of the greatest importance; and as the Chinese element is rooted in the Chi- nese language, both spoken and written, and thence is to be explained, the student of Japanese ought to know so much of the Chinese language, as shall enable him to read and understand a Chinese text. The Japanese learns Chinese by means of his mother tongue, thus one, who 1 2 INTRODUCTION. is not a Japanese and docs not understand Japanese, but wishes to learn it, must make himself master of Chinese by another way; to do this, he will be obliged to make use of the resources which already exist in European languages. Whoever supposes that he can learn the Japanese language without, at the same time, studying the Chinese will totally fail of attaining his object either theoretically or practically. Even let him be so far master of the language spo- ken, as to be able to converse fluently with the natives, the simplest communi- cation from a Japanese functionary, the price-list of the tea-dealer, the tickets with which the haberdasher or mercer labels his parcels will remain unintelligible to him; because they contain Chinese, if, indeed, they are not wholly composed of Chinese. Thus, whoever wishes to learn Japanese thoroughly, by means of this grammar, is supposed to possess, in some degree, knowledge of the Chinese written language. 2 . ON THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE. The Japanese write Chinese but have, at the same time, their own native writing derived from the Chinese and which they, in imitation of the Chinese, write in perpendicular columns which follow one another, from the right hand to the left. Our alphabet, for that purpose would have to be written thus: I E A J F B K G C etc. ' H D If the words are written in a cross direction , they begin at the right hand . thus, I H G F E D C B A. The circumstance, that the Japanese writing does not run in the same di- rection as ours, but crosses it, or takes an opposite course, causes difficulty as soon as we have to couple Japanese writing with our own. Since, the Japanese, adhering to the custom of writing their words under one another, have altered their perpendicular columns of letters to cross lines, which thus show <1 cq Q ; to bring their form of writing into some agreement with ours, 1 have, till now, thought it best to follow their example and, like them, placed the Japanese letters at the side. Now, however, some Japanese philologists, whenever their INTRODUCTION. 3 writing is coupled with ours have, in conformity with it, adopted the plan of writing perpendicularly, and from left to right, 1 likewise have relinquished the manner formerly adopted, and now have, together with the Chinese, reduced the Japanese writing to the rule of ours, and applied to it the modification in the order of the signs already generally in use for the Chinese writing. The Japanese running-hand, on the contrary, is too much confined to the columnar system to be susceptible of any modification in its direction. 3. INTRODUCTION OF THE WRITTEN AND SPOKEN LANGUAGE OF CHINA INTO JAPAN. The first knowledge of Chinese-writing was carried to Japan by a prince of — Corea in the year 284 of our era, and then, immediately after, the tutor to that prince, a Chinese, named Wang zin (It ), having been invited, the - Japanese courtiers applied themselves to the study of the Chinese language and literature. According to the Japanese historians, Wang zin was the first teacher of the Chinese language in Japan '). In the sixth century, the study of the Chinese language and system of wri- - ting first became generally spread, by the introduction of the doctrine of buddha. Then every Japanese, in polished society, besides being instructed in his mother tongue, received instruction in Chinese also, consequently read Chinese books of morality, and aimed at being able to read and to write a letter in Chinese. The original pronunciation of the Chinese, it is true, degenerated early and that to such a degree, that new dialects of it sprung up, which were no longer intelligible to the Chinese of the continent; but notwithstanding that the Japa- nese, on account of their knowledge of the Chinese writing, and their proficiency in the Chinese style remained able, by means of the Chinese writing to inter- change ideas not only with Chinese, but with all the peoples of Asia that write — Chinese. The Chinese written language has become the language of science in~ Japan. It, still, is such and will yet long remain such, notwithstanding the in- fluence which the civilization of the West will more and more exert there. The ') This historical fact is mentioned in Japan's Beziige mit der Koreischen Halbinsel und mil China. Nach Japanischen Quellen von ). hoffmann, Leyden, 1839, page 111. 4 INTRODUCTION. Chinese written language is, though, the palladium of Japanese nationality, and the natural tie which wall once unite the East against the West! And, however slight be the influence till hitherto exerted on the Japanese language written as well as spoken , by the study of the Western languages and, to wit the Dutch, formerly the monopoly of the fraternity of interpreters and a few literary men, who used this knowledge as a bridge, over which the skill of the West was imported and spread over their country, by means of Chinese or Japanese translations, just as little will it be in future, even if the study of the Western languages should be ever so greatly extended, as the consequence, of Japan’s being eventually opened to the trade of the world. 4 . APPLICATION OF THE CHINESE WRITING, TO THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE LANGUAGE. When, after the introduction of the Chinese written and spoken language into their country, the Japanese adopted it to write their native language, which ✓ is not in the least cognate to the Chinese, instead of resolving the sound of the words into its simplest elements, and expressing them by signs, like our let- ters, they took the sound in its whole, and expressed it syllable for syllable by Chinese characters. Every Chinese radical word , it is known , is expressed by a more or less com- posite monogram (character) which has its peculiar ideographic and phonetic value — its peculiar signification and pronunciation. To choose an instance, such is the Chinese word for a thousand. The Chinese says tsien , the Japanese pronounces it sen, and the Japanese word for a thousand is tsi. The Japanese considers the peculiar pronunciation of every Chinese character, i. e. the Chinese monosyllable, modified by the Japanese accent, as its sound, and calls it Koyi or, by the Chinese name Yin, which he pronounces won ; the Japanese word, on the other hand, which expresses the meaning of the Chi- nese character, is called by him its Yomi, i. e. the reading or meaning for which he also uses the Chinese terms f0|| Kun and £ Tdktt '). The ^ , above *) The distinction between Koye en Yomi agrees with this, as it is made do by the compiler and pu- blisher of the Element de la Grammaire Japonaise par le i\ Rodriquez in § 1 of that work, and it is, therefore, important to maintain the contents of his paragraph as quite correct against the liiLcouception , INTRODUCTION. 5 quoted, may thus stand as an ideographic character and whether pronounced by the Japanese as sen or translated by tsi, or it is only used as a phonetic sign and expresses fhe syllable sen or the syllable tsi. That, by such a confusion of Koyi en Yomi , the whole writing-system of this people rests on an unfirm basis is evident at a glance. Departing from the principle, to write Japanese with the Chinese writing, and to express the Japanese words syllable by syllable, by means of Chinese characters, some hundreds of the Chinese characters most in use were pitched upon and used for phonetic signs, Kuna. [The Japanese word Kuna, pronounced as Kdnna , has arisen from kar’- or kar ot na by assimilation of the r, and means taken upon trust, or borrowed name, thus a phonetic sign without farther meaning, in distinction from Ma-na ), a real name. The word Kuna is generally expressed by the Chinese characters kid ming , borrowed name; the Kuna sign is called n * ^ r ^ ^ Kana-m&nzi , and the Kuna writing ^ , Kdna-gdki.'] These phonetic signs, just as the Chinese writing generally, were at first written in full, either in the standard-form, or in a running hand, which is produced of itself, whenever a Chinese character, composed of several strokes, is written in one continuous pencil-stroke, and gives rather a sketch of it, than a full draught. Running hand forms for are e. g. 'S'V't- The standard-form, written in full, commonly called jf ^ Sin-zi or ^ ^ Sei-zi , the real, proper character, also 17 ^ Kcd-sio , nor- ^ -\r' | ■ . > mal writing, and if-p v ^ Gyoo-sio. text-hand, was used in the Japa- nese Chronicle B $ 1= =2, Yamato-bumi or Nippon-sio ki ’) . containing the oldest history of Japan, from 661 B. C. till 696 A. C. and published in 720 A. C. as manuscript in thirty parts. The running-hand form was used in the old Japanese Bundle of Poems on the ground of which, r. alcock, pp. 9 and 10 of his Elements of Japanese Grammar, takes the field against rodriguez and his publisher. Yomi, nevertheless, means the same, as the Chinese word =JjJ ? Kun, the Kung of alcock. ') The work is written in Chinese, aud was one of the principal sources, in the elaboration of my treatise: Japans Beziige mil der Koreischen Halbinsel und mil Schina; published in VON siebold’s Nippon- Archief. 1839. W t) 6 INTRODUCTION. 3 ^ Man-itov-siu or the Collection of the Ten Thousand Leaves. -7 /K +7 J compiled about the middle of the eighth century. The first /Tana-form was, consequently, called Yamdto-kdna 1 ) ( ** Mgsg), the other Man-yov-kana 5. JAPANESE WRITING PROPER. An abbreviation of the two forms of Chinese writing led to the formation of another writing which, in opposition to the Chinese character writing, was Nippon gdku no mon-zi. a. The Kdta-kdna. Abbreviation of the Chinese standard writing gave rise to the Kdta-kdna gdki. It was, originally, intended when placed side by side with the Chinese cha- racters, to express in remarkably smaller writing either their sound (koyt), or their meaning (yorni) , and was therefore denominated Kdta-kdna-mon-zi orin*^ i. e. side-letter 2 ). According to the Japanese sources 3 ), the in- ventor of this writing is unknown, and the invention of it has been, incorrectly, attributed to the Japanese statesman, kibi daizin, who died in 757. b. The Fira-gdna 4 ). The more or less abbreviated form of the Chinese running-hand or short hand (]§Lj^ Soo-zi) is called Fira-gdna-gdki ) or the even letter-writing, or, according to another reading, Firo-gdna ( gig =8). i. e. broad letters, since they take up the whole breadth of the writing-column. It is the running hand in which official documents, as well as letters and by far the greatest number of Japanese books are written and printed, and thus must be distinguished as the popular writing, proper. It has the advantage *) Yamdto , contracted from Y a mu. ato , be hind the mountains, properly the name of the Province, to which the Mikado’s court was removed in 710 , is at the same time applied to the Japanese Empire. Sec Falc-buts-zcn , under Yamdto, and the Japanese Encyclopedia, Vol 73, p. 4 verso. a ) The notion of some Japanese writers seems less correct, ns by Kdta-kdna were menut half- letters. 3 ) The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-tlzu-e. Vol. 10, p. 3B v. People say and write too Fira-kana , and llira-kana. styled, as the writing of the Japanese Empire INTRODUCTION. I over other forms of writing, that the letters of a word can be joined to one another. 6. ON THE JAPANESE PHONETIC SYSTEM. The number of sounds or syllables in Japanese was first, fixed at 47 and that in imitation of the Brahmanical-writing ( ^ ^ Don-zi ) , which distinguishes 12 vowels and 35 consonants '). The fixing of the Japanese phonetic system is attri- buted to the Buddhist Priest koo-boo dai-si ( ), who, in his 31 st year, went to China in 804 A. C. to study more closely the doctrine and insti- tutions of buddha and who, during a stay of three years, acquired there, among other knowledge, that of the Brahmanical writing (Sanscrit) and the phonetic system, as it was understood by the Chinese Priesthood *). A. SYSTEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF THE 47 SOUNDS, EXPRESSED BY CHINESE AND JAPANESE K ANA-SIGNS. The Japanese phonetic system with its Chinese and Japanese Kdna - signs systematically arranged according to the organs of speech, by which the sounds are produced, is as follows: 1. Palatal sounds 3 ). T»a. 1 >*• u. yi e ?f,o. " (ye). 2. n tl > ka - :£,ki. ku. ft ke. e- 17 , ko. 3. Lingual sounds 4 ). £ J)*, sa. 2/, si. x. su. tit •fe. se. ■jab* a y,so. 4. n p,ta. ft =^-,ti * % tu % 7 s » te. ± X, to. (tsi). (tsu). 5. n -j-,na. — > ni. M nu. IS ne. 7*j 7, no. ') The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-dzu-e. Vol. 15, p. 35 v. J ) The way in which the Chinese translators have copied, syllabically only, by means of Chinese characters, the Sanscrit words in the Buddhist writings imported from India, is placed in a clear light by the work : Methode pour dechiffrer et transcrire les noms sanserifs qui se rencontrent dans les livres chi- nois , inventee et demontree par M. Stanislas julien. Paris 1859. 3 ) tf. 4 ) tif # 8 INTRODUCTION. 6. Labial sounds *). m )Y fa it ,6 * y,fu & , fe fo (va). (vi). (vu). (ve). (vo). 7. V) , ma. , mi. j i mu. k y. me. % x, mo. 8. Palatal sounds. A> , i. vfl 3.,yu. m X, ye. M > A 3, yo. 9. Lingual sounds. n y ,r&. m ,ri. 8 )V , ru. iB \y, re. g a. ro. 10. Labial sounds. ^7 ) wa. p , wi. ¥ wu. yx X. we. 9, wo. We give this view from a Japanese source 2 ), we must, however, remark that the Chinese signs of the sounds are not generally those, from which the Japanese Kuta-kdna sign placed next it, by way of abbreviation, is derived, for, properly, the Kdta-kdna sign ) , tt , answers to the Chinese character 'A- t- o, 97 19 91 11 > vnigo . X’ tsi , 19 11 19 11 = ^- , a thousand, Jap. tsi. ne , 19 99 99 99 , the cyclical sign for mouse, Jap. A, fa, 19 91 91 ,, £ , mi, 11 19 19 19 — , three, Jap. mi. X, mu. 1 99 99 11 11 #• y , me, 11 11 11 19 -/£ , woman, Jap. me. 11/, ru, 19 11 91 91 •M- wi, 11 19 11 11 '■ , well, Jap. wi. X, w e, 11 99 11 11 M.- X, wo, 11 19 11 11 9- According to this system, some dictionaries, particularly those of the un- mixed old Japanese language have been arranged. 5 ) IVa-kan Sets yoo moe sau bulcuro , p. 38, r., where the pronunciation of the Sanscrit phonetic system is given with Japanese Kdta-kana. INTRODUCTION. 9 This system of 47 sounds or syllables, however, and indeed with relation to the consonants, is incomplete. It is not sufficient to express all the sounds of the Japanese language. Therefore, to supply the defect, recourse has been had to a modification of some Kdta-kdna signs, and for that purpose points, or a small ring, have been placed next them. Thus is placed u , 7. 7, 17 the niodiiicatioi * XX Xf ka, ki , ku , ke, ko ga. gi, gn, ge, go. if. l/, X- h- y iff -vT>, IS > XX bf y* sa, si , su , se, so za , zi, zu , ze, zo. 7, x. h 5? Xf yf IK K ta, tsi, tsu, te, to da, dzi, dzu, de, do. ' )Y , bf 7", ^xf A, fc. x. -N, 11 11 ba , bi, bu , be, bo. fa, fi, fu, fe, fo 1 )V ’ bf 7°, A°, pa, Pi. pu, pe. po. modified, are called A T i go rent koye ? ki. — i ni. 7, ta. o. I. yu. PTC ’ fo (ho), vo - tjtLt lx re. - ku. *A. y, me. K- fe (he), ve. ^ , so. ^ 1 1 ya. * HZ . 1 iE. i mi. ± K to. y, tu (tsu). Mo ma. si. T. ti, tsi. ne. ke. 1 X- we, e. m >) , ri. na. 7, fu. It ’ h. fi (hi), vi. ix- X, nu. 7. ra. Q. 7, ko. ^ % > mo. )V , ru. j 4, mu, m. * 7X> X, ye. 1lfc. t- se. 7, wo. 2A n. ^ 7. te. Xi su. The characters marked * stand for ideographic signs, answering to the Ja- panese word tsi (a thousand), ne (mouse), vri (well), ye (hay), yu (bow), me (woman), and mi (three). The sign , mu, which was also used in the old Japanese for the linal INTRODUCTION. 11 sound m (at present n) has, in this quality, more lately acquired the sign n, as a variation. 7 . REPETITION OF SYLLABLES. — STOPS. The repetition of a letter is expressed by , of dis- or trisyllabic words by 1 • Y y / ; thus, for instance, ^ stands for yaya; ° for iro-iro. As stenographic signs for some Japanese words that frequently occur, in connection with the Kata-kuna , the following are to be remarked: for , koto , sake, ft „ p* , toki, time, q- b# , toki , time. It for , tomo. y „ IS y , site. 3B „ y. , tama. Stops. As stops, only the comma ( -» ) and the point (o or .) occur in Japanese. The use of them, however, is left wholly to the option of the writer. Some use o also at the beginning of a new period, and thus begin that with a point, while others with the same object place a somewhat larger ring, O i or a A there. The comma ( * ) stands on the right of the letter (for instance ^ ) , while the repetition sign is placed on the diameter of the column of letters (for in- instance ^ , kuka). The principle of separating the words from one another in writing is, for the most part, quite lost sight of in writing "with the Kdta-kana , and the Kdna signs of a whole period are written at equal distances. The consequence of it is, that for an unpractised person, who is not already pretty well acquainted with the Japanese, it is very doubtful how he has to divide some fifty or a hundred successive Kdna signs into words. With a view to perspicuity and not to require from the reader that he shall be already acquainted with the period which is offered him to read, to enable him to read and understand it, it is in the highest degree desirable that our method of separating the words should be applied to the Japanese, as it is done by us. If the method of separating word for word were adopted by the Japanese, it would be great step in the improvement of their writing-system. 12 INTRODUCTION. 8. REMARKS ON THE JAPANESE SYSTEM OF SOUNDS, AND THE EXPRESSION OF IT WITH OUR LETTERS. To promote the unity necessary in the reduction of the Japanese to Roman characters, we have adopted the Universal or Standard alphabet, by Robert lepsius. As this alphabet enables people of various nations to reduce to their own graphic system, the words of a foreign language, in a manner systematic, uniform, and intelligible to every one; and as it has been adopted by the prin- cipal philologists in all countries, as well as by the most influential Missionary Societies, its application to the Japanese language will be welcomed by every one who prizes a sound , uniform and , at the same time , very simple system of writing. In reducing the Japanese text to Roman character the following signs borro- wed from the Standard alphabet have been adopted. а. a open as heard in the Dutch vader; — English father, art; — Jap. "jU i. i pure as heard in the Dutch ieder; — Eng. he, she; — Jap. . i. i long; — Jap. l. i short. u. u pure, as oe heard in the Dutch, good; — Eng. oo in good, poor, o in lose; — Jap. ^7. At the beginning of a word it is frequently pronounced with a soft labial aspiration, as wu. u, short, silent u. e. e close, e as heard in the Dutch bezig, meer, geven; — Eng. a in face, na- tion; — German e in weh; — Jap. jU 8. e short. 0 . e open as heard in the Dutch berg; — Eng. a in hat; — French e in mere, etre; — German Bar, fett. o. o close as heard in the Dutch jong, gehoor; — Eng. borne; — German Ton; — Jap. 7]“. б. o short. a, a sound between a and o, leaning rather to the a than the o, as heard in the English water, all and oa in broad. o. When the sound a inclines rather to the o than a, it is expressed by o. gu. In the dialect of Yedo f ^7 (au) changes to ao, because the a, for ease in rapid pronunciation, inclining to the u changes to a, while the u, to ap- proach more nearly the a, changes to o. INTRODUCTION. 13 In some dialects of Western Japan, particularly that of Kin-tin, an changes to do, and arau (b) is superseded by ardo (a, a). The etymology considered, however the written form an or au is to be preferred. ou. .Etymologically on (£) in the dialect of Yedo sounds oo, being the hard open o heard in the Dutch loopen, German mond, followed by the u incli- ning towards the soft o. By some Japanese, this diphthong is also pronounced as oo and is written so, as well. On the etymological principle we write ou , in distinction from au, or an ')• eu. (2 t?) pronounced eo. k, as in Dutch, German, and English. = ka, ki, ku, ke, ko. g. In Western Japan, particularly in Kiu-siu, 17'' are pronounced as ga, gi , gu, ge . go, thus g as the medial of k, just as the g in the German ) Leon pages, also has kept this distinction in view, and exprases ^ by 6 and J by 6. — Dictionnaire Japonais- Francois traduit du dicfionnaire Japonais- Poriugais compose par les missionaires de ia compagnie de Jesus. Publie par leon pages. Premiere livraison. 1862. 14 INTRODUCTION. nunciation of Yedo have the sound of the German schi , sche , the English she , s/ioy , and thus answer to the written forms si , se of the Standard-alphabet. Etymology, nevertheless, requires for and the written form si and se, leaving she and shay , and sometimes also tse, to the pronunciation, z, soft s impure, being heard, in the dialect of Yedo , as a combination of n and z or also of d and z. — ^ = za, zi, zu, ze, zo ( nza , nzi , nzu , nze , nzo or dza , cfei, dzu , dze, dzo ), consequently ’y' ^ ^ oc- curs as ardnzti or aradzit. s, Dutch sj , German sch , English s/< , French ch. As pronounced at Yedo this consonant is distinguished as a palatal variety of s which, as such, ought to be represented by s of the Standard-alphabet. The combination of this sound with a, u , o, so sa, su, so, is expressed by vi sT, \ {siya , siyw, siyo) , which, is pronounced by some Japanese of Yedo , as siya , siyu , siyo , with a scarcely audible y , whereas from the mouths of some others, a sound is heard which inclines rather to so, su, so. Since the first pronunciation lets the etymological value of these combinations appear, we think to give the preference to the written forms siya, siyu, siyo, leaving it to the reader to pronounce them sa, su, so or sya, syu, syo. z. The Dutch zj , French j , English s in measure , the softer pronunciation of s. y> =m za i zu ’ z0 - b°r the sake of etymology, we write ziya, ziyu, ziyo. t- , y, y i > = ta, tsi, tsu, te, to. Properly, ^/ , ti en tu are ety- mological; but these combinations of sound are, at once, foreign to the Japanese organs of speech and are, whenever they have to be adopted from ano- ther language, expressed by j tei and £ t&u. (tsi ) , commonly pronounced tsi as in the English cheer. d. K, da, dzi, dzu, de, do, according to the dialect of YMo nda, ndzi, ndzu, nde, ndo. The Coreans express the impure Japanese d by Li; (nt.) ts. The Dutch tsj , English ch in chair. ^ , etymologically tsiya, tsiyu, tsiyo. according to the Yedo pronunciation tsya , tsyu, tsyo, the y being scarcely audible. Some are heard to pronounce it tsa, tsu, tso. dz. The Dutch dzj , English g in George, j in judge. %, £, |*, etymologically dziya , dziyu, dziyo, according to the Yklo pronunciation dzya , dzyu , dzyo , in the mouths of some also dza. dzu, dzo. n - -j*. — > y* / , na , nt, nu, me, no. INTRODUCTION. 15 ■sy, n, final letter, serves as well for the dental, as the nasal final sound, which approaches the French faint n at the end of a syllable and is expres- sed by ng (n of the Standard-alphabet). Formerly , instead of the final letter 2/ , the ATa/ia-sign , mu was used , and pronounced as a mute m. In Japanese words 2/1 stands for the faint nasal final sound n, in Chinese words, on the contrary, for the clear dental final sound n as in our „man, dan.” In composition, the final sound n has a euphonic influence on the con- sonants following it and changes k , s, f and f into the impure sounds g , z, d, b, which are pronounced more or less like ng , nz, ml, nb. The combined sound nb, in pronunciation, changes to mb’, Tanba (-ft 2/ )V) is pronounced Tarnba; Nanbok (-}- 2/ 7 ft* f?) 1 Nambok; Kenbok {)y 2/ 7ft* f?) , Kembok. For the sake of unity in spelling, although in the dialect of Yedo it is pronounced as the French faint n, we retain for the final sound 3/, the written form n, since long current, and continue to write Nippon, leaving it to the reader to pronounce it Nippong. f(h),v. n, y , 7 ft. fa , fi, fu, fe, fo or ha , hi , fu (not hu) , he , ho. Originally the aspirated labial sound /, which has been retained in some dialects , in others , on the contrary , superseded by the soft h ; a phenomenon which occurs in the Spanish also , in which the / of the Old-Spanish language has, in later times, passed into the soft aspirated h. In the dialect of the old imperial city of Miyako, and its dependent pro- vinces, the f is retained, and so far as we know, in Sanuki and Sendai , where commonly fana , fito, furu, feri, foka, are heard. In the dialect of Ytdo, on the contrary, the / has been quite driven out and there, hdna, hito , furu {fu remains fu) , heri , hokd are said. This distinction of the two sounds, according to fixed dialects, rests on communications made to us orally by Japanese. That, in the language of Miyako, where Japanese is spoken the purest, as also in the dialect of Sanuki, the / occurs to the exclusion of li, I have been assured by a native of Yedo who has passed some years in Sanuki '), while another native of Yedo 2 ) has mentioned to me the province of Sendai *) oho-gava kitaroo, mechanician, resident in the Netherlands since 1863. s ) enomoto kamadziroo, an officer in the Japanese Navy, also resident in the Netherlands since 1863. 1C INTRODUCTION. and the North-eastern part of Japan as districts, in which the f. to the exclusion of h , is commonly in use. In the middle, or at the end of a word, the / or h in the pronunciation, passes over to v or a pure labial (not labio-dental) w, and even in writing 7 ( wa ) supersedes A (ya)\ f] y A, 7 A are heard kava , Iciva , kUva, or also fcawa , kiwa , kuwd, for which ii V-. vv , is written. On the contrary the syllables . vi . 7, to, , re, 7^;, ro, whenever a vowel precedes reject the aspirate, and y ^ is pronounced as ai , y 7 as aw (aw), y as ae, -T * as ao, RS W • ^ 7 as iu, -f as ie, y y as 00 etc. The aspirated labial in ^ y, fitd , man, sounds like a /at or /to whistled with the mouth, and is easy to be pronounced. In the Yedo hi, on the contrary, the li often occurs as a palatal aspirate, which, whenever it is pressed through the closed teeth, forms a sound quite strange to Euro- pean ears, which it is not possible to express with our letters. What former travellers, golownin, meylan and others have said about this sound ') is now confirmed by our observation; and we have only to add that in the mouths of some from Yeclo the word t b (fitd or Into , man) became even sto. Since for the syllables A, , 7)* two forms of writing have now come into existence, in proportion as one or the other pronunciation is fol- lowed, one with /, the other with h, the question becomes important, which of the two forms of spelling deserves the preference. If Japanese is to be written according to the accent of Yedo, then, naturally, the h must be adopted, just as, to let the dialect of Zeeland enjoy its rights, Olland and oofd must be written for Holland, and hoofd, or, not to do injustice to the Berlin dialect, Jobe, Jotl and jut must be written for Gabe, Gott and gut. If, however the pronunciation most generally in vogue, with the exception *) „ No European,” says golownin, „will succeed in pronouncing the Japanese word for „ lire,” — it is K, Jl. — I have practised at it two years, hut in vain. As the Japanese pronounced it, it seemed to be fi , hi , psi , fsi , being pronounced through the teetli ; however we might, wring and twist our tongues into every bend, the Japanese still stuck to their: „ not right.”” — Jiegebenheiten des Capifaittt vun der Russi.ich- Kaiserlichen Marine golownin, in der Gefangentchaft Lei den Japan ein in den Jahren 1811, 1812 und 18111. Aas dew Russischen iiierie/zt von Dr. 0. J. SCHULTZ. 1818. Vol. II, p. HO. INTRODUCTION. 17 of Yedo , that of Miyako be preferred, then must the h be put aside and f adopted. We do the last, and that for the following reasons: 1. The Japanese philologers themselves have, at all times, characterized the consonant of their series of sounds ) \ , 7 < ^ * as labial , and made it equivalent to the labials of the Sanscrit. 2. The Chinese Kona signs, fixed upon to represent this series of sounds, are all sounds which, after the Chinese pronunciation, begin with a p or an /, whereas the sharp aspirated h of the Chinese woi-ds, just as the /< of the Sanscrit, is expressed by k , and , km is written and spoken for the Chinese hai. 3. In Japanese, as in Dutch and English, the sharp f between two vowels passes over into the soft v or w, and beside the older written form U 1] for which we must write kara , kave , kcivo , that of U V' UT'ti 7, kawa , kawe, kawo , has gradually come into vogue. 4. From the beginning Europeans, who had intercourse with the Japa- nese, generally wrote / and not h; thus the Portuguese missionaries, and their contemporary, fr. caron (1639); also more lately, e. kaempfer (1691), p. thunberg (1775), j. titsingh ') (1780), and others. All wrote Farima. Fauna , Firando , Fori. In this century the h first appeared, because then Europeans came more frequently in contact with interpreters and natives of Yedo. If now we adopt the li , then will all connection with what was for- merly done for the knowledge of the language, history and geography of Japan be broken off. a door opened for endless confusion, and for thousands of Japanese words we shall have a double spelling. b, impure, from the sound arisen from the blending of n with v, which the (Ko- reans, whenever they write Japanese words in their character, express by mp ( ajj ). — )Y, li 4 '. 7*1 ^1 ba, bi, bu , be. bo. p. )Y, t' , pa, pi, pu, pe , po. y. The Dutch j ; — English y in yard ; — French y. 7- 3-- X- 3- ya, ya , ye, yo. The pronunciation of ^jr. is not fixed, and fluctuates between wi , yi , xi , and i. r. Soft guttural r. just as the English r in part, art. r of the Standard- *) In titsingh’s Bijzonderheden whenever an h occurs in Japanese words, it has been placed there, from a mistake of either the writer , or compositor. 2 18 INTRODUCTION. alphabet. -7. 1) . )\_y , ]y . p. ra. ri , ru, re, ro. The Japanese r, comes from the root of the tongue. tvhich is kept almost motionless. Our trilling dental r cannot be uttered by a thorough-bred Japanese of Yedo. This is also the case with our l\ this sound too is quite foreign to the Japanese mouth '). Instead of adopting a proper letter for the l . the Japanese, whenever they have had to reduce words of European languages to Japanese writing, have made the foreign l equivalent to the r, and have used their r for both sounds; a mistake, by which they subjected themselves to a perpetual mutation of the letters r and l when writing a foreign lan- guage, and induced our philologers to suppose that the Japanese r was an intermediate sound between l and r which, as it now appears, is not the case. In combinations of sounds such as 1 / 2/ , ren , 1J P , riu, U ^ P* riyau (ryoo) , the guttural r so nearly approaches the lingual cl, that, with the utmost attention, it remains doubtful, whether the r or the d is meant. This is to lie remarked especially in words adopted from the Chinese, and which in that language begin with l , which becomes r in Japanese, such as den for ren (Chinese lien), dyu for ryn (Chinese lung, dragon), dyoo-ri-nin and doo-sok for ryoo-ri-nin and roo-sok (Chinese liao-li-nin , cook, and Id tsii, wax-candle). It is worthy of remark, that with the Chinese just the opposite takes place, that they can pronounce the l easily, but the r not at all. w. The German pure labial w. ^7 . ^7, 7? , wa, wu, wo. 9. DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS BY ASSIMILATION. If the letter ^7 which is mostly pronounced as the ts mute, occurs in a compound word before a k, t or then, for the sake of euphony, it passes over to the latter sound, — it is assimilated. ') 'Hi is lias become quite evident to me, from the instruction in the Dutch language which several Ja- panese have received under my superintendence. After having lir>t pronounced the I ns the guttural r, they required long practice before, being able to utter a sound, that in any degree resembled /. Si’Af.DlNn also, bns observed that thorough-bred Japanese of Yedo, with whom he met, coidd not pos- sibly pronounee his name. „ They cannot sav L he adds, M they rail it 7f. The word glove , which they call grove , is too much for them.” — j. w. SPAl.DINo , The Japanese expedition. Rcdficld, 1856. p. 233. INTRODUCTION. 19 T ‘y itsU-ka written . is pronounced ikkd (one). V ^ 1 frl’ itsii-kin ,1 V „ ikkvi (one pound). T y Mt’ itsii-ken 11 11 „ iklcin (a glance). T ri;. itsu-koku 11 11 „ ikkdk (a whole empire). 4k* Fdt$ii-kin „ • Fokkin (Peking). < y itsU-sai „ issai (all). r y m- itsu-siyo 11 11 „ isso (one and the same place). T y itsu-sun 11 11 „ issun (the tenth of a foot). A*. y o 9 katsit-sen „ kassen (battle, fight). T y stj. itsU-sen ii „ issen (one cent). .T y itsU-tai „ ittai (a whole life). a! mdtsitte „ matte (with). 'fS* % a 4 katsute 11 11 „ kdtte (already). U i- -t tatsUtoki 11 11 „ tattoki (worshipful). *T FI v kdtsU-pa ii ii „ kappa (overcoat). 0; NitsU-pon ii * „ Nippon (Japan). The 1) ri also before t is sometimes subject to assimilation; of *y Ij ^ arita the pronunciation becomes atta, for which y* is written. A rule to determine when, in pure Japanese words, the ^ shall retain its value, as in ^ ^ ZL Mdtsu-mdye , N ^ 'i ~7 MdtsU-daira , where it is not thus assimilated, has not, so far as we know, yet been fixed. Certain it is, that the vowel of the syllable, which precedes a double consonant, is short, and that the doubling of the consonant is chiefly applied to compound words of Chinese origin, of which the first syllable contains a short vowel, which in some Chinese dialects is stopped by t, represented in Japanese words, by Upon this principle the double consonants in words from foreign languages also are expressed in Japanese writing; in this case some place the "V of the *) 2 / diameter a little to the right and write ^ for dutch „ridder” and Zy for 20 INTRODUCTION. 10. ON ACCENT AND RHYTHM. In Japanese distinction is made between accented and unaccented syl- lables. To the unaccented belong chiefly those ending in i or u, in which these sounds are scarcely heard at all, and that especially at the end of the words. Thus, e. g., P 9 , sita (beneath) sounds as sta, is A , sime (let) sounds as sme, P , siki (like) sounds as ski , P , P 'i , mas! . masu , masita sounds as mast . mas , masta , 9 9 , tatsu (dragon) sounds as tats, 3 L , yomu (to read) sounds as yum, T >v , naru (to be) sounds as nar , 9 9 j) , tsukuri (to make) sounds as tskuri , etc. The i has, moreover, the peculiarity, that as a final letter it is whispered. As in Japanese the i and u mute have not ceased to be real elements of the words, and to be necessary to the distinguishing of them, they ought to be expressed in all philological writings. Even if J- (mitsi , way) and £ f (mitsu, three) sound as mits, in our writing we must, because the Japanese do so in theirs, distinguish both words and write mitsi and mitsu, or cha- racterize the weak vowels, as weak and mute by writing mitsi and mitsu. — The form of writing adopted by some, mits ' and mits u . answers that purpose also. The accented vowel is pronounced either long or short-close. Thus is, e. g. the a long in 9 , mdtsu (pinetree) . short-close -fl- 9 , sake (strong drink). The consonant, following a short-close vowel is often doubled in pronun- ciation, though not in writing. Thus, e. g. /'f , fdna (flower) sounds as fauna ; 7 , / , sake (strong drink) as sdkke. Since, with regard to the correct indication of the quantity of the syllables, the Japanese graphic system is defective, it behoves us to keep it in view the more carefully, because the accentuation, provided it be based on the pro- nunciation of Japanese, is an indispensible help in the acquiring of a correct pronunciation. INTRODUCTION. 21 Hitherto the only European , who has paid attention to the accent of Japanese words, and expressed it after a fixed principle, was e. kaempfer. From his manner of writing it might he gathered , that 2 y , dragon . and -? f , pine-tree . are pronounced as tats and mats , thus with an a long, ~V "Z , i t h and 'y -f / V -f- as ydmma, mindto and tatsbdnna. Later travellers, who have visited Japan and written books about it. have been either unable or unwilling to follow his example, and thereby have left their readers in uncertainty with regard to the rhythm of Ja- panese. Only recently, since the arrival of natives of Japan in Europe, have our linguists had the opportunity to hear Japanese spoken by Japanese, and so to become acquainted with the rhythm peculiar to that language. Availing our- selves of this opportunity, we have already been able to publish the reading of a Japanese text ') supplied with a continuous accentuation. If we cast a, hasty glance over what has previously been said , with regard to the Japanese phonetic system, the writing, the pronunciation, it will appear most clearly, that the Japanese phonetic system is very defective. It does not satisfy the requirement of being able, with it. to write the Japanese language itself, as it is spoken, let alone the possibility of its being applied to foreign languages. The Japanese, with all their attempts to write Dutch, French or En- glish, after their Anna-system, have been able to effect nothing else, than — caricatures of those languages. From their defective syllabic-writing are the Japanese behind not only the Western nations, but other Asiatic peoples also, and even the Coreans, their neighbors who rejoice in the possession of an original, and simple character- writing, not borrowed from the Chinese. With regard to the writing of foreign languages, the Chinese alone are worse off. The intricate, often equivocal writing with which Japanese is written , occa- sions more difficulty for those, who have not grown up with it, than the study of the language itself, witness the Japanese running-hand, whose turn comes next. l ) The Grand Study ( Ta Rio or Dai-ga/cu). Part. I, The Chinese text with an interlineary Japanese version. Part. II, Beading of the Japanese text in Roman character, by J. hoffmann. Leiden, 1864. 22 INTRODUCTION. 11. THE JAPANESE RUNNING-HAND FIRA-GANA. a. The Irovd in Fira-gdna. The Irovd in Fira-gdna- writing , as it is learned in schools and , in connection with Chinese running-hand, is generally in use, consists of the following signs, which are derived by abbreviation from the Chinese characters placed next them. I 19- Wa 5 ■ u £ <£>• A g b - ro M ^9' , ka wi £ sa fa (ha) , va M 2’ yo 75r eb- no H X ki li- ni k ft. ta n 2b o * V9> . yu & li- fo (ho) , vo tttL ti’ re a < - ku k J6- me K es, fe (he) , ve - j tW a X so ya m mi It <£’ to n *9- tsu i- ma z l- si b’ tsi m la- ne ft IF ke M jg. e m 9 - ri 7 i’ na % fu it £a- fl (hi), vi nu it (>• ra a L. ko € X mo © d - ru O- mu. 1/2' ye Hk 12 . se it wo. 1^7 "T 5 5 o ^ ^ KI. * i I ? ft k it n M \ i- & i ^ ;KU.^ ^ ^ KE^tt it it if tb it t? h ft. ft- K i ** # n jt £&> %> jc %* KO. >a d - T T T T "Sr ^2 ^ 24 INTRODUCTION. sa. *-f£ tf) Y> Y TA. x^fc 7 C ^ ^ * 1 ? ¥ 1 £ & T ^ If ^ H . 8L ^ TSI. +^ 1 ^'^; I-> ^ 4 > *7 ^ 4 >U SU. 7 ^ TSU.yjffl ff] *1 <1 l“J p v? o m w n fi£ }% * £*t * i? Wf se. r tfi; 1£ -% ^ te. T*i tx ^ T 1 £ 5 2 't’ gf 4 ? m % % & SO. yf- $ $ ^ -f TO- .-It t £ fc i t M *V & % ^ -k INTRODUCTION. 25 na - n ■* h * & 5 ' A - 5 ' 3 > 5 $ SIS ^ jJi #1 % !ft M. NI - -t UK i'c /? ^ '4^ >F 7F JF -F 1 fl- 3 }i A}> * f 4 *> ^ * NU. ** A # # «2 ft b ^ ft. # iS # gF ft, [ 4 ) f * & <* <* no. '?$ 75 7 > ch m W oft % stliStli * H. ft H irt H H fa.,.® ;.j| Ji yi $ |£ /d /V / a y^> ^-> * £ ^ h *2 X. \ UM 1 « & & 4 f -?> £ % ■£ •*■ FI - *!» 4 f> b L ? ik 17 ? £/? i/' fu. 7 ^ & .F -ft ft J. tfiii M tk iW FE.-K (\)'V -v '~> *s &$} 7b 7k FO. * & J5. H & IS IS * ^ $• ft ft 26 INTRODUCTION. MA - & % YA.y^ ^ ~Zp 7 j ^ ^ Z B 7£ /t >» l& /4 t& ft % MI. e = l. I it i M it MXXZ wu-se (x tr o m f * fy 5 § YU.z & up f ^>\q>t) S'V't m fi ME ■ * & #) Ifr >£, >t> /) YE-x^c ^ lq # i. M0 -^ 4) 4) i & £ 6 yo. 3 «i ^ J: x i x d H H t £ £ £ 6 B &h INTRODUCTION. 27 ra 5 k t> r ]mm ^ ■ n ft #§ t- it- h wA.»^n &->% %o\~> ~h i ! E E ^ ri. ■.« fa ft % # 5 > 5 - 5 x & }$- /,> Itr th Kir- * n ft h RE. •at £ t H Hr fc a. ^ Jfr ;)i 4 R0 - a § /^) A) s§ wo? st ^ 5 S w * £ 28 INTRODUCTION. The synopsis of Japanese running-hand characters, given on the preceding pages, collected by ourselves in reading Japanese books and manuscripts, is de- submitted to the criticism of a clever Japanese, we, some years ago, sent a few proof impressions, to a respected friend in Japan ! ), on whose invitation Mr. mats moto was so kind as to undertake the revision and correction of one of them. This impression being returned to us, we were enabled to submit our synopsis to a strict revision, and if we have given it a place here, it is with the conviction that it will be a faithful guide in the deciphering of Fira- gana texts. To become familiar with this writing, the Chinese character should be taken for basis, and attempts made at learning to write with a pencil the more and more sketchy Fira-gana forms derived from it. By following this practical way, the student will most quickly become so conversant with this writing, as to be able to read without hesitation a text written in it, provided the printing of it be not too bad. In the Fira-gana writing the letters are more or less obviously attached to one another. The way in which this is done will be best learned by copying some Japanese texts 2 ), in which it will at once be discovered, that some pecu- liarities in the manner of attaching them are only the natural results of a quick handling of the pencil. The stops ( * ) , and the sign ° , by which in the Kdta-kana the change from pure to impure sounds is indicated, are used in the Fira-gana also, e. g. ^7' The point, which in the Kdta-kana , placed under a letter shows that it is repeated, in the Fira-gana runs together with the letter into one stroke. Opposed ’) w. j. c. HUY8SEN van kattendyke, Knight, Commander of the Naval-detachment in Japan in 1857, 1858 and 1859. 5 ) The Japanese Treaties, concluded at Yedo in 1865 with the Netherlands , Russia, Great- Jiritain , the United States and France. Fac-simile of the Japanese text. The Hague, martinus nijhoff. 1862. serving of remark on account of its correctness. As we appreciated its being 4- / j to ' kiki and ,, tada , are the Fira-gana forms The repetition of two or three syllables is shown by and INTRODUCTION. 29 As stenographic abbreviations come under notice 5>. c? for lj|. ^ koto (sake). /} » // for g * yori. »* ^ koto. ~n „ it •' tomo. S' ^ 2f. ■■ T (JOtO. tk J nari ‘ 12. WRITTEN OR BOOK LANGUAGE. Books among the Japanese are written either in the Chinese, or in the Ja- panese language. A. Exclusively Chinese are scientific works, intended for literate persons, — ' who make use of the Chinese written language, just as formerly our learned men did of Latin. To this class of books belong, among others, the oldest Chro- nicle of Japan ( Yamdto-bnmi or Nippon-ki ), in which the pure Japanese words, such as the names of persons and places, are expressed phonetically with Chi- nese characters, the Japanese Encyclopedia Wa-Kan san-sai dzu-e , the Chronicle Wa-Kan nen-kei , the Japanese Government-Almanac, etc., while furnishing the books, which are written for the general public and in Japanese, with at least a Preface in Chinese, is still considered to be in good taste. Among the pure Chinese texts must also be reckoned the Chinese transla- tions of Buddhist works, originally written in Sanscrit, which translations, chiefly imported from China . are hummed by Japanese Bonzes in a peculiar Chi- nese dialect. That a Chinese text can be read aloud with a Chinese pronunciation ( koye ) — by literate Japanese is a matter of course, for, with the Chinese character, they become acquainted with its pronunciation also, and this according to certain dialects ; but that whole sentences , when read aloud , according to the pro- nunciation of the characters, are intelligible to listeners, we have constantly — doubted and now, upon the authority of a learned Japanese ’), dare deny. The Chinese text with its ideographic signs is there, to be apprehended according to its contents and. for the Japanese, the translation into his mother tongue is included in this apprehension. The apprehension and translation of a Chinese l ) Mr. TSUDA SIN-ITSI-ROO. 30 INTRODUCTION. text is therefore very justly called its reading ( yomi ) or Wa-kun (^Dfll), the reading in Japanese. Respecting the Chinese dialects, which have been here mentioned, the following ought to be added. In Japan the pronunciation of three dialects of the Chinese written language have been adopted , which are called after the Chinese dynasties Han , % U and fH" Hang (in the Japanese pronunciation Kan , Go and Too), Kan- icon ( ' jifi ^ 9 ) , Go-won ( % n " ^ 9 ) and Too-in ( Ml er 1 ’ ) or Kora-koto, i. e. dialect of Han, U and T‘dng. The dynasty of Han, which had its seat in the country of Ho-nan-fu, thus on the borders of the Hoang-lio , flourished from 202 B. C. till 220 A. C. The dynasty of U, settled on the Yang-tse-kiang , where at present Nan-king is si- tuated, existed from 222 till 280 A. C. The dominion of the dynasty of Hang embraced the period between 618 and 906. If with the Japanese it be accepted, that the said dialects were not local dialects existing next one another, but changes which the Chinese language has undergone in the lapse of ages , then the introduction and continued existence of those dialects in Japan would not be without importance in the knowledge of the old Chinese language. But since, with the defective Japanese Kdna- writing, it is impossible to represent any Chinese dialect faithfully, those dia- lects too, that have wandered to Japan lose all historical value, and we therefore confine ourselves to the question of their introduction into Japan, and the use to which they have been applied. On the first point the Japanese works at our command do not shed suffi- cient light. As the first teacher of the Kan-won, ■& Pino Sin-kung , a scholar from the country of IJdn is mentioned, with the addition, that he came to l'akdta in the country of Tsikuzen; but the time at which this happened we do not find recorded. Such also is the case with the introduction of the Go-won , which is attributed to & ;f I ’ Kin Li-sht and another Bonze from the country of U. As both had settled on the island of Tsusima, the Go-won was at first also called Tsusima-won mi*' m ) or the Tsusirnaman pronun- ciation 1 ). With regard to the second point, it may be assumed as certain, that, the ') The Japanese Encyclopedia XV, 33 verso. — Fak-buts-zen under Kan-won and Go-won. INTRODUCTION. 31 Go-won was the dialect, in which the Bonzes read the Buddhist writings, im- poi'ted from China, and that it still, with a few exceptions, is in vogue among them, whereas the Kan-won. the use of which was, in virtue of an edict pu- blished by the .1 [ikailo as early as 702, made obligatory in the study of the Chinese language '), prevailed in the domain of science, and penetrated into the whole profane literature. In the Chinese-Japanese dictionaries the pronunciation of each word is found, given in both dialects and that, first in Kan-won , and then in Go-icon. In the instances or f and Bfj * or •=; l(f} x , 1 and ^ are placed as Kan- '% i * , . V *7 won . f. and v as Go-icon. ^ 7 The dialect of T‘ang ( Too-in ), as it has been fixed by means of the Kana- writing approaches more nearly the ordinary Chinese official language (Kwan-hoa) , than the two other dialects, but is just as unintelligible as they, to a Chinese. This dialect is found mostly in works about China, used in the description of the names of places, and it is also said to be used by the monastic order of the ..Five hills or convents” ( jf. l_L| Go-san ) at Miyako. We close this digression on the three dialects with a quotation of the spe- cimen by which the difference is shown in the Japanese Encyclopedia. Wa-htn. Too-in. Kan-won & Go-won. Wa-kun. Too-in. O Kan-won. Go-won. 7 X 7 X X 7 7 I- * V 1 is 17 7 Y 7 Y X 7 ') Is \s Y ') V 7 U V 5 A T 7 m 3 7 7 7 y s ns 7 — Is = > 7 7 * u 7. Y Is A'. 0 Y V 9 h X 7 M T 7 w \- 7 y X Y Jr Is 3 3 y 7 T 7 t: 3 is 7 Y * V 7 :7* S 7 9 is M y 9 V 9 T Y 7 Y 7 Y J apanes e translation Tatoveva Fiats no koiva ani ototono gotoku. Mai a iviiku , fibiki no ziva ko magono gotosi , i. e. The two dialects. t . to use an example, are like brothers. It is also said: The assonances or finals are like sons and grandsons. ') Wa-nen hei oder Geschichisiabellen con Japan, aus dem Originate iibersetzt von j. Hoffmann. INTRODUCTION. 32 Chinese text with Japanese translation. In Chinese there are hooks written, which contain a complete Japanese translation at the side of the text. There are also some, in which the Japanese translation is incomplete, and only here and there words or fragments of words are explained. In this case are found either only the principal ideas translated, or merely the terminational inflections given. It is supposed here, that the Japanese reader knows the signification of the Chinese character and the word corresponding to it in his mother tongue, or not being acquainted with it, he resorts to a Chinese- Japanese dictionary, to supply all that, in which the translation is deficient. Were the construction of the two languages alike, it would suffice simply to represent the signification of each Chinese character by a Japanese word placed at the side of it, and to read Japanese in the same order as Chi- nese. But there is one point, from which the two languages diverge; to wit, the Chinese verb has its objective ( compliment , regime ), whether a simple noun or a substantive phrase objective, after it, the Japanese has it before. To give an instance, the Chinese construction requires one to say: „He reads a book; he desires to go home;” on the contrary, the Japanese: ,. He a hook reads; he homewards to go desires.” Thus in the reading aloud of the Japanese translation of a Chinese sentence a transposition, a skipping over of the Japanese words is necessary, as often as the case in question occurs. This transposition is shown on the left-hand-side of the Chinese text — the right-hand one being occupied by the Japanese translation — by numbers or equivalent signs. This transposition of the words is called ^ £ §1| ^ X GeM-tdlcU-suru , i. e. against (the order) in reading, or also KaifSri , turning back, and the transposition-signs Kayiri-ten or marks of going backwards. o o These marks are 1) the hook i^, which indicates the transposition of two words following each ]^X ^ other, as u Z m0 ^ e korewo - korewo motte (thereby); 2) the Chinese ciphers -, =, a (1, 2, 3) when the translation of a character skips over two or more characters; 3) the signs 1, >M, (above, in the middle, beneath), whenever the parts of a sentence, that have been already marked, must be again skipped over: INTRODUCTION. ‘M 4) the cyclical signs R>. £., iM , for a farther skipping over. The ciphers and signs cited may occur in connection with the simple trans- position-sign, thus: c-, c5 , g; tfc, 31, ill, B. A practical indication of the use of these signs will be found in our edition of the Grand Study (Ta-hid), a few lines of which are subjoined as a specimen of Chinese text with a complete as well as a fragmentary translation in Japanese. CHINESE TEXT 1 , with a complete translation in Japanese. 2 , with a fragmentary translation in Japanese. JE o y )\y * 1 fffj 4 * B B Jk 2 RE riu* m # V o w » _ r=9 o jt o M = pi = If. ,, fl y m i rfn rfo r m — I/U*' , B B B J$l x Rb at >\s # *> R* o Reading of the translation in Japanese: Dai-Gaku no mitsi va met toku wo akiraka ni survt ni ari ; tami wo arata ni su- ru ni an ; si-sen ni todomaru ni ari. Todomarukoto wo sitte, sikausite notsi sadamarukoto ari. Sadamatte, sikausite 7 o 7 o notsi yoku sidzuka nari. Sidzuka ni site, sikausite notsi yoku yasusi. Yasu- 34 INTRODUCTION. site, sikausite notsi yoku omonbakaru. Omonbakatte, sikausite notsi yoku u '). If, as here, the Chinese text is in the standard form written in full, then the Kdta-kdna is used for the interlinear translation in Japanese, whereas the Fira-gdna accompanies the Chinese running-hand. B. Books written in the Japanese language. In these, the national writing, whether Fira-gdna or Kdta-kdna , forms the chain, in which a larger or smaller number of Chinese characters are inserted. In this style, the Chinese characters represent ideas, for which the reader, in case the meaning of the Chinese character has not been already expressed at the side of it in Japanese writing, must substitute Japanese words and connect them with the inflectional forms, which the writer has placed after the Chinese character. Here also the Kdta-kdna accompanies the Chinese standard-writing, and the Fira-gdna the Chinese running hand. In this style the whole Japanese literature proper is written. A Japanese text without an admixture of Chinese ideographic signs , women’s letters excepted , has never yet come under our notice. To exemplify what has been said, we subjoin a few lines written in this style. In the one specimen the translation in Japanese will be found written next to each Chinese character, in the other it is left out; the latter happens chiefly in official documents. m * u* * ft o m y V * 7 r U t ft" 3 9 n 7 7 y 7 lint * 3 * n/ tr ly si m 3 0r 3 T y * * m t I- s y I® *(• O % m m if f / ± m ; / ') Translation. The way of the Grand Study consists in illustrating illustrious virtue, it consists in reno- vating the people , it consists in resting in the highest excellence. The point where to rest being known , the object of pursuit is then determined : that being determined , a calm unperturbedness may be attained. To that there will succeed a tranquil repose. That being attained , there may be careful deliberation , and that deliberation will be followed by the attainment (of the desired end). — j. I.EOOE, Chinese classics. Vol. 1. 220. INTRODUCTION. 35 Reading of the Japanese text. Nagasaki oyobi Hakodate no minatono hoka, tsugini nosuru ba-slyo wo sano ki-gen yori aktibesi ■). The frequent use made of Chinese ideographic signs in this style of writing has for consequence, that even people of the lower order are more or less ac- quainted with it and, appreciating a sort of knowledge, which pleads for a good education, make ample use of it. We possess written communications from Ja- panese work-people which, written in the prevalent epistolary style, contain more Chinese characters than Japanese letters. It stands to reason that, to understand texts written in this style, in the first place, an acquaintance with the Japanese language is necessary, since the logical connection between the parts of the proposition and the ideas indicated by the Chinese characters is expressed in Japanese letters, thus in Japanese. C. Style. Just as every living language the Japanese too has, during the lapse of cen- turies, undergone change and had a gradual development, which is reflected in a literature of more than a thousand years. This is not the place to investigate those changes or to indicate specimens of different periods. We desire merely to direct attention to the difference which exists between the old and new Japa- nese language, written as well as printed. a. Old Japanese. The old language, Furu-koto , is an idiom free from foreign ingredients, that has been developed freely and independently in the isolated Nippon. Origi- nally the language of the ancient Mikado-dynasty, that was settled in Yamuto 660 years B. C., and therefore also called Yamdto-kotobd or the language of Ya- ~~ mato , this idiom had, with the political, intellectual and spiritual power of that dynasty obtained supremacy over the other dialects of the empire and was, for ages long, the general written language, expressed at one time in Chinese, and then again in Japanese writing; but when at last the power of this dynasty declined, and lost its direct influence in the government of the empire, this old language shared its fate: it was superseded by a new idiom, and supplanted in ') That is: Besides the Ports of Nagasaki and Hakodate, the places mentioned beneath shall be opened at the following periods. — Art. 2 of the Netherlands- Japanese Treaty of the 18 th August, 1858. 36 INTRODUCTION. the political life, but by no means driven from the mouths of the people, or forgotten. As the vehicle of an extensive literature, and chiefly by the power of its poetry and of the old religion, this language has kept its stand, and is still held in respect , since the literature founded on it, as the expression of an an- cient civilization, and as the witness of a past, glorious in the eyes of the nation, still finds its admirers; and the old service of Kamis , which still lives on among the people, is rooted in this language. Considered from a philological point of view, the Yamato-kotoba is the mirror which reflects most faithfully the being of the Japanese language, the most ex- poses its organic structure, and sheds a clear light on the grammatical forms also of the new idiom, now become prevalent. The student of the Japanese language, who is not satisfied with the mecha- nical learning of grammatical forms, but wishes to penetrate into the knowledge of their origin and being, must, in the etymological and grammatical treatment of that language, take the Yamato-kotoba for basis, following, in this respect, the example of the Japanese themselves who, to be able to lay any claim to li- terary proficiency, apply themselves to the study of their old language and read the old authors and poets, and sometimes even imitate their versification. The Japanese literature is rich in works in the Furu-koto , but not less rich ^ in philological resources, chiefly in dictionaries, in which the old or pure Japa- nese language is illustrated by citations of the sources. The principal sources are the works on mythology and history, the oldest of which are those which have been designated with the name of „the three records” fjji 7 * ^ San-bu fon-siyo). r 1. „ Original account of the old events of former times, ^ 7/ ^ ^ ^ Sen-dai ku-zi fon-ki," executed by s'ivau-tok dai-si and Soya no mumakono sukune, by order of Mikado sui-ko, in 10 volumes, beginning with the god-dynasties, and extending to 620 (the 20th year of the said Mikado). ✓ 2. The „ Hook of antiquity, Furn-koto-bumi or a l|j. ^ =[* ' Ko-zi-ki," written by Oho-ason yasu-maro and presented to the Mikado gen-miu in 711 or 712, 3 volumes. It begins with the mythological times and reaches to 507 (the 5th year of the Mikado sui-ko). 3. The „ Japanese book, Yamdlo-bumi or |jj ~ ^ ^ %\L * Nippon 8ii/o-ki completed by tonhki no sin-woo and Oho-ason yasu-maro, in 720, in INTRODUCTION. 37 20 volumes, beginning with the creation and ending with the year 697 '). These works, executed before the introduction of the Japanese Kuta-kdna- writing, are, as appears from the copies , that we have of them, generally writ- ten with Chinese writing, partly ideographic, partly phonetic; at the side of which is found the reading in Japanese expressed with Kuta-kana , but this is an addition of later time. As a specimen we here subjoin the first lines of the Ko-n-ki ( £ =- • o nij o o 05 0 5 )|il}J l m ^ 9 © Mi- il A 1} Cl' hiij A 'zs ft* Fr (V 9 IRJ * z' %' ifilpj* ml flip a w. ° * V s it* btl f )\y $>1 ** 1* ml o Reading: Arne tsutsino fazime no toki iaka-mano farani ntrimaseru kami no mi-navd Ameno mi-nalca- nusino kami , tsugini Taka-mi-inusubi no knmi, tsugini Kami-musubi no kami, — Kono mi fdsirano kami Pa mina fitori garni ndrimante, mi-mi wo iakuzi -iam dvi ki . Translation: The three gods: Ameno mi-naka-nnsi no kami, Taka-mi-musubi no kami, and Kami-musubi no kami, at the time of the creation of Heaven and Earth existed in the high expanse of iieaven, were solitary gods and hid themselves. As sources for obtaining accpiaintance with the Fur it- koto , the topographical, physical and historical descriptions ( ^ -J- *' * Fuu-to-ki) of Japan , col- lected as early as 713 come further under notice; the laws and precepts edited ') Of this work I have made ample use in the elaboration of an historical treatise , which appeared in 1839 in von siebold’s „ Nippon-Archiv” under the title of Japan s Beziige mil der Koreischen Halbinsel and mil China. Nach Japanischen Quellen bearbeiiet. It might be expected, that the style, in which these annals are written, would be characterized by una- dorned simplicity; but the opposite is the case. The oldest Japanese prose is completely subservient to courtly manners; it is verbose and diffuse, and any one, unless he is penetrated, like the authors themselves, with the divine worship , which they display towards the prince and his house , will discover but too soon that behind the richness of courtlike expressions lies hid — - poverty of ideas. 38 INTRODUCTION. in three different periods ( — ^ San-dai kdku-siki) of 820, 869 and 907; — Historical narratives and romances ( >Jjfy J 4 Mono-gatari) ; — collections of Lyric poems ( ^ ^ utd) , as well as the Bundle of Ten thousand leaves; — Epic poems and Melo-dramatic pieces Mavi , or mai) etc. As philological aids towards illustration of the Furu-koto deserving of men- tion are: fa fs # w a-mei-seo , or explanation of Japanese names, collected by mina-motono sitagavu ( jljfi ) ? a famous poet, who died in 986. 20 volumes. There are editions of 1617, 1667 and 1851. ? Ftiru koto no bdsi , or „ Ladder to the old language.” 1765. >\y E* / >'>' ■£/ w ** w t wc Ga-gen siyu-ran or Miydvi-koto-atsume , „View of the correct language,” by isi-gava ga-bau. 1812. ^ ^ ^ ^ Ga-gen ka-zi kdku , „ Standard of the correct lan- guage” in 2£ona- writing , by itsi-oka take-fiko. 1814. tl ? v. 2 ^ 9 Wa-gunno siwori , or „ Guide to the Japanese language,” by TANI-GAVA SISEI. 1830. 5. New Japanese. Opposed to the Furu-koto is the New Japanese, as it has been in vogue since the 16th century, for the newest type of which the style may pass, in which the diplomatic documents of our time, particularly the treaties concluded with the Western Powers in 1855, are composed ’). The distinguishing characteristic of this style does not lie in the spelling, - for this, as the literature of this people, dating more than a thousand years ago. has undergone but few changes, — but in the analytic character, by which it forms an opposition to the antique-synthetic Japanese, and chiefly in the strong mixture of Chinese, or, properly, Japanized Chinese words, which, it is true, are governed by the Japanese element, but jflay so important a part in it, that this style has been, not with injustice, called the Sinico-Japane.se. Rising in the opinion of the Japanese, above the popular language proper, in dignity, conciseness and strength of expression, this style is more particu- larly a possession of the more civilized classes of society and, at one time more, at another less, impregnated with the foreign element, forms the book-language; ) See p. 28. note 2. INTRODUCTION. 30 as such, has penetrated to the lower classes of the people, and exercises its influence even on the polite conversational language and the epistolary style. It follows, as a matter of course, that in our treatment of the Japanese lan- guage this style occupies a prominent place, and if at the same time we look back upon the old as well, it is but to be able, from a grammatical point of view, to illustrate the new as it requires. 13. LANGUAGE SPOKEN. — GENERAL CONVERSATIONAL LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. Almost each province of the Japanese Empire has its peculiar dialect, and the difference of dialect becomes greater, in proportion as the provinces are more distant from one another. It is a fact confirmed by the testimony of different Japanese, whom we have questioned on the subject, that a native of the southern part of Japan and one from the northern cannot understand each other’s dialect. The merchant or functionary passing from Yedo to Nagasaki, understands the dialect spoken there just as little as, on the other hand, a native of Nagasaki understands the lan- guage of the common people of Yedo. The case is just the same with dialects of Japan, as with the many dia- lects, which, e. g., exist next one another in Germany. But as amidst those many dialects one general polite written and spoken language, — the High German, — has gained the ascendancy there, so in Japan also, (instead of the old Yamdto-kotoba ) a general polite spoken language has obtained ad- mittance. It is the spoken language, at present in general use in Migciko and, with slight modification at Yedo also, but here it is spoken by the polite clas- ses alone ‘). Since the influence of Yedo spreads to the most remote parts of the empire, and the instruction in the schools is everywhere given in that lan- *) In confirmation of this assertion, we here quote the very words of O. . K. . as we noted them down, when uttered „ Miydko no s/o bu-menwo yomi-mds loorini handsi-mas ; kdra-nga-yuhii yorosik' ko/owa baktiri gozarimas. Eddo no kotoba wa , ki-ninwa yorosiki ko/oba nite ha.nasi-m.dsu i. e. The inhahitahts of Miyako speak as one reads in a hook, and therefore have only good language. With regard to the language of Yedo , only the polite man speaks good language. 40 INTRODUCTION. guage , every well-bred person in the provinces makes use of it in his intercourse with the educated, and leaves the local dialect to the lower classes of the people. To foreigners, who wish to get some knowledge of the spoken language whether at Kanayava or at Nagasaki , it is not a matter of indifference to whom they apply for instruction. If they choose for language-master a servant taken from the street, he will sell them his patois for good Japanese, declares what really is good Japanese „not good,” and, although it may not be his intention, gives them the means to afford Japanese functionaries — amusement. As in every language, so in the Japanese also, the dialects have their unquestionable right to existence, and knowledge of them is of importance, as well for the daily in- tercourse with that portion of the population that do not rise above their dialect, as for comparative philology; but to intercourse with the well educated part of the nation, with whom the foreigner will certainly wish to place himself on a level, he gains admittance only by means of the general polite spoken lan- guage, and for this he must look about him. To take an instance, he will then use the word watdkUsi for „I,” just as the gentleman and merchant of Yedo , and not accept the porter’s „ivatski or wasi," or a servant-maid’s „watasi ” or „ icatdi ” instead, or please himself with the ataksa from the district of Yosihara. The ordinary conversational language differs from the book-language, both in respect of diction and pronunciation. If the book-language is succinct , and concise, the conversational is more circumstantial and diffuse; the natural con- sequence of the task laid on it of coming up to the rules of good-breeding, which prescribe the form of social intercourse in the different ranks of society. These rules require from every one respectful politeness to his superiors, strict courtesy to his equals. From a people that, like the Japanese, has obtained among the Western nations the reputation of being the most civilized and most courteous on the earth '), it is to be expected that its conversational language should express that character, and this is the case: the language fami- liarly spoken is a concatenation of courtly expressions and goes even so far, that a person, who has not been brought up with it, will not, to use the mildest expression, acquit it of exaggeration. With regard to pronunciation, of which we have already spoken above (p. 21), the same phenomenon occurs as, among the Western languages, in the ) In 1802 the Netherlands became acquainted with some exceptions to this rule. INTRODUCTION. 41 French: the pronunciation deviates from the written form, and this deviation arises partly from the original inadequacy of the Japanese phonetic system, which cannot possibly express all the existant combinations of sound, partly from the development of the language, in which the pronunciation has undergone many a change, whilst the once adopted, old orthography, with but slight modifica- tions, has maintained its historical claim. Specimens of the Japanese conversational style in the form of dia- logues have only very lately reached us. It is true, about forty years ago, a Japanese translation of Dutch dialo- gues found its way into a Museum in the Netherlands, and later a place in a book about Japan '), and every one who attached importance to the study of Japanese, in the supposition that that translation was also in the Japanese conversational style, had then to attach no small value to it; but, now that we have been able to become better acquainted with the familiar conversational style, it appears that people were misled: the translation of these dialogues is not w r ritten in the conversational, but in the book style, and therefore loses its supposed value. The first specimen of the genuine conversational language that reached us was a pocket-work published at Nagasaki for the use of Japanese merchants, which we, with a view to the wants of the non-Japanese, recast and published in 1861 with the title of Shopping-dialogues in Dutch , English and Japanese. The Japanese it contains, is the pure conversational style in use among the trades- people. This specimen w r as in 1863 followed by Familiar dialogues in Japanese with English and French translations for the use of students; a contribution with which the names of r. alcock and leon pages are connected. Now the want of aids to oral intercourse with Japan is daily becoming more prominent, and as yet it is not to be expected, that the Japanese, who re- luctantly see the attempt of the foreigner to become in any degree master of their language, will themselves cooperate therein and publish dialogues, from which the foreigner may draw profit, — it may be hoped, that for that very reason the zeal of such Eurojieans, as apply themselves more particularly to the study of language in Japan, or do so in their intercourse with Japanese out ') Bijdrage tot de kenn'us van het Japansche Rijk , by van ovm7. 14. ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH. Remark 1. By the written form INTRODUCTION. 43 „Sutegana” and ,, IVokiy,” names, which require a further illustration. Sute-gina ( j v ^ ’ ) , i. e. deserted , or foundling-letters (a foundling child is called sute-J odori (pronounce ondori) ; from meno H- tori , female-bird , d & p i) mendori , and / K 'J medori (pron. mendori)', from meno suru , female-monkey, ^ ^-tfji/men- zdru and ^ df ji/ mezdru (pron. menzdrU); meno + tora , female-tiger, ^ 2^ K> mendora and ^ medora (pron. mendora)', from meno kataki, female-enemy, d if ^ ^ me-gatdki (pron. mengataki). 3. There come under notice also Ko ( 3 ) and Me ( -jg^ •*) , lad and lass , with antecedent attributive definition. Ot6-ko 2 ) , lad , man. Musu-kd = begotten son , (my) son. Fikd , young nobleman. Kana-ydma fikd no kami, the god of the ore-mountain. Mi-koto , Sublimity, Highness. Ono mi-koto , His Highness. Oto-me, virgin, maid. Musu-me = begotten maid, (my) daughter. Fime, young lady. Kana-yuma fime no kami , the goddess of the ore-mountain. Fimc-gami , goddess. Fime no mi-koto , Her Highness. The old-Japanese also has ki and mi instead of ko and me, probably with a view to the vocal-harmony; thence Tzana-ki and Tzana-mi, = male-goer to and fro, female-goer to and fro, name of the divine pair that first mingled carnally. *) Comp. Introduction, p. 15, line 8. 5 ) Oto , old- Japanese for ono, genitive attributive of o ( yj\ ), small, young. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. 53 C. The ideas of male and female are sometimes transferred to objects without sex , for the purpose of characterizing the one as big , strong , rough , the other as little, weak and mild, or to indicate other peculiarities of one or the other of the sexes; e. g. O-mat sit, the masculine firtree, or Kuru-matsU , the black firtree '); Me-matsU , the feminine firtree, also Aka-mdtsU , the red pinetree 2 ). Two islands being next each other, when they are of unequal size, are of- ten denominated O-sima , man-island, and Me-sima, woman-island. Me-ikitsa, a female-army, means a w r eak army (= Yoioaki ikusa ) ; me-nizi , a female-rainbow, is the name of the faint by-rainbow. Me-kavdra or feminine-tile is the name given to flat tile (Jira-kavdra) , on which the rollshaped ( mdru-ka - vara) , as the masculine tile ( O-kavarci) , rests. D. The Chinese expressions, used in connection with Chinese names for female and male , are for quadrupeds K ^ jin and bo ; for birds ^ ^ ;£j| £ si and yuu, e. g. f j!?§ > mare; jtfk* yuu-tsi , cock-pheasant. NUMBER. § 5. The grammatical distinction of singular and plural is wanting. The noun used in its radical form expresses the idea generally and leaves it undeter- mined, whether the said object is to be adopted in the singular or plural. Only when it is strictly necessary to make the general idea appear in a de- finite sense as something either singular or plural, such is expressed in one way or another. A. In Japanese words the singular is expressed by the numeral £ S fito , one; Fito yo , one night. Fito kado , one corner. „ tose, one year. „ katamdri , one clog. „ tdbi , one time, once. „ fana, one flower. in Chinese words by — * ^ gjj * , ikka or ikkdno , as * ikka siyo, one place; * y ikkdno tsi , one piece of ground. More amply, when treating of the numerals. . -f .-r ’) Pinus massoniana Lamb. 2 ) Pinus densijlora Sieb. et Zuc. 54 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. B. The plural is expressed: I. By a repetition of the noun, for so far as a distributive generality ') indicated by the repetition includes the idea of a plural. Yama , hill; Ydma-ydma , every hill. The number of such repetitions is determined by custom. In the pronun- ciation the accent lies on the first part of the compound , while the second occurs as a soft prolongation of the sound, and the consonant, with which it begins, undergoes a softening and becomes impure. Examples: |gj| Z kitni , country , province ; ffl * kohdri , koori , district; mUra , village; pq, * sato , village ; BTfj. matsi , ward, street; the, ie, house, family; fe, he, door, family; l|fl ^ y asir0 ’ c hapel ; \\\Z yama , hill, mountain; a tokoro , place ; ? sumi, corner; IB | fit? at an jjttr ill? ® s ISSI ^ kuni-guni , each country , every province. f kohori-goliori , every district. ^ { mura-mUrd, each village. {" sato-zato , each village. { matsi-matsi, every ward. ^ { ihe-ihp, every house, each fa- mily. V ' f e ~f e i ( l° or for door, every fa- mily. \ yasiro-yasiro , every chapel. { ydma-ydma , every hill or moun- tain. V f tokdro-dokoro , every place, eve- rywhere. V { sumi-zumi , every corner. ^ ^ ma , space, (place and time). KT Y > ma-ma , every space , every time. J ai, space between; BUS ) ai-cu, meanwhile. hdsi , bridge; ^ (' fdsi-bdsi , every bridge. ^*5 on °? ° ne ? ( bnd-unti , each. ^ p fdd , one , man ; At V I* fitd-bito, every one. ’) „ Die Wicdcrholung dcr Substanzwdrter bezeichnet liicbt den Plural, aucli nicht lohlechthin Mehrheit, sondcm distributive Allheit, die wir am beeten dnrch „jeder” wicdcrgebcn.” — Steinthal, Pyptn drs Sprachbaues , pag. 158. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. 55 H v °y a , ol(1 ; ^ 5 ydkit , office ; jtf* 3 yo, age, time of life; t, tosi , year ; 0 * fi , day ; £ toki , time , hour ; i ro i 1) color, 2) sort; $5 K OP V s{na i !) degree, rank, 2) quality. x siyu, sort; ^ samO’ i the look , the mien & £ tabi , journey, turn; |j|! x kiisuri , medicine; A-oy yo-yo , every age. #£• V { tosi-tosi , each year. 0 u ^ v yi-ta', every day. {' toki-doki , always, each hour. V { iro-iro , every color or sort. pp ^ V ^ sina-zina , every quality , every article. 7 ® IT V ^ siyu-ziyu , every sort. v V r sama-zama no , of every form. ^ ^ I tabi-tabi , each turn. V r kiisuri-gusuri , every medicine. V i* koye-goye, each sound. II. The plural is expressed by nouns used adjectively, which signify a quan- tity, generality. 1. In composition with Japanese words (yomi) are used: vx , ohokuno, ookuno, many. Ookuno fito , many people. Ookitno kane, much money , in opposition to sitkosi no kane , little money. A? tai-seino, in great power, in multitude. Tai-seino fito , people in multitude. , tai-sauno, tai-soono, exceedingly. '/ipf 0|v/ o f |X( w > taku-s&nno, abundant. V iro-irono, of every color or sort, of all sorts. Iro-irono fana , all sorts of flowers. Iro-iro no ydku nin , functionaries of every rank. PP Y Y p, sina-zina no, of every quality. >||| % IV, sama-zama no, of all sorts. Sama-zama no wake, all the diffe- rent judgements. Sama-zama no mono, things of all sorts. WLx' V i ^ > kazu-kazuno, numerous. [V , siyu-ziyu no, su-zuno, of every sort. Siyu-ziyu no f ltd, people of every sort. 56 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. — 'y is-saino, all. — ijiv, is-saino sm-ziyau , all living beings. Moro-morono, all [from , moro, both]. Moro-moro no fitd , all people; moro-morono mono , all things; moro-morono tsutsi-rui , all sorts of earth. Ta&a moro-moro no tori ivo kdsumu , the falcon plunders all birds. 2. In composition with Chinese words ( koye ) are used: su, number, many. U 7 ' ^ ^ , su-dai , many generations. ^ J , su-nen , many years. ^ su-get, many months. p[ su-zit, many days. I A& sn-zin, many people. x ~/j Z'l su ~ man , many tens of thou- sands. I Tt, sn-sen , many thousands. I w! At. su-bydku nin , many hundreds of men. a > siyo, every, all. S' 3 I I I HH y , siyo-koku , the countries. ~}jv, siyo-fau , the regions. svyo-buts , the things, f, , siyo-nin , mankind , the people. -}- siyo-si , the warriors. I I I I ^ ^ , siyo-ydku , the functions. |> , siyo-setsu , the arguments, l||b » . siyo-kei , the arts. siyo-siydktt , every trade. siyo-siu , the sects. III. The plural of a noun is also expressed by one or another suffix, which signifies a quantity or generality, and either must be considered as coordinate, as e. g. Co in I and Company for ive, or with the preceding word forming a col- lective word, as e. g. man-kind for men. These suffixes are ra, domo, gara, bara, nami, tatsi, siu, gata, nado. 1. Ra (4^^) signifies a class of persons or things without any distinctive, e. g. YdtsUkdre, subject or vassal; Ydtstlkdrerd ( U subject and class, all that belongs to the category of subjects, the subjects (or vassals). Otdko , man ; Otokord ( ), man and class, all that belongs to the ca- tegory of man, men. Fiyak-siyou rd ( v jffc / 4^ v ), or Nou-minrd ( ^ ^ ^ country- people. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. 57 Ware , the I; Warerd (2£^), I and class, we. Nandsi , thou; Nandsira ( tk # ) * y° u - Kore , something that is here, this; Korird ( ^ ^S), this and class, such. Korerdno nozomi , such a desire, a desire of that nature '). Koto , matter; Korerd no koto , such a matter. .Soho mono, such a one; Sono monord such a one and C°., such persons 2 ). Migi (pronounce mingi ), on the right, in a writing referring to what prece- des. Migird, all that precedes, the aforesaid. ^ 7^ 7, U •> wtgri- ra no siyo niu-ji, the expenses of all the aforesaid 3 ). At si kotsi , there and here; Atsira kotsira, all that is included in there and here. Kora Wani no kind , Kamo no kind ra ga oya nari , this is the father of the princes (princely houses) of Warn and Kamo. Remark. If we are at liberty to consider ra as a coordinate word, and then again as a suffix that forms collective words, logic will require the first, seeing that such an expression as I and Company really answers to ice, which is not the case with the expression my company, by which „I” may be excluded. 2. Tomo, domo, mate, fellow, companion, particularly in the spoken lan- guage, for persons and things. Watdkusi no tomo. my mate or friend; Watdkusi domo ( it ), I and mate, we; Watdkusi domo no lion, our book. Ko , child; Ko-domo, a mate who is a child, (my or his) child ; Ko-domo ra or Ko-domo domo , (my or his) child and mate , (my or his) children. Ke-rai , attendant ; Kc-rai domo , attendants , the suite of a prince. Sono mono domo ( itt ^ K -F), such persons '*). Ware, 1; Ware domo , we. Mi, I myself; Mi domo, we ourselves; Mi domo ga kind , the prince of us our- selves, our own prince. Ohokuno taka domo, falcons in multitude. Yebisa domo wo tairakesimU , he has the savages subjected. Taka no na tomo too sirusu , to give up the different names of the falcon. Neko , the cat ; Neko domo , the cats. Mumd , horse ; MUma domo , horses. 3. Gara, series, row; division of objects distributed in classes. Fitu, man; Fito-gara ( A PP .Ai)- series of men. Fito-gara no ygu ni , after the manner of men. Fi-gara ( 0 'A ), series of days. Koto , matter; Koto- ') The Treaty between the Netherlands and Japan , concluded at Yedo, 18 th August. 1858. Art. II, al. 12. ») Ibid. Art. VI, al. 9. 3 ) Ibid. VIII, 2. 4 ) Ibid. VI, 10. 58 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. (jara , series of matters. Tomo ( ) , fellow , mate ; Tomo-gara W 0 'fit )i a row °f companions, a series or class (of men or brutes). Waga-tomo- gara ( ^ j0 _ ) , the class of the I , we. Nandsi ga tomo-gara ( ^ ) , the class of you , you. Neziimi no tomo-gara '), the mouse-kind. 4. Bara, group. Taka-bara (ft#) , bamboo-wood. MatsU-bara ($t #) , firtree-wood , a group of firtrees. Nandsi-bara ( tkW ) , your group , you. Tono-bara ( ^ ^ ) , they there without. 5. Nami (^), series. Fi-nami , series of days. TsUki-nami , series of months. Se-ken-nami , the com- mon people. Fito-nami , the people. Wa-nami ( ) , my series, we. 6. Tatsi 2 ), row of persons who are, or may be, in an upright posture for, or at a given time, host. Ydku-nin , functionary; Ydku-nin-tatsi ( ^ , row of functionaries, functionaries. Kami, god; Kami-tatsi (iW# ), series of gods, gods. Kono mi- fasira-no Kami va mina Wataravi-agata ni masu Kami-tatsi nari , these three gods are a series of gods residing in the district of Wataravi. — Kono futa fasira no kami va minasokd-ni narimasiru Kami-tatsi nari , both the gods are gods sprung from the bed of the river. Tomo , fellow, friend; Watdkusi no tomo-tatsi , my friends. 7. Situ, siyu ( ^ i su , also su, in the written language P^l ^ , siu-dsyu, company, circle of persons. Samurai siu , band of warriors, warriors. Ondgo-siu , circle of women. Remark. Both expressions, samttrdi-siu and ondgo-siu , already given by Col- lado as forms of the plural, are acknowledged by natives of Yedo, in answer to our personal inquiry, to be good Japanese, in colloquial style. Thus, when in the Japanese Grammar of 1861 (page 19, line 6 from the bottom) it is re- marked: „ Rodriguez speaks of a fourth (particle expressing the plural), soo, but this appears to be always a prefix. It has reference to number, but is not indicative, as alleged, of rank , while the other three (% f 0 Kt o .?) un- doubtedly are,” it appears that there the difference between * su, number, *) Jap. Encycl. 30, 6, v. *) Instead of but only as the phonetic representative of tatsi. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. NUMBER. § 5. 59 multitude (see page 56), and the s?«, su, used elliptically is not taken notice of. 8. Gata, pronounced ngata = no gat a , side of. ATi-kata, the side or party of the Mikado. Tekino kata , the hostile party. To indicate the plural gata is used for high persons, and characterizes deep respect towards them. Dai-migau , = great name, nobleman; Dai-miijau-gata ( kdil; ), the no- blemen, the nobility. — Tono sama , young nobleman; Tono-suma-gata , young noblemen. — Te-mae-sama , you, Sir; Te-mae-sdma-gata , you, Sirs or gentlemen. — Ka-nai-sdma-gata, the gentlemen house-mates, your family. — O-ko-gata , your Highness’s children , your children. — Dzijo tsiu gata ( *r k * ) , women of quality, young gentlewomen. 9. Nado, from nani-to 1 nando , whatever, and so forth, and such ( ^ , vulgo ). lye-nado , house and so forth, house and such like, houses. — SamUrai- nado, warriors. As the grammatical distinction of singular and plural is wanting, so the compound words, which express a plural, have no separate declension. Remark. With a view to courtesy, which particularly dominates the spoken language, it is not a matter of indifference which of the words given, is used to indicate the plural. Ra, domo and nado refer directly to a class of persons or things and therefore are used when one speaks of his own or of subordinate people, or in general of objects, to which no importance is attached. — Gara and bara belong to the written language. — Tatsi implies respect, and gata, side, the highest respect, which is analogous to our „on the part of the King” for „from the King.” It is natural, that more or less elevated expressions, which from politeness are used to others, are not applied to oneself and one’s own. IV. The plural is also expressed by adverbs, as Mina ( £& s -), together, ^ y ^ Nokor&zu ( |) , without exception , and Koto-gotoku ( ^ ) , generally , which then precede the predicative verb to which they belong, for instance Moto sinaioa mina yordsii, the article itself is together good, the articles themselves are all good. — San-kan nokordzu mitsuki-mono wo tate-matsuru , the three empires offer without exception tribute. — Tane koto-gdtoku me ico iddsu nari , the seed shoots generally, all the seed shoots. 60 CHAPTEK I. NOUNS. ISOLATING OF THE NOUN. § 6. ISOLATING OF THE NOUN. § 6-. The suffix A va, ^7 wa, )V ba. Every one, who for the first time hears a Japanese harangue, is struck by the continual repetition of the little word wa, which pronounced in a sharp and high tone and followed by a pause, breaks off the ecpiable flow of words, in which the speaker then proceeds in his ordinary tone of speaking. On a hearer, not acquainted with the language, this little word with its resting point makes the impression, that the speaker would emphasize what he has just said, and sepa- rate it from what follows. And that impression is correct. Wa, ^7, in the book- language A, va, is an emphatic suffix or rather an interjection , intended to isolate some word or saying, and to separate it from what immediately follows. We do the same, when we raise the voice at some word and, after a pause, continue speaking in our ordinary tone. Va or wa therefore is used, in the first place, to separate the subject from the predicate, as in Turna vk yamayori idsti, = the jewels || mountain out come (jewels come out of mountains) ; and it may not cause surprise when , on that account, it is understood as characteristic of the subject and consequently as the sign of the nominative, which, strictly considered, it is not. It is indeed joined to the subject, but not exclusively, and serves to isolate every other rela- tion, every dependent case. The isolating power of va finds its equivalent in expressions like as to, with regard to, quant a Fr., quoad , quod attinet ad,Lat., wat . . . aangaat , Dutch. Whenever va isolates the subject, it answers to the Chinese ^ tie, which has the signification of a „ definite something” and passes for a relative pronoun. As a euphonic modification of va, )Y ba also occurs. The subject and the predicate are not always separated by va, but how ne- cessary this separation sometimes is, appears from the instance quoted, which, with the omission of va, may also signify: „ jewel-mountain from come,” i. e. be produced from a jewel-mountain. Examples: $|jj ^ ^ ^ ^ J v f ') , Sisiva fdku-ziuno t siyq,u nari, the lion is the head of all brutes, or: as to the lion, he is the head etc. — w* y SH X -gj £ -f 1 , Usi va ta wo takavesu tsiku nari , as to the ox, he is a field-ploughing domestic animal. — $}j§ f Osova sui-tsiuni sumit, = the otter in (the) water lives. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. (31 DECLENSION. § 7. The relations of one noun to another word, or its cases, are expressed by suffixes, by particles ( Teniwova or Tsuke-zi) '), which generally have a defi- nite signification and , arrantred according to our declension , are limited to the following. Nominative (subject) and Vocative. . . Accusative (object direct) Genitive Qualitative Genitive Dative and Terminative Index of the relation of the Place, Means and Instrument Ablative 5? wo. "Jf ga (pronounced nga, na ), among in- exact writers often ha. J no, old-Japanese also -)~ na and tsu, originally tu. -N. ve, he or X ye, e (wards). zz. ni (in, at), Y* to (to). ni, X te - .n X nite, X* de (P ron - nde). X ij yori, ^7 y kara (out, from). 3? wo alone, which indicates an object direct is characterized as a real form of declension, the other inflections belong to the suffixes, that have their own signification. If, notwithstanding, they are here already cited and illustrated, it is for the behalf of those, who do not willingly dispense with the ordinary de- clensions. Explanation. I. Nominative. The primitive form of a noun is at the same time that of the nominative, which thus has no inflectional termination. In imitation of former grammarians the suffix A m, vulgo 37 u ' a i has been considered as a characte- ristic of the Nominative, but as this suffix is merely an isolating particle, which may also be of use with other cases, it must not be longer considered as a definite characteristic of the Nominative (subject) 2 ). *) See Introduction, § 14. 3. pag. 42. ! ) „ Keine altaische Sprache hat einen Nominativ.” H. steinthaL, Charakierisiik der haupisuchlichsten Typen des Sprachlaues , 1860, pag. 186. 62 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. Vocative. The poet sometimes stretches or doubles the final sound of a noun, to make known, that his feelings are thereby affected, or that he invokes the object. This emphatic prolongation of sound, by which the vocal-harmony comes into play, belongs properly to the interjections, and has the same effect as our exclamation 0! or Oh! Hana , flower ; liana a ! (ft: q- T > o flower! oh the flower! Tori, bird; torii! ( ^ *' o bird! Mi, three; mii! ( — * Yo , four ; yd o! yo wo ! <151 3 ^ ) ■ . . . u ; . . . u wo 1 As exclamation Y , wo occurs, e. g. in Trova nivoveto tsirinui'u wo , = the colour with the smell corruption o! i. e. oh! that the colour with the smell should vanish! Besides, B yo, just as in German: Feuerio! Mordio! is used as an emphatic suffix and, added to the simple root of a verb, strengthens the Imperative, e. g. To wo ake yo , open the door ! II. Accusative. If the object direct of a transitive verb is indefinite, it is placed before the verb in the primitive form and the logical accent falls upon the verb, e. g. Kusa kari, = grass to mow. If the object is definite (Accusa- tive definite), it is characterized by ivo and at the same time is accentuated, e. g. Kusuvro karu , = grass (or the grass) to mow. If it is to he brought out with emphasis as the subject of conversation, then the accusative is isolated by the particle va besides , and the form wo va is obtained , which for euphony passes over into wobd, and is frequently pronounced oba. Examples. Tori-odosivd tori kedamonowo oddsu mono ndri, the scarecrow | is something that frightens birds and beasts. — Uwd torn amivd uwowd torn gu nari, = the fish catching-net, is a fish catching-net. — Midzu kumi, water sco o per. — Ike no midsuivd kurnU, to scoop the water from a pond. — Kefurino nohoruwo miru , to see the mounting of the smoke. — Kamini nikdmit tokdro oba nwtte simowd tsUkau koto nakdre ’), with that which people disapprove of in their chief, they must not charge their inferiors. In the book on the Middle-Way ( Cap. IX) after what a man may un- *) The Grand Study (Dai Gaku ) , X , 2. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. 63 dertake of what is great has been summed up, there follows as antithesis: „but he cannot keep the Middle- Way,” which the Japanese translation very cor- rectly expresses by m ; ml m Tsiu-you woba yd- kusu bekarazu. It would have the same effect , if it were : „ Tsiu-you wa , kore wo yokUsu bekarazu - but the Middle-Way — that can one not keep.” The form Tsiu-you wa cannot , it is plain , pass for an accusative. On the other hand the saying : „ MUma sarit wo ba nava nite kore wo sibdru , = the horse and the ape — with a rope (one) binds them fast,” contains an unnecessary repetition of the object, characterized as accusative. If the rvoba is preserved, the kore wo is super- fluous; if the kore wo remains, Mima sdru va must remain, the wo being superfluous. The use of wo in Kai-hen wo isi-kabewo tsttku , to build a wall on (or along) the seaside , deserves notice. — Nippon no bu-nai wo riyo-kau-suru men-giyo ( Q * ' ^ ft ? Sfi « X n/ % it). permission to travel through the inland of Japan ‘). The Accusative employed here indicates a continuous motion which we express by means of along , through. III. Genitive. 1. ~fj* * ga, nga, na ( ^ ) , in pronunciation sharp toned, cha- racteristic of the genitive relation, sets forth the object as something taken in a definite sense, and has the effect of of the. The genitive subordination by means of ga is considered disrespectful; thence the speaker applies it only to himself and to persons and things of which, having higher persons in view, he makes no case. One says, indeed, Wore gd or Watdkusigd , = of the I, of me, and Aregd , of him; but ga is not used with those nouns and pronouns, with which respected persons are addressed or indicated 2 ). Examples. Ko va Misima-agata-nusi gd oya nari , this is the progenitor of the bailiff of the district of Misima. — Kono kami va N. N. ra gd oya nari , this god is the progenitor of the N. N.s. Fitu mina Sukunegd kau-rikiwozo kan-zi keri , each admired Sukune's strength. — ') Netherlands and Japanese Treaty I. al. 3. *) This kodriguez also must have meant, when he, according to the French edition § 7, says: „ga s’emploie corame pronom de la troisieme personne, pour les inferieurs, et comae pronom de la premiere, par humilite.” Let the misprint „ com me pronom” he altered to „apres” or „pour le pronom,” and the agreement with our assertion will he found. A pronoun, ga, does not exist. The same mistake is met with in another Japanese Grammar of 1861 p. 18, where we read: „■)}'' ga, a sign of the genitive in nouns, is used as a pronoun in the third person for inferiors, and in the first person as a term of humility.” 64 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. Kai-mon gd dake , the peak of the sea-port ( Kai-mon is the name of the entrance to the bay between the provinces of Odstimi and Sdtsuma). Sag ami no Miura gd sdki , the cape of the Sagamian Miura , the cape of Miura in the province of Sagdmi. — Amegd situ , under the heavens, the sublunary world. — Fituwo naigd siro ni su , to estimate others at the value of nothing, to consider others of no value. — Karri , being so, KdrUga ytieni, = for the reason of the being so, on account of the state of affairs. — Watakusi gd ki- mono , the dress of me. no index of the subject. The particle ga is also considered as an emphatic definite characteristic of the subject. Now the question arises, if a particle, which, as it most evidently appears from the instances cited, is an emphatic definitive characteristic of the genitive, can also be one of the nominative. The answer is negative. The cases, in which ga is considered as an emphatic nominative termination, are capable of a conception , which leaves to this particle its value of a characteristic of the genitive, and besides places in a clear light the reasons, why ga has that effect, which is ascribed to it as an emphatic characteristic of the subject. An instance will make this clear. Speaking of an undertaking the question is proposed: „Is there money for it?” and which is answered by: ,, There is money for it.” Now in the question money is the subject, which after the Japanese arrangement, is placed first and, as a subject first brought into conversation, isolated by va or iva. In the answer, on the contrary, the predicate „t}tcre is" lo- gically has the greater weight, and the subject „ money,” as subordinate attributive definition, precedes the predicate, as genitive, emphatically characterized by ga. The answer: „ There is money" changes to: „of money the presence (is)” '). The question sounds in Japanese: Kane wa drimdsUkd f the answer: Kane g& drimdsU. Another instance consisting of the words /?, day, and kuretd , become dark. To the question: Fiwh kuretakd? = the day (as to the day) || has become dark? i. e. has the day approached the end? as answer, follows: Fi ga kuretd = the day’s having become dark is, i. e. the day has become dark J ). *) It must be kept in view that in Japanese no congruency, properly so called, of the predicative definition with the subject exists. Sec Introduction § 15 A. p. 44. 2 ) This instance is taken from the Japansch en llollaudsch Woordenbock van den Vorst van Naknts, 1810, letter fi. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. 65 The Shopping- Dialogues are rich in instances, which plead for this conception. E. g. pp. 1 and 2: The buyer. 1 have come to buy something = WatdkOsi -wk Icai mono ni maitta. The seller. What will you buy? = Nani wo 0 kdi nasdrukd ? The buyer. What is there? = Ndni ga dri-mdsnka ? The seller. There are lacquered goods inlaid with mother of pearl = Awo-gdi mono gk dri-mdsU. The buyer. Are there any gold-lacquered goods? = Mdki-ye mono wtt dri- mdstika ? The seller. Yes, gold-lacquered goods are at hand = Hei. Mahi-ye mono gk drimdsii. — Question: Oko samagata wa ikdga de iraserare mdsuka ? , your children, how do they do? — Answer: Sue no ko ga sugure masenti '), the youngest child is not quite well. Therefore is said rightly for ,, it snows” Yuki ga furti or furi-mdsu, = of snow come down is, whereas Yuki wa fujU = with respect to the snow, it is coming- down, would be a definition which attributes „come down,” the predicate, to the snow. The same is the case with Hokd no fane ga tsuki-masta 2 ), there is another ship arrived, properly the arrival of another ship has happened, whereas Hokd no jinn wa tsuki-mdsta , would signify: „another ship — is arrived,” the sub- ject now being ..another ship” the idea to which the most importance is attached, and on which the attention is first fixed. The degrading of the subject to attri- butive genitive of the predicate is a phenomenon, that commonly occurs in the Altaic languages 3 ), and in the Chinese also, plays an important part. Thus, to choose a classical expression, the saying 0 ^ sK ik Hoei wet zin ye, means Hoei is (or was) a man, Japanese Kwai va f it 6 16 nan. Hoei is here the subject brought under consideration, of which something is said. On the contrary the saying of CONFUCIUS: 0 f ^ 1r \ ^ ^ A t ill *)’ J a P auese Kwai ga f it 6 to na- ri , = Hoei ! s a man to be (is), lays the accent emphatically on the predicate „to be a man,” which we might express by „Hoei was eminently a man.” *) Copied, with correction, from r. alcock, Familiar dialogues, pp. 1, 2. s ) k. brown, Colloquial Japanese, p. 1, n°. G. 3 ) steinthal, Charakterisiik etc., p. 1SG. 4 ) Tsc/iung-yung , Cap. VIII. 66 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. Still worthy of a place here, is r. brown’s remark in his Colloquial Japanese, pp. XXXIII and XXXIV, his opinion concerning the power of both particles being fully confirmed by onr illustration. „ Wa, which is merely an isolative particle, serving to separate a word or clause, from the words that follow it, is not a sign of the nominative, though it frequently stands between the subject and its predicate... Wa is a sort of vinculum around a collection of words , and serves to give definiteness to this group of words, distinguishing it from the other elements of the propositions. . . . Nga or ga {if) is used for the same purpose, except that it seems to be more emphatically definitive. — The difference between tea and nga is scarcely translatable, but is to be expressed by the tone of the speaker’s voice, rather than by any cor- responding word in English. The native ear at once perceives the difference, and a foreigner can acquire the use of these particles only by practice and much familiarity with the Japanese usage. The native teachers say that wa is a kind of cordon drawn around a word or words , as if to isolate it or them as a distinct subject of thought, and that nga is used when one or more objects are singled out, being present or conceived to be present, spoken of specifically. Thus, if a Japanese should say of a certain lot of teas; Here are the musters, his expression for the musters, would be Mi/ion wa, i. e. the musters, as separated from the original packages, but, if a buyer, taking one of the samples should say he liked it, his expression would be Kono milionga Jcini irimas' . The idea would then be, that that particular sample suited him.” — Thus here a difference is made between Mi- lion wa (properly Te-honwa) holconi arimasu , samples are here at hand, and Kono le-honga Jcini irimasu, these samples please me. 2. No, y , cognate to m, to be, is used for the attributive subordination of one substantive to another, and gives to the subordinated the character of an •adjective. As the use of K ') ondori , for 6 no tori , male bird; / ^ K 'J mendori ')< for mono tori , female bird. That no, frequently, has still another particle (case) after it is the consequence of an ellipsis, e. g.: ;'!')] t iv 7 ^0 £ i'l'JJ f h c M'C y ' 7 f S o Usivo , dsitd no wo dmsivo to ini, kun no wo yuusivo to ini 2 ), tide, that of the mor- ning is called the morning-tide, that of the evening the evening-tide. — Kore *) Compare ( 4, A. 2. Remark p. 52. -) Jap. Eneycl. 57, 2 verm. CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. G7 wa amari tsiisai; mo sttkdsi ookii no wo 0 mise '), this (case) is too small; let me see a larger one. 3. Na, -J- (abbreviation of naru, „being”), old, and in the popular language, still used variation of no, in the mouths of the vulgar at Yedo da ) also (pronounced nda) 2 ), which, however, is to be considered as a syncope of de-dru. Simozamana koto (^ it*), baseness, vulgarity, from simo, beneath, sama, manner, and koto , thing. — Kova na-bakdri nan, that is only a name. — Na- bakdri na mono , something (mono) that exists only in name. — Kan na gawa , for kaneno gawa ( J|| ), metal-brook, or kamino gawa ( J|j(j) 7^5 j/pJ" ) , god’s-river. — Tai-zidk (for Tai-zi de-aru) koto ivd gozdninasinu , there is nothing of consequence. 4. Tsu, y ('^), old-Japanese characteristic of attributive relation, appears still only in old compounds, instead of no; sometimes, for the sake of euphony, after m or n it passes over to dzu ( The oldest records sometimes have, instead of f and y , X su and X zu also. Examples. Amatsu kami , = of heaven khan, heavenly god. — Amatsu sora, the expanse of heaven, the firmament. — Amatsu miko, the son of heaven (the Emperor). — Amatsu jitsiiki, the heavenly (imperial) crown. — Kind tsu kami , the country god. — Kurd tsu or kuni zu (y —X) 3 ) mono, country objects, coun- try products. — Ivetsu imo , house-potato 4 5 ). — Ira tsu kokoro , = prickle heart, shrewdness. — Xivatsu dori , the court-bird, the cock. — Aki , 1. glitter, 2. au- tumn. — Aki tsu musi , the glittering insect ( Libellula ). — Aki tsu sima, glittering islands (a name of Japan). — Sit a, beneath, under. — Sitatsu mitsi , an under- ground way. — Kiln tsu 3 ) takefiko , the hero of Kibi. Instead of A/' 9 3 otsuko , bachelor, and Af ' otsume, spinster, occur in old writings otoko and otome also. IV. Dative and Terminative. "N. ve (he) or X (fr) ye, e properly signifies side or direction, e. g.: Yamanove, the mountainous side, the side of, the direction of (towards) the mountains. — Yuku ve f the side, by which one goes ') Shopping-Dialogues , p. 3. -) From oral communication by O. Y. from Yedo. 3 ) In the Nipponki , XXII, 20, both forms (7 = y and 9 — X) occur alternately. 4 ) Caladium esculentum. 5 ) It must seem strange, that the writer of the Japanese Encyclopedia (78. 8. r.) has thought it neces- sary to subjoin to this name the note: 9 J ^fj ' jjq' ^ flit 1 ^ |sj V , tsu i a ziyo-go, xo to ondzi , i. e. tsu, an auxiliary word, the same as no. G8 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. away. — Mavd, nia ye , vulgo mai - look -wards, i. e. forwards, before. — Atove or atoye , = spur-side, backwards, behind. As suffix ve or ye answers in all respects to our wards and indicates the direction in which any thing proceeds, e. g. Yedo-ve (or Yedo-he ), Yedo- wards , as distinction from Yedoni , in or at Yedo , Yedoni oite , being in Yedo; Yedo ve no mitsi , = Irdo-wards road , the road to Yedo. — Nippon ve no miydke , presents for Japan. Examples: Siyok'-motsu w6 fitdve dkurii, to send victuals to others. — Kariva mindmi ve sdrita , the geese have gone away towards the south. — Tovoki kuni ve yuku , to go to distant countries. — Ten-kivd sirno ve kUdari, tsi-kivd kamive no- boru , the mists of the sky sink towards beneath (to the earth), the mists of the earth rise towards above. — Moto ve modoru , to return to the source. — Kara- fune itsu sou (issou) Sagdmino MiUrdga sakive feu-tsiyaku-su , a Chinese junk ran aground on the cape of MiUra , in the province of Sagdmi. Instances from the treaty between the Netherlands and Japan. Art. II, § 17. Kdkudaive furi-watasu , to make known into every part of the realm. - Gun-you no siyo-bids va Nippon-ydk' -siyo no fokd ve uru-Mkardzu , munitions of war may not be sold to any other than the Japanese government. — V, 1. Olanda- zin ve (or ni) taisi ( r ) fauivo ( ^ ^ ) okdsu , to transgress the law against the Dutch. — VI, 9. 3 i'S/i Ejj f , to communicate to the Con- sul. — V, 1. in every direction , towards every side. Ni ( . Y ), with relation to, in general, points out the relation of an indirect object, is, therefore, used for the indication of the place at which, as well as of the direction towards the innermost part, or to the attainment of anything, and answers to our in, at, to, unto, by and by means of, accor- ding as the verb, to which it belongs, indicates that the place has been reached, or that the object makes movement towards it. The relation expressed by Ni may be understood as: a. Dative or A Illative, by which, in general, a collateral relation to the predicate verb is expressed. E. g. Fitoni tsikdki mitsi, a road, which with relation to people is near. — Fitoni tovoki mitsi , a road which with relation to (for) people, is remote. — Fitoni f and ruru, separated from people. — Kdviko kuvdni fdnartnu, the silkworm does not remove from the foliage. b. Local, to the cpiestion where or when. E. g. Kono tokdroni , at this CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. 69 place. — Nusubitd tokdro-dokdro ni okora , robbers rise at every place (every- where). — Figa figasi ni nobori , nisini ira , the sun rises in the east, and goes in (down) in the west. — Yedo ni kiyo-riu-sum yakit-nin , functionaries residing in Yedo. — Yuma ni iri ki wo kiru , = to go into the mountains and chop wood. — Ftlne ni noru , to be load in a ship (to navigate). — Ydma-gusd wo ndvani tsuri, kazeni sardsu, to hang up mountain-herbs on a rope and dry (them) in the air. — Kaviko ni yamavi dekiru , by (among) the silk worms exists sickness. — Ivu ni todokovoru , to stick fast in speaking. — Kono tosi ni , in this year. — Fir a ni , at noon. — Yuvu ni , in the evening. • — Firu-gavo dsani ake , yuvubeni sibdmu , the „face of noon” ') opens in the morning, and closes in the evening. Niva, the relation indicated by ni isolated by va. — Nan-bu , Tsukuru-ben no tsi-mei ni va fan-mei ohosi , among (ni va) the names of places ( *) of the country of Nan-bu and Tsfikdru strange names are manifold. Niva sometimes elliptically changes in to nva (3/ )^). — Aru toki ni va or dm toki nva , at any time. c. Modal, to the question how. E. g. Uai-sini tatsi-tamavu , he appeal’s as (in the quality of) hereditary Prince. — lkdni , vulgo ikdn ( \ 2s ) , how, in what manner. — Ikd-sdmani . in what (or which) manner. — Saka-samani , perversely. — Koto ni , particularly. — Makdto ni , in truth, indeed. — Tadani, mere, only. — Ooki ni , often, very. — Sumiyaka ni , suddenly, quickly. d. Casual and Instrumental, to the question of whom, by which or by what, with which, with what, although here also the original signification, with relation to, is preserved. E. g. Ya ni atareta, struck with an arrow. — Fitoni damasareta , deceived by people (others). — Dai-Minno sei va fai-gunni korite susumi tsiku-dzukdzu , Td- Ming's army, confounded by the defeat, does not approach. e. Dative of the person, to the question to whom. E. g. Oyani niru , with relation to the parents, to be like, to resemble the parents. — Fitoni taisu , to stand opposite others. — Fitd-ni mono wo atavuru (pron. atguru ) , to concede or give anything to others. /. Dative of the thing, to the question to what or to which, for which the suffix to is used also. E. g. KUvd no mi wo taneni (or taneto) toru , to take mulberries for seed. — Mdyuwo watani toru , to use cocoons for wadding. — ') The flower of Pfiarbitis Nil cuois, or Ipomoea Nil linn. 70 CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7. Yumi ni tsukuru ki , wood worked into bows. — Wdra vd musiro ni oru besi , ndva m ndvu besi , fdki-mono ni tstikurU besi , with regard to straw ( wara vd) , it can be woven into mats, it can be twisted into rope, it can be worked up into shoes. — Nami kaze mo tawoyakani nari , wind and waves become smoother. - — Asiwo kirite siyoJcU-mdtsu ni atavu besi , he will cut off his feet and give (them) for food. y. Terminative, the direction whither, signifying to which (to what, to whom), provided the movement directed towards an object extends to within its limits or reach, distinguished from ve which properly answers rather to our wards. E. g. Kazevd nisi-katani kavaru , = the wind changes to (veers to- wards) the west side. — Yowo fini tsdgu , to continue the night to the day. - Kaze ydmite ( yande ) June kisi ni tsuku , the wind lulls and the ship comes to the shore. — Fdkusai yori Nippon ni ivatdru , he passes from Fakusai to Japan. — Isini naru , to turn to stone. V. To, to, Dutch tot, ter, German zu, a particle that denotes the inherency of a substantive in a predicate verb, which exjiresses a becoming or a making to, in general a working, which has an object for its apposition. Of such sort are the verbs nari , to become; nasi . to make; ivu , to be called, to name; nddsu- kuru , to name; miyu , to seem; kaku , to write, etc. E. g. Midsukdra toravare-fito to nari , he becomes, of his own accord (to) a prisoner. — Mdjuwo ma-wata to nasu , people make (work up) cocoons to silk wadding. — N.va tori to kesite tobi- yuku , N. changes himself to a bird and flies away. — Fit6 to ivu, to be called man; Fitd to ivu va (by syncope Fito to vh), that which is called man, the so called man. Nite, ^T, in the spoken language, passing into nde, for which (de) is written, characterises alike the Local and the Instrumental and is used, especially, when the predicate-verb does not follow it immediately, but is sepa- rated from it by the interposition of the subject or of the object direct. E. g. Kono sedonite sivo faydsi, = in this strait the tick* is rapid. — Kari-bdsi nite kava wo watdru , to cross the river by means of a temporary bridge. — Koine wo kdra- usit nite kdmakdni kuddku , to stamp rice fine in a mortar. — Kitvd nite kdviko wo ydsindvu, to rear silk-worms with leaves. — Tamayo nite siyau-zuru mono , beings proceeding from eggs. — Fdku-sai-k6kU nite va taka wo Kutsin t6 ivu, in the country of Fdku-sai, the hawk is called Kutsin. — Aru kuni nite va kaviko-ami wo tsukavu nari, in a certain country the silk-worm net is used. — Moroyosinite va, in China. — £ [|| ^ in the Middleland. Kuni-yuni nite , in each CHAPTER I. NOUNS. DECLENSION. § 7 . 71 country. — Te nite , with hands ; Te nite no si-kata , gestures with hands. — Fast nite fasamu, to take hold of with eating-sticks. De, ^ 7 *'', contraction of ni -j- te and pronounced as nde , characterizes alike the relation of a. the Local and b. the Instrumental is, however only peculiar to the easy, spoken and written styles. Examples: a. Miyako 3 T at * til- Wa-gun siicori, under Kara. *) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 23. 5 ) Ibid. p. 14. 3 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 35. 6 ) Ibid. p. 41. CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS. § 8. The Pronouns in Japanese are: I. Nouns which express a quality. II. Pronouns demonstrative, which point out something, either a person or thing according to its relation to the speaker. They are all subject to the ordinary declension , and with the genitive suffix . no, are used as pronouns possessive. The distinction of three grammatical persons (I, Thou, He) has re- mained foreign to the Japanese language '). All the persons, that of the speaker (the I), as well as that to which or of which he speaks (Thou, He), are con- sidered as contents of the proposition and thus, according to our peculiarity of language, in the third person, and etiquette, having in view the meaning of words expressive of quality, has to determine, which person, by one or another of these words is intended. Etiquette distinguishes only between the „I,” and the „not-I,” it abases the one, and exalts the other. Thus, it is the meaning, which in this sort of words comes first under notice, before the use, that eti- quette makes of it, is indicated. ') Therefore, as it will be seen hereafter, the verb has no conjugational suffixes, which tend to the expression of this distinction. 74 CHAPTER II. QUALIFYING PRONOUNS. § 8. With respect to the use of the qualifying pronouns especially, the written or book language and the conversational differ from each other. 1. Qualifying nouns, which are used as pronouns, are, A. For the ,,I”: Yatsu-ko (E ^), pron. Yakko, = house-boy, valet, servant; belongs to the old written language. — Yatsu-kare (^|p), valet, your servant. Yhtsu-bara '*) , the valets , we subjects. The Chinese ^ yu, Jap. gu, unintelligent, in compounds, as: jR' AZ gu-nin, the unintelligent man, I. gu-sa , the unintelligent. (t) ’ fp. Z ’ ^ le unintelligent herb , the ,,1” of the Bonzes. gu-rau , the unintelligent old man. MtA AS'C gu-sin , my heart. B. For the person spoken to, THOU: 1. Nandzi elk A-J, formerly ndmUdzi , originally na-motsi , = having a name, name-having, name bearing, renowned , honoured ; plural nandzira, nandzi ya-tomo- gara. It belongs to the written language and to the solemn st}de. Nobles, and literate persons address one another with Nandzi. j^. du kC tff<- JVf'wi iomoni ndndziwo mini, the people look up to you together, or every otic looks up to you. — 'Nandzi fit 6 J Seo-si. j£i ? -jp* ^ Gu-si. $P ^ ^F* ^ Ts«-si. One’s own wife ( #'JJ . v is: Another’s son ( ^ ^ y 3 ) is : S; If* Kok-M. ^ Rei-si. Siu -"- ffi t Ji I Ran-giyok. %«» % M - Another’s wife ( u ^ ' is: ^ Kei-sai. 1 ^ Sen-sai. -i ■A. ^ T* f “ ^ Re i- sits. 9 j^J Y Wj ^ Ncii-dziyo. ml Sen-sits. p£j r ^ Nai-si. ft 7 v A^ct/ sly on . $0* $ i Sai-kun. One’s own concubine ( ^ ^ £) is: Another’s concubine ( ^ ^ ^ y yk ^ ^ ^ Seo-seo. J p 3C ^ ^ ^ pf* /A'i-Aa. $] J S> / ^ < '- Se0 - ^ y I2| Rei - ts w ou - -j^l] ^ ^ ^ Sdkit-sits. U| Sei-tsiyon. One’s own country and town Another’s country and town mimimy »= ( lif MV [_L| * ^ ^ San-ken. jlf-* pg^ Ki-kokil. flj ffl ^ &-»■ ^ '' fjl 11 Fei-ri. Ki-ken. M ’’ 111] t /*-*«». Hit $$| Kan-kiyau, M ' 1 *««-«• |)is CHAPTER IF. QUALIFYING PRONOUNS. § 8. 70 One’s own dwelling place <«£ g* ®i> »: ^ ^ Ktiva-siya. $fj) ' ^ ^ Kuva-sits. wr “-* 8 - lra“ ^ ^ ^ ^ Kan-stya. Fou-sits. wi ^ One’s own letter ( tJ^ 7 - 4|b * Sun-kau. Siyu-tokH. H * ^ t Seki ~ M y°- ffi * Gu-kan. :%) is = Another’s dwelling place (AS Z' K|) is: Mil l Kau-iu. FPl Kan-tei. 7 ^ ^ Kuva-tei. j||j f ^ ^ Ran-baii. - ffi: ft ^ ^ Ka-sits. Another’s letter ( A S ^ J|J* Z>a-im. §j|J Sau-kan. *&“-«*• "b]^ 1 H? ^ Siyun-vn. 7 ft Kuva-kan. tHc^) is: II. Pronouns proper, which point out objects with distinction of the place they occupy in space. They are formed from adverbs of place. They are: 1. Wn (*7). pointing to the centre of space, therefore to the person speaking, to his „I.” 2. A (Y’), anywhere, elsewhere, indicates a place not sufficiently known beyond the speaker. 3. Ka (77)> there, indicates a definite, more distant place. 4. Ko (17), here, indicates a definite place in the neighborhood. 5. Yo (37), yonder, indicates a place, which is beyond a place already de- fined. and serves to suggest the idea of other, Dutch ander , German der andere , dussere. G. So (}/), so, indicates a place already mentioned or imagined as mentioned, and serves to form the reflective pronoun. 7. The interrogative elements Ta (-£?) or To (V*), vulgo Da {^C) or Do ( ) , and Itsu (^ or Idzu (-'f ^ >i ‘), answering to ich in „who? which? what? where?” and to the Latin qu in „quis? quid?” — and is the written form occur- ring in old books, that now, in accordance with the pronunciation of the people, 80 CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS PROPER. § 8. is more generally superseded by and ■). The first form may perhaps be attributed to the inaccuracy of writers and engravers. a. To the immediate compounds with the root Wa (own, proper) belong: Wa-nusi f ) ? proper master, the master, the master of the work- people. Wa-dono (3 *- 57 H ), my or our master. Wa-nami (2**^ the P r0 P er row, we. Wathkusi ), the „I,” plural Watukusi-domo , we, among people of fashion, and in the familiar language the ordinary pronoun for the first person. It is commonly abbreviated to Watdksi or Watdks , and Watdkusiva to Watdksd, whereas the porter at Yedo says Wat ski , Wdsi or Wasi , and the servant-girl Watdsi , Watdi. Whoever does not wish to put himself on a footing with the last mentioned should, thus, use WatakUsi. About the meaning of takusi, the second element of this compound, the Ja- panese etymologists keep silence; likewise, our question directly proposed on that subject always remained unanswered. Referred to our private judgement, we now recognize this word as the tdki , vulgo greedy, desirous, in use in the popular language, adv. tuku , whence the verb tdkUsi to desire, to be greedy, is derived. Thus Wa-tukUsi means self-love, egotism, and is tan- tamount to the ordinary Chinese compound , self-love, egotism. b. The remaining adverbs of place enter into immediate composition with words as 1) Ko ( a 0 i place, region, 2) Tsi (^-), plural tsira (^y), way, tract, in the popular language also Tsutsi - ), province, etc. These com- pounds indicate a place or places, and are, as nouns, declinable. - 1) Compounds with Ko ( ^ 3 g jijj • 3 ): Doko ( 'fcf ’ Jl I 3 ), what place? — Doko no tsurugizo , whence this sword? — Dokoni or Doko de , at which place? at what place? — Doko vi or Dokoyt , to- wards which place? whither? — Doko ye yukuka, where is it going to? whither is it going? Koko (jtt 3 o ||£ 3 0 2^ 0 MV' this l )lace » here< — K°koni or Kokode wakdru , herein lies the difference. — Kokoni oite , herein. Soko ( ^ ^ 3 g y pron. sko , such a place, the place of which is *) W %-gun siwori , under Tare. CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS PROPER. § 8. II. 81 spoken, or the place of something, pointed out, serving formerly to indi- cate the person spoken to; plural sokora ( ^ ^ — Sdko-mdto, for dsdkd-moto = the seat there, serves as pronoun for the person spoken to: Thou, You. — Sdko-nidto naniwo kitrdsii zo ? in the spoken language: Sdko-mdto tkdga 0 kitrdsi nasdru , how do you do? literally: how do you let (the time) go round, how do you wind round? — Asdko , pron. dskd = of some where the quarter, any where. — Kdsokd , vulgo kdsikd ( ^ ), = the place of there, that or yon place. — Doko kdsikd , which quarter? — Koko kasikoni , at this and yon place, here and there yonder. — Kono yama yori kastko no yama tie ittsuru , to remove from this mountain to yonder mountain. Yoko, because it means „cross” is superseded by Yoso ( 41 yo illy)’ another place, elsewhere. — Yoso ye, utsurn , to remove to elsewhere. — Yoso ye ugokdnu , not to remove to elsewhere, i. e. to stay firm at (or in) one’s place. Idzuku ( juj £ ||i^), old-Japanese Idziiko , which place? Some consider ku as an abbreviation of kuni , country, and consequently write -fpj" £ |§|J which country ? — 0 kuni tod idzuku de gozdrimdsU , your country — which country is it ? what is your country? — Idzuku no fitdzo, from what country is the man? — Idzuku ye, whither? — Idzuku ye md, whithersoever, — to every-where. — Idztiku ydn kitazo , whence has he come? — Idzuku yori md , whencesoever, from every place whatever. — Idzuku ni driizo , where is he? Iyi ni dru , he is at home. — Idzuku nikd, or Idzukunkd , where? whither? '). — fuf 7 ^ 2 ) , Z7si tdzukunkd yukfi , whither is the ox going? Idzukunzo , J '? >/ z y", originally Idzuku nizo, d y*>szz'/\ — old-Japanese Idzukonizo, d — X, from the elements, of which it is composed, has the meaning of „at what place? where?”, answers nevertheless to our „on what ground? why?” also, and with this meaning is ranked with Ncmtosite and Dotisite 3 ). The force of Idzukun zd appears most plainly in the Japanese transla- tion of the Chinese expression following: u y u Kare idzukun zd korewo sirdn ? ‘) = he there on what ground (why) s ^ ia ^ he know this ? o 7 v The speaker’s object here is, not to draw out an answer, but -) mencius (legge, Chinese Classics, Vol. II, p. 15). <) „ „ Vol. I. Book I. Pt. I. Ch. VII. § 7). 6 ') See p. 68, line 8 from tlie bottom. 3 ) See p. 85. 82 CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS PROPER. § 8. II. he will have it understood that he not only doubts the assertion, but even is convinced of the contrary: „one does not know it.” If the question proposed by Idzukunzo is affirmative, as in the instance quo- ted, the speaker has the negative contrary in view, if however it is negative, then the positive, as in the phrase: Kqu-miyqu idzukunzo imdda Jirokardzu? Why should his fame not be spread everywhere? The affirmative question +. T '( V~ ft At % I =8 mi T fill ^ "pj* t ^ , Idzukunzd ka- nardn? = why shall that be possible? implies that the speaker is y* convinced, that it is impossible; the negative form: Idzukunzo kanarazdran? = why shall that not be possible?, is a consequence of the con- viction, that it must indeed be done. The Chinese characters , which are used to represent Idzukunzo are f ^ ^ 0 7 M . 3 iW o o ill . iBJW-- of the Ja P anese word only the termination nzo is mostly found added. These characters have the force indicated only, when they occupy a place before the verb of the pre- dicate; at the end of a sentence, where some occur likewise, they imply a direct question. 2) Compounds with Tsi (j||*' 7 i^^), wa y, place. Dotsi, which place? where? — Dotsira , which places? — Dotsiye, whither? — Dotsira ye mo , whithersoever, to everywhere. — Dotsira karamu mukdi-dvii , to meet each other from whatever places it may be (from all sides). Atsi (^[» 7 jfy f ) , atsira, elsewhere. — Kotsi ( j|^ 3 ~ f ) , here. — A tsi kotsi or otsi kotsi , atsi kotsi to, plural atsira kotsira , elsewhere and here, here and there. Sotsi ( old- Jap., his place, plural sotsira , serves to indicate the person, of whom it is spoken. — Sotsira kotsira , those (the persons) there, and those here. 3) Compounds with Tsutsi. Do-tsutsi, which place? — Do-tsutsi ve , whither? — Do-tsutsi kara , whence? c. The adverbs of place Ta (vulgo Da) and Wa with the genitive possessive termination ga (pron. nga), which is mostly, but improperly, written ')] , ka. Tii ga, vulgo Da ga, (pron. Da-nga) , arisen, perhaps by syncope, from Tarega or Darega , whose. — Dd ga iycka , whose house (is this) ? — Ddga awarcmU-koto arq.u (or aroo ), whose compassion will there be? who will have compassion? CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS PROPER. § 8. II. 83 W&ga, pron. Wa-nga, oivn, my or his own, according as the subject of dis- course , to which Waga refers , is the speaker or another person , — for distinction from Waka, young. — Waga kunt, own country, my or his native country. — own body, one’s own person, my person, — the „I” in a woman’s mouth. — Waga tatsi, one’s own station, we. — W dga-tomo , ours. — Wdga-tdmo de nai , they are not of ours. — Waga tdmo-gdra , one’s own relations or clan , we. — Waga mama , own authority, arbitrarily. — Waga mdmdni (or de) wd nai, it is not arbitrary. — Waga rihitsiiwd tatenu , not to persist in one’s perverse view. — Wdgd tdmenl, for own behoof; I for my own sake, or he for his own sake. — Ware sore wo lodg'd mono n( sitd, I have made that my own property. — Kare soriwd ivdga mono ni sitd , he has made it his own property , he has appropriated it. — Waga mave ni, = „before the I” of the subject of discourse, whether the speaker, or a being beyond him. — Kaviko son 6 seki wo sardzu , wite , kuvd mo zoaga mave ni kita- rdbd , kuvil , the silkworm does not leave its mat, sitting still it eats, whenever food comes before it. — Waga de ni, with one’s own hands. In the old- Japanese, which used A for Wa, we meet with Aga for Waga also; thence Aga-kimi abbreviated Agimi and Agi , Sir. — Aga fo- tdke (35-^ /jpjj h) i our Buddha. — Ago (3|- 7 , abbreviated for Aga-ko , my son. — Adzuma, abbreviated for Aga-tsuma, my beloved, my husband ( 2£ r ^ Z), d. Pronouns possessive. By suffixing no, the adverbs of place become pronouns possessive; thus we have Ano, Kano, Kono, Yono, Sono, Dono, Idzuno. Ano fit 6 (T A II b), after the Yedo pronunciation: And htd and And std , a man of elsewhere, any one, he. — Ano onna (7 A A ^ P) , a woman of elsewhere , she. — Ano f ltd tatsi, Ano fit d gala , the men there, those people, they. — Ano kata {7 A % A) , contracted Andta (7 7 A), the side of elsewhere, is used as a polite indication of the second person, thou (you); plural Andta gdta. — Andta dewd gozdri-masenu ; watdkusi zi-sinni itdsi-mdsita , = it is not you; 1 have done it myself. T Waga ted (or Waga tsoo), own realm, my or his, our realm. — Waga lye, also contracted Wdgiye , own house. — Watdkusi vd wdga lye ye kaydrit , I re- turn home. — Kareva wdga lye ye kayeru, he returns home. — Wdga tsUmd, one’s own beloved, my wife. — Wdgi-mdko, old-Jap. for Wdga imdko ( ^ -jp 3 ), my little wife. — Wdga kd ( ^ 3 ) > own son. — Wdga-mi *■), 84 CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. § 8. n. Ada (Y $?') , pron. Anda , is used with the signification of other, opposed to Ware, I, Mino , own and MidzUkdra , self. Kano kisi (d7 J Y 1/), the bank (or shore) yonder, the other world. — Kano kata, yon side. — Kano fitd, that man. Kono yo ( 3 y 3), this world , this life. — Kono toki , this time , this hour. — Konokata , this side, — with relation to time, since. — Kono aida, between there, meanwhile. — Kono yudni, for this cause, therefore. — itfc ^ 13 ^ p , these articles. Yono J), without, on the outside, other, with reference to something that has been already mentioned. — Yono fitd ( m a j:), another man, some- one else; the same as Fokd.no fitd ( ^[' i/ J\^ or Betsu zin ( ^|j f J\^ rp. — Yono isiyd, another physician than he, of whom it is question. — Sobdno {sty a , an additional physician. Sono ( j£^), his, its. A no fitd sono tokdro made yuki-tsuku, he arrives at his place, he reaches his object. — Fitd bitd sond sdsidsiimd wo fddzitsdnu , each one misses not his aim , = no* one misses his aim. — Kun-si sono kurdini so-site okondvu, sono fokawd negavdzu, the nobleman acts according to his station, what is beyond that, he does not long for. — Sond mi, his body, himself. — Ayamatsiwo sono mint motomurU besi, men must seek for the fault in or with themselves. — Sono tdki, or sdnd sitsu (giBfr. ft* Iff t'), its time, such a period, the period of the act that has just been mentioned, then, there. — Sono Ji ( ^ Q ), that day. — Sono migiri ( lit JJ), that point of time. — Sono fen ( ^ it ^7 £ V )> there- abouts. — Sono ndtsi ( lit ^ ^ ' [|j ^ ^ ') , thereafter. — Sono iiyd ( it v R ^ R ), or after the Yedo pronunciation: Sdnd Uwe , moreover, besides, also. — Sono dtd , behind that , thereafter , there upon. — Sono yUtfni , for that cause , so , there- fore. — Sono ta va else, otherwise. — Sono todrini , thus. Sono kata, contracted: Sonata, his (or its) side, yon side, the familiar word for Nandzi , your Honour, you; vulgo Sdnd fdo, Sdnd hoo ( lit ^ £) , plural Sono fdo dorno. — Sdnd fdo tori-tsUkUrd ye, undertake it! = Nandzi kdndvc yo! Sono moto (3t" If?.) = yon domicile or seat, for „you, ye.” — Koko mo- to ni ( JjS = ££ 3 Jn?)’ at this place. — Kami no moto, seat of gods. — Fitd ga motoni, at the place where someone dwells. — Tsuku-yumi no mikoto mikoto- noriwo ukete kuddri-mdsii. Tsuini Uke-motsi no kamino motoni ( gf |) itdri-tamavtl , tin* god of the moon-how receives the divine charge and descends. At length he CHAPTER II. TRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. § 8. II. 85 comes to the seat of the goddess of the harvest. — Sono rnoto rnotsi-kita , you have brought. — KUni-gitni nite iro-iro no si-fgu art; ono-ono sono y'drusiki ni sita- gaint best, in every country different ways of acting exist; people ought to keep to the best (ydrusiki) of each (ono-ono-sono). — Ono-ono-sono bun 100 u , = eacli gets his share. — Sono i ni makase ( jit -t ^), leave it to his pleasure. T6 no or To no, commonly D6.no or Do no ( 'j *~), or Donna jstCt), the interrogative which? what? Dono fitd , which (what) man? who ? — Dono tokdroni , at which place? where? — Dono kata , or contracted Donate, which (what) side? where? — is at the same time used as the „who?”, polite interrogative — Ddnatdye yitkii zo , whither, or to whom, ai'e you going? — Donatdga anatani koreioo dsiye-rndsita kd, who has taught you this? — Donna kotozo ( fa l t ^ y.) , which matter ? Dono yau ( fa a % i ), pron. dono yoo , = which way? how? — Yon't do no yau na , how is the night? In the popular language Dono yau or Ddygu resolves into Doo, which is • written £ or p also Thence: Doukd (^p-^), pron. ddokd, Douzd ( / fpj‘ f ^ ~ A ), how? — Ddu mu, however. — Ano koto wa dou ndttaku , = the matter how is (it) become? what has become of the matter? — Ano f ltd no nd tod dou tukd , = his name how is it called? what is his name? — Koretoa dou tsuktirite ydkaroo kd, = what concerns this, by what making will it be good, i. e. how will people have to make this? Dou-si, = how to do? — Ka-ygu-si ( ^ l ') , contracted Kgu-si , Kdo-si, so to do. — Dou-site ( / ftjf 'ftrf pj r ^), = how doing? — Dou-site makoto de ndi to iwareu zo, = how could people say, that it is not true? — Ware dou-site somukau zo, how should I be against it? Dou-sita (an abbreviation (apocope) of DousitdrU), - how done? how? is used adjectively. — Dousitd koto gd dru, what sort of matter is there? — Ddusitd kotozo, = what sort of matter? what matter? e. Substantive pronouns. By suffixing re the adverbs of place become substantive pronouns, which refer to something (whether person or thing, remains undetermined) as being present in a place. The termination re is indeed an abbreviation of are, which, by a mutation of sound, has arisen from ari , to be. The pronouns thus formed are declinable as every other noun, with the genitive termination no, are used as attributive adjectives, and, in this form, answer to our pronouns possessive 86 CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 8 8. II. („mine, thine”), they are, however, used as substantives also, in which case they, as every other noun, are declinable. These substantive pronouns are: 1) W&re, the „I,” understood as that which is in the midst, in the circle (ten), by which the person thinking or speaking supposes himself surroun- ded. The characters used for it are 0 ^JP The Mikado uses for „I” Tsin, for which formerly Maro § a ) was used, which word however has at present become an appellative of youth. The Tai-kun generally uses for „ I” 3 or 3 Hp* (not to be confounded with ^ ). — Ware fito ]\^ j: o ^ [=J ) , the I and another. — Ware ware wo wasuru ( ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ Z) , I forget the I , — I forget myself. — Kono kdsa va ware no nari (ft ^ r ■))> tllis hat is mine *). Plural: Ware-ware, War e-war e-dzure , Ware rd ( v Ikare domo, we; IFarerdi/d, ours. IFare properly belongs to the book-language, nevertheless it is used in the conversational, when the speaker exalts his „I.” Then it answers to our we. 2) Are, y’l/ something that is some where, he, she, it, German er; plural ArS-are , Arera. Being short in matter it, just as he or it, refers to something (person or thing) of which no case is made. Are ga lion , that one’s book, his book. — Areva tare? = something what? i. e. what is it? who there? — Are wo mi-tdi, I long to see him (or it). In old-Japanese Are occurs, as a variation of Ware , I. Are me, - that there, also A-itsu and Ko-itsu, = that there and this here, or A-itsume , Ko-itsume are opprobrious terms. ° r6 ( ® * /fL ^), variation of Are, in the mouth of a plebeian of Yalo or k, refers with derogation to another person, whereas from humility, the speaker, with it, also designates himself. „ Ore va fito wo iyasimete ivu kotoba nari; kou-sei midzukdra mo tvu." Ore is a word, with which one mentions another disrespectfully; in later times persons have applied it to themselves. — Furii-kotono basi. 3) Kare, UV „ j^C), something that is there, he, she, it, that. 4) Korc , J , something that is here, tins. >) Here a contraction takes place, as the word Kasa, which belongs to Ware no also, is expressed but once. Comp. pag. 66, line 4 from the bottom. CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. II. 87 Koreiva amari tsiisai ( ^ *7 this is too small ’). — Kore wo inotowd sirti, to hi, this is called knowing the foundation. — Are kore, that and this, those and these. — Korekara inUrii, to go from here. — Kore ni ydtte (Jfc! Zl)’ therefore. — Korede ydi, so far well, good so! Plural: Kore-kore, Korera. — The isolated Korevd is often superseded by Ko va OUT# and the attributive Kore no continually, by Kono. — Kova no-f do-kusa no fazime no oya nari , this is the progenitor of the human race. — Kono nedamoa iktira si-masUkd, the price ( nedan ) of this (article), how much is it? 2 ). 5) Sore, VI/ (^ o fit ^ ), something that is so, such. Plural sore-sore, so or such. — Sore kore ( lit ^ ^ ) , = such ones. — Sdreivd deki-mdsiika , can such happen? — Sdreva ndnide gdzarit, what is such? — Ware sore wo wdga mono ni situ , 1 have made such (or that) my property. — Sdreno tokind fan ydri tsU- yind told ni itard made , = from the half of such an hour till it comes to the next hour (till the next hour). — Sore ni tsuite ( ? C ) , concerning that. — Sore ni wd oyobi-masehU , = it comes not to such , such is unnecessary. — Sore de m6 yoi , also so it is good, also that is good. — Soredewa , kai-masoo , so (this being so or then) I will buy it. — Sore hard uye, - from there upwards; in relation to time, earlier than, before. — Sore yori may 6, = proceeding from there forwards, i. e. earlier than — Sore yori simo, = proceeding from there downwards, i. e. afterwards, there upon ^ ). — Sore yori kono kata ( |^ ^ ) , = proceeding from there on this side , i. e. since. — Sore-sore no mbnovd , things which are so or so. — Sore-sore ni sitaydtte , = according to the so or such , in proportion as it is so or so. If Sore happens to be at the beginning of a sentence as attributive definition (such) of a noun immediately following, then it reflects on that, which has pre- viously been said of the same subject already; e. g.: Mention has been made of the historical commencement of Japan; after some general remarks the writer continues: Sore Nippon-yokii va Tsiu-kwano tsiydri f 'Ujdsini atdrU yiiveni Nitsu too to ivU, what concerns such country Japan, as it lies towards the east of the Central Blooming country (China) , so it is called the Nitsu too or country eastward of the sun. Evidently sore is here, not as a mere expletive particle, but is of the same value, as the Latin relative qui at the beginning of a ') Shopping -Dialogues , pp. 2, 23, 24. 2 ) Ibid. p. 34. 88 CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. II. sentence such as: Quae contumelia non fregit eum sed erexit. (C. Nep. Tliemistocl. I. 3). In cases such as this , we supply the place of the reflective pronoun with the demonstrative, and the Japanese Sore Nippon gohi is ecpial to: this coun- try Japan. Soregasi = such a man , formerly used only by princes as a modest indication of their own persons towards higher '), latterly it has come into vogue with inferior persons, and is used by them to speak modestly of themselves. It is taken for a amalgamation of Sore ga nusi , Mister such a one, and is placed on a footing with the Chinese Jjj£ or A , = somebody, quidam * 2 ). 6) Yore is not in use. 7) Tare, 3^1/ , old language, now usually Dare, = who? Lat. quis? — Dore, ^ \y , which of many? By suffixing the interrogative par- ticle y" zo , is formed Darezo, abbreviated Dazo, who? — Darega, whose? (cujusf), is often superseded by Daga. Kavd (- karevd) dare ( ^ ) , who is there? — Kavd-dare-tdki (= the who is there ?-liour), the hour at which objects are still too faintly lighted , to be recognized well , the morning twilight. — Kavd-dare-bosi , the morning-star. — Sore tea dare no 0 ko de gozarimdsiika , what hoy is that ? vulgo : Are wa dare no ko dakd ( dakd = de drukd). — Siiniire darega tameni nivdvu , = the violet for whom does it smell? — Sdkdni darega uruzd , who is there? — Dare ga ydkii sir it e oru, who knows it well ? — Kono fitd wa dare de dri-masUkd , = this man who is he ? = vulgo Ano fitd tea (or Areivd) dare da kd (properly : dare de ani kd ) , who is he. — Nandzi va dare do drUzd , who are you? — Dare to bndzi koto , with what identity? — Dare to fandsi sicrii , with whom to talk? — Dari to tomoni oru zo , with whom to dwell together? — Dareni yordzil , indifferent who. — Korcrano siyono nakade dor eg a nandzi ni ydkizd ( lit # , # / 4* 3 * y), which of these books pleases you? — Dore mo, whatever, each. — Dorc-fodo *), how much? — Koko yori tsugind matsi made dore-hodo arimdsU , = from here to the nearest town how many (miles) is it? Remark 1. The Japanese does not distinguish the interrogative sentence ') In the Nippon woo dai itsi ran (39th Mikado, 10th year, 10th month), the Emperor’s brother, addressed by him as Nandzi, calls himself Soregasi, whereas now every one speaks of Soregdsi gd kaitafumi, — the letter written by me. 2 ) Wa-gun moori , under Soregasi. CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. II. 80 from the affirmative by an altered order of words; the sentence „whoisit?” must, therefore, as „it” is the subject of discourse, lie expressed by Sore wa dare de arimdsttkd , and not, as in the Ban-go zen '), II, 30 r. is the case, by Darcga sore de anmdsukd. Remark 2. The question, if perhaps Dare , just as the Latin quis , with the signification of aritfitd , = somebody, is thus used as an indefinite pro- noun , has been answered negatively by a literate Japanese 2 ). Idzure, ^ (f£ fb.fa ), mostly yX/ Itsure, who?, what?, which? — used rather in poetry and in the epistolary style, is superseded in the ordinary conversational language by dore , doko , dotsira or dou. Idzitre ga masuru (ft T if l|fr^), who surpasses? which is the better? • — Imdda idzure kd 3 ) kore ( Fou-rai-san ) ndrit yd tsitmdbirdka nardzu , it has not yet been settled, which (of the mountains mentioned) this (the Pung-lai-schan ) is. — Idzitre no tokdro ni kd 3 ) te u ‘0 kuddsan ( / ffif ||l ^ ) , at which place will one lay hands on? where to begin? = Dore kara fazimeu zo ? 3 ). — Idzitre no fit 6 , which man? — Idzitre no yo, which age? — Idzitre no tosi, which year? — Idzure no kata, which side? which province? — Idzure mo , Idzitre tomo , whoever, whichever, = Dore mo, dotsira mo. — Idzitre to (or Idzitre tomo) ndku , = without whatever, i. e. without anything whatever, = Dore to wit koto naku. — Idzure mo idzure mo, plural, whichever, all. — Idzitre nari tomo, whoever it may be. — Idzitre no utsuva ni te mo , in somewhere a vessel. III. Determinative and reflective pronouns. Self, determinative pronoun in I myself, he himself, reflective pronoun in myself, himself, herself, is expressed by A. 1. Onore, = Individual; onodzukara , apart, by oneself. 2. Mi, = body, person; Midzukara, personal; Waga-mi, = own body. 1. Onore, ( vnl g° Q) % ... K5 ) , from ond, = single, and ore , = are (being), thus something that is single, single being, indivi- dual, — allied in sense to fitdri (= fitd-hori, being alone, single, alone); plur. ondredomo, ondrera, also ondra ( g, ) in old Japanese. 3 ) Ka, an interrogative suffix, just as zo. 2 ) Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIROO. 90 CHAPTER II. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. III. As the subject of a proposition Ondre answers to he, German er, einer, and, just as these words, indicates a person, without any compliment. Therefore, when the speaker applies it to himself it betrays modesty, whereas applied as a de- monstrative pronoun to any one beyond the speaker it shows a want of respect and, just as the variation Oddre (i[ R i^), is understood as a epithet expressive of contempt. The Princes of the Empire call themselves, ondre, to the Emperor, and make this word equal to the Chinese expression J|[ ^ p kwa-zin , Japanese siikundki fitd, i. e. an insignificant man '). Onore , used attributively (genitively ) , or objectively, refers to the subject as being itself the object of its action, and answers to: his own, himself. Examples : ft; a; o „»? [MU _A ’ Jk\i EC ■I A 1 H if Onore fito no oyd ivo iiydmavebd , Fitd mata ono- reyd oyd wo uydmavu. Onore yd mi wo tassentd hdssurebd , MudzU ta-zin wo tdsse-simd yd. If an individual honors the parents of others, Then others honor the parents of the individual. Will you improve yourself, First improve others. Any one may now substitute for the word „ in- dividual,” in the first saying „I myself, thou thyself (you yourself), or he him- self,” and say: „If I honor another’s parents, then the other also honors mine.” In the second saying, however, onore , in consequence of the Imperative there used , may be referred to the second person (thou , you). — Onore yd kokdro-sdsiwo okondu ( 2 ^ ) , to do his own will. — Ondre ivo okonnu ( fy FI 1 , to behave oneself, one’s own conduct. — Onore wd sutete , fitd no tame ni su (^ (A J \^ ) , to set oneself aside and to act for the advantage of others , = Way a koto ivo bd sdsi-dite , f ito no kotoniivd sewayakii, to give up one’s own business and serve the interests of others. — Ondre wo taddsiu site , fitdni motdmdzdrcbd , suna- vutsi urdmi nasi , when one rules himself (his individual) and seeks nothing of others, then one experiences no hatred. — Ondre ni katsU , self-victory. — Ondre- ydri ( § 2, / ) , = from oneself. A? >s. CHAPTER II. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. III. 01 Remark. If we have derived onore from ond and attributed to this the signi- fication of one, the word ond-ono pleads for this conception, for ono-ono , as a repetition of o?io, has the signification of „one and one,” i. e. each one, answers to the Chinese & kd, and is equal to fitd-bito, = man and man, i. e. each man, everyone. As derivatives from this ono , which, singly, is no longer in use, conies under notice: On&ziki ( |rJ ) ? not individual, i. e. identical. Onore is frequently superseded by Ore ( 2 ^) ')> which some Japanese plii- lologers consider an abbreviation of onore. 2 . Mi (|f £ ), body, person, understood as the concrete self, whereas the idea of self, when it is taken in opposition to all that does not belong to self, is indicated by xoare or onore. — Mi wo tatsuru mono , = one (mono) who makes his body stand, is one who makes the most of his person; ware wo tatsuru mono , on the contrary, is one who places his I, his will, his interests on the foreground, and by which is , in general , understood a self-willed person. — Sono mi wo usi- navdzu mono , is one who does not throw himself away, does not lose sight of his personal dignity; on the contrary Ware ware wo was ur end , I do not forget my I, do not lose sight of my own interest. — Kare onore 100 wasurenii , he does not forget himself (his individual in opposition to others). — Onore wo homeru , = to praise oneself as an individual ; mi wo liomeru , to praise one’s own person. Examples : Mi ten-ka no kcn-mei ivd usinavdzU HIT* Z'mtje v), he himself (by his (personal conduct) does not lose his bril- liant name in the Empire 2 ). — Kun-si sono mi wo fddzukdstmezu , the noble man brings no disgrace upon himself. — Mi wo osdmuru yuen wo sirehd , sunavdtsi fito wo osdmuru yafoiwo sirti , if one knows the way to rule oneself, then one knows the way to rule others. — Mi wo mmdni makdsete mge-sdrinu , yielding himself to the horse, he escapes. Waga-min'O unt, to sell his own body (himself); said of girls who porsti- tute themselves for hire. — Wdga-miioo ydsumeru , to let one’s own body rest, to allow oneself rest. — Wdga deni ivdga-mi wo ivdruu suru mono , one who de- forms himself with his own hand. *) See p. 86. s ) Tschung-yung , Cap. XVIII, § 2. 92 CHAPTER II. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. HI. Women use Waga-rni and Mi , plural miclomo , for I. — Midomoga mditta toki , when we have come — at the time of our coming ‘). Mi-mi (fjjjfj a Jj' 3 -), = Highness’ self, in old Japanese the self of illustrious persons , e. g. Kono fUtd fasirano kami mo . . . mi-mi wo kdkusi-tamaviki , also both these gods kept their sublime persons (themselves) concealed. Midziikara, ^7 ~7 ■> compounded of mi (body), dzu (piece, i. e. some- thing that, as a part of a whole, exists apart for itself, so that mi-dzu, means a separate* something that is body) and kara (from), answers to our of it- self, from itself. It is expressed by the Chinese characters I. Sffi. S' Remark. As the Japanese etymologists do not satisfactorily explain this word, as they leave the dzu unnoticed, we must explain the derivation given here. We acknowledge now, and that for the first time, dzu , — to be distinguished from the genitive termination tsu , — to he the same suffix, that , added to the radical numbers (fito , fata , = one , two) , forms of them proportional numerals , (thus: fit 6- dzu , futd-dzu , = single, double, simplus , duplus) , and which, by means of repetition, used in the form of dzu-dzu, gives to these numbers the character of distributives: fito-dzu-dzu , futa-dzu-dzu , — singuli, Uni, one at a time, in couples. Whereas now in mi-kara {=. from a body) the idea of body is taken quite generally, and only opposed to something else, midzu-kara , refers to a separate body, to a separate person (opposed to all other persons). By means of the same derivative elements ( > ) , from Te (7-), hand, and Kokoro (3 v u), heart, will, are formed the words Te-dzu-kara ( ( ), = from a separate hand, i. e. with one’s own hand, and Kokoro-dzu kara Oft ^ )?"#>), from a separate heart, i. e. spontaneous (from one’s own free movement). According to its form Midziikara is originally an adverbial definition (= of it- self), and as such not susceptible of declension; e. g. Midzilkard tordvdre f ito to ndri , he becomes a prisoner of himself, he surrenders himself a prisoner. — I'edzil- kdra kuvdwo tdrii, to pluck feeding leaves of mulberry trees with one’s own hands. ’) The words given in hodiuguez Elemens, pp. 11 and SO ought, for the correction of typical errors, to be reduced to the forms: Sui = d/i no , Waga-mi no , Ware-tomo no Sibi = Mini, ni , iii Se = Mi wo, wo, wo. Midziikara also occurs there with the inflectional terminations no, ni and wo, although in original foils it is always undedined. CHAPTER IT. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. III. 03 However it is also used (in the quality of subject or of object), for I myself or he himself, aucl for they themselves. Midztikara is used as subject, whenever another object is mentioned before the verb of the predicate; e. g.: Midztikara omdvdkUva fakuri-koto wo yeturi , he has himself, as he thinks, attained what he intended. — Midztikara is also characte- rized as the subject in the proverb: Ta-nin no tirei tod mite vd sunavdtsi midztikara tomoni urcvu besi , If one sees another’s grief, then one must oneself be grieved with him. As object (= himself), on the contrary, Midztikara is used, whenever it is immediately followed by a transitive verb; e. g. Mina midztikara akirdkani suru ndri ( ^ g IJJJ ) '), all (these sayings) mean : to enlighten oneself. — Midztikara azdmuku c ft ^ ), = from the individual, from oneself, of self, Lat. sponte. What has been said of Midzti- kara , is, with regard to its adverbial character, applicable to OnodzUkara also. Onodziikdrd kura-kuru to mavdni mono , things turning themselves, having their own revolution. — 0. maukerti fitd, one who, of his own accord, immigrates. — O. ndrii kotowdriwo miyo! behold reasons, which are self-evident! B. As Chinese expressions of the determinative and reflective pronoun self are in use: 1. %\ Sin, body, self, opposed to A rA zin , others. 2. g ^ A , Zi-sin, often pronounced as dzi-sin , own body or person. — Zi-sin wo aistiru fitd , one who loves his own body , i. e. who is fond of ease , the same as So no mi too aistiru fitd. — Watdkusi zi-sin ni itasimdsita , I have done it in my own person (myself). — Andta Go-dzi-sin ni ( |jfp g ^ Ifp v — ) simdsita , = You have done it in your Honor’s own person. r o & ” * Ai At AZ Z' [4* ? PP 1/ 7 Jfkt 9 ’) Dai Gatcu , 1,4. 2) Ibid. VI 1. 3) Ibid. Ill, 4. 94 CHAPTEB II. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. III. 3. dj ^ ft ^ , Zi-bun , = own part , Ills part. — Zi-bun wo mi-suteru mono , one, who loses sight of himself , his interest. — Zi-bun ni suiedtte oru , = midzu- kara oru , to he substantive. — Zi-bun no sai-ku wo suru , to do one’s own work. — Zi-bun no mono to naru , to become property. 4. [|] ^ fyi T , Zi-zen (by some pronounced as dzi-zen ) , also zi-nen, = being of self, original, natural, unworked. — Zi-zen ni , or zi-zen to, = Lat. sponte. — &ore no tsi-dru vd zi-zen nari , that this human understanding is there , is something natural. — Ydma no Uye ni zi-zen no fo dri , on the mountain there is a natural fire. — Yume ni zi-zen ni miru , to see something in a dream , of oneself (involuntarily). — @^15 4 X i to exist of itself (spontaneous existence). Besides these, there occur many more expressions compounded with S S> , ** (self), in which zi , at one time, has the meaning of „own,” then of „self.” In the former case it stands adjectively before a substantive, in the latter objectively before a transitive verb. [=j zi, enters adjectively into compounds, as: ^ , own country. 17 , own house. i 25 S 25 dj ^ Jfp rT, own body, self, a 25 a 3 , own person. § 25 Li 3 own clan. own person. ^ , own strength, i own disposition. dj ^ "Hi v’ own w bi m - i 2 S 2 a 25 ft?. u -7’ own trade, own fabric, own pencil. [t| '' |UT, own drawing. II 25 l«JB , own question, dj ^ ^ ^ , own answer. 0 ^ 1 si ^ ’ own neglect. @ ^ own boiling, dl ^ own interest. Zi is objective to the verb in standard compounds as: dj ^ ^ o self-love, dl ^ jj'*, self-praise, dj ^ ^ T’ self-existence. d| ^ self-confidence. Q 2 $\} !/', self-bondage. j, self-nomination. n 22 MT- i 221 If. a 25 ®?. a”**. n 25 .15 self-prostitution. self-injury. self-sale. self-murder. self-destruction. self-annihilation. CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS. EXPRESSIONS OF RECIPROCITY. § 8. IV. 95 These compounds by suffixing the verb si, su , sum (to do), can be changed to verbs, as zi-fits-suru , to write with one’s own hand; zi-san-suru , to praise oneself. IV. Expressions of reciprocity. The reciprocity of an action is expressed in Japanese not by pronouns, but by the adverbial (modal) definition Tagavi ni (■£;#'£ — , pronounced td-ngdi ni, Tj f_ o j$&), or Ai-tag&ini (7 £ 5* Jj £ - ), = reciprocal, or also by the verb Avi (7 £), vulgo At (7 1)- The last means „meet each other” and signi- fies, whenever it is prefixed to another verb, that the action takes place reci- procally or mutually. The meaning of Tagai , is generally explained by Kara kore , this and that; Atsi kotsi , here and there; Ware fito, self and another. Remark. Japanese etymologists ■) ascribe to Tagavi the meaning of \ , Ta-kavi , = changing of hands , by which nevertheless the change of the k to the troubled g (= ng ) is not explained. To be able to give a reason for this, we think we must consider Tagavi as a fusion of ta -f- mukdvi , = meeting of (or with) the hands, as this takes place in weaving when the shuttle is thrown with one hand and caught up ivitli the other. We, thus, see in g (ng) a fusion of the m with the k; a phenomenon that frequently takes place. In Figdsi (pron. ft-ngdsi), = East, likewise the troubled g in gdsi is called into existence by a fusion of mukasi to ngdsi. Fi-mukdsi , originally Fi-mukdisi kata, means: the side (kata), whence the sun (ji) has come to meet (mUkdisi). Examples: ns v . T i- , Tagdi ni fin-ziyu to ndru 2 ), by turns he becomes guest and host. — Tdgdv'i ni nikdmu , hate each other. — Tagdvmi miru , see each other, meet. — Kwan-nin ide-mukdvi , Fokkin yorino okuri-fitd to tdgdvini ai-sdtsu tamdviki, Mandarins came out of (the town) to meet, and ex- changed welcome-greetings with the people sent from Pekking. Avi-nitaru mono <#£ Ml to ^), things resembling one another. — Avi- iitsU, strike each other, come to blows. — Avi-siru , know one another. — Avi katdrit , converse (speak together). — Avi-tagaini ( ^ Jr -) , reciprocal. V. Pronouns Indefinite. In Japanese, if the subject of a proposition is indefinite, it remains unex- ! ) Wa-gun siwori. 2 ) mencius (legge, Chinese classics. Book V. Pt. II. Ch. III. $ 5.) 96 CHAPTER II. PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. S 8. V. pressed; there, propositions without subjects are something very common. Our idioms do not permit this, and having to represent the subject of a proposition by a pronoun indefinite, in such sentences we make use of our „one” (people) or „it.” Besides, for our „one,” in a more definite sense are also found Fito, man, and Aru-fito, = some person, e. g. Fitoga druyd ( dUt A„JS v ), is there anybody ? — Fit6 ga nandzi wo tovu , someone asks for you. — Fito ga drite (or atte) 0 me ni kakdri tusi , there is somebody , who wishes to appear before you. „Something” or „anything” is expressed by Mono, which „thing,” means, however it is also applied to living beings. — Korewo kdka mono ( is „a this-writing-individual ,” some one who writes this, distinguished from Kaki-mono , = a written something, a writing ( )jt^ ) , and from Mono-kaki , = a something writing, a writer, = fumi-bitd ( ). In Kaki-mono, mono, has the signification of thing or something and is defined by the verbal root Kaki as, something written; in Mono-kaki, mono is the objective definition to the same verbal root. Nani, = what? is also used as our „ somewhat,” with the signification of „something.” If by „nothing” is intended something without contents or substance, it is expressed by the noun-substantive Nai, = something of no value; e. g. Fito wo nai ga sironi su , to consider anyone as worth nothing. Our „nobody,” when no particular accent falls upon it, is superseded by „ somebody” with the negative form of the verb connected with it, the negative („not”) being thus taken from the noun or pronoun and incorporated in the termination of the verb. — Fitoga ari-mdsU, there is somebody. — Fitoga dri- masenii , in the written language Fito nasi ( JH A j:), somebody is-there-not , = there is nobody. if, however, it is wished to bring out „nobody” and „nothing” with em- phasis, the expressions which signify „ whoever, whatever,” are used in con- nection with a negative verb. Dare korewo sirdnu means: who does not know this? (sirdnu, verb negative = not know). — Dare mo korewo sirdnu, whoever (who it may be) knows not this, nobody knows it. — Fare naniwo sdnu , = what does he not? — Fare nani mo sdnu, = he does not whatever it may be, i. e. he does nothing, — Dokonimo ardsu , wherever not to be, = to be no where. 97 CHAPTER II. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. VI. Consequently the instance, cited in the Elements of Japanese Grammar , Shang-hai 1861, page. 23, Pare mo kokoni kimasinanda , will mean: „ whoever has not come here,” and not „ nobody here come (honorific) has not." We are not at liberty to assign to Dare mo the meaning of Nobody , and to overlook, that in Japanese the negation of a negation is equal to a confirmed assertion. VI. Relative pronouns are wanting, because the Japanese, having no relative clauses, substitute for them adjective clauses, which precede the word, to which they refer. Instead of ,,the man, who is present,” an expression is used, answering to „the present man” (.lrw fito)-, instead of „the town, which the enemy has sacked,” — „ of the enemy-to have-sacked-town.” In such cases, moreover, the substantive Tokoro ( j i)j'), - place, is also used to intimate the passive something. TsUkuru koto is the fabricating, the fabrication; Tsukuru mono , a fabricating being; Tsiikuru fito , a fabricating man, one who fabricates; TsUkuru tokoro, the place of fabrication; Fito no tsukuru tokoro no mono is something (mono) of a man’s ( f ito no) fabri- cating- (tsfikurti-) place (tokoro no), i. e. something that somebody fabricates. — Irdsiye yori motsiyurU tokoro no nen-gqu is a year-name (nen-yqu) of a place, where (not which) one from ancient times has used, i. e. a year-name used from an- cient times. Thus we, although the Japanese philologers do not do so, give to Tokoro , in that position also, in which it seems to do the work of a pronoun relative, its proper signification, namely that of „place.” In the Syntax this construction will be treated again. VII. Interrogative pronouns. In the previous pages, treating of the formation of the pronouns, those, ot which the inteiTOgative elements Ta or To , vulgo Da or Do , and Itsu , vulgo Idzu are the foundation, have already been explained. To embrace them in one glance, they are: 7 98 CHAPTER II. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. VII. Dano , which? p. 85. Dare , who? 88. Dare ga , whose ? „ Dag a, „ „ Dazo , who? ,, Dareno lea, whose? „ Dareno zo , ,, „ Doko, where? p. 80. Dotsi, „ 82. Dotsira , „ „ DotstUsi , „ „ Dono , which? 85. Donna , „ „ Ddnata , who ? „ Donoyau , how? „ Doyou , d!ow, „ „ Dousite , „ „ Dore, which? 87. Idzttku , where? p. 81. IdzUkunka , „ „ Tdzukunzd , on what ground? how? „ Idzure , who, which? 89. Idzurend , whose? „ Besides these are still Nani, what? and Ika, how?, which from the impor- tant part they play, deserve an acquaintance more than superficial ') , whereas Iku, how much?, as being related to the numerals, will be treated of with them. 1. Nani, ^ — ( 'f tsf ) , abbreviated Nan, >/, obsolete Nam, -f A , plural iVan ra Her ), what? which? Lat. quid? quod? It is used both substantively, and adjeetively, and very often strengthened by an interrogative suffix, ka or zo. Substantively, with the meaning of „what?”, Nani occurs in expressions as: Nani wo yerabi mdsUkd?, what do you choose? — Nani wo tdvukd ?, after what do you ask? — Nani wo nandziga motomuru yd?, what do you seek? — Nani wo 0 kai nasaru led?, what do you buy? 2 ). — Nani wo motto?, wherewith? whereby? - |gj{] ^ :I ) , Nani too motto waga kuniwo risen, wherewith shall 1 advantage my empire? — Nanigd dri-mdsitkd? , what is there at hand? '). - Korewa nanini motsii-masUka? , what is the use of this? — Soreva nanini yoi kaf, for what is such good? ') The greatest stumbling-blocks in oral intercourse with the Japanese, arc the interrogatives (we under- stand by the term every word, by which inquiry after anything is made), and the ways of using them. Uncertainty in that respect brings about misunderstanding on both sides; one answers to what the other has not asked; and the speakers, weary of the continual deviating answers, probably end by thinking each other reserved, if not by suspecting each oilier of a want of understanding. With a view to this, the interrogative pronouns, and the combinations formed with them arc here treated of with the diffusiveness required. a ) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 2. •’) mencius (ljuku; , Chinese Classics , II. Book I. Pt. I. f’h. I. { 4). «) „ p. 2. CHAPTER IT. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. VII. 99 Nani to, = to what, whereto, as appositive definition '). — Andtano 0 na va mini to ii-masilka ? , = your name what (how) is it called V, what is your name? J ). Nani to ivu (fa? zrp. in the popular language contracted to pronounced Na-ndeo , for which far # f is written, = what to call? how? called. — Nani to ivu koto , = a what calling matter? i. e. what sort of or which matter? — Nani to mousi-mdsakd?, what do you say? — Nani to ndku , without anything ( fH§ ^ /J> )• Nani to zo (1 ), what says it?, supersedes, like doo zo , our „if you please.” Nani to te, also + K 7 - Na-ndote , from Nani t6 site , = to what? tending, whereto? wherefore? — Nani tote kordivo itdsimdsita ka , to what end have you done this? Nani yori ( t r} ft t), Nani kara ( [rj | 'fof t), = of what?, whereof? Nanini yotte ( ft = ^ 1 J}^=), = on what ground?, whence? — "jof =■ 'l . Y v 3 ), Nanini ydtte waga kandru-kotoico siran? on what grounds, (how) do you know that I am able for that? Nazeni, from nan-se-ni , = for what? to do, why? — Nazeni sore wo sezuni druka ?, why does not one such? — Nazeni 0 agdri nasardnuka? = why does not your rise happen?, i. e. why do you refuse? 4 ). Nani-sini, Nani-sini kd , variation of Nazeni , why? — Nan sore zo, pro- perly Nan sure zo , how doing, on account of which, why ? faS- I m _ ___ x ^ u- fFait most korewo yosi to seba, sunavatsi nansurezo okonava- Bll? 5 ), if the king considers this as good, why does not , ^ -f ^ he carry it out? ft ? ^ v u ^ ^ Nani zo (t = /. / fdf ), abbreviated Nan zo ( -f ^ X), also Na-nzo ( -f~ X) , how? in what way, for what reason? — occurs also as a mere characteristic of a direct question. — fa ^B lXI ^ 6 ), TFaw nanzo n too ivan , = the king , why does he mention the word advantage ? — fa dm m i m 7 ) , Nanzo faisa beken , how can one abolish (such)? — ¥ *1 Ay mm X 8 ), Giu ygu nanzo eraban , why to choose between ox and *) See page 70, V. 2 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 19. 3 ) mencius (legge , Chinese Classics, vol. I, p. 15). 4 ) „ p. 21. 5 ) „ Ch. V. § 4. 6 ) mencius (legge, Vol. II. Book I. Pt. I. Ch. I. § 3). ') „ Ch. VII. § 4. 8 ) Ibid. Ch. VII. § 7. 100 CHAPTER II. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. VII. goat? — Nanzo 0 kini iri-mdsu monoga gozdri-mdsu , is there anything that pleases you? — ^ -*! £ ') . Nanzo sono motoni kavera- zdru , why not return to the foundation? Nanzo ya, -f dS'/N , obsolete t/'l’ » fa tk , fa An , = how is this, how does it happen? as predicate closing the sentence, and preceded by a subjective clause. Tami ohokikoto wo kuvavezaru va nanzo ya 2 ) , that the people does not increase its number, how is this? Nazo-nazo, = how? how?, riddles. Nani naru 3 ), = what? being. — Nani naru mono, or koto , what thing, or what matter? Nani no, Nanno, adjectively what? in the expressions: Nani no fi ( U 5 B u )> what day ? vulgo itsu. — Nani no koku ( fa 7 M y)> what hoiir? — S u = m y* ^ Ml >i -Z Zt b fa V A y ■ nfe v '*), /(Tore makotoni nanno kokorozoya , what was really (my) opinion concerning that? JVam and iV J - ) , without any purpose. — Nani-yfd (faJ (A J), what cause? - Nani-yuini sore zo ?, why that? — Nani-kore , obsolete Nani-kure ( fa- fi \s> 1 what one? Nani-gasi (fall £' ) , after Jap. etymologists from Nani ga nusi , = where- of? master, what somebody, now in use only with the signification of the inde- finite pronoun „any-(some-)one” ( ) and applied by the speaker to himself. Compare Soregasi , pag. 88. Combinations with Nan ( f- what thin S- Ika-sama, vulgo Ika-yau, Ika-yoo ( Hi its. ^ A ) , which way. — lka- yau ni, in what way, how. — Ika-yau ni mo , however. — Ika-yau ni ndrU tomo, however it may be. — lka-yau ndrU mono , what sort of thing. — lka-yau naru mono nite mo, what sort of being or thing it may be, who or whatever. — lka- yau na koto de mo sd.rH , do whatever thing it may be , do every thing. Ika-fodo iHi ft , quantity. — Ika-fodo ka , how much ? — Ika-fodo no tsikara , how much power. — Ika-fodo no aula , = how much interspace , how long? — Sore wo ikd-fodoni uruya, for how much is such sold? — Ika-fodo ooku tomo, however much? how much soever? Ika-bakari , how yet (still). — Sono koto wo ika-bakari kuvinka , how will people yet (still) be sorry for that. Ika-naru, how being, of what sort. — Ika-narU kotozo , what sort of thing? — Soko ni ika-naru fit 6 zo , what sort of man is there? — Ika-naru sei-meizo, what (is your) name? The modal terminations of lka are: Ikani, d ~ , — Ikanika, -f S — lkanizo , 1 abbreviated Ikan, d h ^ , — lkanzo, d Id A'X, or even Ikade, d i? d"' (pronounce lka-nde ), d dh d* dJ ? Ikade ka, Ika-nde ka , how? Lat. quomodo. Soreva ikan? = such — how? how is such? According to the rule of the Japa- nese arrangement of words ikan , as predicate, follows soreva as subject 4 ). The subject may also be a subjective clause, e. g. ...aru vd ikani, how does it happen, that there... is? — Ikade (vulgo doude) iraserare mdstikd , how goes it? — Ikade arazaran , how should there not be, why not? l ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 17. 3 ) Ibid. j). 11. 2 ) Ibid. p. 35. ■*) See Introduction, p. 44, 15, A. 102 CHAPTER II. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 8. VII. Ikaga, "f pronounce ikd-nga ( -jof -fuf ) , how?, probably a fu- sion of ikd ika. — Ikdga On watari sorooya , = bow is your passage?, bow do you do? — Soko-moto ikaga 0 kurdsi zo ?, = bow do you let (the time) go round? bow do you do? — Ikdga sen, how will one do (anything)? — Ikdga naru (or Ikdga nd) koto , what matter? — Ikdga nd obdsimesizo, what opinion? wliat do you think? Interrogative pronouns with the suffix mo. Connected with the suffix mo, ^ (= also, Latin que, cunque ), the interro- gative pronouns embrace all that is comprehended in the interrogative as indivi- duals together. Dare mo, the same as quicunque, whoever, everyone that may be reckoned under Dare or qui. If the interrogative is joined to a substantive, mo is placed after it, and if it is declined , after the inflectional termination. — Idzure no ya mo kara to ieu best , every arrow may he called kara (shaft). — Dokonimd or Dokodemd, wher- ever, everywhere. Instead of mo , te mo (-H) is often used ; e. g. Dare te mo sono zi wo hdmetdri , = whoever it may be (everyone) has praised this poem. — Idzure no tosi ni te mo , in whatever year it may he; te mo having, by apheresis, arisen from site mo (= also is), whereas to te mo in expressions as Nani to te mo, = whatever people (may think or say), is the same as an ellipsis, being the verb that means think or say, and that governs the apposition ’) characterized by to ( nanito ), not expressed itself, but only indicated by the termination te. Nani to te mo, thus stands elliptically for Nanito iyu te mo 2 ), = whatever it may be called or be. An abbre- viation of which is Nanito mo, Nantdmd. — Ndnto omomika, what do people think of it? Nantdmd omowdnu, people think nothing of it, people do not trouble themselves about it. VIII. Arrangement of the personal pronouns in the conversational language. The choice of the words, which are used in the oral intercourse as pro- nouns, is not indifferent, but it is prescribed by etiquette. From our own expe- rience, if after an intercourse of more than two years with Japanese we may speak of it, and from the information given by a learned Japanese gentleman 3 ) l ) Compare p. 70, V. 5 ) Wa-tjim fiioori. s ) Ml - . TSUDA SIN 1TS1ROO. CHAPTER n. ARRANGEMENT OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 8. VIII. 103 the following expressions, used as pronouns, enter into the conversational lan- guage. 1. For I. 1) The humblest expression is Te-m&e, plural Te-mae-t&tsi , in the popular tongue of Yedo which frequently changes a to c, Temee, = at hand, i. e. that which is at hand or present to the person opposite. 2) Wathkusi, plural Wat&kiisi-domo, a modest, and, in confidential intercourse, most usual expression. Every respectable man speaks of himself thus ; and the man of the people at Yedo says for it Wasi ( wasclii ). 3) Ore, plural Orera, in the IVdo-dialect Oira, after the mention on page 86 supported by a quotation from the Dictionary of the olcl-Japanese language, a self-humiliating expression, is now considered as one of pride at Yedo. 4) W&re, plural Warera, the „I” and „We” in the mouth of a prince, when he speaks to his people. 2. For the person spoken to, THOU, YOU, YE. 1) W&re, plural Warera, the most humiliating expression, which is applied only to low people. Probably confounded with Are? 2) Te-m&e, the same as given above for „I,” is fit for subordinate persons and sen-ants , and answers to the well known German „Er" and „Sle." 3) Tem&e-sama, plural Temae-sama-gata , is equal to You, Sir, You, gentlemen, used by a person of quality towards those somewhat below him. 4) O-mae, in the Yedo- dialect Omee, plural O-mae-gata, in use among the middle class. 5) O-m&e-sama , = Your Honor, more periphrastical and consequently more so- lemn than O-mde. 6) Anata, plural Anata-gata, used, with preference, by polite people towards their equals '). 7) An&ta-sama, plural Anata-sama-gata , is expressive of the greatest respect towards the person addressed. 3. For the person spoken to, HE. 1) Are, plural Arera, is put down for disrespectful. ') The members of the first Japanese embassy, which came to Europe in 1862, and to which the author was appointed as one of a committee by his Government, generally used Anata mutually. 104 CHAPTER II. ARRANGEMENT OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 8. VIII. 2) Ano mono , = that person there , characterizes the person spoken of as a mere object (mono), deseiwing of no respect. 3) Ano fito, plural Ano fito-gata, polite indication of one’s equals. On officer or functionary speaking of another intimates him by Ano fito. 4) Ano O fito, plural Ano O fito-gata, somewhat more stately, is used when the person spoken of is related to the person spoken to. 5) Ano kata, plural Ano kata-gata, = the side there, and Kono kata, = the side here, looking from the person, and only indicating the direction, in which he is, both belong as our Your Honor, to the very respectful expressions. fi) Ano O kata, plural Ano O kata-gata, is indicative of the highest respect. The above arrangement of the pronouns of the conversational language agreeing, ' in general , with that adopted by r. alcock in his Elements of Japanese Grammar. page 21, contains, however, a few deviations which, the reader will please to observe, rest upon the authority of Mr. tsuda sin itsiroo. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. 9. The adjectives attributing to the idea, expressed by a noun substantive, one or another quality, have, in proportion as they represent an attribute or a predicate, different forms which, though strongly prominent in the written or book language , are, on the contrary, more or less obsolescent in the conver- sational. The forms of the written, will, therefore, be treated before those of the spoken language. I. THE ADJECTIVE IN THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE. A. Construction of the adjective in its radical form with a noun. — If the quality expressed by the adjective is represented as present in the object from the very beginning, then the adjective is, as a subordinate attributive definition in its radical form, joined to the substantive in a compound word; Taka-no, = Highland, German Hochland. Thus also: • Nagasaki , Long-cape. Kuru-tsutsi , black-earth. Aka-tsutsi , red earth, ruddle. Amd-zake , sweet-beer. Sh'6-gdne, white ore (silver). Furu-tosi , the old-year. B. Adj ectives in ki. 1. a. Ki, termination of the adjective used as attributive. — If the quality is first to be attributed to the object expressly, the adjective, to be used as attributive, acquires a conjunctive, or properly a derivative termination, which 106 CHAPTER in. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9. for a particular class of adjectives, is ki; Takakino, = a high land, land that is high, distinguished from Takano, = highland. Thus also: Nagdki saki, a long cape. Akdki tsittsi, red earth (ruddle). Siroki cjdne , white ore. Kuroki tsutsi , black earth. Amaki sake, sweet beer. FUruki dto, old traces, ruins. The adjectives belonging to this class generally express a quality, to which activity is not allied. 'Remark . The termination Ki , whose vocal / is the root , from which the continuativc verb ari = to be , is derived, means „ being so” that is to say, as the essential part of the word implies. The relation of the essential part to the verbal element can be no other, than that of an adverb to the verb, whereas the mutual relation of Takaki and Yama is that of a compound word. — Compare what has been said on page 96 line 15 et seqq. concerning Kaki-mono. The vulgar language of Nagasaki substitute, ka for the adjective termination ki, thus sirdka for siroki , white '). b. The adjectives with the termination ki may be used substantively, as nouns concrete , and then as such are declinable. — Yama takaki or Yama no takaki is the high of mountains, i. e. eminently high, or the highest of mountains, yama now being a subordinate definition to takaki. 2. Ku, adverbial form. — If an adjective of this class is used as an adverb, then its radical form assumes the termination ku. Takakii tobu, = to fly high. The adverb in ku under all circumstances remains an adverb, yet re- presents in the coordinate sentence, whose predicate verb must be in the uncon- jugated radical form 2 ), the undefined radical form of the adjective verb termi- nating in si. Isolated by the suffix va (§ 6) the adverb acquires a position separated from the verb, which brings out its idea with more emphasis. — OdsikU vd , = manifold , often (frequently). 3. a. Si, form of the adjective as praedicate. — When an adjective of this ') The question, formerly mooted in the Procve ccncr Japansche Spraakknnst by r>. cuktius, 1857, p. 34, if the termination ka is really peculiar to the dialect of Nayasaki, has since been answered affirmatively, as well by Japanese orally, as in writing by the late it. j. de saint aulaikk, who was stationed, as Dutch inter- preter for the Japanese language, at Nayasaki. „ The adjective termination in a,” wrote the latter to me, „ is really used generally in Nayasaki and the lower class of the people understand nothing else; those however who have had a little education, know very well, that it is not right.” 5 ) See Introduction, p. 45, Coordination. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9. 107 class is used as a predicate, its radical form acquires the termination si, = to be, is. Yama takksi, = the mountain high to be, i. e. the mountain is high '). The relation in which taka stands to si, is, in the spirit of the Japanese language, again no other than that of an adverb to its verb. This si. placed by Japanese grammarians among the auxiliary verbs (Ziyo go) 2 ) and designated Gen-zai no si ;: ) or the, si of the present tense , undergoes no verbal change. b. If now a verbal change to indicate term and mood is required , then instead of si, the continuative verb 6,ri, kru ') (= exist), is used, which added to the adverbial form ku, fuses with this intokari; from Takahi ari, = continually high to be, comes Tiikakiri, a derivative verb, which is now to be conjugated in accordance after the general plan of conjugation 5 ). Instead of ari, eri is also used, as synonyme. 4. By the change of si into sa these adjective verbs are made nouns abstract; Tak&sa, = the height. Remark. Sa is a contraction of the si predicate, and the isolating va. Takctsa, therefore includes the Takasi predicate „ is high whereas va raises this idea to a noun substantive ,, the height.” The Chinese follows the same way, when it expresses the abstract idea of „ height” by , 5. LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL ADJECTIVE ROOTS IN KI. 1 . Taka-ki ln S h - 2. Fiki-ki , Fiku-ki -fj^; ^ jy , low. 3. Fuka-ki Ml‘ dee P- 4. Asa-ki shallow. 5. Naga-ki JS £, lon s- 6. Midzika-ki short. 7. Firu-ki Jlf ^ , wide , broad. 8. Seba- (Serna-) ki , narrow. 9. Fittu-ki thick, coarse. 10. Foso-ki bne. 6 ) [Ooi-naru ^ | r fc', large.] 11. Tsiisa-ki yj> t , small. *) In r. brown’s Colloquial Japanese, p. XXXIX, line 26 et seqq., hi is cited as the termination of the adjective predicate , and si is wholly overlooked ; a capital mistake that we may not leave unnoticed. ■> w: Z' it — Wa-gun siwori under Si. Compare rodrigukz, pag. 66. 4 ) Not karu, nor yarn, as it is printed in alcock Elem., p. 27, line 9. 5 ) See $ 10. 6 ) The adjectives placed between brackets [ ] do not belong to this category, and are inserted only for the antithesis. 108 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9. 12. Fira-ki ^p* level, even. 14. N aka-daka-ki p*f y +, , gibbous, con- 13. Kevasv-ki ') steep. 15. Kubo-ki mi 5 hollow, con- vex. cave. - 16. Firata-ki M -> , flat. 18. Atsu-ki 20. Nao-ki 21. Tod-ki 23. Amane-ki 25. 06-ki 27. Sige-ki 29. Matta-ki 31. Kovd-ki 33. Tsuyo-ki , j|C 5 , thick. fit ri ght. far, distant. tloi.®- eve- rywhere. much, many. , dense. £ entire, whole. 17. Mdro-ki(Ma- ^ rti-ki) 19. Usu-ki round. hard. a, strong. 22. Tsikd-ki 24. Suku-na-ki 26. Sukds'i-ki 28. Mund-si-ki 30. Nd-ki 32. Moro-kx 34. Yowd-ki pfj Z . thin. crooked.] 15: 1 , near - V , seldom. -^*5 little, few. f , without con- tents, void. AS t, without, ...less. Mlc HI » brittle - M #. S . weak - 35. Ara-ki #5.41 . )tEo [ Yawaraga- jji^? soft, weak.] harsh, rude, waste. ndru 36. Omd-ki heavy. 37. Karo-ki light. 38. Kdta-ki HI ^ , difficult. 39. Ydsu-ki ^ , facile , easy. 40. To-ki pointed , 41. Nibu-ki , x, blunt - sharp; quick. 42. Hayd-ki ■?* v o 43. Osd-ki late; slow. early; quick. 44. Waka-ki ^ Vo » y° un g- [ Oitaru , ^:| v, old -] f A rdtd-ndru frit’ new -l 45. Furu-ki ]£f S ’ ancient ’ antique. 46. Yo- (old). Ye- ■) flit good, well. 47. fkdrrt-ii ®vi ba(1 ’ base - ki 48. SdmU- (isdbu-) JY ^ , cold. ki [d 61. Niku-ki It ngty- m&~) ki nice, beautiful. 62. Kayu-ki itching. 63. Niga-ki bitter. 64. Sibu-ki fife K raw i acerb. 65. Yegu-ki / ^ f nr f gg 7-1 66. Kanbasi-ki , t£$2.' * 2 ^, fragrant. 67. Kusd-ki stinking. Kauvasi-ki , 68. Sivd-ki covetous, 69. Tu-kl H- desirous, scant. willing. 70. Gotu-ki [ Kotonaru ? , u , different.] 71. Si-ki being such 72. Sika-ki jiffa being so, or such. as (substantive suffix = . . . ish , ... like). 73. Be-ki allowable. THE SAME BOOTS ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. Aka . 54. Fiku . 2. Kaubasi 66. Mat/a . 29. Onto . . 36. Su . . . 59. Vma . 60. Ama . 58. Fira . 12. Kayu. . 62. Midzika 6. Oo . . . 25. Sukosi . 26. TJsu . 19. Amane . 23. Firata 1.6. Ke . . . 51. Moro. . 32. Oso. . . 43. Sukuna. 24. Ao . . . 53. Firo . 7. Kevasi . 13. Muma . 60. Suzu . . 49. Waka 44. Ara . 35. Foso . 10. Ko. . . 51. Munasi. 28. Samu. . 48. JFaru 47. Asa . 4. Fuka . 3. Kova . . 31. Seba . . 8. Ta. . . 69. Alsu . 18. Fun . 45. Kubo. 15. Na. . 30. Serna . . 8. Taka. . 1 . Yasu . 39. Ava . 52. Fulo . 9. Kura. 57. Nag a. . 5. Si . . . 71. Tsiisa 4. Yegu . 65. Kuro . 56. Nao . 20. Sika . . 72. Tsika. 22. Yo . . 46. Be. . . 73. Goto . 70. Kusa . 67. Nibu . . 41. Sibil . . 64. To . . 40. Yowa. 34. Niga . . 63. Sige . . 27. Too . 21. Faya. . 42. Kata . 38. Maro. . 17. Niku . . 61. Siro . . 55. Tsuyo . 33. Fiki . 2. Karo . 37. Man. . 17. Nun. . 50. Siva . . 68. 110 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9 . Remark. The termination ki, as the distinguishing characteristic of this class of adjectives, ought to be placed on the foreground , deviating from the method in the Japanese dictionaries, which give these adjectives as ad- jective verbs with the termination si and, so doing, do not distinguish them from those, which terminate in silri (= ish). So, to give an instance, their ex-' pression M, ■g* is defective , since fisasi (= is of long duration) as a syncope of Jisdsisi , is in all respects the form of the adjective verb, has but jisdsiki , not fisdki , for adjective form, whereas the adjective form of nagasi is not nagasiki , but nagaki. 6. Examples of the use of the forms cited. [Ki.] Sibu-kakino taneivo iiete, amaki kakiva fayezdru , if people sow seed of the sour fig, then do not grow figs, that are sweet. — Tanba-kUni yori kUroki kitsuni ico .sasdgu , from the country of Tanba people offer a fox which is black. — Tsikdra-ndld yumi, a powerless bow. — Tsikdra-ndki koto , powerlessness. — Ne- zumino sir old wd siro-nezumi to til, the white of mice (= mice that are white) are called white mice. — Furuki icd stitete atardsiki ni tsuku , forsaking the old , to apply oneself to the new. If objects are previously mentioned , from which a choice is made , then the expression is good : Furuki no xcd stitete , atardsiki no wo torn , to reject the old (objects) and take the new ones ■). JX* ik? jsl2 Ydma takdki ga yiieni tattokardzu , a mountain is not considerable , IrJ | because it is high ; Ki dru wo mdtte tattosi t6 su , because he carries wood, people consider him to be respectable. )V 1 7 X' 3 — 9 * • qr 2 J: 7 ^ ■ A it t? £ * 3 9 Musasabi va takdki yori Jikiki ni dmomuku. Fikiki yori ta- kaki ni nobdru-koto atavdzu 2 ). The bat turns itself with its head from above towards below. To climb from below towards above it may not. [Ku.] Konofa akdku terite firugaveru , the tree-leaf shining red flies around. — J y6 wo takdku tsukuru , to build a house high. — Kari va takdku tonde tooku yori kitdri, the wild goose flying high, comes from afar. *) With regard to this construction compare, page 8G, line 10, in connection with note 1. 5 ) Kanra-gaki kin-moo dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE. § 0. Ill Si* . ? ^ •* IV *T t n/ * y t »-< V 44 '! r\ P* Ami # y Kumn-taka vd taka no ooi-naru mono nan. TsUbasa tsu- yokii , ku-tsiu takdku tobi-inegurit '), the eagle is the big- gest among the birds of prey; strong in the wings, he soars round high in the space of the air. TsUbasa tsUydku stands to the next sentence in the relation of coordination, in consequence of which its grammatical relation is left undefined and the adverbial form tsuydku is used instead of the predicate tsuydsi. (See above, page 10G b. 2.). The same is the case with yastiku in the proverb: jgft a ^ Aktt-dau ni iri-ydsuku , sen-dqu ni icdt iri-gdtasi , = to turn into the way of evil — (is) easy, to tread the way of virtue is difficult. ^ Korewd soreydri ydsuku ari-mdsu , this is, from that out, cheaper, = this is cheaper than that 2 ). — Nomi-tdku dri , desirous 5 - 0 JiaydkU ari-mdsu , = your rise is speedy, a greeting at setting out on a journey, and on the way. — Yoku 0 ide nasdre-mdsita , = well, your arrival has happened, i. e. be welcome. — WarUku nan , to become bad. — WarUku ndtta , has become bad. — Yo fodo takdku nari-mdsu 3 ), it is too high (too dear). of drink , to be thirsty. — 0 ide haydku ari-mdsu , or merely Remark. Do the adverbs in ku in the three last expressions, which we have taken expressly from r. brown’s Colloquial Japanese, p. XL, retain their adverbial character, or are they predicate ad- jectives? this question is answered in the place quoted in that sense, filial wherever this form (the adverb in ku) precedes a substantive verb, it is an adjective or a predicate adjective ,” a conception with which we cannot agree. As the Japanese has no properly called nominative termination, an adjective, to stand as predicate, cannot agree with the subject; these adjectives are governed as sub- ordinate definitions, by verbs which, as regards their signification, answer to our „ be” and „ become,” but their complement, when it is a noun, to the question where? how? or whereto? in the case of ni or de , and, if it is an adjective, have ku before them, in the equivalent adverbial form. Ten-ki yoku dri (yokari) or Ten-ki yoku nari, the weather is good, or the weather becomes good, is in a language nearer perfection in all respects expressed by Tempest as bona est , or bona fit , but* the Ja- panese expression is, as far as form is concerned, equal to Tempest as bene est, or bene fit. [Si.] Kono misdki ivd hanaiiada nagdsi , this cape is very long. — Ne no adzi dmdsi , the taste of the root is sweet. — Kariga tobu-koto takasi , the flight of the geese is high. — Yama toosi , the mountain is far. — Kono sedo nite ') Kasira-gaki kin-moo dz/t-i. XIII. 0. recto. 3 ) Ibid. p. 37- : ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 35. 112 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9. sivo faydsi , in this strait the stream is swift. — Siyu ni mdzivdrU mono vd akdsi ) , whoever goes about with red is red. — Fi no atarti tokdro , taki- fino kin-ziyove 6ku koto asisi. Subete dsiki nivoviwo imu best, in a place where the sun comes, (and) in the neighborhood of fire (the eggs of the silkworm) to lay is not good. In general people ought to avoid the nasty smell. — Kono sima f ito nasi, this island is without inhabitants. — Yosito omovu, to think that it is good. — Ne no adzi asisi yotte , because the taste of the root is nasty. [Sa.] Kono misaki nagdsa san ri bakari nari , the length of this cape is only three ri (miles). II. THE ADJECTIVE ACCORDING TO THE SPOKEN LANGUAGE. The spoken language suppressing the k and the s of ki, si and ku, thus retains only the i and the u., which now immediately follow a vowel. Thereby they acquire for aki and asi the form ai and for aku the form au, pronounced as au, ao, oo. o ’ o ’ n eld 11 esi 11 11 ei 11 11 eku 11 11 eu, 11 11 eo. n iki isi 11 11 ii 11 11 iku 11 11 iu. ?? oki 11 osi 11 11 oi 11 11 oku 11 11 ou, 11 oo. n uki 11 usi 11 11 ui 11 11 uku 11 11 uu. The easy written style, which follows the spoken language, has for au, eu and ou, no fixed written form; it supersedes the form of writing to be used by choice 9F9 (high) also by zijy , 9- -j ^ and 9 z (long) 11 ii t „ t a* 99 (desirous) 11 11 h * ii h 1 1 9 (without) 11 ii ty, y „ V 1 i/ ft? (close) 11 ii (far) 11 ii bf Examples of the use of the forms. [i for kij. Nagai matsu yori otsuru yuki , snow falling out of the long (high) pine-trees. — Karoi kemuri noboru , light smoke ascends. — Fdna simo no samui wo osdru , the flower fears the cold of the rime. | i for si]. Kurd no figa akai , the evening-sun is red. — Kariga tobil-koto takai, the flight of the geese is high. — Korewa amari tsiisai '), this is too small. ’) Shopping • Dialogues , p. 2. CHAPTER IH. THE ADJECTIVE. § 9, 10. 113 ..nagai '), is long. — ..takai J ), is high. — Fitoga nai 3 ), there is no one. - Korewa dziyciiga usui '), this is thin of texture. — . . atsui 5 ), is thick. — Korewa iroga koi 6 ), this is dark of color. — ..iroga usui 7 ), this is light of color. — . . iroga warui 8 ) , this is had of color. — Osoi kara 9 ) , as it is late. — Ydsui nara , tori-masoo ,0 ), as it is cheap, 1 shall take it. [u for ku]. Ari-gdtau or Ari-gdtoo , difficult to be, abbreviated for An-gdtaku ari-mdsil , it is difficult to be, = I am obliged to you. — Ydo moosil , for Y6ku mgusii , to speak well. — Kasikdo suru , for KasnkdkU sum , to do wisely. — Fukdo wadzurao , for Fukdkii wddziirdvu , to be deeply involved in difficulty. In Japanese vocabularies the expressions of the conversational are mostly distinguished from those of the book language by an antecedent A or O; thus pf; A y msf. — O 7 f - >7 ° >7 , tliat is: the word Kan ari of the book language is equivalent to Soredemoyoi of the conversational. — I nay a (= should not...) of the book lauguage is the same as Soosita koto via nai (= such sort of thing there is not) or as Kau/e tea nai (= so is there not) of the conversational. DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. § 10. Adjectives in karu and garu. By a fusion of the adverbial form ku with aru (being), the form karu is ob- tained (so being as the previous adverb indicates). Nomi-tdku-aru , passes into Nomi-takdrii (/ L 'A /J «/), = desirous of drink or being thirsty. Derivatives of this stamp take the same inflections as ari , — drii being the attributive, art the predicate form; and as the adjectives in id themselves, express a quality, to which the idea of activity is not allied, the derivative form k -f- ari expresses merely the continual presence of the not-active quality. Waka-ki , young. — Waka-ki toki ni , in youthful time. — Wakakdru toki ni , while or as long as one is young. — Wakakari si toki yori , since the time when one was young. Naki , not at hand, being without. — Nakari , continually not to be at hand. Siro ki , white. — Sirokaru , continually white. Ydsuki , easy. — Ydsukdri , continually % to be easy. *) Shopping -Dialogues , page S. ~) page 12. 3 ) page 5. 4 ) page 23. 5 ) page 24. 6 ) ,, page 23. 7 ) page 23. s ) page 14. 9 ) page 41. 10 ) page 37. 8 114 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 10, 11, 12. . Remark . This illustration of the derivative form kari explains the obscure §§ 55 and 57 of Rodri- guez Elern. The guru there mentioned on page 55, lines 8 to 12, is a fusion of the genitive-termi- nation, ga and aru peculiar to the conversational language exclusively. Joined to the Chinese word Yek-td >), gladness, with it, it forms Yekkigaru , being full of gladness, synonymous with Yekkinuru, Yekkina, being glad. See § 12. § 11. Adjectives in aru. Ari, aru (^ 7 7 J), verb continuative , to be at hand, to be there, to exist, antithetical to Ndki (ffiEp, not at hand , .... less. Ari is the radical (to be) and at the same time , but by exception , the predicate form (= there is) ; dm the substantive form (the being) , which is at the same time used attributively (being) , to derive adjectives from substantives.. — Iro ari , = there is color or colors are there. — Kumova iro ari , = what concerns the cloud, there is color, i. e. the cloud has color. If the definition: „ there is color” is to become attributive, then ari acquires the attributive form dru; the subject iro now becomes an attributive proposition of dm, and assumes the attributive form, thus the genitive termina- tion no , in the spoken language, ga. Iro no or iro ga aru kumo means, literally: colors present being clouds, i. e. colored clouds or clouds which have colors. The genitive termination no is often omitted in similar expressions, parti- cularly when the attributive definition joined to aru is a verb, which is in its radical form; e. g. AsiJd nrndi dru Id , wood (hi) of a bad smell. — Nivoi , to smell , smell. Examples. Tsumi ari , there is guilt. — TsUmi dru mono, a guilty person, criminal. — Futd-kokoro no dru fitd , a man who has two hearts, a double- hearted man. — Omoi futdtsu dru, kotoba , a word ( kotoba ), that a couple ( fiitdtsU ) of meanings (omoi) has, an equivocal word. — Kokdro-sdsi dru mono , one who has a will, a firm character. — Aya-drU ori-mono, flowers having texture, flo- wered silk-stuff. — Sai-vai-dru , happy. — Yamavi-dru , sickly. — Koto-dm, having business, busy. — Fima-dru or sukimaga dru ,. having free time. — X)} ^ K Kou-dru filo, a man who has merit. — ^ ^ Yeki-aru, profitable. § 12. Adjectives in naru, na and thru. My means of the substantive suffix naru, which is, in my opinion, a fusion of the Local ni and of dri , dru, and* thus means „ being lasting in...,” from >) if -=tr * u CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 12. 115 substantives and adverbs adjectives are formed, which indicate a possession ot that which the root expresses. The familiar conversational > and the epistolary style abbreviates nant to na. — Ki , yellow. Ki-uri , the yellow pumkin '). Ki-narU or Ki-na uri , a pumkin that is yellow. — A Fimana tokoro , a place of rest. — A Kirei-na nizi , a beautiful rainbow. With the inflectional termination ni the radical forms of this class are used as adverbs. — Oolni, greatly. — Tsiine ni , commonly. — Suguni , directly, straightly. As words, which have naru for their derivative form are to be noticed: Ooi ! ) ^ 1 0 great. Y’ ° Ue above. Tsuni ^ |, common. Stta below. rare, seldom. Mae before. Sugu jf[ right. iya unwelcome. Examples of the use of the forms. Fit 6 sono nave no 6oi naru wo si'ru koto nasi * * 3 ) , - it is not the fact ( koto nasi) that a man knows that his rice-crop is so large (ample). — "H'X Pf 3 / ‘ ~)K. y yj-* £ 7 9 o i[ ^ i Y ‘V"> T-t)- 7 9 , Inkova dai seo ari; 6oi n6.ru va fatono 6oisa ari. , of parrots people have big and little ones; those which are big have the bigness of a dove. — Sono kou ooi navi , his merit is great. — Kavi-ko no katavara naru taka-tokoro, a high place at the side of the silkworms. — • Sakini nevuri si kaviko va live (or tie) naru kava wo nugi idzuru , = the silkworms that have previously slept, throw off the skin being (which is) upon them. 2) By means of naru , or ?ta, Chinese words are made Japanese adjectives. f>v i tv a. tt'H Zin-ndru , humane. Tsiu-narU , sincere. f, u , Fu-tsiu-narU, insincere. Yuu-n6.rU , brave. ') Cucurbit a Pepo verrucosa linn. , 5 ) Ooi, great, after the old writing and the forms ooki, oosi , in the conversational language ooi, derived from oo , much, are frequently interchanged; the same writer frequently uses hy turns ooisa Ct'-'Y'tt) and oosa (tY'-tt) for „ great,” and ooi-nari and ooki nari for „ is great.” 3 ) Dai Gaku, VIII, 2. 116 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 12, 13. ffT V. Sin-zits-ndrU , solid, real, sincere. ~P !( y f , Tei-nei-narU , courteous. Mi f tin Ki-rei-narti, beautiful, fair. Bu-ki-rei-ndrU , not beautiful. ^ Yau-na , ...ly, being as... — Yumino yauna , archwise. 'IS? ■ YekU-na '), glad, joyful. grit 1 -. Soo-si ’), = cease laughing, feel pain. — Soo-si nari , It is not to be laughed at, It is sorrowful. T&ru >i/), = ie nr?t, is also used to form Japanese adjectives from Chi- nese words. — v ^ ,l/ ’ Gen-zen-taru , apparent, public. If more adjectives thus formed follow, linked to one another, then only the last has the attributive form tarU , whereas those preceding have the indefinite form tari. ; U '■% Ay IUJ o 11 ttl' /f 7 Sit-tan , kan-tari, f i-tdru Jeun-si ari 2 ), there is a prince, stately, worthy, perfect. § 13. Derivative adjectives in ka. The termination ka, in my opinion, allied to the adjective radical forms AY and -A'o (page 109 n°. 51), just as these, indicates, that the quality expressed by the radical word is present in a large degree or is strongly prominent. As evi- dence of the mutual affinity of ka, ke and ko may be adduced that the forms kanaru , kanari and kani, the first being attributive, the second predicate, the third adverbial, are frequently superseded by keki, kcsi and keku. — For kanaru and kanari the conversational language uses only kuna. Adjectives of this class are: Akirdkd Iff} "£ 7 # , bright, clear, light; allied to Aka, light. Atatakd & %%%, warm; allied to Atatameru, to warm. Faritkd far. — Sono dto farUkd nari or farUkcsi, his trace is far. Kdsiikd |^J ^ ^ , remote, solitary. — Umino kazeva kasUkd ndri, the sea-wiml is so solitary. — Mitsi ga kdsitkani farilkana, the way solitary and far. ') Both expressions arc taken up hern, to illustrate the forms occurring in RonmnrKZ Etimens , p 66, line 9 and 10 susina , „ avoir du regret” and yekina, „se rejonir.” 5 ) Dai Gakit, III, 4. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 13, 14. 117 Kirdmkd ^ , brilliant ; from Kira-kira , glitter; Kirara , glimmer, rm'&a. Komakd , fine; allied to Komamiiii , to make fine, to make small. Komakana sitna , fine sand. — Komakani, adverb, to the most minute par- ticulars; minutely, exactly. Nadaraka py#, smooth, ironed out; from Naderu , to iron, to stroke. Namerakd smooth, slippery; allied to Namerit , suck, and to Namesii , to make smooth. Nodoka set fair (of the weather); from Nodo , calm. Ogosoka Jy#, severe, strict. — Ordka i stupid, obsolete broke. Ordsoka negligent, lazy. — Ordsokanisu , to neglect; allied to drdsu, to lay down , put off. ^ - 4-4 Sad aka ^ Jf , certain, sure, definitive. — Sadaka nari or Sadakcsi , it is cer- tain: allied to Saddmem , to define, fix. Sidzilkd ^ ^ ’ calm, still. — Asa-Jiga sidzuka nari , or sidzUkana, or sidzukesi , the morning is so calm. — Sidziikdni , old-Japanese also sidzukuni yuku , to go softly, slink, sneak. The old form Sidzukuni pleads for the in- fluence of the vocal harmony. (Compare page 62, line 2). The radical word Sidzu is preserved in Sidzu-kokdro , a calm mind. Tanraka c or Tairakd , even, plane, flat; from fa, hand and fir a , flat, thus hand-flat-ish. Tsiimd-bnrdkd v ^ ^ , clear and plain, decided, settled; after the Siwori from Tsumari , concise and jirdku , to open. — Tsumdbiraka ni , or old-Japanese Tsumabirakekti , adverb, plainly. Wadzuka $f| , scarce; TJackitM ni , scarcely, hardly. f. § 14. Derivative adjectives in yaka. Attributive yakanaru , predicate yaka nari (in the conversational language ya- kana), adverbially yakani. The derivative form yaka means as much as having the appearance of that which the root points out *). To the words of this class, which have passed from the old language to the new, belong: ] ) This notice of the meaning of yaka agrees with that which a Japanese etymologist gives of it: ^ ilL. T TTX A- /rft* f re ^ I ? V — Wa-gun siwori, under yaka. 118 CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE. § 14 . Asayaka ^ HJ] , fresh and bright as the morning (asa). Also Azayaka , Azayagu , Asayuga , Azarakeki. — Asayaka ndru iro , a bright color. — Kure- naiva iro hana-hada asayaka nari jt|± ^ m ^ v , the safflower is very bright of color. Fiydyaka $-?»■ bleak, cold. — Aki-kazeva jiyayaka nari, the autumn wind is bleak. From fiya , cold. Ke-zayaha ^ y , bright (of the weather). Kirdviyaku glittering; also kirabiyaka, from kirami, to glitter. Komdydkd d, v % , 1) tight, close, dense; from komi , komu, to fill. — Kusaki komayakana , grass and wood close growing. — Komayakanaru sake yj| ypj , strong beer. — 2) narrow, precise. Mameyaka pL* sincere, unfeigned, true; from Mame, reality. Miyabiyaka v Y ^ , splendid , beautiful ; allied to miyaburi , courtly. Nagdyakd Mi hfrtn maidenly, graceful; from Nago , maid. Nigiyaka y? busy, bustling. — Nigiwavi , bustle. Nikoyaka tylfc 5 v # ? fine, tender, soft, mild; from Niko, pleasing; fine. Nobiyaka £ v % , elastic; from Nobi, u , to stretch. Oddyakd ^ v ^ , calm , still ; from odcfri , , to become calm. Savdyakd bright; gay; brave. Sayakd '/fgy ty] * > °°fi Sayakeki , clear (of light and sound). Sinayaka ^ , supple, pliant; soft, flexible; also Sindbiyaka, from Si- ndrni , to bend (oneself). Sindbiyaka ^ ^ v ^ , secretly; from Sinobi, u , to hide; to suffer. Sukdyakd ^ § y # c _p| -j^ , strong, full of power; also Sukuyakd , Sukuybkd , £«- kdyakd and Suldyakd; allied to 7®. I ’ wet ' through. § 16. Derivative adjectives in siki, = ..like. Adjective siki ( 2 -df), adverbial siku (is > 7 ), predicate sisi (£/•»), often, but not generally, si ( is) ; in the conversational language by the elision of k and s , mostly sii ( i/d ) and siu (2 / *7 the last mentioned frequently pronounced as su (sA«); substantive sisa (^-tf); continuative verb sikari, u, = so to be. Root si ($R^), = so, Lat. sic J ). Siki means, just as ..like (German ..lick, Dutch .. lijk , .. aardig ), equality with that, which is expressed by the root, to which it is joined. Being of a similar sound to the transitive verb Siki , Siku , = to spread, Chinese or , it is indicated in writing also by these Chinese characters, thus by a rebus, which places the word indicated in a false light. As in old-Japanese many of the adjectives in ki (§ 9. B.) occur with the ter- mination siki or ziki , the Japanese philologers consider the ki as an abbre- viation of siki. ') Distinguished from Fdru ke-siki, spring-weather. c ) 7 O lEl A h ~ZX? f V- Zoo boo si-mon tsuc-boo ki, 1773, under Siku. 120 CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE. § 16 . Siki forms adjectives from nouns, from adverbs and interjections, and from verbs. 1) Denominative and Adverbial i. e. derived from nouns and adverbs are, e. g. a person of bad character. — Asiki utsuva, bad tools. — Asiku manabti , to learn badly. — Fi no teri-komuva hanahada asm, = the entrance of sunshine (in an apartment where silkworms are bred) is very injurious. — Yosi asi wo wakemavenu , = not once to distinguish the, „it is good and it is bad,” not to distinguish good from bad. — Astkd.ru , continuative verb, from asiku and dru. Ava-siki 'jfo ' > 1/ V , frothy; faint of taste; also Ava-ava-stki. Aya-siki -yjj- y _ J ]'^ , wonderful; singular; from ay a ! , exclamation of sur- prise. Ayasiki ame , a wonderful rain, e. g. a stone-rain. Bi-bi-siki ' ?)jl %•> handsome. — Fage-siki heavy; eager. Fanafada- or Hana hada-siki iQj t V , very, uncommonly; from hanahada , very. Fisd-siki A +F jxV , long ago, antithetic to Sibaraku , shortly, lately. — Faku-sai Hon-tsiyau ni toworu koto Jisdsi , it is long, that FakU-sai has intercourse with our empire. — Fisasa, length of time. — Iku fisasa ni nari-mdsuka , = what lapse of time is it?, how long is it ago. In Fisa is placed the meaning of Q -=fc* , i. e. the sun or the day goes hence, or has gone hence, which refers to Fi sdrisi. Fitd-siki r o ^ , = of one sort; agreeing. Futd-siki it thickish, stout. Ikdga-siki tin* m interrogative, inquisitive. Iyd-siki jj|v despicable, mean; from Tya , no! Kdna-siki r painful, pitiful; from Kana! alas! — Kanasiki kdna! how Mi-kuru-siki , disagreeable to be seen, ugly, misformed. Root Kuri , u , to reel (reel off cocoons). A-siki , bad. — Kokdro no asiki mono , any one bad in disposition , o , fair, neat. — KUvd-siki ma , a fair horse. — Kiivd- siku , neat, precise. Mddzu-siki poor, shabby. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 16. 121 Mdsa-siki if real; from Musa, truth. Mitnd-siki without contents, empty; in vain; from mi, kernel, fruit and na, without; thus fruitless. — Mund-s'iku ndni, to become empty; to give up the ghost. Ona-ziki identical. Sabi-siki ^*^* 0 [*| 3§4 HR 7 rusty; alone (solitary). Suzu-siki ^ cis*, cool. — Suzu-sikaru, continually cool. I'add-siki n < is* c p|l , proper, real. Taye-daye-siki V ! zjjl I’ often interrupted, by pausing. Ure-siki glad, merry, joyful, pleasant. — Watakusimo Uresiku gozdri- mdsU , also 1 am joyful. — Urcsisa , gladness. — Urcsisa kagiri nakeri, the gladness was boundless. — Urdsikdru or Uresigdru, - uresiku-aru , continuative verb, to rejoice. — Fi-kdzu no ooi wo uresigdru, to be glad at the greatness (ooi wo) of the number of days (at a long life). — Urcsimu , transitive to make glad. — Ure, Yakutie Yor, joy. — The Wa-gun Siwori gives (<’, uru, = to get, acquire) as root. Utsuku-siki lovely; agreeable; handsome; old-Japanese Itsuku-siki ; al- lied to Itsuku-simu, or also Utsuku-swm , to love. Yasd-siki meek; honest, graceful. Yord-siki ^ ^ ^ = ||| , apt, fit; well. 2) Verbal, derived by means of siki. The transitive or intransitive meaning of the verb, from which adjectives are derived by means of s'iki , passes over to the adjective too, because siki is, by nature, neuter. On the manner, in which the derivation in one case or another is brought about, the Japanese etymologists , at least those, whose works are within our reach, preserve silence; they talk about it, indeed, but leave the matter itself in the dark. To be able to treat thoroughly and satisfactorily, this class of words , which, from an etymological point of view, belong to the most intricate, we ought also to be able to compare the forms, in which they occur in the different dialects of the popular language. As these are still unknown to us, we think we must confine ourselves to a mere indication of the most con- spicuous phenomena. Adjectives with a causative meaning derived by means of siki from causa- tive or factive verbs, from verbs, by which, as it is known, to cause an ac- 122 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 16 . tion to take place or be carried out is indicated, and which in Japanese, as it will be seen, hereafter, are formed by changing the verbal termination i into asi (or for vocal-harmony sometimes into osi). From Konorni , = to like, to be fond of, is formed the causative Konomdsi , = to cause fondness for, to make one to he fond of, and from this the adjective Konomasiki, = lovely. The adjectives, so formed, thus show, that in the nature of the object lies the action, expressed by the causative verb, to exercise or to bring to light. To this kind of adjectives, among others, belong: Ibukdsiki gjjp t ^ strange, wonderful; polite expression for: doubtful, su- spected; from Ibukasi , u , to excite surprise, and this from Ibuki , u, to be surprised at something. Isogdsiki ml m. it . it , busy ; from Isogdsi , u , to make busy ; and this from Isogi, u, to make haste. — Isogdsiki tokdro, a busy place. — Watdkusi wd kon-nitsiwa isogdsii ( yjr/, y ^ 0 *7 ^ y J [‘£ t d ) ') i I have much bu- siness to day. As a variation of Isogd-siki , we have Isogavdsiki , derived from the causative form Isogavdsi , = to make busy, which proceeds from Isogdci , u, = to he busy. Ttamdsiki or Itavdsiki ^ , smarting , painful ; from Itamdsi , u , to torture , and this from Itdmi , u , to feel pain , to suffer. Konomasiki, lovely, agreeable, from Konomdsi, u , cause to like, to excite one’s love, to attract a person; and this from Kdnomi, it, to be fond of. ^ . Medzurdsiki y ^ . exciting interest, interesting; from MedzUrdsi, u, to excite interest , and this from Made , Medzuru , also Medzitri , to take inte- rest in..., to have gladly ( ^ ). Distinguished from Mcdzurdkd , important; costly. Every thing that is strange and rare, and however insignificant, an object of taste, is called MedzUrdsi. If from Me-tsUki or Mi-tsUki, = to fix the eye upon a thing, an adjective with the signification of „ attractive to the eye,” must be formed by means of siki, we should obtain MetsUkasiki, as de- rivative from the causative form MetsUkdsi (- cause one to look), hut not Medzttrasiki 2 ). MutsUkdsiki , tiresome , grievous , vexing , |jj| , or also , by means of rebus , ex- ') Shopping -Dialogues , p. 16. ! ) This as an answer to the question, proposed in r. brown’s Colloquial Japanese, XLI. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 1G. 123 pressed by -^i) 'jjg and -j%i) from Mutsukasi , u, to vex, to grieve, make sad, and this from Mutsuki, it, whence the continnative Mutsu- kdri, it, = to be grieved (or sad), is more in use. Natsiikdsiki jlffi • vulgo -y dt^ jr', attractive, engaging. — Fdnano nivdvi natsukdsii , the scent of flowers is attractive. — From NatsUkasi , it , make disposed, excite inclination or love; and this from Natsuki, u, to be inclined, have inclination to. OmdmUkdsiki ffj! t jSj^ also by contraction Omogdsiki , pronounced as Omo- ngdsiki , attractive, engaging; from Omd-mUkdsi , w, to attract, and this from Omd-muki , it , to turn oneself with the face (dm3) towards a thing. From muki, = to go to meet, arises a continuative verb mukavi , it, to be turned towards; whence mukavasi , it, the causative form; from this is derived dmdmitkavasiki , to be continually attractive. Omdvdsiki, causing to think of one, keeping another’s thoughts engaged, and that in a good sense, thus engaging, dear, kind; from Omovdsi , it, also Oino- vdd, it, to cause to think, and this from 6 mod , it, to think (^). Osorosiki frightful; from Osdrosi , it, to make fear, and this from Osore, uru , to fear. Saimgdsiki • full of rustling and noise, stormy, turbulent; from Sawagdsi, it, to make rustle, to disturb, to confound, and this from Sawayi , it, rustle, make a noise, be uneasy ( t#$. * £ t!i >• — jSii’O sawagasi , the sea is stormy. — Kokdrowo sawagasu , make the mind uneasy. — Sdruva sei savagasiku site mono too kai-su '), = the monkey makes much noise and injures every thing. — The old-Japanese has as variation of Sawagi also Sa- ivagavi , rage, tear; Sawagavdsi , it, enrage, and Sawagavasiki , full of noise. Tanomosiki , trusty, a thing upon which one can rely; from Tanomosi , it, make trust, and this from Tanomi , it, to trust to, to rely upon. Urdmdsiki, exciting disgust; from Urdmasi , it, make have disgust, to prejudice against oneself, and this from urdmi , it, to be disgusted with. ^ '|‘j^ . Urdyamasiki (vulgo, and by way of rebus •if? hi; it ^), worthy of envy; from iirdyamdsi , it, to make one envy, excite envy, and this from ur 6 garni , it, to envy. jg o . ’) Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. 124 CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE. § 16, 17. \nsis* , charming; from Uruvdsi, u, enliven, and LJruvdsiki , uruwdsiki ^ ~ > o , this from uruvi , tirdvi, to be enlivened, or charmed. Utagavdsiki doubtful; from utdgavdsu , make doubt, and this from utagavi , it ( o 3^ ^ ) , to doubt. Utomasiki , despicable, from Utomdsu , to despise, properly to estrange, and this from titomi , it , to be strange , to be despised. . Wadzuravdsiki mf Mh » , tiresome, teasing, plaguing, from WWzuraua'si , it, to tease, and this from WadzUravi, it, to be plagued. Ydddrasiki , hospitable; from Yddorasi , it, to lodge, take anyone in, and this from Yaddri , it ( h) , to lodge somewhere. Yawdsiki 5 2/ * , calming , from Yciwdsi , it, to make rest , to reduce to calm- ness, and this from Yarn , it, or Yami, it, to come to rest. Yordkobdsiki , joyful, rejoicing, from Yorokobdsi , it, to please anyone, and this from Yorukobi , it, to rejoice, to be glad. ||^ o Jal . Yukdsiki urging on, impatient; from Yukdsi, it, to make go; to drive; and this from Ytt&t , u, to go. § 17. Derivative adjectives in ka-siki. To the adjectives in siki unite the derivatives in kfr-siki , ka-siku, ka-si; terminations, which are considered by Japanese etymologists as contractions of kamasiki, kam&siku, kamasi (for which kavasiki etc. also occur), and which are indicated in writing by l|t^ gC The sign ^ means to go through or to make go through for...., in Japanese Kagovi or Kagovasi. Is this character to be remarked as a rebus here, or is its signification allied to that of the Japanese termination? This question remains unanswered by the Ja- panese philologers. The writer of the present, leaves the rebus for what it is, and sees in the kasiki in question nothing more, than the frequently occurring abbreviation of sikh-siki , of which the radical form sika ( ) is quoted among the adjectives in ki (page 109 n°. 72) with the meaning of „ being so, such.” Kasi is met with, and that as a substantive predicate verb with the signification of „is as much as,” in simple expressions such as „lleer (Mister) to va kimizo kasi” '), = the word lleer is as much as kimi; whereas the continuative verbal ') I borrow this satisfactory example from a metrical list of .Tapaucsc ami Dutch words, by a Japanese dilctautc. CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 17 , 18 . 125 form Kant (for sftkdru) in Karuga gueni (= for reason (giteni) of the (ga) being so ( kdru ), that is therefore, on that account), is generally in use, and that to exclusion of sikdru. The derivative forms kdsiki , kdsiku , kd si si or kasi thus answer to ...ish, ...some; whereas kamusiki is equivalent to a fusion of sikd-mdsi-siki ( masi , = to be). To this class of derivative adjectives, among others, belong: Fddzi- (vulgo Fddzitr) ka-siki ^ ][({■ ^ , timid; also Fadzi- (vulgo Fadzu-) ka-masiki , or -kavdsiki; from Fadzi, blush; l'adzu , Fadzuru , to blush. Fartt-kd-siki jiff) clear (of the weather); also Fdru-kavdsiki ; root Fare , clear. Kara-kaviga mdsiki , droll, jocose; from Kara-gavi , to laugh, and this from /vara &ara , = ha! ha! Ne-ka-siki ^ ^ sleepy, also Ne-kama- (or Aura) a?Ai; from A5-, slee]t. Ya-kamdsiki Pj§f # | , noisy; from ga! an exclamation like Heh! holla! ho! '). — Kokode gakamdsikiwo sakeru , here people prevent what is noisy. — Sidzukani site gakamasi nai ) , it is quiet and without noise. Yume-ka-siki ^ yH * jUj^, also Yume-kama- (or kava-) slid, as in a dream; from Yume , a dream. § 18. Derivative adjectives in ra-siki, = having a resemblance to.... They are generally denominative. Ra is instead of ara, which has arisen by the strengthening the final vowel of an into a; ara-siki, by apheresis ra-siki, thus means: „such (siki) as were there...,” or „so as if there were.” Makoto, = truth; Makoto-naru, = being truth, true; Makoto-ra-siki, such as if it were truth, i. e. probable. Makoto-ra-siki koto, or Makoto-rd-sisa , probability. Ra-siki therefore answers to the derivative termination ..ish, so far as it means having a resemblance to that, which is indicated by the root, as bluish * 2 ) , whereas the Japanese termination gives at the same time, to the ad- jective formed with it, a diminishing, frequently also a contemptible signification in addition. The old way of writing the predicate form Arasi is ^ 1 he presence of , which is here ideographically , with the signification of „to be ’) Fa, yobi-kaka.ru koyeni iveri , : - Ya is said of a calling voice. — Wa-yun sitoori , under Fa. 2 ) brill, Nederl. Spraakleer, 1854, § 42. 1. 1). 126 CHAPTER m. THE ADJECTIVE. § 18. on hand, = Jap. ari," pleads for the correctness of the assimilation of ra-si to ara-si, and therefore against the supposition, that the ra used here might be the characteristic of the plural (§ 5. III. 1. page 56). The dialect of Nagasaki has r&ska for rasiki. Examples of derivative adjectives in ra-siki: Otoko , man; Otoko-rdsiki unna , a manly woman. Onndgo , woman; Onndgo-rdski otoko , a womanish (effeminate) man, = onndno yauni okondi-masu otoko '), i. e. a man conducting himself like a woman. W arabe , Wararnbe , boy; Warambe-rdsiki , boyish. Ko-dorno , child; Kodomo-rdsiki , childish. Kodomo-rdslki hand si, childish-talk. Ko- domo no yau ndru , childlike. Kind , gentleman; Kimi-rdsiki, playing the gentleman. Dai-miyau, = great name, imperial prince; I)ai-miyau-rdsiki hdtamoto, a vassal, who plays the prince. Baku , fool , madman; Baka-rdsiki , stupid, foolish ; Baka-rdsiki koto , stupidity, folly. Uso , gossip, untruth; Uso-rdsiki , trifling. The derivative Fitd-rasiki , from Fito , man, answers formally indeed to ,, hu- man,” must however, with a view to the examples quoted, have a signification, by which it is only applicable to a not human being, that acts humanly s ). Also words of Chinese origin are compounded with rdsiki , e. g. Kou • merit; Kou-aru ivaza , = a merit being deed, a deed, that really is meritorious. — Kou-rdsiki ivaza , an apparently meritorious deed. Ri-kou M' ] P£, whetted mouth or tongue, eloquence. — Jiikou-ndrU fito, an eloquent, witty (but not blunt) man. — Iiikou-rdsiki fito, a man, who plays the witty person or the orator. Ai , kind; Ai-rdsiki, amiable. Ka-ivai , proper PP K d-ai, kind, agreeable. Kawai-rdsiki , amiable, lovely. Ka-wai-rasiku naki koto, ungraciousness. Bin-bou ^ ^ ^ ^ , poverty ; Bin-bou-rdsiki , poorly. ') Thus Mr. Oono Y., when requested to describe the meaning of Onvagorasiki otoko, defined it -') We know this word alone from a Vocabulary, in which it was translated „ menschlijkerwijze."’ CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 10, 20. 127 § 19. Derivative adjectives in beki. Placed after the attributive form of a verb beki ( Tif ^') signifies, that what the verb expresses may, can, must and shall happen. The predicate form is bes'i, the adverbial beku. — Onna kono tnoazawd su-besi , women may, can or will do this work — Koreica onna no sii-beki tewaza navi , this is a work to be done by women. — Sii-beki, = being allowed or able to do, is here conceived in an active sense, whereas the genitive onna no precedes as definition. Compare page 07 § 8. VI. — Fito-bitb kono tama wo tattomii, every one values this jewel highly. — Korewa fitu-bitu no tattomU-belci tama nari, this is a jewel, which every one may, can and shall value highly. In the chapter on the verbs we shall refer again to Beki. § 20. Derivative adjectives in naki, = without, ...less, indicating the want of that, which is mentioned in the radical word. Na-ki in the conversational language Nai, from the radical word Na, = not, used substantively means „the good for nothing” or „ something good for nothing,” = nothing, e. g.: Fitowo nai ya siro ni su, to consider a person as good for nothing (of no value). Naiga is genitive. Used attributivelv it means „not existing;” Naki-fttd is a not existing man, one deceased; Nai-viono, a good for nothing, a not existing thing, a nothing. — Fitono naki-kotou'o kiku, to hear of a person’s not existing (his death). When Naki is preceded by an attributive definition of what does not exist, it answers to the suffix ...less. — Tsikdra-naki or Tsikarano naki yumi , a powerless bow. The predicative form Nasi, in the conversational language Nai, means the not being at hand of anything, be it thing or circumstance. — Kono yumiwa tsikara nasi, this bow is powerless. — Ixequ-ga-sima fitd nasi, the sulphur island - . -j- is without inhabitants. — Ari nasi wo tovu jw* m T } to inquire about the existence or non-existence of a thing. Adverbially Naku (£ff£), in the conversational language Nau, Noo (Ti^o f 7o y y o y > ). — Thence the continuative verb Nakari (= Ndkfi + ari) , not to exist. — Naku nan, to go to nothing, to die. — Naku si, su, to be without . . . , to want. Na and the forms derived from it will be found treated more diffusely in the chapter on the verbs. 128 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 21. § 21 . Adjectives with the negative prefix Na, or the Chinese 7 Fu. Na, with negative power comes before adjectives as well as substantives, and causes them to express the contrary. This use of Na peculiar to the old lan- guage has been preserved in expressions as: Na-yami, = no rest Na-yi (T#), = no seat, for „ earthquake” (*&if ) ; Na-ivi zo , = not speak , = be silent! The Chinese fu, = not, as a pure negative prefix to Japanese words expressive of quality has also got into use. To the few compounds of that na- ture belong: Fu-de-ki 7' 7 ttrir. mis-eliance, bad-growth. De-ki , to proceed, to be produced. Fu-nari 7 7 Jf| bad growth. — Fu-nari no tosi , a bad year. Bu-nari-naru misshapen; Nari , shape. Fa-katte-naru 7 7 m t- 7 t ns, uncomfortable, disadvantageous; uneasy; Kdtte , the winning hand. Fu-mi-motsi-naru 7 7 a 1 1 behaving badly; Fu-mi-motsi , bad beha- vior, Fr. inconduite; Mi-motsi , behaving as it should be. Fu-ratsi no 7 7 I#?/. extravagant; absurd; improper, irrational; from the Chinese Line (tf , vulgo after the Japanese pronunciation, Ratsi, li- mit , fence. — Fu-ratsi no koto , what goes beyond limits. — Iiatsi mo naki zon-zi yor\ fa k* W ? > an irrational opinion. Fu-sai-vai-naru 7 7 m ct v, unprosperous; Sai-vai , prosperity, luck, bles- sing; from saki , development, and favi , growth. Fu-si.-avase-naru 7 7 'ft ^ no ^ 1 uc Xy; fr° ra Si-avase , chance. /’ 'u-sugure te imam v m ^ v 7 , not excellent, not being particularly well. Fu-tsu-gau-ndru Jfi 7 t /n i inconvenient, incongruous; from the Chinese = altogether, the sum; thence Tokino tsu-gguni yori, according to the time. More numerous are the compounds with 7 7 > which , adopted from the Chi- nese, and sanctioned by use as classical expressions, have penetrated even to the language of daily life. As attributive definitions prefixed to Japanese words, they occur with the suffixes no or naru; e. g.: CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 21, 22. 129 7 ^0 v f v ’ discordant. ^ 7 ^| tv , desastrous. 7 1 1 v , unchildlike. 7 J[jL £ ^ , insufficient, not enough. 7 7 lit! f >u , indisposed. Mt [I1 3 r>n indisposed, not well. J (% 7 fp * ^ $ r , unfashionable. ^ 7 ISrf p Al ^’ unceasing gossip. ^ 7 IT H'j? 71 imperishable friendship. 7 7 15 ur. unforeseen difficulty. t; 7 ll r VT. unexpectedly, by chance. If the pure negative ^ 7 , of similar expressions is superseded by llff 7 ’ ( bu , = without), the meaning of the word undergoes a considerable modification, which is still frequently lost sight of. ^ 7 JJfjj i t n/ Fu-rei-naru , is uncourtly, and equal to coarse, clownish. S{§ 7 * f(f| ^ f -v > = ,, without ceremony,” and may also be rude behavior, which does not wound. ff - u at Y, is a behavior, antagonist to the nature of politeness, thus misbehavior. fu-zi is untimely, i. e. not at the time fixed; without fixed time, i. e. always; If" wrong-time, the. improper time, the time at which something may not happen. § 22. Adjectives with a previous definition. Nouns , prefixed to an adjective as definitive, form with it a compound word , provided they are not characterized as an attributive addition by the termination no. — Tc, hand; Naga, long; Te-naga zaru , long-armed ape. — Kutsi , mouth; Omoki , heavy; Kutsi no omoki fitd, a man heavy of mouth or tongue. Examples. Inisihd imdno na-takaki fitd, High named (celebrated) persons of old and new times. Te-baga, asi-faya , = of hand quick, of foot quick; quick-handed, quick-footed. Kotoba-fayasi , he is ready of speech. — Kotoba-oosi, he is woordy. — Kutsi-Jirdsi , broad-mouthed. — Me-akdki , red-eyed. Mimi-tdki fitd, a man, sharp of ears, a quick-hearing mau. Fara-buto , thick of belly, a paunch-belly, name of a fish. Faraka Uwd (for fara-cika uwd) , a fish red of belly , the red-belly. Omo-sirdki , white or clear of countenance, friendly. Mono-koye no naki yo , a night without sound , a dead night. Kokoro-ne no firoki kotoba , a word ample of meaning. Kokoro-neno warui fito , a man bad of disposition. Ke-no ara-mono , ke-no niko-inono, rough haired beings, soft haired beings. o 130 CHAPTET? m. THE ADJECTIVE. § 23, 24. § 23. The definition, that the quality in any object in full or relatively full measure is met with, is expressed by adverbs or definitions equal to them, which precede the adjective; as such are worthy of notice: 1. Ma, M' in conversational language generally Man, = effectively , really; genuine unadulterated, indicates the full measure of the quality. Ma-naka, or Man-naka, ft v pjl £, the just middle. — Yumino ma-nakawo tdru , just the middle of the bow to seize, to seize the how just in the middle. — Man-naka no iy6, the middle house, standing between two others. - Man-f irald jjl£ J ^ ^ quite level , even. Mdn-mdruki ft T, |J|j , quite round. Md-ydsuki ^ ^ ^ ^ , quite easy. Ma-sirdki jpL ' \^\ a\ i quite white, snow-white. Md-kuroki ft ~ jp3 ^ ^ , quite black , jet-black. Ma, = effectively, really, variation of Mi ( j|| ,2 -), is the same radical word, that occurs in Ma-koto (ft ||j. ^ W^’ = rea ^y> truth. Ma-gokoro , an up- right heart; Masa , truth; Masa-siki , = really. 2. Itsi-dan, — • ^ , a whole piece, adverbially: wholly. — Ttsi-dan dtsdkusiki onna , a woman in all respects beautiful. — Ttsi-dan kek-kau not'd, in all respects excellent. 3. Ikanimo, = however, in all respects. — lkanimo tsiisaki, as small as possible. — Ikanimo taydsuki , as easy as possible. 4. Zui-bun, |||;f = c omparatively , so much as possible. — Zui-bun faydkd, pretty early; is also used with the signification of „very early.” § 24. Absolute comparative. Adverbs which, expressing a higher degree of the quality, come before the words of quality, are: 1) Mo, jjfr^ vulgo , yet, yet more; to be distinguished from Ma, = real, with which it frequently mutates. Mo-ydsUki ^ ^ \ , easier. Mo-gami ^ ^ Jf, higher up. Mo-sotto /j^ E -dh -V , yet less. Mo-fayd j|jf ^ J|L y , still quicker or earlier; already. ft fo-sukdsi jj|f Af 2 , yet a little. Mo-sukosi sakini, still rather earlier; just now. — Korewa umdri tsiisai. Mo- CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. $ 24, 25. 181 stikosi ookiinowo 0 mist' '), this (case) is too small. Let me see one rather larger. 2) Ookini, greatly, very. — Ookini furuki , very antique. — Ooki S -T — ni c irttki , very rough. 3) Sukosi, Ap | , little, in slight degree. — Sukosi takai tokdro , a place high only in a slight degree. 4) Nao old-Jap. Navo once more so..., still more. — Sore de nao yoku nan, thereby it becomes so much the better. — Sore dake nao yordsii, it is so much the better. 5) Iy& or iyo, also yh or yo, V „ 3 0 5$ » = once more so.., far- ther, more; to be distinguished from iya , no. — 7yd taka yama , the mountain once as high. — lyd medzitrdsiJci , still more interesting. 6) Iy6-iyk or iyo-iyo, {/Hjjv V { 0 jUjjl V more and more; in the con- versational language lyd ga uyi ni also. — lyd-iyd fukaki , still much deeper. 7) M&su-m&su, more and more. — Riygu-kdku no mdzivari mdsu-mdsn \ dtsukii nan, the intercourse of both the empires extends more and more. § 25. The relative or real comparative. 1. If a quality be attributed to one object in the same measure as to another, the likeness, if it is quantitative, is expressed by Podo, if it is qualita- tive by Yauni. Fodo (Jgp*) means quantity, Yauni, or Yoo ni (qfp!?), in the manner. Namiva yama-fodo takasi , the waves are as high as mountains. — Namiva yukino yauni sirdsi , the waves are white as snow. — Yama-fodo, = size of mountains, and Yukino yauni , = in the manner of snow, are here adverbial de- finitions, which, as such, precede the words of quality takdsi and sirdsi. The par- ticle va, vulgo iva, is here necessary to separate the subject nami from the following substantive (yama, or yuki), which, as subordinate definition, belongs to the predicate word of quality. San ri fodo todsi , it is so far as three miles. — Isiyau ni kataki , = stony hard , i. e. so hard as stone. — Zen fodo tai-setsu ndrU monova nasi, Dlf f" t ^ ‘ ’ -/ifr i/ FI > / |_±: r T zjfjf / /v , there is nothing so important as virtue; in the con- versational language: Zen fodo tai-setsu na (or also tai-zi ta, ft ^ Z) mono iva nai. ') Shopping-Dialogues , p. 2. 132 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 25 . 2. If a quality is ascribed to one object in a higher degree, than to another, with which the comparison is made, the latter is considered as the point of depar- ture in the ascription and, as such, characterized by the termination yori (out), immediately precedes the word of quality, which does not assume a comparative form; thus Nami va iye yori takasi , = the waves are from houses out high, i. e. the waves are higher than houses. In this form of speech also the isolating particle va or wa is indispensible. The Mongolian and Mandju, in respect of the comparative, follow the same way '). To the expression: ,,The horse is higher than the sheep,” is equivalent in Japanese the expression: Mumd va fitsuzi yori ooi nari (.14 « JkI J$(> ij) , = the horse — from the sheep out high is ; in Mongolian Morin anu chonin etse jeke. lighter than down. — Ookamivd yama-inu yori takesi , the wolf is bolder than the wild dog. — Olanda-funS vd Too-sen yori sakini tsiydku-gan su , the Dutch ship lands earlier than the Chinese. — Kakuretdru y6ri aravaruruva nasi , = some- thing more manifest than the hidden, is there not, there is nothing more mani- fest , than the hidden. — Hi too kivamete , Tcn-ka too dsdmuru-koto va — siyu yori ooi-ndrU va nasi , what concerns the forming of the understanding , and the go- vernment of the state, there is nothing greater than the doctrine of confucius. . . . yori sulcdsiku naru, less becoming than . . . Remark. No comparison is contained in the sentence: Kono sdkayori tsutsi ftkisi , = the land ( tsutsi ) is of this steepness off low; as the words „of this steepness off ( kono saka yori)" are an attributive definition of „ land (tsutsi)," and not of the word of quality „low (fiki)." The relative comparative may also be defined by means of one of the adverbs (§ 24), which indicate a higher degree of the quality; e. g.: Wasiva kuma-takayori mata-mata ooi nari , the eagle is twice as big as the bear-falcon (the horned falcon). — Knma-taka va me-o no dai-siyau mina taka ni onuziku , taka yori ooi-naru koto san bai seri, with the bear-falcon ( Spizaidos orientalis) the size of the female and the ') Compare I. J. SCHMIDT, Grammatik dry Mongolischen Gprac/ir. SI. Petersburg, 1831. S. 39. - canon de i , a u adi:li:nt/. , Klem . dr la Grammaire Mandchoue, 1832. page 8fi. — Charar/cristir dry himptsuchlichsten Typen de . » Sprachbaves , von l)r. it. sthintjiai,. Berlin, ISfin. page 200 Examples. Mei va koo-mooyori karosi ( up ^ M male generally is as with the hawk; his size (ooinaru koto) with relation to ( yori ) the hawk amounts to threefold (.'•■an bai); i. e. it is thrice as big as the hawk. The object, with which the comparison is made, is also isolated by va, when the word expressive of quality does not immediately follow it, but is separated from it by a subordinate abverbial definition ; e. g\: Kono iyi yori va mata takasi , is as high again as this house. — Kono iye yori va nao takasi , is yet higher than this house. If the object, with which the comparison is made is something which either has remained without notice, or is not expected, then it is characterized by the suffix mo (= also, even). Kore yori mo oosi , more than this also, or more than even this. — Faydbusd to ivu tori va taka yori mo fayasi , the bird . called Faydbusd , or the quick flier (it is the noble falcon) is fleeter than even the hawk. — Kono fitdiva are yori mo nao gakusiya de ari ■), this man is more learned than even he. — IpL % | 7 ^ \ * ft l 3 9 * + ,u 3 ^ i~ S' Sau-mdku no kwa-kiyauva Botan yori ooi-ndru monovd nasi , among the flowers of the vegetable kingdom there is none bigger than the piony. Verbs also, which express a more or a less, such as Masi, Masari, Masa- reri ( l|tt V> c £ ^ ||| ), = to be more, to excel (praestare ) ; Otoreri ( ^ X ^), - to be less, are used in the forming of comparisons; e. g.: Idzxirega nandzini masdru ( MMik) , who is more than you? — Kono kunini masdrite takd- ra no drti kuni ( M J ' -SI = An vM v 9 ' H ) , a country better than this country and l’icli in treasures. — Ware ni masdreri , he has excelled me. — Siro-mayu-kaviko ni masdreru monova nasi, there is nothing, that surpasses the silkworms of white cocoons. — Fitd ni otdru , to be less than others. Remark. When in the saying: „It is better not to go, than to go,” deviating from the usual order of words, according to which one would be obliged to say „ Yukdnu va (the not going) yuku yori (than the going) masi (is better),” is expressed by Yuku yori va yukdnu ga masi , a rhetorical inver- sion takes place, to make it appear, that the predicate „it is better (= Lat. praestat)" is of the most importance. Therefore the subject yukdnu, as a subordinate definition precedes the predicate, but is emphatically cha- racterized by ga, whereas the yuku yori, contributed to the comparison, *) Compare rodriguez Elemens , p. 80. 134 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 25, 26. isolated by va, is placed in front. Compare what is said on this subject, on page 64. The poet supersedes yori va by kara koso or gara koso ; e. g.: Uete miyd ! Fana no sodatanu sato va nasi. Kokoro gara kosd mi va tyasikere '). Plant and look! There is no village where flowers do not come up. My outside is worse than my heart. § 26. The absolute superlative. The absolute superlative is expressed by one of the abverbs, which imply the highest degree of the quality and precede the word expressive of quality. The adverbs are: 1) Fana-fada , or hana-hhda, t ^ , very; old- Japanese Fata-fata, from /afo, yet again. — Fana-fada takaki , very high. — F. sebaki, very narrow. — F. takti- san ndru , very plentiful. — TsUbame tobi-kakeru koto fana-fada fayd-si , the flight of the swallow is very quick. — F. tai-setsu ni bmdvu, to consider of the most importance. 2) Mottomo, Jj|r:P ^ fXj , originally Motomo, utmost, quite. — Aka- kane no nari motto mo yorosiku , itdtte mare nari , as to the standard of copper (the coin) is quite good, it is however extremely rare. 3) Ito, ito-ito, o jj|jj 0 0 i/jg , very. — ItoydsUki, very easy. Itodsiki firne , a very lovely girl. 4) Itatte , a. j , the gerund of itari , = arrive at the place to which one will come; as adverb complete, entire; utmost, highest. — Itatte yordsi , it is quite good. — Itatte faydku , very early. — Sasaki va katatsi itatte tsiisdku site lcoye ooi nari , the wren is in form very small, yet in voice strong. — ...to kokdro-yuru vd makoto ni itatte oroka nari , mean that..., is indeed utterly stupid. Instead of it place the inversion: makoloni oroka no itiri nari, = is indeed the highest point of stupidity, if the logical accent is to be placed on itari. — En-in ainari kino-dokuno itari ni soro, f ij\ l yjf j ^ J/jc ') ^5 ^ 7 ^ ij ~ A o , delay is the summit of vexation. The Chinese 2^ si, = itdtte, also is used to express the superlative, and that in composition with Chinese Words; e. g.: ') A leaf in an album, written by puku-sava, 1802. CHAPTER III. TIIE ADJECTIVE. § 20, 27. 135 si-guku , top-point, utmost. si-zen , highest good, perfectly good. si-beo , excellent. si-you, needful in the highest degree. 5) Moppo (> y which is said to be in use with the signification of „most,” but only at Yedo , is known to us only under the form of Meppou-naru . as synonym of Mono-osdre send, = caring for no danger, fearless, bold. 0) Itsino, — first; Dai-itsino, ^ — ■ -f, = the first. — Tsuruya kita- kuni itsino yoki mindto navi, Tsuruya is the first good (the best) harbour in the northern provinces. — Nippon itsino takelci mono, the bravest man in Japan. On the other hand itsi stands for utsi , = blow, in ltd fay aku, - quick as the lightning. — Ten-ka dai-itsino ydku-siya , the first scholar in the empire. 7) Itsi-ban, — • ^ ^j|: f , - first rank (see § 31. 1)). — Ttsi-ban yorosiki , the very best. 8) Sugurete, ^r_, excelling, surpassing. — Suyitrete medzUrasiki , most in- teresting. 9) Kitsuku , kitsun ( |), heavy , very. — Kitsuu sui mono , something very sour. Very common also, are the following Chinese compounds with jjfc*, Sai, = very, utmost, which express a superlative: fir , uppermost , best. jjj|f £ £ , the highest. ^ r f-p % • middlemost. ^ ^ ^ \ , first; with relation to time, fir , lowest, least. = just now, presently, a few mo- ftr very first, first begin- ments ago. ning. jj|r $ J , most deligent. § 27. The relative superlative. The relative superlative is characterized in that, that the objects surpassed are expressly named, and this naming, whether in the genitive, or in the local, is placed before the word expressive of quality, by way of a definition, and thus subordinate to it. The brighter of (or among) the stars is, after the Japanese manner of speaking, the brightest of (or among) the stars, Fosi no (or Fosi no naka ni) akiraka naru va. Examples. Karasi fazikami va na no tattoki nan , mustard and ginger are the principal ot vegetables ; or : Na no tattoki va karasi fazikami nari , the principal 136 CHAPTER III. THE ADJECTIVE. § 27, 28. among the vegetables are mustard and ginger. — ||| x ^ y pjl £ ^ y ^ ^ [ 4 ] >\s ^ y , Kusuri no naka no masdrcru \ot6reru ] mo?io , the best [the least] among the medicines. H ^ 5ft y Buppoova moro-morono norino nakani motomo sarani sugurete imdsu ’), the Buddha-doctrine is among all doctrines the most excellent. § 28. The excess in a quality is expressed by: Amari, ||^5 ^ . = excess, adv. excessively, too... — Tsikarano amari, excess of strength. — Amari gin , excessive money. — Kore wa amari tsiisai , J|4 ^ >7 ^ 5 y d 2 ) , this is too small. — /fore ted amari nagai 3 * ) , this is too long. — Korewa amari iroga koi '*), this is too dark of color. — Korewa amari dzi yai ga dtsui 5 ) , this is too thick of stuff. Yo-fodo, ^ = excess, excessive, too..., = Amari. — Soredewa yo-fodo takaku nari-masu , f 7 ^ ^ 3 ^cjp * V ^ T ^ X 6 ), then it becomes too high (too dear). — Yo-fodo osoi 7 ), it is too late. ’) Nippon-tci, Vol. 19, page 25 verso. ! ) Shopping -Dialogues , page 2. 3 ) page 8. 5 ) ,, page 24. B ) page 37. *) page 23. 7 ) page 41. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. The Japanese language has its own numerals; but until the introduction of the Chinese system of measures, weights and reckoning of time, the Chinese numerals and the Chinese marks of number came early and generally into use. Thefore one has to do with two sorts of numerals, with the Japanese and with the Chinese. The Japanese are Chinese with Chinese. § 29. The ancient Japanese card UK Fito (F’to, H’to) . . . one. 7 • Fut& (F’ta) two. ^ , Mi three. 37 , Yo four. I itsu five. A , Mu , Muyu six. ~p n , Nana seven. Ya eight. Tbe vulgar man says for Hiio (1) and Kol-ono communication bv oono y. connected with Japanese words, and the inal numbers are: I? \ y, Kokono nine. Too, = once ten. y, so, ten, termination of tens. n , Momo hundred. , ..fo, ..vo, as termination of hundreds. , Tsi thousand. 37 t 2 y 4 *, Yorodzu .... ten thousand. (9) , by way of abbreviation , Hi and Koko also. Oral 138 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 29. These radical forms are used in the forming of compound words in which, according to the principle fixed in § 9. I. A., the idea of number is supposed to be already combined with the object, e. g.: Fit6-vi no fdna , = one day’s flower. — Fito-yo no sake , = one night’s rice-beer, i. e. sake , that is only one night old. — Fito-fdna , one-flowered. Futd-go , a twin. — Fiitd-gokoro , a double heart. — FiUd-nari, an hermaphro- dite. — Futd-oyd , the parents. — Futd-tdbi , twice. — Futd-na no sima , a two- named island. Mi-ka , the day (ka) , which has the number three as characteristic, the third day; also the period of three days ( triduum ). — Mi-ka-tsiiki , = the third-day- moon, the moon of the third day. — Mi-tose, the year three, also the period of three years ( triennium ). — Mi-kusdno kayu , = three-lierbed pap. Fa-mo, the square. — Mu-tose , the year six, also the period of six years. — Afii-tdse no , six yeared. — Ndnd-ydma , the Seven mountains. Used as substantive numerals, the cardinal numbers from 1 to 9 take the suffix tsu, which just as the Chinese numeral-substantive (Ao), with which in the most ancient writings ] ) it is assimilated, means, originally, a piece of bamboo and, in a general sense, in the counting of articles, is taken for ,, piece, number” 2 ). Consequently we have the following compound nouns : Fitu-tsti ( F't6ts\ H't6ts') . . one. Futd-tsil ( F'tats ’) two. Mi-tsu three. Yo-tsit four. Itsu-tsu ( Its'ts ’) five. Mu-tsu six. Ndnd-tsii seven. Yd-tsti eight. Kdkdno-tsU nine. These numerals answer to the question: Iku-tsu (^ v), how many pieces? Fitd-tsu-fa , a single leaf 3 ). — MU-tsu-hdna , or Mu-tsu no liana , flowers to the number of six, being Mulsu characterized by the genitive termination no as a noun used attributively. ') Nippon- H. v ) When , in 1857, I published the Froeve eener Japatuchv Spraakkumt vrw don MR cubtius, I con- sidered this tsu as tiic old genitive termination. 3 ) The name of Acrostichum Lingua. CHAPTER IV. NUMKHALS. $ 29. 139 By combination with ari or on (= to be), Fitd , Fata , Mi and Yo form the words Fitori ( /fly f - ) , Futari (ZL' Mit&ri ( — ^ if )i and Yottari, = individual, alone; — pair, both; — triad, three together; — four; — nouns, which are only applicable to persons, and thus are used as substantives, as well as attributively. — Kun-siva sono fitori wd tsutsitsimit , the philosopher attends to his own person, himself alone. — Iku-tari, how many persons? The tens: 10, 20 to 90, consist of the cardinal numbers followed by jf , so. which means ten (just as ..ty in twenty). Mi-no , three ten, - thirty. If they are used as substantive numerals, they take as suffix, (instead of y , tsu) , tsi. which is only a modification of tsu , and for the sake of euphony also changes to dzi. Mi-so-dzi , = thir-ty-n umber. Mi-so-dzi no liana, flowers to the number of thirty. Let this Jr be distinguished from F zi , for Misozi means the age of 30 years (=^ a -f- y |J| ^ The tens are: Radical forms. K y , Too, also To, contracted from F"tdso, - once ten. (y yy , twenty, not in use.) i. y , Mi-so , thirty. 3 y , Yo-so , forty. J y V , Itsfi-so ( its-so ) , commonly : J y , I-so , fifty. A y , Mu-so , sixty. i~ ' y , Kana-so, seventy. y , Yd-so , eighty. J \ J y , Kokond-so , ninety. Compounds with tsi. h y f , Tod-tsi, one ten. y y J- , Futd-tsi , ) > two tens. n 5* > Fdtu-tsi , | L y f. Mi-so-dzi, number of thirty. 3 7 f , Yo-so-dzi, number of forty. 3 y f , is-sd-dzi ( its-sd-dzi ) , number of fifty. A y f- •. Mu-sd-dzi , number ot sixty. T i y J 1 , Nand-so-dzi, „ seventy. -\yf, Yd-sd-dzi, number of eighty. ^ \ y y f , Kokond-so-dzi, „ ninety. t ^ , Momo , a hundred; in combinations cfe, -fo, -vo, -ho; thence Yo-vo, 400. — I -vo , 500, — Ya-vo, 800; others we have not met with. Tsi, thousand; J- ^ , Tsi-tsi , thousands. y 2 Jr ' , Futa-tsi-tsi , two thousand. — T ' Jr , Nand-tsi, nine thousand. 3 u y" , 1 ord-dzu , ten thousand. — 4: •» Jr , Momo-tsi, a hundred thousand. Y ■> 3 try", Momo-yorddzu , a hundred times ten thousand, or a million. Yavo-yorddzu , eight hundred times ten thousand, or eight millions. 140 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 29. The Japanese numbers J/omo, Tsi and Yorddzu are generally used in a ge- neral sense for many and all; Momo-kUsa, all plants; Tsi-tose, many years; Yordclzu no mono , all things; Momo-tsi-dori , all birds '). If a numeral precedes another numeral in its radical form , then it is the attri- butive definition of such: Mi-yotsu is thrice four; Miso-yotsu, thirty times four. Two and thirty, on the other hand, is expressed by Misodzi amari (or simply mari) fiitdtsu , i. e. a number of thirty plus a number of two. One counts thus : Eleven Too-tsi mari fitotsu. Twelve ,, „ fiitdtsu etc. One and twenty, Fatatsi mdri fitotsu etc. Mu-sd-tsi mdri mtitsu no kuni ( A -J-* ^ ^ f ^ 7 [||| Z ) , the six sixty and countries. — Ya-fo yorodzu no kami , eight hundred times ten thou- sand gods. The saying: „It is more than 1792470 years, since the heavenly parents descended from heaven,” we find in the ancient chronicle Nippon-ki III. 2 verso, expressed by: +! i&Tf r -5 -b; m O Tt +1 v- * 7 I s* t 7 ') n % ■ 3 , a | r t- 7 v ') T 4 W| E t 7 -■{ ') ill mi Amatsu mi-oyd no ama-kiiddri-masite ydri ko- nokata. Momo yorodzu tose (100 X 10000 years) amari ncindso ydrodzu tose (70 X 10000 years) amari ko- kono ydrodzu tose (9 X 10000 years) amari futdtsi tose (2000 years) amari yo-vo tose (400 years) amari nandso 5 ) tose (70 years) amari tosi dri. The numerals in tsu and tsi serve as nouns substantive and are also used, with or without the genitive termination no, as attributives. Kono simavami fitotsuni site , omd yotsu ari , = this island (the island of the four countries, Si-kdkit) is of body a unit, and has of faces four in number. ■) Momo-tsi-dori is also the name of (lie thrush , lliat imitates the voice of all birds, h The original , printed with some worn out forms , has nana instead of nanaso. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 30. 141 § 30. The Chinese cardinal numbers, after the Japanese pronunciation. The first column contains the number in full. two. three. four. 1 A o l O r *7 » Itsi, Itsu (<<«’) M „ * J Ni * ^ i San at. w*. Si ') IE.. Go (vto, nyo) it. I . a 9 o ') 7 > Roku, Riku #. -b X > Sitsi (s'tsi, at Yedo h'tsi) »i. A?. F&tsi (hat si) a. %% a ? Kiu, Ku +f. S>' 7 2 ). Ziyu (at Yedo dziu , dziu , (/!/, Eng. Wfi Fiyak’ (hyak') "ft. Sen Ho V ’ Man (ban) The number of the tens, hundreds, thousands and tens of thousands is more definitely determined by the units preceding them, thus: 4 y 2 ?x, Ts-ziyu , ten. = ^ : 3-, Ni-ziyu , twenty. if £?x, San-ziyu , thirty. 2/ £?x, Si-ziyu , forty. X' 2?X, Go-ziyu , fifty. n ? 2?x, Fok'-ziyu , sixty. Sitsi- (h'tsi) ziyu, seventy. Fatsi-ziyu , eighty. Ku-ziyu , ninety. 4 ? y’-y ?, Ip-piyak', one hundred. — \1'\’ Ni-fiyak', two hundred, if > LT'-Y ? , Sam-biyak', three hundred. 1/ Si-fiyak', four hundred. x' y -V Z , Go-fiyak \ five hundred, n y s -\’ Z , Rop-ptyak', six hundred. i/ y ~y Z , Sitsi-fiyak', seven hundred. £ -y Z , Fap-piyak', eight hundred. Z Z i Ku-ftyak', nine hundred. 4 y if Ts-sen , one thousand. — if s', Ni-se?i etc., two thousand. 'j f ty, Itsi-man , once ten thousand. — -ry, Ni-man , twice ten thousand. Ziyu-man , 10 x 10000. — i/ x -r X, Ni-ziyu-man , 20 X 10000. y -y ^ ^ ■>', Fiyak-man , a million. — y “Y 4? V £ / , Ni-fiyak-man , two mill. *) The muneral 5'i (4) is mostly avoided in composition with nouns, and superseded by the Japanese nu- meral Fo because also means „ to die.” ■) The written form t 7 would , in all respects, answer rather to the Yedo pronunciation, is however, in 142 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 30, 31. By the suffixing additional numbers all possible numbers are expressed; thus: Ziyu man itsi, 100001. — Ts-sen fap-piyak' roku ziyu roku nen, the year 18G6. The number is intended here as an attributive definition belonging to this year. If however the meaning is 1866 years, then the number is preceded by the ad- verbial definition Oyoso, (pron. oyosso), = in sum, together, and the number itself followed by a numeral substantive (see § 37). ru ir # ' v , Oyoso roku ka nen no aida, = within six years. The necessity of taking up oyoso in the translation, naturally disappears in every language, that has a plural. To a Japanese word, the Chinese numerals are connected by the genitive termination no. — Ziyu ni no iro , twelve sorts. § 31. Ordinal numerals, the first, the second. As the most in use are: • 1) The Chinese numbers Itsi , Ni, San etc., followed by 3|:<5 ban , that means watch, and number. To the question Iku-ban, = what number?, answer — * % •to' l ’ Itsi-ban , number one , i. e. the first. ~ 1) , Ni-ban , number two, i. e. the second. — t, Sum-ban , number three. DtJ 3 ^ ? Yo-ban , number four , exceptionally for Si-ban. 2) The Chinese numbers, preceded by ^ Dai, = series; thus: 4$ ^ — '-f ’ Dai-itsi , = one according to order, i. e. the first. — Nippon-ki ken daini ziyu sitsi , = Japanese chronicle, volume 27, literally: 27 according to the order of the volumes. yj&i ZEl t- “jp Dai-san si, the third son. 3) The compounds Itsi-ban, Ni-ban, Sam-ban , etc., preceded by 'j Dai; thus Dai-itsi-ban , Dai-ni-ban , Dai-sam-ban, first, second, third. — Dai-yo-ban, fourth, exceptionally for Dai-si-ban; so also Dai-ziyu-yo-ban (14th ) , Dai-ni-ziyu- yo-ban (24th ). With the genitive termination no, these three sorts of compounds become attributive. If only two objects are to be counted, the difference is made by £ Sen and w 3 6ro, before and after. If the arrangement is limited to three classes, Japan itself, nut yet adopted. — By a mutation of the French letters j and y , in the Supplement to kodr. Or. from page 15 you is generally found improperly for jou (ten). CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 31 , 32. 143 they are distinguished as the topmost, middle and lowest, by v Ziyoo , Ppl £ JsiM and ^ (ze '). or as foremost, next and last, by Saki, Tstigi and .4fo or ust’ro. — v ^ ^ |[ o fjj £ ^ ^ ^ | is the seed of the first, second, third quality. The first, with reference to the time, is expressed by t\y fdtsu , or m y fazimeno , = first: Fatsa-mono, the firstlings, the first fruits; Fazimeno tosi , the first year (of a period). § 32. The iterative numerals, once, twice etc., are: Japanese, to the question: Jku-tabi , ^7 how often? Fitd-tabi , once. Futd-tabi , twice. ^fi-tabi, thrice. Yo-tabi , four times. Itsii-tabi , five times. Mti-tabi, six times. Nana-tabi , sevpn times. Ya-tabi , eight times. Kokono-tabi , nine times. To-tabi , ten times. In numbers higher than 10 the Chiuese numbers also are compounded with /afo ; thus Ziyu-itsi-tabi , eleven times, etc. Chinese, to the question: Nan-do , -ferf £ ^ **, how often? *) — ' f J?< K i Itsi-do , once. ‘ ~ h ", Ni-do, twice. — t $£ H . ism-do, thrice. J)fJ 3 ^ K , Yo-do, four times. Si-do , 4°. 7r. H . Go-do , five times. >*> 7 ^ h \ Rok'do , six times. h , S itsi-do, seven times. A? Jit Fatsi-do , eight times. jl ? H . Ku-do , nine times. ^ h \ Ziyu-do , ten times. -}-*£ — ■ ^ H , Ziyu-itsi-do , eleven times. etc. Momo-tabi, ^ a hundred times: many times. — Tsi-tabi , ^ a thousand times; many times. — Tsi-tabi momo-tabi , Wl SI. a thousand times and a hundred times; often. — Tabi-tabi , SI V { , as often. Ta&t, with which the Japanese cardinal numbers form a compound woi’d. means journey; Tabi-bitd , a traveller. ') The yoiui Kami, Naka, Simu , is in the case in question, according to the oral communication of a uative of Yedo, there at least, not in use. Also how many degrees; Itsi-do, 1°; Ni-do, 2°, etc. 144 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 32, 33, 34. — v PH 3 He ' ’ ^ an y° ' ^ iree to four times ; San si do , 3° to 4°. By suffixing Me ( f=j *), which means eye and, figuratively, mark, these iterative numerals become ordinal numbers, which with the genitive inflection no are also attributive. — Iku-tabi-me , ^ j=j x , what number of times? — Fit6-tabi-me , or Chinese — ■ ^ F |p *, Itsi-do-me, the first time. — To-tabi- me no hanasi , a story for the tenth time. § 33. The doubling or multiplying numerals, single, twofold etc., consist of the Jap. noun , ve or he, vulgo X? ye or e, = fold (German fach), preceded by the Japanese cardinals. To the question Iku-ye ( t, J|f x ), = how manifold ? answer : Fito-ye , single. F'td-ye , two-fold. Mi-ye , three-fold. Yo-ye, four-fold. Itsu-ye, five-fold. Mti-yd , ! six-fold. Mti-vd (obsol.), ) Nand-ye , seven-fold. Ya-ye , eight-fold. Kokono-ye, nine-fold. To-ye, ten-fold. Fatd-ye (obsol.) , twenty-f. Fit6-ye no fdna , a single flower {flos simplex). — Ya-ye no fdna , ail eight-fold, i. e. a full flower ( flos plenus). The counting by pairs is expressed by the Chinese -fe f (also ), bai, = double, pair, in connection with Chinese numerals, thus: — 10 f, It®- bai, one (or a) pair. JHJ 3 'fg- f, 10*1 Ni bai, two pair. f if) — f i 0 San bai, three pair. v if)f, Instead of bai, £ Soo, pair is also used. — -i, Fo fecw , four pair. Ziyu bai, ten pair. Fiyaku-bai , a hundred pair. Is-soo, one pair. § 34. For sort numbers, as one sort, two sorts etc., serve the Chinese numbers compounded with the Chinese siyu (pron. su), which means sort, kind. They are, after the Yedo pronunciation: q p i/ x , Is-su one sort. “ i/ 3 . , Ni-su two sorts. if & 1/ 2. , San-su three sorts. 3 1/ 3 . , Y6- (not Si-) su. . four sorts. 3" lx 3 . , Go-su five sorts. o Z 1/3- , Rok'-su six sox-ts. 1/ f 1/ x , IFtsi-su seven sorts. /-»-f 2/3., Hdtsi-su eight sorts. 1 / 3 . , Ku-su nine sorts. h 1/ 3. , Td-su , etc. . . . ten sorts. Ren-ziyak' va, wo no nagaki to mizikaki to no ni-siyu ari, of the bird Ren-ziyak (Bornbyciphora) there a two sorts : as well a long- as a short-tailed. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 34 , 35 . 145 With the termination no these substantives are used attributively : San-siyu no sin-too , the spirit-service of three kinds. § 35. To express the distributive numbers, one at a time, two at a time, etc. are used: 1) the Jap. adverb dzu-tsu, pron. dzts, = at a time, preceded by the Jap. numerals Fitu-tsu , Futa-tsu (= one piece, two pieces), or also by the Chinese numerals in connection with the object counted. Dziitsu ') is expressed by To the question ikit-tsu dzUtsU , how many pieces at a time? answer: Fitd-tsu dziitsu , — ■ ^ y ^ 'J, one piece at a time. Futa-tsu dziitsu , ‘ ^ £rjj 'if, two pieces at a time. Nava wo futd-sudzi dziitsu fdru , ropes are spun ( fdru ) , two pieces at a time. As it appears, here the accusative navawo (rope) is the objective direct to faru , whereas futd-sudzi dzUtsil , by way of adverbial definition, is placed between the object and verb. — — • ;El> h , Itsi-nitsini san do dziitsu, twice or thrice a day each time. — In accordance with this is the saying: Ano otoko no kodomo ni Too hiydku ( ) wo itsi-mai dzutsii 0 yari nasdre * 2 ) , = give to these boys a Too hiydku , one piece at a time. — * f ^ n -J- -r ZL ~ )%, v ^ % x , Fito-iro ziyu-ni tan dziitsu ari-mdsu , of one and the same color, twelve pieces at a time are at hand. — Zl = ^3 > y\[ f ; ZLf i£j A r i ziyoo fassak dziitsu no futd-kire 3 ) , two pieces of 2 ziyoo 8 saA: at a time (- 28 Jap. feet). One, two, three or four at a time, when persons are spoken of, is expressed by Fitori dziitsu , Fiitari dziitsu , Mitari dziitsu , Yottari dziitsu. — I kutdri dzutsii , = how many persons at a time? (see § 29.) — Ko fimeni fitori dzutsii nontaru fiindkatd roku-ziyu fodo kogi-kitdri , sailor to the number of sixty, seated one at a time in a small boat, came rowing. *) The common written form ^ f is inexact , as it , according to the rule given on page 1 1 , answers to dzudzu. Misled hy indistinct examples in hadly printed Japanese hooks we have in our Spraakkunst of 1857, page 64 improperly adopted Filo-dzudzu instead of FUo-tsu dzutsu. 2 ) R. brown. Colloquial Japanese, N°. 171. — Too hiyak, i. e. „ a hundred (cash) worth ,” inscrip- tion on the new Jap. bronze coin of the period Ten-loo (vulgo Tempo). 3 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 33. 10 146 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 35, 36. 2) In the same manner, instead of dztitsU Ateni (^f), the modal of Ate is used, which means an object, that is proportioned to another, and fully answers to it in respect of value or quality. We consider it equivalent to „per ration, in proportion.” Iku-tsu ate ni , ij|| ^ fgj 7 ? _ , how many pieces per ration ? Fit6-tsu ateni, — j|fj 7 ^tir =■' one pi ece P er ration. Fiitd-tsu ate ni , two pieces at a time. § 36. Fractional numbers or broken numbers are expressed by means of Chinese ciphers and numerals. The denominator as genitive, indifferently with, or without no, precedes the numerator, thus 1 7 pg: fry Kin-nyoono si-bu itsi, or si-bu no itsi, i. e. one of the four parts of a Riyoo gold, = a fourth Riyoo or \ koban. #5 ftl — t ft 7 ' PP ft 7 —A X.* ft 7 —A _JU a 7 ft 7 ' -A -fa* ft 7 '% » A ? ft 7 ' ft 7 . Y ■f » ft 7 ' ft 7 ' wi ft 7 ' -A ft 7 ' ’ Y ■f Tit ft 7 ' .Y ■f Tit ft 7 ' Ham-bun, = the half part, the half. Sam-bu itsi, a third (part). Si-bu itsi, a fourth. Go-bu itsi, a fifth. Rokti-bu itsi, a sixth. S'itsi-bu itsi, a seventh. Fdtsi-bu itsi , an eighth. Ku-bu itsi, a ninth. Ziyu-bu itsi, a tenth. Ziyu-itsi-bu itsi, an eleventh. Fiyaku-bu itsi, a hundredth. Sen-bu itsi, a thousandth. Itsi man-bu itsi , a ten thousandth. Itsi man-bu san , three ten thousandths. In broken numbers ft is generally read bu instead of bun , and therefore often , but improperly superseded by -ij; 7 , bu , the name of a superficial measure. Mi-tsu itsi, Mi-tsuni means one of three, two of three, properly of a number of tln’ee, being the denominator, which is expressed by a Japanese nu- CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 30, 37. 147 meral, the partitive genitive of the numerator expressed by a Chinese numeral. They count further: Yo-tsu itsi , one of four. Itsu-tsu itsi , one of five. Mu-tsu itsi , one of six. Nana-tsu itsi, one of seven. Ya-tsu itsi, one of eight. Kokono-tsu itsi, one of nine. Kokono-tsu fatsi, eight of nine. The division of a hundred by ten is called Wari, , = splitting. — — * If. ^l] tp Itsi wari, = 10 per cent (10°/ 0 ). Ni, san, si, go wari, = 20, 30, 40, 50°/ 0 . Ku wari, ziyu wari , = 90 °/ 0 , 100°/ 0 . Bu, vulgo chiefly is called the tenth part of Wari. — ft 7 , Itsi bu, = 1 per cent. Ni , san, si, go bu, = 2, 3, 4, 5 °/„. Rin , 1J, , is the tenth part of Bu. — * "£ £ , Ttsi rin , = a tenth per cent (jVVo)- And so further: Ni, san, si, go rin, = ( 2 0 -, , 3 S , A, A 0 / o- P5J ^ W'J M 3l 3 ^ 7 ^ t 'l , Si-icari go-bu san-rin , = 45,3 °/ 0 . - The definition, that the import duty of certain articles shall be paid for with 35 percent, in the Regulations , under which the Netherlands-Trade shall be car- ried on in Japan, belonging to the Treaty of the 18th Aug. 1859, edition of the Japanese text page 25 verso line 2, is expressed by " — W»J 3 l ^ ' M ± ? A Migiva san wari go bu no un-ziyau wo komu besi, i. e. on the said articles a duty of 35°/ 0 shall be paid. § 37. Numeral-substantives, or Numeratives. Since the Japanese language, like the Chinese, is deficient in the gramma- tical distinction of singular and plural (see page 53 § 5), to distinguish what is enumerated as something in the singular, or in the plural as a repetition of singular objects, it must have recourse to certain names, which, joined to a numeral, express that the object, which is to be counted, is present as a unity so many times, as the numeral denotes. For „one cannon, six cannons,” the Japanese uses an expression answering to: „one-piece cannon, six-piece cannon,” in which case „ one-piece” and „ six-piece” have the value of an attri- butive definition to „ cannon,” or, in its place, is found: „ cannon one-piece, cannon six-piece.” The number of suchlike auxiliary names in Japanese is greater, than is really necessary. Considering objects in respect of their outward appearance, they are counted according to one or another noticeable cha- racteristic, as stags, by heads, — fish, by their tails, — brooms and objects with 148 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 37. handles, by the handles. Hence has arisen a distribution of articles into classes, which are denominated either with Japanese or with Chinese names, and are usually indicated with Chinese characters. The Japanese names of classes are associated with Japanese numerals, the Chinese with Chinese. We have thus for „one piece of wood” either the Japanese expression — • £ Fitd- motono ki , or the Chinese — * i 7fcU Ippon (or also Ippon no) ki. A list of these classes has been taken up in some Japanese Encyclopedias, under the head of Tsui-miyau, i. e. names which are used for pendants or matches; a denomination, which very justly describes the cha- racter of these words. The Japanese-Chinese dictionaries also contain lists of these words, being amassed, the Japanese under Fitd (one), the Chinese under — • ^ o — * i, , Itsi , Itsu , but at the same time being mixed with words which indicate an idea of measure or of a quantity, as one grain of rice, one bale of rice. As the last mentioned properly belong to the names of the objects contained in the dictionaries, we limit ourselves here to those auxiliary names, which are alone used for fixing the idea of number, and them we divide into Japanese and Chinese. I. Japanese Numeratives. 1. Fasira, ^ post, columm, for Kamis or gods of the Japanese myths. Jku-fasira , yjv£ ^ , how many (gods)? — Fitd- fasira no kami , one god. — Mi-fasirano kami , three gods. — Kono futd-fasira va kaz&no kami nan , both these are wind-gods. Futa-fasira , here used substantively, includes alone the idea of „both.” Applied to statues of Buddhist saints , Fasira is expressed by "II. = statue. M y in 1] 1} M f c Hir 1 )* one bronze statue of s&kya- Buddha. The patrician compares himself with a tree ( old-Jap. ke) , and counts the people, with whom he does not come in contact, as herbs ( Iql jp. 2. Kutsi, P ?. nth, for the number of souls. Also MUnd, breast. 3. Kasira , t', head, for stags and wild boars. — Sikd mi-kastra , or Mi- kas tr a no sikd , three stags. ') Nippon - ki , XIX, page 25 verso. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 37. 140 4. Fami, bit, for reined horses. — M'mano fito- (vulg . fitutsu) fami, one reined horse. 5. Moto, b ° 5 pale, seat, for hunting-hawks, which are held on perches; for trees. 6. Fa, Wa, *, feather, wing, for birds. — Kid no fito-va , one phea- sant. Compare page 130, 7. 7. O, tail, for fish. — Koiftitu-o , two carp. 8. Ori, fragment, piece, for perch ( Tavi) , which are offered as a present, and from modesty are called a small piece. 9. Sudzi, line (from sumi , ink and cfei, way), for things that are long and thin. — Nava , TadzUna , Tsuru , fito-sudzi , one line, one rein, one tendon, a girdle. 10. Fira, ijJ| 3j 0 ^ , spot, stretched, for things which are flat and even. Osi-gava f it 6-fir a , one piece of leather. 11. No, r|jg y , breadth, for rolls of writing. — Maki-mono f itd-no . one roll. 12 Ma, M room, for apartments. — Ne-dokdro f itu-ma , one sleeping- apartment. 18. Tom&ya, ^ J|| v , vulgo Tomai , for warehouses. — /G, then the numeral unites itself more closely to it, and the final consonant undergoes an assimilation, which has been already illustrated on page 19. Itsn-k . . . becomes Ik-k... San-f. . . becomes Sam-b Itsu-s . . . Is-s . . . Ziyu-k... ,, Zik-k . Itsu-t . . . It-t... Ziyu-s ... „ Zis-s . Itsu-f . . . ?? Jp-p... Ziyu-t... „ Roku-f . . Rop-p... Ziyu-f . . . „ The combinations subject to assimilation are to be known by the numeral — \ e. g. — >1y jg*, pron. Ik-ka. No assimilation takes place, when the enumerative noun begins with one of the impure sounds g, z , d, which are pronounced as ng, nz , nd, or also with m, n, r, y and w. The characteristic of this class is the form — *$; e - g- — Itsi-mai. To the Chinese Enumerative nouns most in use belong: 1. ^=, Nin ( — % A 7 , ) , man, for persons. — Av’ Itsi-nin , = the Only, is applied to the Emperor (Mikado) alone. Bon-si ni-nin , two Bonzes. — vj? ^ -j- \ ^ 3 A v > Siya-mon ziyu yo nin , ten Shamans. — San-nin no onna , three women. — Go-nin no kwai-kokU-nin , five foreigners; Kwai-lcokU-nin go-nin , foreigner five persons. The conversational language uses for one, two, three or four persons the words Fitdri, Futari, Mitdri and Yottdri (see page 145). — Fitorino akindo , one merchant. — FUtdrino sUi-fu , two sailors. 2. jgj * „ ^ , by abbreviation or , Ka ( — * iy j|fj *) , the most gene- rally used enumerative noun, applicable to objects, which it is wished to cha- racterize as individuals, as a piece, answers to the Japanese tsu (page 138). The counting according to the Yedo-pronunciation is: lk-ka , d ij 1. Ni-ka , 2. San-ka , ->)- 3. Si-ka , l/ij 4. Go-ka , 3"# .... 5. Rolc-ka , n y dJ ... 6. Hit si-ka, # ... 7. Ilatsi-ka , f^-^pdJ ... 8. Ku-ka , ^ dJ 9. Zik-ka , F-V dJ ... 10. Ziu-ik-ka , £? i -f J? # . 1 1. Ziu-ni-ka , x “ # . . 12. — Jk-ka-siyo, a district (by counting). — — sfyo (ts-so) , one and the same district. — — ^ ^ (3 jji, San-ka nitsi , three days. — — * 0 San-zitsU , the day three, the third day. — (ZE] y A ? ^ Sikano Dai-zi , the four great temples. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 37. 151 To show that a quantity counted is spoken of, the word Oyoso ( /pf), pronounced dyosso, = in sum, together, is generally placed before the num- ber. — /t/? + b~ J~i Oyoso ziyu-ka getsti , ten months. — /L I — * y pjj r , Oyoso ik-ka nen no aida , the interval of one year (in counting), i. e. a year long. 3- El- 7E- j;. Fiki, Hiki ( — '1 y (7C^), objects, which are paired or given in pairs , as horses , horned cattle , some sorts of fish , such as perch ( Tai) , woven stuffs etc. The counting at Yedo is: lp-piki . . . . . 1. Go-hiki. . . . . 5. Ku-liiki ( s'ki ) . 9. Hiap-pi-ki 100. Ni-ldki . . . 9 R6p-piki . . . . 6. Zib-biki . . .*. 10. Sem biki. . 1000. Sam-bikl. . . . . 3. S'tsi-luki . . . 7. V Ziu ip-pikl . . 11. Si-hiki. . . . . . 4. Hdtsi-lnki . . 8. Ziu-ni hiki . . 12. M 'md ip-piki , one horse. — Sam-biki usi , three oxen. — Kinu ip-piki , one piece of silk, of the length of 58 Jap. feet, or two pieces of 28 feet each. * tE Fa, vulgo Wa ( — ■ i « ''), handful, bunch. Budoo, Dai-kon, Kari-kusd, Warn itsi-ica , a bunch of grapes, radishes, hay, straw. At Yedo they count: Itsi-ica. . . . . 1. Si-ica . . . . . . 4. Hitsi-rca . . . . 7. Zip-pa 10. Ni-wa . . . . . 2. Go-u-a . . . . . 5. Hatsi-u'a . . . . 8. V Ziu itsi-ica {ip- Sam-ba . . . . 3. Roku-wa . . . . 6. Ka-ica . . . . . 9. P a ?) 11. This enumerative noun is applied to birds also (except birds of prey), and then expressed by fT. Fa , vulgo Wa , feather. — Oo-sagi itsi-wa , a heron (not to be confounded with usdgi , = hare). — Ni-wa sira-sagi , two white herons. Sam-ba fibari , three larks. 5. Bi ( — ‘If. J^ 1 ^), tail, for fish. Koi, Fasu, Funa itsi-bi , ni-bi , carp, white fish, stone carp one piece, two pieces. 6. pj Ku ( — pj 7 ), mouth, for pots and pans. vulgo ^ , Fai, Hai ( — ■ i U y), a saucer as a measure of what is drank; also a numeral-substantive for muscles. People count: Ip-pai . 1. Rop-pai. . . 6. Ziu ip-pai . 11. Ni-ziu ip-pai 21. Ni-hai . 2. H'tsi-liai . . 7. Ziu ni-hai . 12. San-zip-pai. . 30. San-bai . . . . . 3. Hatsi-liai . . 8. Ziu san-bai. 13. Si zip-pai . . 40. Si-hai . 4. Ku-hai . . . 9. V Ziu si-hai. . 14. Rok zip-pai . 60. Go-hai . 5. Zip-pai . . . 10. Ni-zip-pai . 20. Hiap-pai. . . 100. 152 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 37. Midzu ip-pai , a saucer or a glass of water. — Tsa ni hai , two cups of tea. 8. ■ Mai ( — '% handle, anything single, leaf, for things thin and flat, as boards, paper, prints, coined silver, some sorts of fish etc. 9- Fon, Hon ( — '1y 2{£ £), stem, stalk, handle, for trees, plants, in general things long and slender', which have the property of length, as a pencil ( Fude ), fan ( Oogi) , spoon (Tsiya-siyaku) , whip (Mutsi) , needles (Fan), salmon (Sake), etc. At Yedo, they count: Ip'-pon . . . . . 1. H'tsi-lion . . . 7. Ziu sam-bon . 13. Ni-ziu-ni lion 22. Ni-hon . . . . . 2. Hatsi-hon. . . 8. V Ziu si-hon . . 14. San-zip-pon . 30. Sam-bon. . . . . 3. Ku-hon . . . . 9. Ziu go-hon . . 15. Si-zip-pon . . 40. Si-hon .... . . 4. Zip-pon. . . . 10. Ziu rop-pon . 16. Si-ziu ip-pon . 41. Go-hon . . . . . 5. -Zm ip-pon . . 11. Ni- zip-pon . . 20. Hiap-pon. . . 100. Rop-pon. . . . . 6. Ziu ni lion . . 12. Ni- ziu ip-pon 21. Hiak ip-pon. 101. 10. Tan ( — ), a folded piece, for silk and cotton goods. Yulgo K5. sometimes ?. also. In answer to the question Nan dan ( MtK5h how many pieces? the manner of counting is: It-tan . . . . . . 1 . Go-tan . . . . . 5. Zit-tan . . . . 10. Si-zit-tan. . . 40. Ni-tan. . . . . . 2. Rok-tan. . . . . 6. Ziu-it-tan. . . 11. Si-ziu it-tan. 41. San-dan. . . . . 3. Il'tsi-tan. . . . 7. Ni-zit-tan. . . 20. Hiak-tan. . . 100. Si-tan . . . . . . 4. Hatsi-tan. . . . 8. Ni-ziu it-tan. 21. Sen-tan . . . 1000. | — * iy ^ , Kinu it-tan , one piece of silk. — ^ / Zl - Nuno ni- tan , two pieces of hempen cloth. — > IZ5 / jElv piece-wares three pieces. 11. Tsoo ( — >1y ^|), handle, for tools with handles. Nomi it-tsoo, a chisel. So also Kiri , borer; Yasuri , file; Teppoo, gun; Naginata , pike; Sumi, East-Ind. ink; Roo , wax; Soku , flat candlestick. 12. Fei, Hei ( — stem, handle, for pikes and articles with handles. 13. Yoo ( — the middle, the waist, for swords, which are stuck in the girdle. Tatsi , Katana , Waki-sasi itsi-yoo , one sword with belt, one large, one small sabre. Utsiwo, Yebira itsi-yoo , one quiver. 14. ( — ‘-v EnLiO’ cover i f° r h a t s (kasa), umbrellas and parasols (kara-kasa). They count as with Ik-ka: Tk-kai , 1. Ni-kai , 2. Zik-kai , 10. jVt- zik-kai , 20. Sen-gai, 1000. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. § 37. 153 15. jjipv, Kiyaku, Kiak ( — -i, v), foot, for articles of furniture having feet. Tsilkue , or Keu-soh ik-kiak , one desk. Siyoo-gi san-kiak , three couches. 16. Tso ( — t #J). swing, for trunks and traveling-articles, which are carried hanging on a stick. Nonmono it-tso, a litter or sedan chair. Naga- bitsu or Naga-motsi ni-tso , two traveling trunks. 17. Jjj^, soo ( —1> j®?). vessel, for ships. Counting is done: Is-soo . 1. Go-soo . . . . . 5. Kti-soo. . . . . 9. Ni-zis-soo . 20. Ni-soo . 2. Rokit-soo . . . . 6. Zis-soo . . . . 10. San-zis-soo . 30. San-zoo 3. H'tsi-soo . . . . 7. V Ziu is-soo. . . 11. Si-zis-soo . . 40. Si-soo . 4. Ilas-soo. . . . . 8. Ziu-ni-soo. . . 12. HiakU-soo . 100. Is-soo-fiini , one ship. Is-soo gun-kan , one war-ship. Ko-bune is-soo, one boat. 18. Jfljv. Riyoo ( — ijjj^v), a pair of wheels, for carriages. Kuruma itsi- riyoo , one wagon. 19. ^ f , Kwan ( — ^ ',')> roll, for writings and stuff, which are rol- led up. Siyo(so)-motstt ik-kwan , a roll of writing. 20. Fuku ( — '1y breadth, for piece-goods, pictures etc. 21. j£jj] Ziku ( — 'If. ijijj]^), axle, for pictures, which are hung on rollers. Kake-mono itsi-ziku , a hanging piece. 22. ]Sj*, Men ( — ■ ^ ]§f*), face, for mirrors, flags, fiddles, drums. Ka- gami itsi-men , a looking glass. 23. ff-$, Sats’ ( — volume, for books. ls-sats' no so-mots , one vo- lume. Hon ni-sats' , two volumes. 24. Tsuu ( — '1y for open letters, written declarations, proofs of receipt etc. They count: It-tsuu. . . . . . 1. Si-tsuu . . . . 4. Ziu-it-tsuu . . 11. Ni-tsuu . . . . . 2. Rok' tsuu. . . 6. Ni-zit-tsuu . . 20. San tsuu . . . . 3. Zit-tsuu. . . . 10. Ni-ziu it-tsuu 21. . \ ^ It-tsuu no so zioo , or garni , one letter. '2 m San-zit-tsuu . 30. Si-zit-tsuu . . 40. Hiak'-tsuu . . 100. \ , So-kan, or Te- % If?’ or bR? two recei P ts - — * xm ; SR *r Lf r Hrj T ^ > 25. Fuu ( — ‘i, seal, for sealed letters. They count: Ip-puu . . . . . 1. Go-fuu. . . . 5. Ku-fuu . . . . 9. Ni-ziu-ip-puu 21. Ni-fuu . . . . . 2. Rok-puu . . . 6. Zip-puu. . . . 10. San-zip-puu . 30. San-puu. . . . . 3. H'tsi-fuu . . 7. Ziu-ip-puu . . 11. Hiak-fuu . . .100. Si-fuu. . . . . . 4. Hatsi-fuu . . 8. Ni-zip-puu. . 20. 154 CHAPTER IY. NOTATION OF TIME. § 38. — T Ip-puno so-kan or te-gami, one sealed letter. 26. Soku ( — My >^ 7 )? foot, for shoes. — Tabi is-sokii, one pair of stockings. NOTATION OF TIME. § 38. Enumeration of years. Year, Japanese h 2 /, Tosi, old-Japanese fi'-C, Tost!, Chinese Nen. 1. The enumeration of years in pure Japanese is limited, on the question: Iku tosi ( iy £) , how many years ? , to : t ^ Nana tosi, seven years. /V Yd tdsi, eight years. Kokdno tdsi 1 ), nine years. -J- h 4jS £, To tdsi , ten years. ^ £, Momo tdsi, a hundred years. Tsi tdsi, a thousand years. — • ^ Fitd tdsi, a full year. Futa tose , two years. — £ Mi tosi, three years. JJtJ 3 £, Yo tdse, four years. Tt X 4^ £, itsii tose, five years. 4£.£, Jii< six years. 2. The Chinese enumeration of years , on the question : ■Ht T,, Nan-nen, how many years? — ‘If. Itsi-nen , or — My flfj * Ik-ka-nen , a year. ~ 4j£f^, Ni-nen , „ ~~ t . ~ * 4£f;, Ni-ka-nen, two years. ~~~ v ^ ^ 1 nen , „ ~ t |f|* San-ka-nen , three v H 3 ^ Yo-nen , of Yo-tosi, „ |5j jgj * ^ , Si-ka-nen , four „ 31 3 ' G'o-nen, „ 3. 3 jgj* Go-ka-nen, five „ etc. etc. The Chinese si (four) before nen is continually superseded by the Japanese yo. ft* fQ'-'+g #1, the year 40 from the accession to the throne. Yo-tosi-me ni or Yo-nen-mcni nari-masu, it is now (it goes now in) the fourth year. 3. The question: how old? = Japanese iku tdse ( ^ £), how many years? is answered in the Chinese manner of counting. — -p ^ Y ^ = ^ ft ^ = ■M 1 7 , Ziyu-sitsi zai nite kUrdini tsuki-tamoo, in the 17tl> year of his life he comes to the throne. — Ni-ziyu no tosi ni or Tosi ni-ziyu ni , in his 20th year. ) Vulgo KonS tose also. CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 39. 155 § 39. Chronological notation of years. 1. Japan uses the Chinese enumeration of years, •which was introduced by a buddhist missionary in A. D. 602 '). After this the years, as well the months and the days, are counted by sexagenary periods, and named after the known sexagenary cycle, which itself consists of a cycle of ten and one of twelve series. The cycle of ten series is called from the five elements: Wood, Fire, Earth, Metal and W ater ( J apanese Ki , Fi , Tstttsi , Kane , MidzU) , which , each taken double, are distinguished as masculine and femine, or, after the Japanese con- ception, as the elder and as the younger brother ( % x , Ye and % h . To). The names of the ten-series cycle are: 1. m 11 Ki nd ye. 6. Bf 2. Ki nd to. 7. m 3. ii Fi nd ye. 8. 4. Tj M Fi nd to. 9. if 5. ii TsUtsi nd ye. 10. x , Kan no ye. s y . , Kan n6 to. x , Midzu nd ye. 7 Midzu nd to. The twelve-series cycle has relation to the division of the zodiac into twelve equal parts, and bears the names of the Chinese zodiac, for which Japa- nese names of animals are used, as: l. Ne. . 2. Usi . Bull. 3. Torn 4. U . . 5. fc=K # Tats' (spr. Taats ) Dragon. 6. Mi. . 7. M'ma Horse. 8- * |i, Fitsuzi Goat. SarU Ape. 10. ]3[ ff , Tori Cock. n- # inti Hound. 12. ^ , 1 Swine. If both series are let proceed side by side, till both are run out, then the sixty-series cycle is obtained, of which the first year is called or Kino-ye ne no tosi , and the sixtieth ^ 4|S , or Midzti no to i no tosi. The first year of the cycle now current answers to 1864. ! ) See Japans Beziige mit der Koreischen Ralbintel und mit Sc kina. Nach Japanischen Quillen van }. HOFFMANN. 1839. Page 120. 156 CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 39. SYNOPSIS OF THE SEXAGENARY CYCLE. y * T l x nJ X v- if X ** p ** 1 13 25 37 49 •fit 2 14 26 38 50 7 51 3 15 27 39 W" 52 4 16 28 40 m 41 53 5 17 29 42 54 6 18 30 31 43 55 / 7 19 32 44 56 8 20 Ejit 21 33 45 57 9 S'V 22 34 46 58 10 ' 11 23 35 47 59 12 24 36 48 60 2. Enumeration of years by years of governments. In the earliest times, was added to the cyclical enumeration of years, the calculation after the years of government of the Sovereign (anciently Nin woo , = King of men, called afterwards Mikado). According to the rule adopted, the first year of the reign of a Mikado is always reckoned to have be- gun with the year following the death of his predecessor. The Japanese New- year’s day, on which zin mu, the founder of the Mikado-dynasty, ascended CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 39, 40. 157 the throne, was the 1 9th of Febr. (after the Julian style) of the year G60 B. C. '). The second year of king zin mu is called )jj(Jj k A ^ J J|[ £ -J- r x A* * - = vj 40. Enumeration of years by year-names. In 045 A. D. the reckoning by years of government was superseded by a reckoning by year-names, Nen goo J or Just as in China, these are appointed by the Sovereign, so are they in Japan by the Mikado, and after the lapse of a larger or smaller number of years changed by him, this being one of the prerogatives of his crown. The adoption of his year-name pleads for the recognition of his sovereignty 2 ). The 08 Chinese words, from which the Japanese year-names are chosen, are: O 7t Hr* 5 Wi mt mi xi \ n ie| ^ J®’ 99 m m at? w-l Hi y J M 8 if m *F? Sift? A? Vci *3 i fx m* m j lS/ T i % u fi? t zt Bl iff ff* its? M* a? W mi I mi is? * _ v The successive year-names of the current century are: 1 ^tl 7 , Kiyoo-wa ^ 7C 1801. - VC > Bun-kwa ^ 7E 1804. v ? ’ Bun-sei IS 7C 1818. % l ft 1 1 7E 1830. ( Tem-poo ) •ffc ' w Koo-hwa ^7C 1844. Ka-yei He 7C 1848. A^?> An-sei f 7C 1854. Hv Man-en It 7C 1800. Bun-kiu 7C 1801. 7E v 7fT> Gen-dzi 7C 1804. *) After the calculation of the Professor F. kaiser at eight o clock in the morning of the said year, there was a New Moon at Miyako. Therefore the correctness of the Japanese chronology may not be called in question. •) The change of the year-names seems , in latter times , not to have been known early enough , as reckoning has been continued with one year-name, when another had taken its place. 158 CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 41 . § 41. Division of the solar year. The course of the sun and the solar year are divided into twelve equal parts (months), called after the zodiac, beginning with the arc of the Mouse, on half of which the winter solstice falls. If the twelve arcs are bisected, the 24 periods of 15 days 5 hours and 14' minutes are obtained, by which the hus- bandman regulates his labour. These 24 divisions , called |[p ^ ^ * , Sek-ki or modifications of the weather, are distributed by pairs over the twelve months of the year, the first of each pair being called m SetsU , the second 4 '? Tsiu. rmj +? | M ? ? » ftt, * . 1 it Li * y a? Si, Ris-sun 3 Febr. Beginning of tlie spring. ^ ^ , U-sui 19 Febr. Rain water. Kiyoo-tsits ... 5 March. Awakening of the insects. sun-bun .... 20 March. Middle of the spring. Sei-mei 5 April. Clear. Koku-u 20 April. Seed rain. Rik-ka 5 May. Beginning of the summer. Seo-man 20 May. Little plenty. Boo-siu 5 June. Transplanting of the rice. HI Ge-zi 21 June. Height of the summer. , Seo-siyo 6 July. Little heat. Dai-siyo 23 July. Great heat. 9 IFW ALy ill s' \ 39 m , tf \'b fA?' Ai, i- "T'* i pJ'S A? Ris-siu 7 Aug. Beginning of the autumn. Siyo-siyo 23 Aug. Local heat. FdkU-ro 8 Sept. White dew. Siu-bun 23 Sept. Middle of autumn. Kan-ro 8 Oct. Cold dew. Soo-koo 23 Oct. Fall of hoar-frost. Rit-too 7 Nov. Beginning of the winter. Seo-sets 22 Nov. Little snow. Dai-sets 7 Dec. Great snow. Too-zi 22 Dec. Height of the winter. Seo-kan G Jan. Little frost. Dai-kan 20 Jan. Great frost. The civil year begins with Ris-sun (beginning of the spring). Ris-sun yori fatsi ziyu nitsi me, or the 80th day from the beginning of the spring is our 23th of April. Time is very commonly determined after the two equinoctial feasts Bi-gem ( ^ j f') , which last seven days each, the principal feast, that takes place on the fourth day, falling on the day of the equinox. CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 42. 159 § 42. Enumeration of months. Months are reckoned in answer to the question Iku-tsiiki ( ^ £ PJ |) , or Nan- getsil , how r many months? Japanese. Flto-tsuki. Chinese. — * % M V ')> ktsi-gets or — ■ 1y p* * p Ik-ka-gets, one month. ~ pj y Ni-gets „ * pj tj Ni-ka-gets, 2 months. „ v P* * M V San-ka-gets , 3 „ „ PI] ^ A * pj tj Si-ka-gets , 4 „ „ ^ ftp Go-ka-gets, 5 „ „ PJ P Rok-ka-gets, 6 „ ” "t iP A* M V Sitsi-ka-gets , 7 „ „ A+ M V Hak-ka-gets, 8 „ „ jl 7 A * M V Ku-ka-gets, 9 „ „ p^P p^* PJ ? Zik-ka-gets , 10 „ pi — p pi £ Ziu-itsi-gets „ p-p — p p V * PI ? Ziu-ik-ka-g., 11 „ p ^ *. ~ pj |T Ziu-ni-gets „ p-*^ p^* ^ ^ Z," Ziu-ni-ka-g., 12 „ To the question Nan-gwats ( Juij' f pj ■»), at Yedo Nan ngats, which month? Futa-tsUki. Mi-tsttki. Yo-tsuki. Itsu-tsuki. Mu-tsUki. Nand-tsukt. ) d-tstiki. — M $ San-gets |ZP u PI V Si-get « MV Go-gets PI ^ Rok-gets Ml f PI £ Sitsi-gets A ? PI £ Fatsi-gets Kdkdno-tsilki. 7 MV K u ~9 ets To-tsiiki. p- p pj p Ziu-gets (of the year) the names following answer : ~|p v 'p, Siyoo-gicats , first month. -- h Ht M s. r M (at Yedo Soo ngatsu). Ni-g teats , second San-gu-ats , third Si-gicats, fourth Go-gwats , fifth “ PJ , Roku-gieats , sixth P^ p PI Sitsi-givats , seventh month. A? h , Fatsi-gwats , eighth „ A" h , Ku-gicats , ninth „ TO , Ziu-{Dziu-)gwats , tenth ,, pp — ■ £ pj , Ziu-itsi-gwats , eleventh month. p- p JZl “ pj , Ziu-ni-gwats , twelfth „ These names are good for the intercourse of every day life; in chronological writings and in almanacs the months are also named after the sexagenary cycle. The intercalary month. As the civil year of the Japanese is a lunar year connected with the solar year, the months continually begin with the new 7 moon ') Itsi-gets , — a whole month. 160 CHAPTER IY. NOTATION OF TIME. § 42, 43. and have 29 or 30 days alternately. Thus to the common lunar year belong 354 or 355 days. To keep the four seasons even with the revolution of the sun, every two or three years an intercalary month ( Uruu-dzuki ) is added, which ob- tains the name of the moon, which it follows, preceded by the word Urun The intercalary month following the second month is thus called y Zl ~ ^ , Uruu nigwats , = supernumerary second month. § 43. Enumeration of the days. The natural day, from the rising to the setting of the sun, is called in Jap. £, Fi , Hi; the night 5, Yo; the midday Fim; the midnight Yoru. The compound Firu-yoru , = day and night, means the civil day; it is equiva- lent to the Chinese m Tsiu-ya, and, just as it, applied to the astro- nomical day also. In connection with the year and month, the civil day is called Jap. Ka, Chin. 0 ^ .y , Nit si (or Zitsit) ; both are used in counting the days. 1. After the Chinese manner they count, with or without the numerative fgj or /y , lea, to the question: ^ i, 0 ft, Ikii-ka , how many days? — * y jUl 1] 0 ^ , Ik-ka nitsi , 1 day. ft 0 ^ , Ni-ka nitsi , 2 days. ^ t ft 0 f > , ^ an ~^ a nitsi , 3 days. |JIj ’F ft 0 ^ , Si-ka nitsi , 4 days etc. after the reckoning with the numerative |gj ^ , ka (page 150): — f -|— F y JJIJ ^ ft 0 =/ y,, Sanziu san-si-ka nitsi no aida , within 33 to 34 days. If the numerative fUj* 7 , &a, is left out, the Si-nitsi (4 days), because it also means dying-day, is superseded by the Japanese Yok-ka; for 14 days is said Ziyu-yok-ka , for 24 days Ni-ziyu yok-ka , for 34 days San-ziyu yok-ka etc. 2. The Japanese manner of counting, which extends only to the first ten days , and to the 20th and 30th , refers to the days of a month , when the month is expressly named previously; this not being the case, the counting must then be considered to begin from another given date, which however is not included in the calculation. The days of the month, — it generally begins with the new moon, — are called, after the question: Idzii-ka (ftf- B ft ) , = which day? or IdzUreno Ji-ka? CHAPTER IV. NOTATION OF TIME. § 43. 161 1. m 0 2 •f * Tsui-tatsi. 16. TS 1 . a 7 0 5, Ziyu-roku-nitsi . 2. — 7 * 7 0 Futsu-kd. 17. Y'i 0 ~j . , Ziyu-sitsi-nitsi. 3. 0 y i Mi-kd. 18. Yi A? 0 5, Ziyu-fatsi-nitsi. 4. PJ? 0 t Yok-kd. 19. Y'i A 7 0 ^ , Ziyu-gu-nitsi. 5. 3L? 0 * Its'-kd. 20. — • n + , 0 11 , F&ts’-(Hhts’-)ka. C. _L A 0 y J Muyu-kd , v ulgo Mui-kd. 21. m ' — 'F 0 ^ , Ni-ziyu-itsi-nitsi. 7. "b £ 0 y Nanu-ka , „ Nano-kd. 22. Y — . ~ 0 ijt, Ni-ziyu-ni-nitsi. 8. AS 0 Yoo-kd. 23. Y — ' * 0 ~L, Ni-ziyu-san-nitsi. 9. A; 0 t Kdkdno-kd. 24. tt ra# 0 ^ , AT-lh/w-yokka. 10. + ? 0 t 7 Too-kd. 25. 3L' 0 ^ , Ni-ziyu-go-nitsi. 11. — * y 0 Ziyu- -it si -nit si. 26. Y _L C2 0 ^ , Ni-ziyu-r ok' -nitsi. 12. — . = 0 -ni-nitsi. 27. h- -bi' 0 ^ , Ni-ziyu-sitsi-nitsi. 13. * V 0 Ziyu- -san-nitsi. 28. h- A? 0 ~L , Ni- ziyu-fatsi-nitsi. 14. +s P3 3 -y 0 Ziyu- -yok-ka. 29. it A 7 0 ^ , Ni-ziyu-ku-nitsi. 15. +? 3l 3' 0 ?7 -go-nit si. 30. ab H *. Mi-so-ka, of San-ziyu-n. Tsui-tatsi , properly Tstiki-tatsi , signifies the moon’s rising; the first day is called also TsUki-gdsira , head or beginning of the moon. The first day of the year is called j £ 0 Gwan (or Gan) zits , or Fazime nofi. The old- Japanese ATa ( 0 means daylight ; FI , as Chin. 0 ^ , Nitsi , means sun and day. Still to be noticed, are the expressions: 7 V ’ Sdku-ya , last night. fjf: 7 0 sf, Saku-zits', \ . [ yesterday. Pf 7 ^ X i »S akA-ten , I Sdkii-tsoo , yesterday mor- ning-. Iff; 5 ^ X ^ SdkU-kon, yesterd. and to day. -pj. .y [Jf; y 0 Is-saku-zits , the day before yesterday. ^ X 0 -f ’ K on-nit si . to day. Hffl HI. Miyoo-nitsi , to morrow. HJ] ^ 3 0 ^ , Miyoo go nitsi , or /l.sc 00001 Metres. - 0,30175 = 0,030175 = 0,0030175 = 0,00030175 = 0,000030175 = 0,0000030175 tjjf, Kot ( — 1 y -g^), 0.000001 = 0.00000030175 Multiples of the Saku. fff] t Ken ( — t, , Tk-ken) , as measure of distance = 6 Sdkti (1,8105 metres); as measure for piece-goods 6,5 Saku. ^°° C — ^ v, Itsi-zoo) , = 10 v Saku (3,0175 metres). y|, Tsao. Tsoo. street ( — SlJ'v, Tt-tsoo). = 60 Ken (108,63 metres). !fl '' , Ri, Japanese mile;- — • £ j|| 11 , Ftsi-ri , one mile. = 36 Tsoo ') From a communication by oono yasaburoo, instrument-maker to the observatory at Yedo. •) Introduction to the Japanese translation, published at Yedo in 1854, of j. n. calten, Leiddraad bij het onderrigt in de Zee-artillerie. Delft, 1832. The title of the work is: m ± m m £ * Kai soo bo-siguts zen sgo, or „the book on Marine artillery.” V fy| T . „ Japanese Translation of the English and Dutch with pronunciation 3N 2E -’V Sh. ’ iHF v pq Numbers. First part, N°. 2. Nagasaki, October, 18C0." Page 120, 121. 168 CHAPTER IV. MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS. § 45, 46, 47. or streets, = 3910,68 metres, if the Japanese foot is reckoned at 0,30175 metres. According to the Treaty between Japan and America, concluded in 1858, Art. 7, the Japanese Ri is = 4275 yards (the yard at 0,91438 Neth. ell) , thus = 3908,9745 N. ells , whereas it is said to amount to 33 EHJ* ^ 48 fH] 1^5 . In the Japanese-Russian Treaty of 19 Aug. 1858, Art. 8, on the contrary the Japanese Ri is made equivalent to 3 wersts 332 saschen, which gives to one Ri 3908,68192 Neth. ells. § 46. Superficial measures. A}? 7 , Pu ( — -If. 7 ') or Tsubo ( — • £ Fit6 tsubo), = — ■ 5f] |5j ~)j , i. e. a square Km , or R.i. e. 6 square feet (3,27791025 square metres). t o * 0 ^ ’ Se ( — ' e Sfj[ * , Fitd se ) , a rectangle of 6 7 Pu length and 5 Pu breadth , = 30 square Pu. Tan ( — ‘i, * , It-tan), a plane of 20 Pu length and 15 Pi breadth, = 300 square Pu. It-tan is the regular plane of a rice-field. myp Tsao, Tsoo ( — 1 y (R) -ft , It-tsoo yomo ) , a plane of 60 Pu length and 50 Pu breadth, = 3000 square Pu. § 47. Measures of capacity ( Masume ) for dry and liquid wares. ¥, Soo , Sao ( — • i, iT, 7s-$oo ) , unity of the measures of capacity , formerly distinguished by Europeans with the Malay name Gantang , is 0,49 Jap. feet long and broad and 0,27 Jap. feet deep, containing 0,064827 Jap. cubic feet, = 1,893365719029 cubic decimetres, or 1 litre, 8 decilitres, 9 centilitres etc. Subdivisions of the Soo. -jj^ Go-goo, pron. go-ngoo , a measure of 5 Goo, = \ ^ 00 full 9 decilitres. < n Go °- pron. n 9 00 ( — ‘f Fsi goo), = ,V | -Soo. Fj y", formerly v, Siykku , pron. Sdktt ( — - i, V, Is-sdkit) , = , -J, Jj* ^ Soo. f/j ^ if, Go siyaku, a measure of , f 0 -Soo, or 1 formerly and |||$, Sai ( — • 1 y Is-sai ) , = , () Y 0 |" S°°- Multiples of the Soo. fit ^ iff;?' soo, a measure of 5 S°°i = 9,46682595145 cubic de- cimetres. v , Pioo , or Tawhra ( — - S, v , Tp-pioo or Fitd-tawdra ) , a sack or bale (rice), at present contains ^ J EEiX 1 or ^ T° ^ ^ 00 r ' ce - Ij' ’ i To- formerly *' ( — ‘if. It-to ), as vessel Tomdsa , 10 Soo. CHAPTER IV. MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS. § 47, 48. 169 Gokii (pron. ngoku) , formerly ^ij- X ( — ■ ^ ^ . Itsi. gdku) , = 100 ^ j •S oo, or 189,3365710029 litres. Remark. The fixed salaries of Government functionaries are based on the quantity of rice, which is allowed them per year or per day, and which is paid in money according to the market-price. The money value of a goku ( ) was in 1865 f 12,50 Netherlands currency , or according the Japanese exchange ZL^ ppj | i.e.2x/5 + 2x / 1,25. — £ >5 7 "jpj * Faktt goku takasa is an income of 100 Kok or / 1250 Netherl. currency. The pay of a common man ( — • £ f , ^ 7 *) is {fr ^ a* - f, or 6 cent a day. § 48. Weights, Hakarime. 1. Sai ( — $ yf = A &*’. f/j', vulgo /*'v, Sak’ ( — $ v. J*4afc’.), = T V T Goo. ^ n Go ° ( — ' + Zfsi £ioo). = T ' 0 /f* Ain. Jf h Kin (— * if t* Ik-kin ) , the Japanese pound , called by Europeans Catty (ct.), weighs according to former notices ') 0,6 kilo, according to the latest definition J ) 0,597 kilo. They reckon, at Yedo : Ik-kin. . . . . 1 ct. Rok-kin ... 6 ct. Ziu ik-kin . . 1 1 ct. Hiak'-kin , 100 ct. Ni-kin . . . . 2 „ S'tsi-kin ... 7 „ Ziu go-kin . . 15 „ Sen-gin , 1000 „ San-gin . . . • 3 „ Hdtsi-kin . . 8 „ Ni zik-kin. . 20 „ Man-gin , 10000 „ Si-kin .... . 4 .. Ku-kin. ... 9 „ Ni ziu ik-kin , 21 „ Go-kin . . . . 5 „ Zik-kin ... 10 „ Go zik-kin . . 50 „ *'+? Jtt , Go ziu kin , = 50 catties (ct. 50) . or half a picol (pi. 0,5). SJ- frl , Hiak’-kin, = 100 catties or a picol. 2 . Silverweight. Unity: Mon-me, pron. Momme , from Mon, - farthing, and j=j * Me , = eye, means characteristic, i. e. weight of a farthing. The signs used for Mon-me are ^ B B PP 1 a bbreviated forms of the Chinese |||1> 3 ) <$e«, = farthing. In stead of Mon-me , in connection with some numbers, only ^ *, Jic is used. The Europeans have therefore adopted the name Mace, Dutch 3 ) %ip f -B- ') ph. fr. von siebold, Nippon- Arc hief , Division IV. s ) Ban-go syoo in, see page 167, note 3. 170 CHAPTER IV. MEASURES. WEIGHTS AND COINS. § 48. Maas. One Mace ( it -r JSL "/ ftsi-me , ox* ^ > , 7/s/ mon-me , or pj (/in /s-sen), weighs 3,74799 grammes and has, as T * T Tael, if the Tael is counted to be equal to / 1,00 Neth. cour., a value in silver of / 0,16 N. c. The Mon-me is divided into 10 Fun, vulgo condrijn, conderein, cent. 100 ||| / , Rin , vulgo cassie, cash, mokje. 1000 ^ ^ , Moo. 10000 i|j^ 3; , Hots , vulgo wassie. Itsi mon-me ni fun , = 1,2 Mon-me , or 1 Mon-me 2 condrijn. — TV/ mon-me san-bun, 2,3 Mon-me. — San-mon-me si-fun go-rin roku moo , = 3,456 Mon-me , or 3 mace, 4 condrijn, 5 cent (or cash) 6. ^ 3 ^ ^ ^ , Go-mon-me , = 5 mace or half a tael. + 2? Ziu-mon-me, = 10 Mon-me or 10 mace, the weight, which, in silver, makes the immaginary coin Tael, Dutch Tail, = 37,4799 grammes, value in silver / 1,60 Neth. cour., being according to the Japanese text of Art. 12, alinea d of the Additional Articles to the Netherlands-Japanese Treaty of 30 Ja- nuary 1856, 6,25 = / 1,00 Neth. cour. '). With Mon-me they count further: Ziu-itsi mon-me, Ziu-ni mon-me, Ziu-ku mon-me (19 mon-me), and in the tens (20, 30 etc.), and in the hundreds, thou- sands , ten of thousands etc. supersede Mon-me by p| * Me ; thus ^ ” - 4 - \ PI*, Ni-ziyu me, 20 Mon-me. — * [jlj > p f p| San-si-ziyu me, 30 to 40 Mon-me. Jt 9 +2? Ku-ziyu itsi mon-me , 91 Mon-me. v § Hi&ku me, 100 Me or Mon-me , = 10 taels or 374.799 grammes, or / 16 Neth. cour. Jit f p| * , Kwan-me (at Yedo Kdm-me), — • 3, P| Ik-kwan-me, or one rist (1000) me - 100 taels. — f j|t v 3 v pj * , San-gwan go hikkii me , 3500 me or 350 taels, ptl / ^ Pj *, Zik kkm-me, 10 rists or 10000 me,. . . . = 1000 „ fEj x ? J^t £ v pj *, Hiak kkm-me, 100 rists or 100000 me, = 10000 „ p Jrf£ v pj * , Sen ngam-me, 1000 rists or 1000000 me, = 100000 „ Jit £ > p| * , M&n ngam-me, 10000 rists, = 1000000 „ ') In the official Dutch translation instead of it we find : „ Dc zilveren Spaansche mat of pilaar-mat wordt gerekend tegen de wnarde van f 2,50. I)e Mexicaansche dollar tegcn f 2,55 Ned. cour.” CHAPTER IV. MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS. § 48, 49, 50. 171 The Yedo Pound (‘/I* ft ') *j§Ny fvt ' Yedo no ik-kin) , being = 10 taels or 1G0 Mon-me or Me, or Sen , weighs 160 X 3,74799 grammes, = 0,5996784 Neth. pound, for which in the above quoted Ban-go syoo-in „ about 0,597 N. pound” has been given. ^ ft Itsi-zi, ( ^ Sen or Mon-me , is= Zl = 3 l J§| > /«« go rin weight. § 49. Iron, copper and bronze coins. The unit is Mon (*g*:£ mon), the smallest exchange coin, in circulation -Sen (- Chin. Tsien ) , Japanese also ifem, and called by the Europeans cash, pitje or duit. The Mon has a value in silver of one ft Rin , and 100 pieces ( m * f , Huiku mon) are reckoned at one Mon-me or mace of silver. The exchange however varies, being reckoned in the towns of the Taikun only 96, and in the countries of princes at one time more and, at another less. The cents with a square hole are strung upon straw-ropes to the number nominally of a hundred , respresenting the value of one Mon-me or mace of silver. Ten such strings joined in one bunch, are called — ft f?2 «- kwan- mon (at Yedo Ik-kam-mon ) or one string of cents, and are worth one tael or 10 Mon-me of silver. ^ = J , Xi kwan-mon , two taels ; ^El t- f ftC. > > San gwan-mon, three taels. The copper coins, which generally bear for superscription a year-name besides the word M Sf Tsit-boo . = money, generally have the value of 1 Mon; never- theless there are larger also , of the value of 4 and of 5 Mon ( Pb mi. jj ~ ftr ^ ^|| £ ) and of 2 X 4 or 8 Mon ( Xl. “ PIJ ^ ¥ , JVi si mon sen). The new „ hundred Mon-coin,” ^ , Too JiiakU sen. of the name-value of one Mon-me (f 0,16 Neth. cour.), was first cast in the 6th year Ten-boo (1835) at 5 edo , with the superscription Ten-boo Tsuu-boo. § 50. Silver coins. The unit of the silver coins is the pjpjj v Riyoo , pronounced by some as dryao. ^ ^ ^ ^ v :El % > V , i. e. one Riyoo of silver is = 4 Mon-me or mace 3 Fun or confirm, thus 68 f ® 7 cents Neth. cour. 10 Riyoo of silver, according to the old coinage represented by an oval silver lump (Ita-gane) , which has been called m Mai (vulgo by the Dutch, schuitje, = little boat), 172 CHAPTER IV. MEASURES, WEIOHTS AND COINS. § 50, 51. must have 43 Mon-me (= 1 tael 4 mace) silver-weight; in weighing the deficiency is made up liy silverlumps. People reckon: Itsi-mai , Ni-mai etc. The oblong coin with the superscription — * ft Itsi bu gin, first cast in 1837 , has been found to have a value of' / 0,80 3 Netli. cour., is nevertheless worth 33 Dollar-cents or 84,' 0 \ cents N. c., and according to the temporary Dollar exchange more or less also. The weight of the pieces is unequal; there are some of 8,61 and others of 8,81 grammes. The smaller square coin of silver with the superscription — * tJv ^ Is-su gin, of which 4 go to an Itsi bit gin , first cast 1854, is worth 8 ! ( Dollarcent, full 21 cents N. c. § 51. Gold coins. The unit is the p|^ v Riyoo. ^ £ ppj v , Kin itsi riyoo , or one Riyoo of gold, is represented by the 3 ^lj <5 Koban, which in virtue of its stamp is current without being weighed. According to the coinage now in force the Riyoo of gold or the Koban is worth 60 Mon-me of silver, or f 9,60 N. c., and divided into halves , fourths , eighths and sixteenths. An oblong gold, but properly silver and lightly gilt coin with the super- scription ^ ft Ni pu, first cast in 1818 and declared worth in silver 30 Mon-me (/ 4,80 N. c.) represents the half Koban. The { Koban is an oblong coin with the superscription — * ft Itsi pu, for which it is customary to write — • Aj? . Its exchange value is for Japanese 15 Mon-me or l£ taels (/ 2,40 N. c.). The g Koban is represented by an oblong coin of silver and gilt, with the superscription Z1 ^ Ni su , for which in general Nisi is said ; the newest cast in 1859, are worth 161 dollarcents or 42 cents N. c. The ,V Koban , also a small silver-gilt coin, has the superscription — • tJc I s-siu, which is called Ts-si. CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 52. The adverbs in Japanese which, as such, always precede the word (verb, adjective, or adverb) that they qualify, are, so far as their origin is con- cerned, to be distinguished as: I. Adverbs proper. 1. Primitive adverbs, such as: Ma, truly, perfectly; Itu, very. 2. Adverbs ending in ku (in the spoken language simply u), formed from adjectives in ki (p. 106), as Hayaku , early; Oftokii , late. II. Improper adverbs or adverbial expressions. 1. Nouns with or without the modal case ni or de, included among which the adjectives in ki (p. 106, b), ka (p. 116 § 13) and yaka (p. 117 § 14), provided they are used as substantives concrete. 2. Verbs in the gerund, i. e. in the modal case, characterized by te, as: Sadamete , definitely; Kcssite , certainly; Kakite ( kaite ), in writing. If, for convenience, we distribute the Japanese adverbs and adverbial expres- sions in groups according to their signification, we shall get as: § 53. Adverbs of quality, to the question: how? 1. Adverbs in ku, derived from adjectives in ki (see p. 106, § 9, B. 2), as: 12 174 CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 53, 54. TdM , b|j 7 , in the spoken lan guage O O Tow, Too , well. (See p. 112. II.) 1. Yorosiku , *,V 3 M. a ’ ” V Yordsiu, well, good. Wdruka , ?? Waruu , bad, ill. HaydkU , jin' ” ?! Haydu, Haydo, quickly. OsdkU, y y i ii 9? Osdw, Oso'o , slowly. 5. KatakU , HHy* ” ?? ?! Katau , Kdtoo , hardly, with difficulty. Ydsiiku , ?! Ydsuu , easily. Kuvdsiku , ?! Kuvasiu , neatly, exactly. 8. 2. Adverbs in ka, with the terminational ni (see p. 116, § 13): ' Sidzukd ni , ^ V _ , calmly, in stillness. 9. Tsiimdbirakd ni , ^ v y % - , clearly and distinctly. . 10 . Sumiyakd ni , I ^ , quickly , swiftly. Tasikdni, ^ _ , certainly. Tamasaka ni , , by chance, fortuitously, accidentally. Dan-dan ni, ^ ^ ( - , by degrees, gradually. Zen-zenni, 'JSf ^ V { = , by degrees. 15. Soro-soro , Soro-soro to , V i - s!) , by degrees, gradually. Yara-yara , slowly. Yara-yara yukU , to go slowly, saunter, lounge. Mu-m to , 16E A ^ Musd-musdto , without forethought, in confusion, in opposition to Kuvdsiku , exactly. 18. § 54. Adverbs of degree, in answer to the question: in what degree? The expressions cited in § 23 and 24 p. 130: d/h, quite; Itsi-dan , wholly; Ikanimo , in all respects; d/o, still more; Odkini , very; Stikosi , little; Akro, once more so, so much the; lyd , iyd , again so; MdsU-mdsu, more and more; Fana- fada , very; Mottomo , utmost; 7/o, very; ltdtte, utmost, highest. Besides these: I him , Nani-fodo , fr: gj. how much? in what degree? 19. Dore-dake , Dore-fodo , how much? Dono-kurai ooki , fa / fa |j ^ T , how much? Yo-fodo, 3 ^*; ylmrfn, j^v, too. (See p. 136 § 28.) Mina, fa 1 y , together. — Sulx'te, , Tonto, in all. Ost-ndbete , |l|l ]£, »’|{V ^ , altogether. 24. CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 54. 175 Koto-gotoka , ^ 3 .. ^ , all over, entirely. 25. Nokordzu , as?. without surplus, without exception. (See p. 59.) MattakU , )' 5, 7 , wholly, perfectly. Ippai ni , — ■ ^ = * foil, abundantly. — Ippanni , — • ^ foil (to the brim). lj-soni , — * .y ^ _ , together successively, altogether. 29. KdtsU-te , if l 4 ^. wholly, entirely. With a subsequent negation, by no means, not at all, e. g\: Katsttte wakaranoi , it is by no means intelligible; Kdtsute mairu mai , 1 shall not go at all. 30. Kdtsil-gdtsil , ^ {' , wholly. KdtsU-mata , a ? #5. JO X £ , so much the more. Yo-keini , in a greater degree, more. lydsikU mo , , so much the more. Sal-bun, ^r, proportionably , pretty, tolerably. 35. Ziyu-bun ni , , fully, quite. Itsi-bun va , — * £ ^ n , partly. Mabara ni , 3 9 = » sparsely, in a scattered manner, here and there, par- tially, thinly. Oydsd, pron. dyosso , 0 1 i Q sura, together; very nearly, about. Tdkttsdnni (at Yedo), m uu t - richly, abundantly, in multitude. 40. Tai-soo , m. excessively. Tai-soo ooku, far above measure. Tai-gai , * Jjj| f , Tai-tei , ^ | in general , more or less. Oo-kata , Sukoburu, pretty, tolerably, for three fourths of the full measure. Sukdbuni fi&asi , it is pretty long ago. 45. Yoffodo , 3 ?* p , contracted from Yoi-fodo , pretty. **, not -f * p, proportionately, reasonbly, “If just. Tsiyau-do yoi , it is just good Tsiyau-do, pron. Tsoo-do , v Fotondo , p, almost, nearly; scarcely, hardly. Soreva fotondo tarau, it is hardly enough. Fodo-fodo , Naka-naka , 44 V 1 , almost. Sukundku m6 odkiimd ndku , /j/' ^ ^ ^ ^ neither less nor more. 50. 176 CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 54 , 55 . Tsito , Tsitto , m . **».. , a little. Zsito mo , as little as possible , with a subsequent negation, not in the least. 51. Yau-yau- {yoo-yoo-) site , scarcely, hardly; almost. 52. Bakari , ff£#, merely, only. Kore bakari , only this. Fu-soku ni , ^ 7 JjL ^ _ , not enough. BdtsUni, in particular, particularly. 55. § 55. Adverbs of circumstance. Mu-ydkuni , A ^ _ , vainly. — Mudani , _ , in vain. 56. Munasiku , , in vain. Ayamdtte , ^ , by mistake. Ukegatte , willingly. Kononde , (contracted from Konomite ), gladly, willingly, readily. 60. Tasinde (= Tasimite ) , , gladly. — Nengoro ni , ^ t a _ , gladly. lya-nagara m6 , against the grain, reluctantly. Tomo ni , #s. A , with, together, alike. ra , FitdtsU ni , — * ^ _ , together. 6-i. Ondziku, |sj f , in the spoken language dndziu , together, at the same time. Tada, O ^ 0 , only, alone, but. Zarfa san /ca mtsi nomi, or Zac/a sanka nitsi balcdri , only three days. 66. /Scuye, +)- x ° ^ originally park, enclosure for cattle; used adverbially it limits the idea exclusively to what has been mentioned immediately before and answers to but, as it is as much as the Lat. modo only. — Sono na saye siru , to know by name only. — Ki-den to saye mausu, say only: „Sir.” — Sake u-o nomi saye sum mono , some one, who does nothing but drink spirits. — Sake wo nomi saye surebd , yevu , if one does nothing but drink spirits, he gets drunken. In connection with a subsequent negation Saye is equivalent to not even, Lat. nee quid em, e. g.: Mma saye nakari , there are not even horses. — Sono na saye siranu , not even to know by name. — Zi saye mi-sirdnu mono , anyone who does not even know the letters. ])ani , #*= , cognate to Saye, as an adverb, has the word to which it exclu- sively limits the idea, before it with or without inflection, e. g.: Jma dani nanori si-lam ave , assume but for as yet a name. — fma sibdsi dani ovase nan, now it will only last a short time. 68. CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 55, 56. 177 Sard, 79, even, German, sogar, indicates that an unexpected predicate is emphatically given to the subject of a sentence, e. g.: Kisdki sura kavi-kou'o kuvase tamgvu , even the queen has silkworms fed. — Kare sura korewo sirdnu , he even does not know this. Kata-gata , ^ , single, alone. 70. Suku-ndku-tomo, 1) t ? h ^ , at least. Sukungu sitemo sun ka getsu, at least three months. — Sa-naku-tonio , at least. Ndrtt-dake, Jf»J£ £, ^ £ , if possible. Ze-lii, so or not so , in any case ; necessary. Ze-hi itasi-masoo , 1 shall do it in any case. Don bo-don, v iffy f , either active or not active, - in any case. 74. To-mo kaku-mo , h 9 To-mo kau-mo , p =e ir 9 <£ , however , in any case. Also To-kaku [ ^5 *' 1 1 , if possible, synonym to Ndru-dake . — To-kaku itsi-yaa ni ndru-besi , if possible it should happen in one and the same way. Fu-ini, ^ 7 1 , suddenly, at once. 76. Tama-tama , , unexpectedly , by chance. Sai-siyo ni vu , jg ^ ^ everywhere. Siyo-siyo, pron. so-*o, ^ everywhere. Tsikdku , jjjy ^ ^ , near. Tooku , far; Yen-foo ni , Uj|5 £ =. > f ar - 95. Ts-soni , — at or to one and the same place. — Is-soni yukii , to go with, to accompany. Nakani , or 7sm , pj=| £ _ , in the midst, amidst, amongst. 97. Utsini , Urdni , , within. — Zb/cd ni , iSofo ni , #[' ^ _ , without. Mayeni , Sakini , || , before. — Ustroni , Afo ni , Notsini , ^ _ , behind. Uye ni , _J^ ^ _ , above. — Sitdni , ~J\ , beneath. 100. »• SiJT , forthwith, immediately, directly, = stiguni, ai-no nai. Suguni, |^f , directly, straight. Zikini , T|f ^ , directly, forthwith. Sibardku , in short , shortly , quickly. Yau-yaku, Yoo-yaku, by degrees. 130. Tatsi-matsi , jjf | ^ ^ ^ , at once , directly ; suddenly. Ffltfute, fg||, suddenly. Soku-zi ni , |jf |] ^ (J^p ^ , directly. Fisasiku , if long. Hisd-bisd , long ago. Fisdsii dto , long ago. Sai-zen , ^ , just now. 133. Kore-kara, hereafter, thereupon. lk-koo , — fo] henceforth, in connection with a subsequent negation, no more. Sudeni, [^ , already. Kiuni, _, quickly, hastily. 139. Tsiyoto , Tsiotto (f 3 y r) , vulgo Tsoito , 3* ^ ^ once, for a moment, fa x- f f, just hear! — Tsioito 0 matsi nasare, wait a moment! llow and then. Ori-fitzi , m m. , from time to time, now and then. Fu-tosde, j^|£ »Jp* , sometimes. Slbii-siba , 1 , often. — Setstt-setsit , Jfg ^ V ! > often. Tabi-tabi , ^ Y {, at every turn. 175. Tsilne ni, £ _ -|‘|4 . generally, always. — Tsilne-dzitnS , continually. Obitadusiku , !|! j; £ E. 7 ’ manifold, often. 177. S 58. Adverbs ot manner, indicating the form of thought or speech, in which the speaker represents the idea expressed in the predicate. 1. Affirmative. Hei, '' r , with its variations: /itf/it , /it, vulgo hdi , /ia, yes. 178. $u-yoo, 'jfl contracted . 800 , so, thus, considered more polite than // indeed. Gent, or Geni-geni , Y evidently, doubtlessly. Kessite, B5V , surely; with subsequent negation: by no means, not at all. AW-trt ni , solidly, to the purpose. 185. KiUo, h , certainly. Fit-sen , ;J/\ .1? , certainly. Fit-dziyoo , ^ v . certainly, definitely. Itsi-dziyoo , — * £ ^ , definitely. Ka-ndrazu, ^ certainly, doubtlessly, without doubt. Motsi-ron, .1 fn-ron, Ron-ndku, Ron- nan , "p , = do not reason ! = without contradiction; not to be contradicted. 190. Sappari , ^ y > \ ') , in all respects; with subsequent negation: by no means. Sappari .... sezu , to do by no means. Tgu-zen . Too-zen , y > > properly. husaku , fit;! | £ o ^ . in short. 193. 182 CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. § 58, 59. 2. Negative. Iiye, i" ' x, vulgo viya, 110 . liya-iiya , no, no. 194. Remark. The negative: not, expressed in Japanese by n, as a rule, is included in the inflection of the verbs, by which a peculiar negative conjugation arises. Fu-sin ni , % 7 ;gprr_., uncertainly, doubtfully. 195. Fa-do-site , Jf 7 II PW suddenly, by chance. 3. Optative. Doozo , far though, than, Pray! Doozo, kikareyo , hear, if you please, hear though! 197. Negavakuva, though (contracted front Neyai, wish, and Ivakuva , so as they say), so as one wishes. (See Shojiping-Dialogues p. 11.) 19S. 4. Supposing. Makotordsiku, probably. — Ta-bun , ^ $*'£•> perhaps. 199. 7b/a m yotte v a , Koto ni yottard , perhaps , according to circumstances. Zi-gi ni yori, 0^^ '/}* % ^ , or ni yotte or yottard , if time be favo- rable, according to circumstances; under favorable circumstances. 201. Utdgavurdkuva , probably. 202. Zon-bun no si-dai , l y ^ > as 1 think; also Zon-bunni s'ita- gdtte. — Zon-bun no si-dai siyo-mdtsU ari-mdsu ka, are there books also? § 59. Adverbs connecting propositions, such as nevertheless, however, since they are conjunctional adverbs, are treated in the Chapter VIII on the Conjunctions. ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OF THE ADVERBS CITED. The numbers correspond w th those placed after the adverbs treated in j 53 — 59. Ai-tai 105. Asdko ni . . . . 88. Betsit ni. . . . 55. Don bo-don . . . 74. Akeno tosi . . 162. Asu . . . . . . 156. Dai-itsi ni vd. 79. Dono-kurai ooki 21. Akuru ji. . . . 163. Asti-made . . . 156. Dai-ni ni vd . . SO. Doozo 197. Akuru tosi . . 162. Asta . . . . . . 156. Dan-dan ni. . 14. Dore-dake. . . 20. AmunekU . . . 93. AsUta . . . . . 156. Dani 68. Dore-fodo. . . 20. A mdri 22. Ato ni. . . . . 99. Doko ni . . . . 87. Dotsira .... 88. Ari-tei ni . . . 185. Atsira . . . . . 88. Doko ni mo . . 87. Fiddri ni . . . 102. Ara toki ni . . 119. . [yamdtte . . . 58. Boko ye .... 87. Firn ni 166. Asattc 161. Bakdri. . . . . 53. Doko yori. . . 87. Fisdsii dto. . . 134. CHAPTER V. ADVERBS. $ 59. 183 FisdsU.il . . 134. Ippai ni. . . • 28. Kono goro. . . 145. Moo 117. Fit -chi i/oo . 187. Ippan ni . . 28. Kono hodo. . . 146. Motsi-ron . . . 190. Fitotsit ni . 64. Isasaka. . . . 193. Kono i-go. . . 144. Mil-da ni . . . 56. Fit-zen. . . 187. Is-so ni . . 29, 96. Kononde. . . . 60. Miikdi ni . . . 105. Fodo-fodo . 49. It si-bun va . 37. Kono tokdro ni 90. Miikdsi 122. Foka ni . . 98. Itsi-dziyoo. . 188. Kore-kara. . . 136. Miikdsi yori. . 122. Fotondo . . 48. Itsii de mo . . 110. Koto-gotokU . . 25. Miindsiku . . . 57. Fu-dd site. 196. Itsil-ka. . . . 109. Koto ni yottard 200. Mu-ron .... 190. Fu-i ni . . 76. Itsti mo. . . . 110. Kotsira .... 89. Musa-musu to. 18. Fu-sin ni . 195. Itsii ni. . . . 64. Kui'd)stku, -siu S. Milsuto 18. Fu-sokU ni 54. Itsii ni vd . . 81. Mabara ni . . 38. Mu-ydku ni . . 56. Fu-tosite. . 173. Itsii zo. . . . 108. Mada 113. Ndka bd va . . 83. Geni , Geni-geni 1 S3. lya-nagara mo 62. Madzu 115. Naka-naka . . 49. Guru-guru 104. lyasikil mo. . 34. Makdto ni . . . 1S2. Naka ni. . . . 97. Gururi to . 104. Ku-ndrazu . 189. Mikotordsiku . 199. Nana-me ni . . 106. Hdi , Ila . 178. Kata-gata . . 70. Mare ni .... 168. Nani-fodo. . . 19. Hugo kit . . 4, 116. Kdtakil. . . . 6. Masani .... 182. NdrU-dake . . 72. Haydu . . . 116. Kata ni . . . 101. Mata SI. Negavdkuvd. . 198. o 4, 116. Kdtau .... o 6. Mata itsii ni va 82. Nengoro ni . . 61. flei, Held. . . 178. Kdtoo .... 6. Mattakil .... 27. Nokordzu . . . 26. Hi 178. Katawara ni 101. Mavari ni. . . 103. Notsi-liodo . . 143. Hisd-bisd . . . 134. Kdsiko ni . . 89. Maye-kata. . . 115. Notsi ni . . . . 99. Hisusiku . 134. Kdtsil-gdtsu . 31. Maye ni. . . . 99. Notsi-notsi . . 143. Tdzukun zo 88. Kdtsu-mata . 32. Migi ni .... 102. Obitaddsiku . . 177. Iiya .... 194. Kdtsii.-te . . . 30. Mina 23. Ondziku 65. Iiya-dya. . 194. Keo 151. Miyoo-dsa . . . 158. Oo-kata .... 44. fye 194. Kesa 152. Miyoo-ban. . . 158. Odki toki va. . 170. Ik-koo . . . 137. Kessite. . . . 184. Miyoo-getsil . . 159. Ori-fUzi. . . . 172. Ikura . . . 19. Kinou .... 153. Miyoo-go-nitsi 161. Ori-dri .... 171. Ima .... 111. Kioo 151. Miyoo-nen. . . 160. Osi-ndbete. . . 24. Imdda . . . 113. Kitto 186. „ nitsi . . . 157. OsdkU ... 5 , 118. Ima-made . 112. Kiuni. . . . 139. „ „ no dsa 158. Osdu, Osdo . . 5. lmd ni. . . 111. Koko ni . . . 89. ,, „ nofiru 157. Otte 125. lmd yori . 111. Kon-nitsi . . 151. Mo-haya. . . . 117. Otts'ke 126. Inisihe . . . 121. Kono aid a, . 147. Mo-hay gu . . . 117. Oydso 39. 184 CHAPTER Y. ADVERBS. § 59. Rai-getsU . . . 165 . Rai-nen . . . . 164 . Ron-ndku . . . 190 . Ron-nau. . . . 190 . Sai-siyo ni vd. 78 . Sai-sen 135 . Saki-goro . . . 149 . Saki-hodo . . . 150 . Sakini . . 99 , 148 . Sdku-gitsiL . . 154 . Sdku-nen. . . . 155 . Suku-zits. . . . 153 . Sa-naku-tomo . 71 . Sappari . . . . 191 . Sara ni 84 . Sage 67 . Sa-goo 179 . SetsU-setsti. . . 174 . Sibardku. . . . 129 . Sibd-sibd . . . 174 . StdzUkani. . . 9 . Sikdto 180 . Sikirini . . . . 124 . Sitdni 100 . Siyo-siyo. ... 93 . Sobd ni ... . 101 . SokU-zi ni . . . 133 . Sono fokd ni . 85 . Sono notsi. . . 142 . Sono told . . . 1 11 . Sono tokdro ni. 90 . Sono fie ni. . . Soro-soro . . . 16 . Soro-soro to. . 16 . So-so 93 . Soto ni 98 . Sfibete 23 . Slide ni 138 . Sudzi-mUkavini 107 . Sugu ni .... 127 . Siu-bun .... 35 . Sukoburu . . . 45 . Suku-nald toki va 169 . Sukunaku mo. 50 . Suku-ndku-tomo 71 . Sumiyakdt ni . . ii. Surd 69 . Suzi-kai ni . . 107 . Ta-bun .... 199 . Tabi-tabi . . . 175 . Tada 66 . Tadd-ima . . . 114 . Tai-gai .... 42 . Tai-soo .... 41 . Tai-tei 43 . TdkUsdnni . . 40 . Tamasakani. . 13 . Tata-tama. . . 77 . Tasikdni . 12 , 181 . Tasinde . . . . 61 . Ta-siyo . . . . 92 . Ta-so 92 . Tatsi-matsi . . 131 . Tau-zen . . . . 192 . To-kaku. . . . 75 . Tokini yotte va 200 . To-mo kdkfi-mo 75 . Tomo ni. . . . 63 . Tonto 23 . Tooku 95 . Too-zen .... 192 . Tsika-dzikd ni. 120 . Tsikd-goro. . . 120 . 'Tsikakfi .... 94 . Tsiyoto 140 . Tsiotto 140 . Tsito 51 . Tsitto 51 . Tsiyau-do . . . 47 . Tsiu 97 . Tsoito 140 . Tsoo-do .... 47 . Tsui ni .... 123 . TsUmdbirakdni 10 . Tsune-d zune. . 176 . TsUne ni .... 176 . Ukegatte. . . . 59 . (Jrd ni 98 . Usiro ni .... 99 . Utdgavurdkuva 202 . LJtsi ni 98 . Uye n i 100 . Wdruku. . . . 3 . Waruu . . . . 3 . Ya-bun ni . . . 167 . Yagate 132 . Yara-yara. . . 17 . Ydsttktt .... 7 - Yasuu 7 . Ya-tsiu . . . . 167 . Yau-yaku . . . 130 . Yau-yau site . 52 . Yen- f oo ni . . . 95 . Yoffodo .... 46 . Yo-fodo .... 22 . Yo-kei ni . . . 33 . Yokoni . . . . 106 . Yoko-samani. 106 . Yoku 1 . Y6o 1 . Yoo-yaku . . . 130 . Yoo-yoo site. . 52 . Yon-yori . . . 171 . YorosikU. ... 2 . Yorosiu .... 2 . Yoso kara. . . 91 . Yoso ni 91 . Yoso ye 91 . You 1 . Ze-hi 73 . Zen-zenni. . . 15 . Zi-gini yottara 201 . Zi-gi ni yotte . 201 . Zikini 128 . Zitsuni .... 182 . Ziyu-bun ni . . 36 . Zon-bun no si- ded 203 . Soo . . 86 . 179 . CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. (postpositions.) § GO. Our prepositions which show the relation, in which the chief idea of a sentence stands to other objects or ideas, are superseded in Japanese by Chief among these words are the inflections (see Chapter 1, p. Gl), viz: ve, he, or x, ye, e, = wards, to. Dative and Terminative (see p. G8). — , ni, = with relation to, in, to (see p. 68). S, to, = to (see p. 70). 3 'J , yori; -ft > , kara, = out of, from. Ablative (see p. 71). § 61. All other relations are expressed either by: 1. nouns which, as such, are declinable and have the further attributive definition, as genitive, before them, as Ycima Uye or Yamcuio uye , the topmost of a mountain; Yama uye ni , on the top of a mountain; or 2. verbs, which being, either in their radical form, or in the gerund in y - , te , in proportion as they govern the accusative , the modal , or the dative have their object with the inflectional termination f , wo , or , ni, or ve, before postpositions. We call them words expressive of relation. Modal and Instrumental (see pp. G8, 186 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 61, 62. them, indifferently, whether this object is a noun -substantive or a verb used substantively. § 62. Nouns, used as expressive of relation, are: 1. Uve, Uye, 1) above, upon (with reference to a place). TsUkd no uvi ni ki wo uyuru , to plant a tree upon the grave. — Tstikd no uve no ki, a tree upon the grave. — Am uyhii mata fitotsu , above which there is still one. — Kono uye wa deki-masenu , = what is above that, does not happen, = more I can not give for it '). — Sono uyewa nai (or ari-mastinu ) , there is nothing above that 2 ). 2) upon, after (with reference to time). Gin-mi (or Tadasi) no uvi fatto u’O motte bassu ( * <« r M) ' ±Z *' 9 y ) , upon inquiry punish according to law 3 * ). — Un- ziyau nou-sai no uve vd ( Ml ±* ,, ) , upon payment of the duty '■). — Sina-monowo uke-totta iiy&de ( dai-kinwo ) age-masoo , after having received the goods I shall pay (the price) 5 ). Chinese compounds with v ziyau , zoo , upon. ill t _t u P on mountains. — ^ %, v , upon clouds. — ” K % > upon the throne. — W ±f upwards , prior to a time , = sore yori mave. — San nen i-ziygu , prior to three years ago. 2. Sit&, beneath, under, below. Sitd-ni sitd-ni , down! down! = kneel! — Sitayori waki-idzuru midzu , water springing up from beneath. — Sdkuno sitd , what is under a foot measure, the divisions of a foot G ). — Watukusi va andta yori sitd de gdzdru , = 1 am beneath you, 1 am less thou you. Chinese compounds with ^ a K ^ v -p o } Ten-ka , U-ke , what is under the heavens , under the firmament, the earth. — under (in) the earth. — |Jj t San-ke , the foot of a mountain. — J^j[ ^ , = Sono ato , after, since. — San nen i-ka , three years since. *) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 118. 3 ) Treaty f. 1858. Art. V. al. 2. s ) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 13. =) Ibid. p. 29. «) Ibid. III. fi. °) Ibid. p. 29. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 02. 187 3. Mave, Maye, vulgo Mai, x (of ma i eye, an d ve i side, direction), before, local or temporary. Matsu-maye , = before the pine-trees. — Yei-zi wo mune no mave ni kakavete niu- you su , she holds the suckling to the breast and suckles it. — Itsu-ka nen ma- ve ni, a year previous '). — Kaviko idzuru maye ni , before the silkworm comes out. — Go nen yori mave , = from the fifth year forward, i. e. before the fifth year. Chinese compounds with t> zen i before. It T , before the front of. - PI t # V , before the door. — W #r. previous to. — Kono fi-giri aruiva sono i-zen nite mo, at this date or even earlier 2 ). hind, after, with a definition of time, refers to a time which is behind, with reference to the present, future. Kaze okiru notsi, after the rising of the wind. — Kazega fukite notsi , after no notsi yori fitotsu minato wo firaku besi, after the lapse of 18 months from now coin; the opposite. lye no urn, the inner side of a house. — Urumi won no Ura nari , disgust is the reverse of inclination. Yamawo usironisi , kavawo omotenisu, (the village) has mountains for back- ground, a river for fore-ground, = it has mountains behind and a river before it. — Also the inside of a garment, as reverse, is called usiro. Saki no tosi , a former year. — Sakini, earlier, before. — Go nen bakdri saki 9. Ato, Sit I. , footstep; behind. Fitono atoni tsuite yuku, go behind any one. — Sono ato, afterwards. -f. Notsi, (from no, back, whence ndku, retreat, and tsi, place), be- the wind has blown. — Sono notsi. thereafter. — Ima yori oyoso ziyu fatsi ka getsu a harbour shall be opened 3 ). — 1 w from now for the future. 5. Omote, countenance, the fore-side, before. 6. Ur&, ^<§1 , the internal, the inside of a garment; the reverse of a 7. Usiro, 8. Saki, # , point, with reference to time, beforehand, past. yori va, only since the last five years. — 0 saki! you before! you first! after you! b Treaty Art. X. al. I. =) Ibid. XI. I. •’) Ibid. II. 2. 188 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 62. 10. UtSl, ft?. * . within. lye no titsi ni aru , to be within the house. — Kiyo-riu-ha no titsi ni ) Treaty. Art. VII 1. al. 1. 4 ) Ibid. ]i. 4. 1) Ibid. Art. I. al. 3, 5. “) Ibid. X, 1. 6 ) Ibid. [i. 13. R ) Ibid. II. 2. 3 ) Shopping-Dialogues , ]). 9. °) Treaty. Art. II. al. 17. ») Ibid. II. 18. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 62. 189 Chinese compounds with gwai, outside, without, out of: PI! 4l Mon-gwai , without the gate. — CJ ^ fy\' ^ > Koo-gwai , out of the mouth, out of the mouth of a river or harbor. 12. Soto, originally the back door, at present generally: without. Sotd-mo for Soto-omo , the back- or winter-side of a mountain. — Sato no sotoni , without the village. 13. Mukkvi, Mtikki, fo] v ti, vulgo also Mukau, Mukoo, as substantive, the opposite quarter, the direction opposite anything. Karega sumi-kava waga-iydno mtikdini dm , his dwelling is opposite my house. — Mukau no kisi ve fitd wo u'atdsii , to put people over to the opposite side (of a river). 14. Avida, Aida, 50 r , the interval, space between things, between; space between two points of time, while. Aida no firm, pause, leisure, opportunity for anything. — Kono aida , be- tween. — Sono aida , meanwhile. — Yamano aidani inidzii dritwo tani-gava to ivu , the appearance of water between mountains is called a valley-brook. — Oydso ik-ka nenno aida , for the time of one year '). — Tada siyau-bai too nasu aidani norni , tou-riu-suru kotoico u-besi. only while they carry on trade, may they hold residence (there) 2 ). Chinese compounds with 50 \ V , kan , gen: ear m \ , between rice-fields. — SI £ I*, to grow between rocks. — t, 50 t > Nin-gen, among men; mankind. 15. Naka, p|} the middle, in the midst of, amidst; among. Ta no naka no iye, a hut in the middle of the field. — Riygu san no naka no riu-sUi (PR? oit, m * %'), streaming water just between two mountains. — Yo-naka , the middle of the night, midnight. — Kusdno nakade naku kera , crickets that chirp in (between, among) the grass. Chinese compounds with tsiu, in the midst: Sui-tsiu ni _) sumii mono , beings which live in fresh water. — Kai-tsiuno mono , something that is in the sea, a production of the sea. — Kai-tsiu ni irite avdbi ico toru , to dive into the sea and fetch up pearl-mussels. — Tsi-tsiuni , in the earth. — ± r ^ £ , Do-tsiu , *) Treaty. Art. IV, al. 3. S) Ibid. II. 13. 13 190 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 62 . in the ground. — jit! P}4 t,, Dau-tsiu , = mid-way, lialf-way, on the way. — Un-tsiu , in clouds. 16. Soba, ^j|l] £ ^ (from sow#, come near and ba, place), the neigh- borhood, next, at the side of, by. Fi no soba ni koi , come next (or by) the fire ! 17. Kata, a %, side; with reference to time, as much as about, against. Figdsi-kata , Nisi-kata , Kita-kata, Minami-gata , the east-, west-, north-, south- side. — Kita-kata no kaze , wind from the north. — Yo-ake-kata , = the side, on which the night goes open , i. e. about the dawn of the day. — Sono ji no yuvn- kata ni , against the fall of the evening. — Sore yori kono kata , = from there to this side, i. e. since that time. Chinese compounds: jUiw Kai-ben , on sea. — Kai-benno min , people that live on (at) sea. — jjk ? Asiva sUi-benni siyau zu , the reed grows on the water. The spoken language often supersedes Kata with the Chinese F6o (Hoo), side, quarter. — Dokoni 0 ide nasdruka? whither are you going? ...san no hooni (or hdoye), to Mr. N’s. — Andtano hdoni, at or to your side, by or to you *). — Sono f do, his side, you. See p. 84. 18. Fotori, i~, round, round about. Ike no fotori no tsutsumi , a dike round a fish pond. 19. Mavari, IH?. , circumference, round about, round. Yasiki-mavari ni , within the compass of dwellings. Chinese expression: y (H' 1 ’, Siu-i, round about. — y * / jiD y HU * = B J[§j 't,? ftj£ i x‘> roun d about their dwelling place people place neither gate nor fence 2 ). 20. To, Sil with, Lat. cum, indicates the express coupling of two or more objects; it is a declinable suffix and, so far, a word expressive of relation. Dare-to ondzikoto ( ^ fii/. ’’ (5 [rij j;. -,) , = identicalness — with which? — YebisU- to wa-bdkil sitd, peace has been made with the barbarians. — Kimi-to tomoni sum, to hold with his master, to be attached to him. — Hana, tori, = llowers, birds. — Ilana-to tori wo yekaku, = to paint birds with (and) flowers. — ’) Shopping -Dialogues , ]>. 1G. ! ) Treaty. Art. II. al. 10. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 62. 191 Hana tori-towo yekaku , to paint flowers and also birds. — Sisi, lion; Toni, tiger. — Sisi-to toraica, as for the tiger with the lion; or also: as for the lion and the tiger, provided the principal accent be placed on „ tiger.” — Kane-ziydku-to ku- zira-zhydku wa doo-kawari mdsuka ? = as for the whalebone and the iron foot , what difference is there? '). — At si, there; Kotsi, here; Atsi kotsi-to , there and also here. ...to ...to, repeated after two nouns coordinate, answers to our both... and..., as well, as... also.., Lat. et..et, que..qne.. — Ilana-to tori-to, both flowers and birds. — Olanda koku-icqu to Dai Nippon Tai-kun to riyqu-kdku no kon- sin kdtsit siyau-bai no tsindmi wo jirdkil-sen koto ic6 hdssite , the King of Holland and the Tai-kun of Japan wishing to extend the relations of friendship and commerce of both countries etc. J ). — Nippon-to San-kan-to no atsukai no koto , ne- gotiations of (between) Japan and the Three states. — Hana-to tori-towo yekdku, to paint flowers as well as birds. — Yuku-to kaveru-to ni mato wo iru , in going to and fro to shoot at the mark. — Faravu ni Nippon to gwai-koku to no kwa-heiwo motsiiru koto samadake nasi * 3 ), = there is no obstacle to using either Japanese or foreign money in payments. — The characteristic of the coupling is necessary here, as without that it does not attract notice. Remark. If, as in the expression: a valley with or without water, the presence or absence of one object near the other is intended, then the verbs drti, present and naki (see p. 108, n°. 30), not present, are used, thus: Midzu am tani , a valley with water; Midzu naki tani , a valley without water. 21. Tonari, t- (from to, door, family, and narabi , row), neighborhood; next, close to. YakU-siyo no tonari ni, next the government house. — Kin-ziyo ( kinzo ), m m- a place near, neighborhood. 22. Si-dai, ^ ^ ^ ^ , rank, following, in proportion to. Negai-si-dai , according to wish, in proportion as it is wished '*)• 23. Toori, H* ,■ passage; along. Warada no fen toori ni icttaru kaiko , silkworms lying along the edge of the straw-tray. — Fama toori no mui'd mina . . . , all the villages along the strand. — l ) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 31. 3 ) Treaty. Art. IV. al. 2. s ) Treaty, at the beginning. ") Ibid. IV. 3. 192 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 62, 63. A. y ? - , dau-ri no toori ni , according to right. — ^|j ^ ^ 7 ^ I = , following a separate writing '). — Wag a kokoroyeno todrini , after (in) my opinion. 24. Tame, purp ose, aim, end, the destination of a thing. Tameni, for, for the service of, on behalf of, for the sake of, on account of. Fit 6 no tame ni , for , on account of others. — Waga-tame ni , for my sake. — Simo kamino tameni su , the less is for the service of the greater. — Tate-mono no tameni kari-uru ikkano ba-siyo, a place hired for building ! ). — Kono okiteivo kataku-sen tameni , for the maintenance of this article 3 4 ). — Uru tameni , for sale. 25. Kavari, ^ , barter. Kavarini, in exchange for, instead of, for. — Kono f ltd no kavari ni ,?for (instead of) this man. 26. Made, |iji ^ , the aim towards which a movement is directed; to, into, till, until, with reference to place or time, opposed to yori , from. Firato yori Nagasaki made sanziyu fatsi ri ari , from Firato to Nagasaki it is 38 ri. — Its a made watakusi mataneba naranu ka? till when (how long) must 1 wait? — Asu made , till to-morrow. — Ten-si yori matte siyo-zinni itdrtt made , = from the emperor himself till one comes (itaru made) to the common man '). — 1-fukti, ya-gu , tabino rui made ge-saru , clothes, bedding, even to shoes, are distributed. — Kdkdnotsu han doki yori nanatsu made utsini , = within one till four o’clock, between one and four o’clock 5 ). — Yok-ka madeni deki-masit, by the fourth day (of the month) it will he ready s ). § 63. Verbs in the gerund, used as words expressive of relation, are A. With a previous accusative, -J , wo: 1. Motte, B * 3 ?, using, by means, with, the gerund of Motsi , to seize, hold, use. The object that is seized, or taken with the hand, is either the object di- rect of an action later to be mentioned, or the means of carrying it out. It is object direct in sentences as: | |b!j: y ]^j[ % ^ Si too motte namini tsutquru koto na- kdre , i. e. literally: Taking the poem let it not be abandoned to the waves! = let not the poem be abandoned to the waves. *) Treaty. Art. III. al. I. 4 ) Dai Gaku , $ 6. 2) Ibid. II. 8. ! ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 17. ») Ibid. II. 6. «) Ibid. p. 10. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § ( 33 . 13 . 193 The object of Motte is used as the means of carrying out an action in sen- tences as: M A Um A*. Fiiowo motte fitdwo osdmti , to treat mankind as mankind. — Irovawo motte rui ico wakatsti , to divide the classes according to the Irova. 2. Tovorite, Toorite, contracted Tootte, going through or along . . . , the gerund of Tovori, go through, pass. Mon wo tootte, going through the gate. — Ft no nakawo tootte , through the midst of the fire. — Mitsi-suzi wo tootte yuku, go along a way. 3. Tsut&ite, vulgo Ts’tatte, along, the gerund of Tstitai, go along. Kai-ganwo tstitaite itsi ri bakari ynkeba, if one goes a ri along the coast. 4. Fete, through, along, during, the gerund of Fe, Fti.ru, to go away, to go along. Sono fa fuyu w6 fete sibomazu , the foliage does not fade in the winter. 5. Nozokite, Nozoite, setting behind, excepted, except, the gerund of Nozdk)i, u (contracted from notsini oki, to set behind). Nippon siyo kwa-feiva, tou-zenwo nozoku, yu-syuts-su bcsi ( ^ fij 1 tU a11 Japanese money, except copper money, may be circulated '). B. Verbs, used as words expressive of relation, with a previous local or dative , — , ni : 1 . ..ni olte, in, at, strengthened local form, of ni (in, at) and 6'ite , or woite, C&f.T ), = establishing, Fr. en etablissant, the gerund of oki , to place, establish, erect. When merely ni and when ni oite is used, will appear from the following examples. The expression: „The Dutchmen staying in Japan, = the Dutchmen in Japan,” is rendered by Nippon ni drit Oranda-zin 2 ) ; in the expres- sion: „this document shall be exchanged at Nagasaki,” on the other hand the local is expressed by ni oite , and the translation runs : Kono fon-siyo wo Na- gasaki ni oite tori-kayesu-besi 3 ). In the first case the definition of place where? is governed by the aru or oru, dwell, immediately following; in the second case the definition of place, where?, because not dependent on the verb, exchange, it is, by the addition of 6'ite, made an adverbial phrase. — This remark agrees >) Treaty v. 1858. Art. IV, al. 4. 2 ) Ibid. VII. 1. 3 ) Ibid., after the Japanese text Art. XI, al. 1; after the Dutch text Art. X, al. 4. 194 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 63. with nil the definitions of place, occurring in the Japanese text of the docu- ment cited. The object of Site may also he an action, one is engaged in, e. g.: Fgu-soku wo okctsti ni oite vd (&9 ml = m r)i by violating the Regulations '). The derivative from old , viz okeru , = to be fixed or placed, preceded by a local in ni, answers to the expression: the position with relation to; e. g.: o TO Kun-si no mononi okeru , koreivo ai-site zin-sezu, - rela- & T tion of the philosopher to the creatures : he loves them , Z' is however not humane toward them. Hi a Meng, Cap. Zl Jkl VII, § 61. 2. Yorite, Yotte, S' o w. m. 0 , = having its point of departure and thus also its point of support in, from, in consequence of, on the ground of, the gerund of yori , yoru , to get out from. Compare p. 71, 72. Korera ncivo sironi yorite , tekini kuddrazu , those yet relying on a castle, do not submit to the enemy. — Koreni yotte , in consequence of that, therefore. — Tsi- kdrani yotte , in proportion to his strength. — Tokini yotte vd, in proportion to time. — Pro ni yotte nedan ga kawari mdsu , as the colors are different there is a difference in price 2 ). — Negaini yotte 3 ), on entreaty. — Aruni yotte , because there is. 3. Tsukite, vulg. Tsuite, f 0 , concerning, the gerund of Tsuki, concern, come to. Fiine kisini tsukU, the ship touches the coast. — Koreni tsuki, or tsuite, or t suite va, concerning that, what concerns this. The attributive form is Tsuite no, e. g. ^ ^ u ~ zini tsuite no soo-ron, dispute concerning (about) religion *). Remark. To Tooteva also, for which the written forms: Totteu-a and Tat- tewa 5 ) have crept in, the meaning of: concerning, quand a, have been given, without reference to the limitation of its use. As gerund of Tov)i, u (M)j; to ask, Tooteva means: if one ask, to the question; and the ex- pression: Ooseva mottomo naredomo, waga-mini tooteva, kanai-gdtai, thus ’) Treaty. Art. V. nl. 4. «) Ibid. VII. 4. 5 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 34. s ) Trraty. Art. VIII. al. 1. b ) COLLADO. ]>. 57. RODRIGUEZ, p. 86. CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 63. 195 means: the command is indeed reasonable, but if one ask me, it is not easy to be canned out. 4. It&rite, vulg. It&tte, ^ o | y, = coming to, respecting; with defini- tions of time: against, towards, the gerund of Ttdri. Taikunni itatteva , does it come to the Taikun, what concerns the Taikun. — Fdrilni itatteva , towards the spring. 5. Tai-site, standing opposite, towards, the gerund of Tai-si, to be opposite, being the further definition, opposite to which, characterized by ni or ve , sometimes also by to. Compare p. 68. Oranda-zin ve tai-si fouwo dkaseru Nippon-zin va, Japanese, who have trans- gressed the law , towards Dutchmen. — Nippon-zin ni tai-si fou wo okasitaru Oranda- zin va, Dutchmen, who have transgressed the law, towards Japanese ’). 6. Muk&vite, Muk&ite, also Makdvute , Miikdote , |Sl|f. foj | f> against, the gerund of Mukavi , to be pointed against something. Fito ni mUkaite (or miikdote) ku-ron-zuru , to contend against some one. Mukarite , Mukdtte, fo] | y, the gerund of Mukdri , be turned against some- thing ; e. g. Kaze ni mukdtte lidsiru , to run against the wind. Mukite, Haiti, fpFJ i, against , the gerund of Muki , to turn against. — Bm/au ban ni muiti, towards both sides. o 7. Sitagaute, Sitagoote, y, according to, complying with, the ge- rund of Sitagavi , Sitagai , to submit , to yield , to follow. Sitagatte , mr, according to, the gerund of Sitagari, to be subordi- nate. — (Ni motsu no) atavi ni sitagatte un-zigguwo dsdmu besi , according to the value (of the goods) shall customs be paid 2 ). — Ki-i ni sitagatte ( ■flj' * ^ _ \ y ^ ) , according to the noble (i. e. your) pleasure. ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OF THE WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION TREATED. Aida = Avida ... § 62. 14. Ato , behind. ... 62. 9. Avida , between . 62.14. Ben = Kata .... 62. 17. Dai = Utsi .... 62. 10. De - Nite § 60. Fete , through . . § 63. A. 4. Fokd , without. . . §62.11. Fotori , round about 62. 18. Ge - Sita 62. 2. Go = Notsi .... § 62. 4. Gwai = Foka ... 62. 11. He = Ve 60. Hoka = Foka . . . 62. 11. Itarite = Itatte. . § 63. B. 4. ') Treaty. Art. V. al. 1, 2. =) Ibid. III. 3. 196 CHAPTER VI. WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. § 63. ltdtte, to, concerning, respecting . . § 63. B. 4. Ka - Sita §62. 2. Kan = Aida. . . . 62. 14. Kara , out .... 60. Kata, next, to; against , about 62. 17. Kavari , for , in- stead of ... . 62. 25. Ke - Sita 62. 2. Made, to 62. 26. Mai = Mave .... 62. 3. Mavari, round about 62. 19. Mave, Maye, before 62. 3. Mott.e , by means of, with . . . § 63. A. 1. Mukdi = Mukavi . § 62. 13. Mukaite = Mukdvite § 63. B. 6. Mukavi , contrary § 62. 13. Mukdvite , against § 63. B. 6. Mukdrite , against 63. B. 6. Mukdtte = Mukdrite 63. B. 6. Mukau = Mukdvi § 62. 13. Mukavute, against § 63. B. G. Muite = MukitL . § 63. B. 6. Mukite, against. 63. B. 6. Mukoo = Mukau. . § 62. 13. Mukdote), against § 63. B. 6. Nai - Utsi § 62. 10. Naka , in the midst of 62. 15. Ni, at, in 60. Nite, in, with . . 60. Notsi , behind, after 62. 4. Nozdite = NozdJdte § 63. A. 5. Nozdkite , except. 63. A. 5. Oitd, in 63. B. 1. Ornote , before. . . § 62. 5. Saki , before hand 62. 8. Si-dai , following. 62.22. Sita , beneath. . . 62. 2. Sitagdtte, accord, to 63. B. 7. Sitagaute , „ 63. B. 7 . Sitagoote. „ 63. B. 7. Siu-i , round about § 62. 19. aS'o&ci, next 62. 16. aSo£o, without. . . 62.12. Tai-site , towards § 63. B. 5. Tame, for, on ac- count of. . . . . § 62. 24. Te, in, with ... 60. Tsiu = Naka . . . § 62. 15. To, to, with. . . 60. To , with, together, and . 62. 20. Tonari, next . . . 62. 21. Todtte - Tovorite § 63. A. 2. Toote va 63. B. 3. Todri, along . . . § 62. 23. Tovorite, through § 63. A. 2. Tsuite - Tsukite 63. B. 3. Tsukite, concerning § 63. B. 3. TsUtaite , along. 63. A. 3. Ts'tatte = TsUtaite 63. A. 3. Urd , inwards . . §62. 6. Usiro , behind . . 62. 7. Utsi, within . . . 62. 10. II . 62. 1. Uyd, up . 62. 1. Ve , wards , to . . 60. Yori , out, from . 60. Yorite , on the ground of . . § 63. B. 2. Yotte = yorite . . 63. B. 2. Zen - Mave. . . . . §62.3. Zvyau = Uyi . . . . 62. 1. CHAPTER VII THE VERB. Man begreift nichts, dessen Entstehnng man niclit einsiebt. STEINTHAL. In the treatment of this chapter, the question, which presents itself most pro- minently, is, what are the conjugational forms of the Japanese verb, and what do they mean. Included in it is the answer to the question, how are the con- jugational forms of the Western languages expressed in the Japanese. § 64. The voices of the Japanese verb are: Intransitive. Transitive, Factive or Causative. Passive, but in the form of an Active. Negative, since the verbal terminations contain in themselves a negative element, n. § 65. The Moods are: the indefinite Root-form: the Imperative which, at the same time , is the basis of the Optative : the indicative Closing form : the Sub- stantive-form (Infinitive), at once Attributive form (Participle), and a derivative Adverbial form (see § 107). — The Root and the Substantive forms are declinable, and by declension express the mood definitive of time and cause (Subjunctive) and the Conditional etc. 14 198 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 66, 67. 68. § 66. The Tenses are root-tenses (Present, Preterit, Future, IJjf? ^ , Gen-zai; i* 3 ’ Kwa-ko; Mi-rai), and derivative tenses. A root-tense is indefinite (aorist), when the action with reference to the speaker is present, past, or future, and is not, with reference to a given period of time, represented as perfect or imperfect. The Japanese verb pays attention to this distinction, and also expresses the beginning, the continuance and the ending, as well as the repetition of an action by peculiar forms. § 67. Person and number are not noticed in the verb, whereas the gram- matical distinction of three persons (1, thou, he) as well as that of singular and plural, have remained foreign to the language. (See pp. 73 and 53). Instead of a grammatical distinction, a qualifying one steps in, noti- ceable by the choice of the verb, by which the speaker distinguishes his own being or acting from that of another person, but particularly noticeable, because he adds the augmentative prefix On or O , which plays so important a part in the domain of the pronouns (see p. 75), to the verb also, as soon as the action that it expresses, proceeds from a person, to whom lie bears respect, or is a con- dition imputed to that person. The want of a grammatical distinction of three persons is fully made good by the manner in which a courtly speaker qualifies his own being or acting and that of another. The way in which courtesy expresses itself in the verbs, is further explained in an Appendix to this chapter. § 68. The verbal root. Every verbal root (the essential part or the root of a verb) terminates either in e or i (compare the Latin doce and audi). These ter- minations are the verbal element proper, which is subject to transformation or declension. Whereas we, by means of the European letters are able to disengage these elements from the verbal root and treat them separately, the Japanese syllabic system of writing represents them as bound to the final consonant of the verbal root. As the element % undergoing a strengthening, in certain cases becomes a or o, whereas the element e, in the same cases remains unchanged, this leads natu- rally to a division of the verbs into two conjugations: a nondeflecting one in o, and a deflecting one in i, called by some a regular conjugation in e and an irregular one in i. CHAPTER VII. THE VERH. § (58, 69. 199 There is a group of about forty verbs derived by a nondeflecting element i, which in respect of their transformation are ranked under the nondeflecting conjugation in e. They are enumerated and explained in § 99. The verbal root or the root-form answers logically, but not formally, to our f Infinitive. Ake, to open; Kaki , to write; Yuki , to go. A verb is in the indefinite root-form , when it is the first member of a com- pound verb, as well as in the coordinate connection of propositions which has the peculiarity, that only the last of the propositions linked together expresses the definition of time and manner, whereas in the preceding sentences the verb is left in the indefinite root form (compare p. 40). The dictionaries of Japanese origin do not point out the root-form. But as a knowledge of it is necessary to being able to conjugate a verb, we, here, as in our Dictionary, place the root-form on the foreground. The root-form is equivalent to a substantive, and is declinable by means of suffixes (see § 7). Ake ni, to the opening, to open. Dative and Terminative; Supine. Ake niv&, = Akenba , = Akeba , while one opens. Local, Modal. Ake te, by opening. Instrumental, Modal. On this principle forms are obtained, which answer to some of our moods. § 69. The imperative mood, Ge-dzino kotoba. The Imperative terminates in the accented e. In the nondeflecting verbs the root is at once imperative: Ake , open! — in the deflecting the termination i changes into e: Kaki, to write; Kaki, write! Kuvi , to eat; Kuve, Kuye , eat! This form may be strengthened by suffixing the exclamation yo (see p. 62), for which in the eastern countries ro is in use '). Akeyo or Ake to, open! Yukiyo or Yuki ro , go! Seyo or Sero, do! Instead of eyo the conversational language of Si-kok uses ei also, thus AkH for Akeyo, open! Sei for Seyo, do! Yoku Oide nasarei , for nasare, = well may your arrival happen, i. e. be welcome! — Ki, come, has Koyo , Koi, in Sikok Kei ’), come! — From Mi, to see, and Kiki , to hear, appear also in the old- Japanese Mi so and Kiki so ( JL- &'• Hi J. y ) as imperatives. ') Wagun siivori , under Ro. s ) Ibid., under Ko. 200 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. $ 69, 70. The termination Ti (= ti) changes into ■ f te; from Matsi , to watch; Utsi , to beat, becomes Mate , Mateyo , watch! We, Uteyo , beat! The imperative thus obtained is with respect to its form the vocative of the verbal root (see p. 62). The categorical imperative, used only to inferiors, is avoided in polite conversation and superseded by more elegant expressions. The imperative , followed by kasi or gana , has the force of our optative. 0 idt. nasarei kasi , oh that you came! § 70. Closing form of the verb. If a verb closes the sentence in the quality of verb predicate, i. e. as finite verb, then the termination e or i of the root form passes over to the mute u. From Ake is Aku , one opens; from Yuki , Yaku , one goes. Logically this form answers to our indicative present. The historian uses it for the past also, which he, in his relation, represents as an event taking place before his eyes. (Histo- rical present). In the application of this rule the following phenomena present themselves : The terminations ai , ei, ii, oi, ui pass into au, eu , iu , ou, uu, which in the spoken language re- solve into ao , eo, iu or iyu, ou, uu. Compare pp. 12, 13. Ai becomes au, it suits; Ei, eu (~zp or iy), one gets drunken; Ti (d ' ). iyu (1 rz.), one says; Oi, oyu (tf x), one grows old; Kui (p A ), Kuyu (pi), one regrets; 6 (x), to get, u (p), one gets; lye, iyu (A x), it heals. The ter- minations: ke, y, and ki, become ku, 9. ge, y, and 90 become se, si, Pi su, x. ze, r, 11 zi, 11 **, x". te, tsi , f , tsu , de, y. 11 dzi, t*» 11 c/c?/ , 7*. ne , ni, nu , x. ve, 11 vi, E, 11 y. The terminations 7 E, 2. E , A E, A E , t ( avi , evi, ivi , ovi , ttw) , for which the spoken language uses ai, ei, ii, oi, ui '), pass into 77, t.7. A P, j[P, PP (avu, evu, ivu, ovu, uvu), in the spoken language an (no), eu (ro), in, ou, uu. See pp. 12, 13. df py ( Kir thru , one shuns) and T HP ( X eg (kit , one wishes) sound in the ') Compare p. 10, line CHAPTER VH. THE VERB. § 70, 71. 201 street language of Yedo Kira-u , Ne) , „ rU , Ari, tari and nari (to be) remain, when they close the sentence as verb predicate, unchanged. See § 9b. § 71. The substantive and attributive form. Used as noun substantive (Infinitive) and attributive (by way of participle), the nondeflecting verbs supersede their termination e with eru or uru, i with iru, and the deflecting their i with u. Ake , to open, becomes Akuru or Akeru. Mi, to see, „ Miru. Yuki, to go, „ Yuku. The terminations eru, iru, oru have more or less continuative force, Akeru, Akuru and Miru being equivalent to Ake-te-oru , Mite-iru or Mite-oru, see $ 78. The form uru of Akuru belongs to the written language and in Kiusiu to the spoken language also ; eru , less in use , is confined to the spoken lan- guage '•). ‘) From an oral communication by the native of Yedo kitaroo. 5 ) See p. 13, note. 3 ) On account of the important part, which Soro plays as auxiliary verb in the epistolary style, it will be treated still more particularly hereafter (§ 102). 4 ) From au oral communication by tsuda sin itsiroo. 202 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 71 , 72 . As noun substantive, the verb is, like every substantive declinable, e. g. Todki ni yuku va , going into the distance. — Kun-si no mitsi tatoye vd tooki ni yuku ga gdtosi , the way of a philosopher is, to use an instance, as a going into the distance. — Ter a too rnlru ni yuku , to go to see a temple. — Ki drii wo mdtte , on account of the presence of trees, because there are trees. — Age-masu kara, after presentation. — Sikdru ni yotte , = on account of its being thus; since it is so. — Yuku yori va yukanu ga masi , it is better not to go than to go. — Se , to do ; Suru , the doing ; Suriini vd , in the doing. — Mi , to see ; Miru , the seeing; Mirunivd , as one sees. — San fao yori miruni (or rmrunivd) yamano sugata ondzikoto nari, on looking out from three sides, the form of the mountain appears to be the same. Compare § 73, page 206. Remark. Kawakitdru , the become dry, is substantive in Fund kawakitdrii wo mdmti , = what has become dry of the leaves one rubs; on the other hand in; Kawakitdrii fa wo te nite momu, = one rubs the foliage become dry, it is attributive. All the relations, which in a noun are expressed by the forms of declension, may, thus, by the same means, be attributed to a proposition, just as it may be desired to characterise it as subjective, objective or adverbial. The substantive form with ka as suffix is the form of the question direct. Arii ka? or Ari-mdsu ka? is there? Art or Ari-masit, there is! The verbal substantive becomes attributive by its mere subordination to a noun following. Akuru-koto , the deed of opening, the opening. — Yuku-mono , the going something, that which goes. § 72. Gerund. 1. The inflectional termination f , te, or 7 -', de, which in substantives indi- cates the local, modal or instrumental relation, added to the verbal root forms a gerund, which characterises the action expressed by this verb as a subordi- nate local, modal or instrumental definition of another action succeeding it. Ake te , by, on or at opening, Fr. en ouvrant. — Mite , on seeing. — Yukite. on going. — Oydbi , to come to. — Kure-g&td ni oydbite wagiye ni kaMriki , when it came to the evening twilight, or, in short, at evening, one returned home. - Teioo ag'ete f it ’dwo manelci-ydbU , raising his hand (lie) winks and calls people to himself. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 72. 203 2. Modifications introduced into the original form of the gerund by the spo- ken language: a. The polysyllabic verbs ending in the deflecting ki or gi, mostly drop the k and g; kite or gite becomes ite. Thence: Yaite for Yakite , Taite „ Takite , Kiite „ Kikite , Oite „ Okite , Suite, „ Silkite , Tsitite „ Tsukite . Kaide „ Kagide . Soite „ Sogite , Toite „ Togile , Yaki , tii. to burn, trans. Taki , to burn, intrans. Kiki , to hear. iff, to place. Silki, m- to like. Tsuki , m. to come to. Kagi, smell, tr IMS. Sogi , split. Togri , grind. The nondeflecting De-k)i, ini ( ). to come out of, proceed, happen (see § 00. N°. 3). has Dekite. b. In verbs in tsi and ri, tsite (Y y) and rite ( 'J 7) change into tte, that is written y 7 but not pronounced tsute or tste. Thence : Tatte , yy y , for Tdtsite , from Tatsi, to rise, to stand up. Matte , ~?y y , n Matsite , „ Matsi , to watch, to wait. Motte , * 7 r , 91 Mdtsite , „ Mot si, to hand, to take. Atte , yy y , 11 Hrrte , ,, dii, to exist, to be. Olte , t y y , 91 Orite, „ On, 1. to dwell; 2. to break. Natte , t? ? , Xante , „ Xari, 1. to be; 2. to sound. Forte , sy y , 19 Yorite , „ Yon , to go out from. Kahette , -jj ^y 7 , 11 Kaherite, „ Kaheri, to turn back. Musitte , 1* *yy. Musirite . „ MUsiri , to pluck. Tsitnotte, y J y 7 - , 19 TsUnonte . „ TsUndri , to be steady, steadfast. Here, after the suppression of the weak termination i an assimilation of ts (originally t) and of r with the t succeeding takes place. In deflecting verbs the forms bite , £’ 7 - , and mite , £ 7 - , dropping the weak j, in pronunciation change into nde. Thence: 204 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 72. Erande , ^r. for Erdmi-te , Ayunde , 7 3.^", 99 Ayumx-te, Yonde , 5 ^7", 99 Yomi-te , Nonde , 7 ^7", 99 Nomi-te , Nomikonde , y L3 2/7", 99 Nomikomi-te Monde , A ^7", 99 Momi-te , Susunde , X ■> ^7", 99 Susumi-te , Musunde , L X ^ 7 ", 99 MusuM-te , Yonde , 3 ^ 7 ", 99 Yobi-te , from Erdmi, to select. „ Ayumi , to walk. „ Yomi, to read. „ Nomi, to drink. „ Nomikomi , to conceive, to under- „ Momi, to rub. [stand. „ Susumi , to advance , to go forwards. „ Musubi , to tie. „ Yobi , to call. The nondeflecting in mi and hi retain mite , bite. Horobi , to ruin , v. i., Ho- rdbite. See § 99. N°. 24. As the old manner of writing used L instead of & , thus L 7" instead of >7", and L, also passed for , for the terminations ande, onde, unde, the forms aude, oude, uude, were obtained; which in the pronunciation pass into node ( oode ), code , uude; thence: Eraode for Erande, Yoode for Yonde , Ay uude for Ayunde. d. In the deflecting verbs in avi, -ft K , ovi (in the spoken language ai, oi) the substantive form is really jy, 4 7, pron. ao, no, to which the ter- mination te is added. Aw, pron. Ai, to meet, becomes 77/, dviite , in the spoken language aote , oote. Nardvi, pron. Narai, to learn, becomes f > 7 / , NaravUte, in the spoken language Nardote , Naroote. Stmdvi, pron. Simdi, to cease, becomes 7 , Simdvilte, in the spoken language Smu/ote, Simdote. Wardvi, pron. Wardi, to laugh, becomes *7/7/, Wardvtiti , in the spoken language WardotJ, WarootS. Fardvi (Hardi) , to sweep away, remove, becomes yy 7 , Faraote (Haroole), in the street language of Yedo Hardtte also '). Omdvi, pron. Omdi, to think, becomes A Ay 7 , Ombv&td, in the spoken language dmdote. Nuvi, pron. Nut, to sew, becomes 'A y 7 , Nuvuti , in the spoken language Nuule , Niite. ') See k. iiuowN , t.'ulloi/uial Japanese, X CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. $ 72, 73. 205 But if it be admitted, that after dropping the weak i, the remaining semi- vowel e equivalent to <«, with the preceding a or o passes into no or oo (o, o), then the forms Aote , Narqote, Omoote , also, are only euphonic modifications ol the regular forms Nardnte , Omdeite etc. 4 Instances of the use of the gerund. Kasira wo iddsite mirii , to stick out the head and look. — Iddsi, to produce, t he causative form of the disused ah', to appear. — Ktidd ted indite ten ted uk&gdo ( ? -5 " -> y - 5 - ttzs-J to observe the heavens with a tube, i. e. not to have a broad view. — .1 fdtte, from Motsi, deflecting verb, to catch bold of with the hand, to use anything. — Oydsd fttdnd sgo-foowd dkagduvd , kasira ted motte sign to sil, he who pays attention to another’s appearance, considers the head as the principal; literally: taking the head, he makes (it) the chief or the principal. Isolated by va the gerund becomes an adverbial phrase definitive of time, te va being equivalent to ebd. See $ 73. Examples : II ltd no kind to ndtte v d , zin ni drit 1 ) , if he becomes another’s lord, he dwells in (his position is that of) humanity. — Xatle - Narite, from Nari, - to be, and, when an appositive definition with to precedes, - to become. See § 100. III. — Fibdri takdku tdnde ament itari bu-mei-su; kutabirete vd . tobi-sagdrite kttsd-miird nakdni irit , the lark, soaring high, goes to the skies, dances and sings; if he is tired, then he descends and goes into his grass dwelling. — Tonde, gerund from Tobi , to soar. — Kutabirete vd , = by fatigue, the gerund isolated by va , from Kutabire, to grow tired. — lobi-sagdn, literally: fly-descend , i. e. Hy downwards. — 7/7, iru , go in, with the local, where? one goes in. Instead of the isolated gerund Ndtte ed (by the being, or becoming) often occurs the expression Ndtte stkdusite , - becoming, so, etc. § 73. The verbal root in the Local for the forming of adverbial phrases definitive of time (Conjunctive or Subjunctive form). The predicate verb of subordinate adverbial sentences, which describe a time really present, or supposed as present, in the past, and which in our languages are connected with the principal proposition by conjunctions such as when, since, as, in the Japanese is placed in the Local in ni, followed by the isolating ! ) Dai Ga/cu, 111, 3 206 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 73, 74. particle /•» va. Thus is obtained ni va as termination , which fuses into /V, ba (= nva, nba). The subordinate precedes the principal proposition. This termination in the nondeflecting verbs in e and i is joined to the root form, thus Akeba, on opening, as or when he opens; Nedz)i, iru, to twist, Nedzibd , as one twists; Motsii , to use, Motsiibd , as one uses; Sii , to die, Siibd , as one dies. In the deflecting verbs the verbal element i first undergoes a strengthening of sound, and changes into e, by which eba is obtained in the same manner: Yuki , to go, Y akeba , on going, as or Avhen one goes, or when one went. floss i , , to long for, Hosseba. Tatsi (= Tati ), to arise, Tatebu. Mats!, (= Mat i ) , watch , Mateba. Tatovi , serve for example, Tatuvebd , for instance. Ivi, to say, Iveba. Yorni , to read, Yomebd. Ari , to be, Arebd. Nari , to be, Nareba. Ndkeri , not to have been, Nakerebd. Examples of the use of this form. Satoo wo mazebd tsya-yu adziwdi amdku ndru , = by the mixture with sugar the tea becomes sweet of taste. 3faz)e , uric , mix in. — Miiod osdmuru yiten wo sirebd, sunavatsi fitoico osdmuru yUm icd sirti , if one knows the means to govern oneself, then one knows the means to govern others. Sir)i , u, to know. — Tsitsi si-seru toki sao-siki wd su-beki tsikdra nakerebd , waga-mi icd urite sgo-rei wo itondmu , at the time of his father’s death not having the means to bury him, he (the son) sold himself and performed the funeral rites. Remark. In nondeflecting verbs in e and instead of the form eba , here explained the substantive form of the verb with the isolated local termi- nation niva, vulgo niwa is also used. — Motome , to strive for, to seek; Mo- tomuru , the seeking; Motomuru ni va , in the seeking, as one seeks. See §71. § 74. The concessive form. The concessive adverbial phrase, which we connect with the principal propo- sition by means of conjunctional adverbs such as though, although, how- ever, but, is characterized in Japanese by the strong accented form-word mo or tomo ( Lat. gnogue) and precedes the principal proposition. Opposed to Ama-gumd &rite vii (pron. attewa), amega fnru , while rain-clouds are present, rain falls, and Ama-gurno areba , amega furu, - as rain-clouds are CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 74. 207 present, it rains, is: Atna-gumo arite-mo (dttnnd), furdzii , = also in the pre- sence of rain-clouds it does not rain, that is: although there are rain-clouds, it does not rain. Consequently the following forms are opposite to each other. The verb as substantive. Akuru \ a, the act of opening. Tatsuruvh , the act of erecting. Mint va , the seeing. Yuku v& , the going. Akuruni va , on opening. Tatsuruni vk, on erecting. Miruni va , on seeing. Yukunivk, on going. Akuru mo, or Akuru tomo, the act of opening being granted. Tatsuru mo , or Tat suru tomo , though erecting. Mini mo , or Mini tomo , also (or even) the seeing. Yuku mo, or Yuku tomo , also (or even) the going. Akuruni mo, even on opening. Tatsuruni mo, even on erecting. Miruni mo , even on seeing. Yukuni mo, even in going. G e r u n d. Aketev a, on opening, as one opens. Tattevk, by erecting, as one erects. Mitevk, on seeing. Yukitev a (pron. Yuiteva), by going. Akete mo, though opening, or even if one opens. Tatte mo , though erecting. Mite mo , even if one sees. Yukite (i/uite)- mo, though going. Time-defining local. Ake ba , contracted from Ake-ni-va , as one opens. Tate ba , contracted from Tate-ni-va , as one is erecting. Yuke ba , contracted from Yuke-ni-va , as one is going. Tatsurebk, contract, from Tatsure-ni-ca. as one is erecting. J.4cdomo, contracted from Ake-ni-tomo , Akendomo, though one opens. 'Tate domo , contracted from Tate-ni-tomo , Tatendomo , though one is erecting. Take domo, contract, from Yuke-ni-tomo, Yukendomo, though one goes. Tat sure domo , contracted from Tatsure- ni-tomo , though one is erecting. 208 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 74 . 75 . From this analysis it is evident why it is necessary at one time to say and to write va and tomo , and at another ba and clomo. .Just as the impure b in ba is a fusion of so the impure d in dorno is a fusion of n -f- t. The Japanese themselves seem not to appreciate this distinction and forget to characterize /■* (ra) and h (to) by adding the Niyori- mark ■) as rt' , ba, and K, do. Instead of dorno, iedomo (1 ^ Kt » 1 i K T) is also used. This is the conces- sive form of conjugation of Ivi or Ii (d 11 d ' ), to say, to he called, and there- fore means: though one says, though it be called. This verb is preceded by the definition, how or what one calls something, as apposition with the suffix to *); e. g. Kurd an, sono naioo Nippon to ivu, there is a kingdom, its name is called Nippon. — Soreiva nani to iu ka, how is that called? — If the apposition is a verb , then this stands in the substantive- or in the root-form : Akuru to ivu , Yuku to ivu, it is said that one opens, it is said that people go. • — Akuru to iedomo , Yuku to u'domo thus means: though it is said that one opens, or that one is going, expressions which answer to: although one opens, or might open, although one is going. — Ari to iedomo , even granting the existence, although there is. § 75 . The form of the Future (7^^ ^ ^ , Mi-rai). There are different expressions, that signify that an action or state which is still in perspective, is objective to the willing, being able, having permission or being obliged. Here the derivative form, which expresses the effort, the incli- nation or tendency to realize what the verb points out, comes first under notice. As it at the same time includes the uncertainty, if anything is happening, has happened or will happen , it has been called Futurum dubium. For convenience’ sake we retain this name, even were that of modus dubitativus better fitted. With regard to the form we distinguish the simple and the periphrastic future. I. The simple future of ) 'amdto-\ an gu age has for characteristic the termi- nations me and mu, which in nondeflecting verbs in e or i are immediately added to tbe root, in the deflecting in i, however, only after this i by a strength- ening of sound lias been changed into a (or sometimes for vocal harmony into 0). The termination mu, according to the oldest writing or ijs. A :l ) and pro- nounced w, lias been in later times superseded by .v, n, and in the spoken language by , u. In measure this .v (n) counts as a syllable. i) S ee i). 9 . 2 ) Sec p. 70. V . 3 ) As in the chronicle Nippon- ki and in the oldest poems. Ake , to open, future Akemil (7 >7 L), Aken ( 7 *7 &), in the spoken language Akeu (7 77), passing to akbi. Mi, to see, future Mima (i > ), Min ( £. >), in the spoken language Miu. Yuki , to go, future Yukamu (x# a), Yukan , in the spoken language Ynkau ( 177 ), passing to Ynkao, vulg. Ynlcoo also. Remark. The Japanese writing of the forms of the spoken language varies: to express the pronunciation of 7 7 7, a. Jj 7 , some write 7 *7 7 , 7 , and others 7 77, ?-1j 7 , and even 7 7 u 7 , is 7", and instead of 7 77 ( aroo , shall be, from Ari, to be), 7 7 7 , 7^7, 7d 7, and even y is written. aS)i , u, to do; future SamU, San , in the spoken language 't? '/\ Dorekara hazimeo zo? where shall 1 begin? — A Do tsutsiye nigeyou zo? whither shall I flee? Nani ka aran what may there be? = A Nanno si-nikui kotoga arqu zo? what may there be, that you do not gladly do? = A Nani no naranu to ivu kotoga aroa zo? - what should there be, that you blame? Ani korewo nasanya? what, should I do this? A Naniwo 0 meni kake-masoo ka? what shall (or may) I show you? — Sake ico age-masoo ka? shall, or may I offer you something to drink? *) Meng-tsze , I. Book I. 3. 2 ) Tschuny-yung. 3 ) Nippon- ki. 4 ! The sign L indicates that the words and expressions , to w hich it is attached , belong to the spoken language, 212 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 75. A Kita no liooni kuro-gumoga ats' matte orimas' kdra , Yedono hoowd mid amega f'tte ori-masoo l ), as in tlie north black clouds are heaped up, it will be raining at Yedo now. — If the definition of time mid (now) is superseded by sdlcu ya (last night), then the after sentence takes the signification of: it will have rained at Yedo last night. — A SakU-ban ittaroo , he will have gone yes- terday evening. The certain Future of the written language. The adverb Masdni , = indeed, certainly (j£ o ^), connection with a future followed by to su , gives the expression the meaning that something will certainly happen or is at hand. (§ 103). — Masdni sardn t6 su, will certainly go. Ten-kano mitsi naki koto fisdsi. Ten masdni Fuu-si wo ' motte bnku-tdku to sen td su 2 ), it is long that the empire has been deprived of the way of truth and righteousness ; but Heaven will certainly use the master (Confucius) for a signal hell (for a herald). At A? % Ml Koku-ka masani okordnto surebd , kanardzu tei-siyou-ari 3 ), if a nation or a family is indeed on the way to raise itself, then there are certainly signs that give notice of it. II. The periphrastic Future. A. The periphrastic Future of the written language is formed 1. by grafting y > & , aran or y ? -k , arame (= shall be) on the substantive form of a verb, by which aran by aphaeresis becomes ran. E. g.: Mi, Miru, to see; Miru-ran , = the seeing will be, videns erit. Kik)i , u , to hear; Kiku-ran, = the hearing will be. Tv)i , u, or Ji, In , to say; Iu-ran , = the saying will be. As the Japanese find these words expressed in the old rebus writing by P4]£ Wl or 14] £ Mlo H fil> the y consider ran as a particle standing alone. Rodriguez also, on p. 00 line 27. cites ran and. on line 8 , man as particles of the future. ') r. drown, Culloq. Jap. XII. -) Lun yu III. 24. See j. legoe, Chinese classics, Vol. I. jmg. 28. 8 ) Tschung-yung , XXIV. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 75 . 213 2. By suffixing naramu, = naran , or naramo (= will be) to the substantive form of a verb. — Miru-naran , Kiku-naran , Iu-naran , = will see, hear, say. — A.. va B.. nari to iveru nararne , people will (narame) have said ( iveru ) that A is equal to B. 3. In negative verbs by suffixing aranan — a euphonic modification of ari -|- nan, = shall or may be, — to the substantive form. — Kastitmi tatazu mo aranan '), ,= also the not rising of fog will happen. See § 84. 4. By grafting su, suru, fut. suran (- to do) on the form of the Future, by which the s passes into the impure ns = z. — Mi-tari , have seen; Mi-taran , 1 shall have seen. — Mitaran-zu , = visurus est; Mitaran-zuran , = visurus erit. 5. By grafting the auxiliary verb mas)i, u (= to dwell, reside, see § 101) on the form of the Future of deflecting verbs, . . amu , ..an, by which . . am' -f- mast or ..an A- masi passes into ..amasi, e. g.: Ni, to be, becomes Namasi ( & * *■ m ) , contracted from Nan -f- masi. Ari , to exist, becomes Ar amasi. Nari , to be, becomes Naramasi {-f ? a ^ ^ ' ||- ^). Kuvd-sikdn , to be fair, neat, excellent (page. 120), becomes Kuvd-sikdramdsi. Sin , noscere, becomes Siramasi , sciturum esse. Mavusi (pron. Maosi) , to mention, becomes Mavusamasi. Iv)i, a, to say, becomes Ivamasi ( /, 'jp *>)• Tamav)i , ?t, to grant, to bestow or confer on, becomes Tamavamasi. Sak)i, a, to unclose itself, to open, becomes Sakamasi. Hitomo naki 11 Yadono sakurava 1 saru tosino Haruso sakamasi, the plum-tree of the inn, though there was nobody, would nevertheless open in the spring of last year. The definition of time: saru tosi , — last year, also transfers masi to the preterit. If we compare the periphrastic Future Iva-masi with the periphrastic Present Ivi-masi (see § 101. 2. a), it will appear, that the difference of the two forms is not in masi, but that it is in the verb connected with it, in the one case being the Future, and in the other the root-form. Thus when the native, on old autho- rity, seeks for the force of the Future Ivamasi in the termination si, and cha- racterises it as the Mi-rai no si KU it ^), i. e. the si of the Future, he errs. His Mi-rai no si does not exist 2 ). *) Hiyaku-nin , N°. 73. *) This has reference also to the Mi-rai no si, adopted in Rodriguez Elemens p. 66 line 8 and line 16 — 22. 15 214 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 75. In the rebus-writing this Masi is expressed by ^ b' and the derivative form Masik)i , it, by 5lj ^ f° rms to which the Japanese philologist him- self attributes the force of ^ $ , hossi , = will , and BT0. besi , = may, and which are to be distinguished from masi ( ~ ^ > see § 95. 2. 2)). B. The periphrastic Future of the spoken language. It is formed 1. by grafting (zi) zu ( X ) , zuru, zureba, on the form of the Future, proper to the spoken language, si, su etc. being the euphonic mo- dification of si, su, suru, sureba, = to do. — 7 ’/ X ? Akeo-zu, aperiturus est. Miu-zu, visurus est. Yukoo-zu, iturus est. 2. By masoo or aroo, the Future of masi and ari, - to be, the first suffixed to the root, the second to the gerund of a verb. — Kaki-masoo , I shall write. Kakite (or Kaite ) aroo, I shall write. Remark. 1. Let us now just review the nine „ particles for the Future” quoted by rodriguez EUm. pag. 66 lines 7 and 8. Be)ki, si, = may, is a verb. See § 101. Nan, the Future of Ni, 1. to go away, 2. to he in... See § 83. Nuran, the Future of Nuri. See § 83. Tsuran, a variation of Nuran. See § 84. Taran, the Future of Tart , to be continually. See § 78. Taran)zu, zuru , Future zuran , from Tari. See § 78. Ten, = Tariken. See § 82. Si, the Mirai no si, based on a misunderstanding. See § 75. II. 5. Baya is a fusion of m or n , the characteristic letter of the Future, and haya, an exclamation, which, as an expression of complaint (Nagekino kotoba ), ans- wering to our „Alas,” suffixed to a Future, indicates that what is at hand is execrated ( Baya negavi-sutsuru kokorono teniva nan). — Kanasiki mono to nara- baya! Alas he will become a pitiful man! Consequently Motomc-baya, Se-baya, Mi-baya signify, he will, alas! strive tor.., he will, alas! do, or see. The same may be said of Yoma-baya , from Yomi, to read; Narawa-baya, from Naravi, to learn; Nara-bay a (not Naruwa-baya), from Nari, to he or to become. Remark 2. The Future is used as a softened Imperative. Thus the poet says: Yakazu tomo 11 kusava moye-nan 11 Kasuka-no va 11 Tail a far u no Ji ni 11 makaseta- ranan, even if it he not burned off, the grass will grow luxuriantly, therefore CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 75, 7(5. 215 only leave the field of Kasuka to the vernal sun. Makasetnri , he has left it to. Makasetaranan , he shall or may have left it to, is used, according to the Wagun Sitcori , for the Imperative Makasetare go. Just so in the colloquial: 0 ide nasareo for 0 idc nasarei, may your arrival happen, please come. Remark 3. For so far as they point to something future, the verbs which express the permission or liberty, the power or the obligation to do anything, come under notice here. They are J3e)si, ki , ku , I may; Ata)vi , vu, 1 am able, can, and 9 » Too-sen tari, it ought to be, it must be, it shall be. Further illustration of them is given in § 104. THE SUPPOSITIVE FORM. § 7G. The terminations eba or iba of nondeflecting, and aba of deflecting verbs are the characteristics of the suppositive adverbial proposition, which, as a rule, precedes the principal proposition. They are, in my opinion, a fusion of the form of the future en or in and an with the local termination ni and the isolating va. From Aken-ni-va comes Akeba, 7 Jr/* Oi pronounced as Akenba, on being about to open or as one will open; from Min-ni-va, Miba, £ /V, (Minba), on being about to see; from Yukan-ni-va, Yukaba, x#/T, on being about to go; from Naran-ni-va, Narabii, -j- ? ' , in the spoken language even fusing into Nara, -f>, on being about to be, might it be. In the deflecting verbs, clearly noticeable is the difference between the sub- junctive Yukeba and suppositive Yukaba; not so in the nondeflecting verbs, since * Ake-ni-va and Aken-ni-va both fuse into Akeba. For the definite indication of the suppositive character the help of the adverbial Mostkuva , vulgo Mosi, = albeit, in case of, is called in, and it is placed at the beginning of the suppo- sitive proposition. — Mosi to ico akeba , might one open the door. In the ordinary style of speaking the form Nara is used not only for Nardba , but for Nareba also, thus with the signification of „if it is,” and „as it is,” as appears from the examples following: A Sore nara (or Sore de wa) kai masoo , as it is so (= then) I will buy it * 2 ). — ’) The points, which characterise the impure ha (/s') are commonly left out by careless writers. 2 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 4. 216 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 76. Firu-maye ni wa mairi-ye masenu , before noon I cannot come. — Sore nara , jiru- goni , then (the answer is), in the afternoon '). — Nokordzu O-kai nasdrti nara , ondzi nedan de age-masoo , if you buy all, I will sell them for the same price 2 ). — Ydsui (= Yasuki ) nara, tori-mdsoo , as (if) it is cheap, I will take it 3 ). The future in the Local and isolated by va ( Aken-ni-va , on being about to open, if one shall open) mutates with the substantive form in the Local isolated by va (Akuru-ni-va , on opening), as appears from the passage following, taken from the introduction to a Japanese-Chinese Dictionary: as- it* o ms- — H- / T ft* At b 4? tii L *: 5*7 PIS m / Is / d Tit ” Tir & 7 /V ? Ji- IV ll/ -"■•i -n: iv Fit 6 to iu zi wo motome n ni va , Fi no bu no ld- giyoo-mon no sltawo miru besi. Fdna to iu zi wo mofomuru ni va, Fa no bunosei- siydku mon no sita wo miru besi. If one will seek for the word F'ito (man) , then one ought to look for it in the division Fi, under the class: breathing beings. If one seeks for the word Fan a (flower), one ought to look for in the division Fa, under the class: plants. That the unfused forms Aken-ni-va and Yukan-ni-va appear in the written and spoken language as Terminatives as well, equivalent to the Latin ad ape- riendum, ad eundum, cannot surprise us, since the local termination ni is also used as characteristic of the Terminative. (See § 7. IV. b. g.) Remark. When in the Proeve eener Japan.se/ie Spraakkumi of 1857, ]>. 14G, 1 first explained the origin of the subjunctive and the suppositivc form, I raised the question whether or not the Japanese themselves were clearly conscious of it, seeing that they so frequently confound the two forms Mr. r. brown, who has adopted my theory, at p. VII gives the following as answer to it: „ Ja- panese Teachers know nothing of the rational of these formations, and constantly atlirm that the conjunctive is the same in sense as the conditional, and that J ukaba and ) itkeia have the same signi- fication; but Mr. HOFFMANN has ably and clearly demonstrated the distinction ns above given. Indeed it is remarkable how many obscure points in the structure of Japanese words have been elucidated by *) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 17. 3 ) Ibid. j). :S7. ■) Ibid. p. 30. CHAPTER VTI. THE VERB. § 7G, 77. 217 one who ha? derived al! his knowledge of Japanese from the study of hooks.” — I admit the last, provided „ Japanese hooks” be understood. Before that time I had not had the opportunity of inter- course with Japanese, which I enjoyed afterwards, in 18G2. THE CONTINUAT1VE VERBAL FORM. 77. The deflecting derivative forms ari, iri, ori, uri, as I have shown formerly '), are continuative forms of the verbal element i ($ (> 8 ), and express the continuance of movement or being in a condition or in an action. The choice of them was originally, and still is under the influence of a vocal harmony, which requires that the vowels of the subordinate syllables be accommodated to that of the principal syllable. Ari, Iri and Ori occur as substantive verbs with the signification of 1) to be or exist (^f), and 2) dwell, stay ^ ), and have i, = to go, and i or #, wi, = seat, as root. These three verbs will subsequently be treated, further in 90, 97, 98. Examples of the derivation of continuative verbs. Here is to be remarked . that the forms between [] have not hitherto occurred to me, yet they must be supposed as basis of the derivative forms. Aki , light. Kuki , hook; to hook, v. i. Sak)i , it, unclose itself, to open, u. i. [.bj)*, u. rise.] [Sag)i , if , droop, hang down.] Mas)i , it, augment, v. i. ...zi (= n H- si) , not to be. Miz)i, a, not to see. Kak)e, if, unt, fasten, hang, v. tr. Ag)e, if, a to, raise. Sag)e, it, if to, cause to droop. Akdr)i , if, shine, beam. Kakar)i, it, be hanging. Sakar)i , if, be in blossom or bloom. Agar)i, it, be rising, ascending. Sagar)i , if , to be drooping. Masar)i , it, to be supe- rior. . . . zar)i , if , continually not to be. Mizar)i , it, not to be seeing. ') Proeve eener Jap. SpraaJcJcunst , 1857. $ 37, 41. 218 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 77, 78. Araz)i , u , not to exist. [£«dam)i, w, to be deter- mined.] [Fazim)i, u , to begin , u. ?’.] Tsidzim)i , u , wrinkle ; crimp. Firom)i , w , to widen , v. i. Tsum)i , u, to accumulate, v. intr. Ok)i , it, rise. (9/l)< (=Iki), u, breath; flame. Nok)i , ?{, recede. Nob)i, it, stretch, to be- come longer or taller. Mdts)i , ?«, wait, trans. Ne , sleep. Ncm)i, u, to be sleepy. j «, not to be existing. Sadam)e , « , mto , to deter- Sadamar)i , tt , being deter- mine. Fazim)e, u , «re, begin, u. tr. Tsidzim)e, u, uru , to crimp, v. fr. Firom)e, u , writ, to widen, u A? O ~F‘ % 1 Vau-siya taru fito , a man who is a ruler. o Dai-kin wo faravu sets' mo dou-you taru besi * * 3 ). = also at the time of paying the price, it shall be just so (it shall be done in the same way). ') Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIROO. : ) A native of Yedo also told me: „ Otolo iva ori -masu to mousi man ; kodomo ounce tea 8.l'i-ina3u io iiiotcii-mcAU i. e. The men say ori-:« v ^ 3 , Kwa-ko). The form-words of the past tense are auxiliary verbs of time, by means of which derivative verbs are formed. § 79. ..tari, ..taru, in the spoken language ta, contracted from te-ari. It, in connection with a verbal root, expresses continuance in the condition or action, which, by the radical form of the precedent verb, is named as something just becoming. „ E-tari" and „I have gotten” are both what is called the com- pleted present tense. The spoken language shortens tari and tarii to ta, which ta has also been admitted into the familiar written language. Opposite to Ta ya sonova furubitdri , field or garden have become old, is, in the spoken language: Taya sonogd fit- rttbitd; opposite to Furubitdru ta yd sono, field or garden become old, is, in the spoken language: Ftiritbita tayd sono. Since it is the form of the gerund in te or de on which , after dropping the e , ari (or in the spoken language a) is grafted, the rules given (§ 72) for the gerund are of application to the perfectum praesens also, in other words: the e of the gerund is, in the spoken language, simply superseded by a. Akete becomes Alcetd. Mite ,, Mita. Yuite (-■ Yukite ,, Yuita. Mas'te (- Masite ) „ Mas'ta , = been. Yonde (= Yomite) becomes Yonda , read. Naraote (Naravute) „ Kargota, learned. Atte (= A rite) „ Atta , been there. Maitte (= Mairite) „ Maitta, has come. ') Dai Guku , III. 4 CHAPTER Vn. THE VERB. § 79. 221 Whether the perfectum praesens formed by tari liave an active or a passive, a transitive or an intransitive signification , depends on the precedent root-word. Fund kisi ni tsUku , the ship comes to the shore , it lands; tsukitdri , has come to shore. — Kisini tsUkitdru fund , a ship that has come to shore. — Fund too kisi ni tsukdtdri , one has brought the ship to shore. — Kisi ni tsiiketdrU fund , a ship, that one has brought to shore. — Sina-mono wo motsi watdri , to import goods. — Motsi watdri taru sina-mono , goods which one has imported. Instances of the use of the Perfectum praesens. Koy)e , writ, to become thick, fat, corpulent. M'md ame ni koyu , the plum becomes thick from the rain. .1 Find koydtdri , the plum has become thick. Ameni koyurU m'md , plums, that become thick from the rain. KoydtdrU m'md, plums, that have become thick. — Tsuyu kuvani tsUkitdri , dew has attached itself to the mulberry leaf. Tsuyu (or Tsuyu no) tsUkitdrit kucd , leaves to which dew has at- tached itself. — Kai-fen wo isi-kabe wo tsukite tsiyau-ka wo tsurane tari , along the sea-shore one has built up a wall of stones and placed the houses of the place in a row. — Mitsiwo satoritdrU fitd, some one who has understood the way (the doctrine). — Amanand kUni ydri kitdru fitd Jitaini tsuno an, fund ni norite Yetzi-zen no Fino-Urdni tsUki-tari; yiicni kono tokdrowd Tsiind-kd to nudzuku , men come from the country of Amana, have had horns upon the forehead and sailing in a ship reached Fino-ura in Yetsizen; that is why people call that place: Tsunoka (hornshill). — Ame no yamitdrU asa , in the spoken language : yanda asa , a morning when the rain has ceased. — Watdksd 0 tanomini maitta, I have come to beg you. — Soo-tsi si-mas' ta, I have understood it, I shall not fail. Remark. The perfectum praesens in tari, formed from transitive verbs, as Ake, to open; Tsug)i, u, to pour in; Ir)e , uru, to make to go in, remains transitive even though expressions , as To va aketari , Tsiya va tsugitari , Fi va iretari, because they are found translated: the door has been opened, the tea has been poured, the fire has been put in ! ), seem to plead for the passive signification. Opposite to the subject, isolated by va, door, tea, or fire, stands as predicate: one has opened, poured, put in. ') Japanese and Dutch Dictionary, by the Prince of Nakats. 222 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 80. § 80. The form-word ..eri, ..eru, ereba, deflecting, when in deflecting verbs it takes the place of their verbal element i, expresses the continuance in the past, or the praeteritum praesens. — Mds)i, u, to be; Maser i , has been. Er)i , u [to be distinguished from Er)i, u , that as a substantive verb means to choose] is a variation of ar)i, tc (see § 96), and, just as art, is indicated in old- Japanese by . Eri is the closing form, eru the form of the substantive or attributively used noun; erame , erarnu , = eran, the form of the Future. Examples: Edna sibumu , the flower fades; Fana sibomeri , the flower has faded; Sibomeru fdna , a flower which has faded. — Um)'i, u , to hear; Umeri , to have born. — Kisaki no ameru ko , the son that the Queen has born ; Kisaki no ameran ko , the son that the Queen shall have born. Remark. The eru used substantively, or attributively is, particularly with the nondeflecting verbs in e, superseded by esi (§ 81), ethru (§ 78) or erisi (thus Akesi , Aketaru or Aker id) , because the form Akeru already exists as a variation of Akuru , thus , as participium praesentis. If it be admitted that , behind eri as I suppose , the form Keri (§ 82) is hidden , and thus that Maser i, by ellipsis has arisen from Mdstkeri, with the meaning of which it is equivalent, then its signification is clearly explained by the origin of the form. Application of this rule. Kiki , to hear; Kikeri, htJ * M t- Yuki , to go ; Ynkeri , M Said , to open, v. int. Sakeri , %r,. . . ki becomes ker)i , u. Siki , to spread ; Sikeri , l|Ejjf ^ 7^ <[. Iki , to live; Jkeri , ^ ^ Kdki , to write; Kakeri , . . si becomes ser)i , u. iVosi , to make be ; Nasiri , Nokdsi , to make stay behind, to post- pone; Ndkoseri , ?[. Yadosi , to lodge; Yddoseri , fit*#*- Utsdsi , to remove; Utsusdri , a?#*- Terd si, to make shine; Terasiri , jfaifn- Remark. The seri noticed here is arisen from si, the termination of factive verbs, and m; it is to be distinguished from the derivative form scr)i, which is a fusion of the Kiva-kono si and eri. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 80. 223 ..tsi (- ti) becomes ter)i, u. Tdtsi, to stand up ; Tateri , jjf * Mat si , to wdtch; J [uteri, v ^ Motsi, to take; Motdri , ^ ^ V,. Kdtsi, to overcome; Kuteri , £/fsi , to strike , beat ; f/tm , Funatsi, to let loose; Fdnateri , #t'^r 7vi, to say, to be called; /cm, -7^ Omuvi, to think; Omocdri , ^ ^ Sitaydci , to comply, to suit; SUaymeri, 3 'I* ..vi becomes ver)i, u. — -r Sumi, to reside; Sumer i , Sidzumi , to sink ; Sidzumdri , 5^ ,, Nivovi , to smell, c. mf.; Nivoveri , -^Ej J ,, ij. .let , to meet ; ylem , ^ X «) • Tori , to ask ; Toveri , fH] X <) • Naravi, to learn; Xaravdri , ^ ^ ..mi becomes mer)i, u '). Siisumi , to advance; Susumeri , Kumi, to bail out ; Kumeri , Sibomi, to fade; Sibomeri, >)• £7/m, to bear; Um&ri , ^ ^ Tsubomi , to bud; Tstibomeri, ^ Tr 'fC r . . ri becomes rer)i , u. Nari, to become; Xardri, y Tsumdri , ^ , to accumulate : Tsumordri. Tsiri , to scatter, intr.; Tsireri. Komdri , ^ ,, , to stick in, inf. Komordri. Masdri, ,j , to exceed, Masareri. Furi , [y^ ^ , to fall down , Fureri. Examples of the use of the forms . . er)i , u. [ TsiidzUk)i , «, to succeed]. — Tovi-ya akinavi-ya f it 6 stidsini tate-tsudznkeri. Sd- redd tokdro dokdro ni urd-mdtsi mo ari, the custom-houses and shops (of Simono- seki) succeed one another in one line. Although there are back-streets also. [J/(7s)t, « , to be; Jfaseri , has been]. — N... fime no kami va NN... nusino kaini ya-jiro-wani ni narite , miavi-maseri , as regards the goddess N., the god NN. having changed into a crocodile eight fathoms long, has paired with her. — Amaterasu kami va fiddri no mi me-ico aravi-tamdvi-si tokini nari mciscr u kami nari , the heaven-illuminating god is a god, that came into existance (ndri-maseru ) , when (both the creators) had washed their left eyes. — /Toro tsueni ndri-maseru (or tsueni narerisi) kami nari , this is a god that has become a staff. *) To be distinguished from the auxiliary verb, Meri, explained in § 10S. 224 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 80, 81. [) The Treaty between the y el her land: and Japan. 1858. Art. V, ul. 1, 2. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. 81. 225 .,-Ue-ken, J/<-ken, Yu hi- ken, A /v-kon , = aperuerit , viderit , iverit , fuerit , = he will have opened, have seen, he will have gone, have been. The action defined by the Kwa-konosi is one, perfect or completed, with re- lation to the period, that is defined by the predicate verb which closes the sentence. With relation to a present, the time indicated by si is thus a simple preterit; with relation to a preterit it becomes, logically, our plusquamperfectum , with relation to a future on the other hand our futurum exactum. Remark. The elements ki and si are verbs which signify coming and going and with the precedent verbal root, on which they are grafted, form compound verbs. Ari-ki and Ari-si thus mean the arrival and the departure of existence; forms which express the idea of having been. Compare the ex- pression: Nous venons dc le dire '). In the pure Japanese style the ki of the past tense is found explained by ^ (Mi. = to come), or also by ^ , e. g. Kalieri-ki, ()Jx* ^ y, he returned, and it mutates with nu and tsu (see § 84, 85). As substantive verb with the meaning of come, Ki lias the forms of Ku , Kuril, Kile etc., whereas Si with the meaning of go away occurs in Sin)i , u, uru , die; Siv)i , iru , to be dead; whence Sivi-ne, dead rice ( Oryza sterilis)-, Me-sivi, dead to the eyes, = blind; Mimi-sitn, dead to the ears, = deaf. Derived from Si, is the continuative form Sar)i, u , to go away. Ken , old-Japanese Kemu (= shall have been) , is indicated in writing by |&£ f (Kan) , and — by Japanese scholars themselves — explained as a word that „brings the past into doubt” 2 ). Examples of the use of Ki as closing form: raj itt? Ml iipr Ml 5 ili$| Kono mi fasira no kami va mina fitori garni nari-masite , mi mi wo kdkusi tamavi ki, these three Kamis were solitary Kamis, and kept their persons (themselves) concealed. *) Here, is to be remarked what is mentioned by The Notitia linguae Sinicae of Premare, by j. g. Bridgman, page 54, about lai and Kin. s ) f J'/'v : h Wa-gun Siwori, under Ken. 226 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 81. a) Examples of the use of the form in si as noun substantive : Ko-zinno wen-si mo samo arinu besi , also what the ancients have said (of it), must have been of this nature. — Iveri , continuative past form of Ivi, Ii, to say. — Samo, = Sikamo, so, in this manner. As noun substantive the form in si is declinable, thus: 1. Ari-siva, the having been, or what has been. An-si mo, also what has been (subjective substantive proposition). — Nokorisi kavikono siyau ( v) asiku nari si mo kono yue naran , this may be the reason why the silkworms remaining have become had of nature. 2. Arisini, 8. Arisiniva, 4. Arisite, while there has been. 5. Ari-si yori kono kata, since there has been. 6. Ari-si-yUS, 7. Ari-sini yorite or yotte, Avhile, or as there has been. 8. Arisikaba, whereas or since there has been. — Motome-sikaba , Yomisikaba, Naraisikaba ') , as one has sought for, read, learned. 9. Arisi nari, = it has been there. 10. Arisi koto ari , Ari-si to ari, = it is a fact (koto) that there lias been. — Arisi to kaya, it may be that there has been. b) Examples of the use of the form in si as noun adjective: Nokorisi kaviko, the remaining silkworms. — Sarisi Fotoke , the departed Buddha. Sar)i , u, to go away. — Kono tans wo motomesi fito mare nari, people who have procured this seed, are rare. — Kan-kiwo sinogi si (or si nog i taru) rei no koto , the manner in which people have kept off the frost. — N. . . go nori- si film, the ship in which N. .. had sailed. — Ame furazu 11 fi-no kasanareba, 11 take- si ta mo, 11 maki-si fatake mo 11 asa gotoni sibomi kare-yuku, = when there is a repetition of not rainy days, then not only the sprouted field, but also the sown plough-land fades, and dries up every morning — it becomes more faded and drier every day. — Sikdruni tenno kakoni ya ariken , he will thus have stood under Heaven’s protection. The Kwa-kono si shows itself also in both the words Figdsi, pron. Ftngdsi >) By this, is what RODRIGUEZ page 06 line 7 v. o. says explained: „T-e conjonctif a encore une forme particnliere il la longue ecrite, e'est sikaba, que 1’on njonte aux radicanx de tons les verbes, conime motome tsilcaha , i/omi sikaba , narai sikaba CHAPTER VH. THE VERB. § 81 , 82. 227 and Nisi, = East and West, Ftngdsi being a contraction of Fmo-inukdi-si kata, = the side on which the sun has come to meet, and Nisi an abbreviation of Fino ini-si kata, the side to which the sun has gone away. § 82. ..ker)i, u (= ki-f-eri, = has been), the deflecting continuative form of ki (= was), characterises the perfect present tense. Forms of inflection, the same as those of cri, thus: Ken, Kesi, closing-form, = has been. Kerii, form of the verb, used as substantive and adjective, = the having been, or having been; ...Keru nan, has been. Kerebd , as, when, since it has been. Keredomo or Kerutomo, although it has been. Reran, commonly Ken, shall have been. — Keraba, if it has been. Kerdku , adverbial form, = as has been, e. g. li-keraku, as it has been said. Keraz)i, u, negative, = has not been. Art, there is; Ari-ki, there was; Ari-keri, there lias been. Ideographically kcri, kern is expressed by ft I , phonetically by Jj| , the name of a bird, that cries giri gbi and therefore is called Km in Japan. Jpi ^ stands for Kereba. The adjectives in ki and siki (pp. 105 — 107 and 109), which form a continua- tive present in kari , instead of kari assume keri for the form of the praesens perfectum. Taka)ki , ku, high; Tctka-kdr)i, u, is high; Tdka-keri , was high. Be)ki , ku ( ' st ), possible; Be-kari, is possible; Be-keri , was possible. Na)ki , ku ( r ) , without, ..less; Na-kdri , there is not; Na-keri, there was not. Distinguish: Uresisd kagiri nasi, = the joy is boundless; — kagiri nakdri , = is continually boundless; — kagiri naken or nakesi, = was boundless; — kagiri nakari-keri, = has been continually boundless. Since this distinction is confirmed by the Japanese spoken and written lan- guage, as will be seen by the following examples, we hesitate to agree with the opinion of those '), who declare kari and keri to be identical. Nevertheless, we leave the spoken language of Yedo full right to use keri , where kari is meant. ') R. brown. Grammar, XXIII. § 20. 228 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 82, 83. Examples of the use of these forms. [ Ydsuki, light, easy]. — Nippon sei vd tsudzUkd naku ki-teu suru koto yasu- kdri kSri, the unmolested return of the Japanese army was easy. [ Nari ( Nave ), to become]. — Sono rei-kon ke site kaviko-to narikeru to kaya, her soul transforming will have become a silkworm. \Sir6ki , white]. — Sei-nei Ten-wau mumare nagarani site mi kusi sirokari kereba, Siragano Ten wau to nadzuke tatematsuru , as Emperor Seinei’s hair was white at his birth, they have called him Emperor White-hair. [ Tsiisaki , small]. — Mayu tsiisakereba ito fosokusu , if the silk-cocoon was too small, the thread is too fine. [Asiki , bad]. — Kore yori te-ire asikereba , notsini iro-irono yamavi to nan, as from that point, the treatment (of the silkworm) was bad, afterwards it gets to different diseases (different diseases arise). [ Yordsiki , good]. — Ano kodziikaino tsutdmega yordsik crebd , ivatdkusiica na- gdkti tsukde-rnasoo to um/ri-nidsu , = that servant’s services having been good, I think I shall keep him. The adverbial proposition closing with kereba may be understood either as causal or as conditional, as in r. brown’s Japanese Colloquial N°. 589, where that expression is translated: „lf that servant behaves well (I think I will keep him).” § 83. ..tari-ki, ..tari-si, fut. ..tari-ken; ..te-ki, ..te-si, fut. ..ten. By grafting the form-word ki , si, keri on the continuative form tan (§ 79) the forms tari-ki, = he was being; tari-ken , = he shall have been; tari-keri, = he has been, are obtained. The poet supersedes tari-ki , tari-si, tari-ken with te-ki, te-si, ten, also Omdvi-tesi and Tsikdvi-tesi are considered to be equivalent to Omovi-tarisi (having thought) and Tsikdvi-tdrisi (having sworn) '). Wasuraruru 11 miwoba omovazu; 11 tsikavi tesi Fitono inotsino 11 osikumo aru kana! 2 ). I do not think of myself as being forgotten; oh! the charmingness of the life of the man who has sworn (love) to me, exists still! ') Wa-gun Siwori , under Tesi. s ) Hiyaku-nin , N°. 38. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 84. 229 § 84. [. .nij, nu, future nan; [nuri], nuru, nureba, future nuran. Ni, a deflecting auxiliary verb of time, come, by aphaeresis, from ini , mu, = to go away ( a. * ), and expressed in the old written language, by (to go or pass away), grafted on the root of a verb, by which its termination e fuses with inn into enu, and the termination i, with inu into mu, implies the passing away of a condition or of an action, i. e. the action coming to an end. Whereas Ake denotes the „ opening" as an action first beginning, and Akete-oru „ continuance in the opening,” Ake-taru ,,to have opened:” Akenu proper to the old written language, denotes „the ending of the opening.” SitsUmi, to sink; SitsUmi nu, it sinks away, it goes away into the depth. Fate, disappear; Fi iri fatenu, the sun sets (and) disappears. In, to go in, appears here as coordinated, in the indefinite root-form (see § 08). The rule on coordination excludes the use of the root-forms ni and nuri; since, how r ever, they form the basis of further derivatives, they must be first brought under notice here. SYNOPSIS OF INFLECTED FORMS OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Ni, Nu, = TO PASS OR GO AWAY. Aorist of the Present. Coutinuative Preterit. Aorist of Preterit. Contiuuative Preterit. Root-form [Ni.] [Nuri.] Ni-K, i 3k. went away. Ni-keri ^ ^ , has gone away. Closing-form Nu, Niki. Ni-keri, Ni-kesi. Noun substantive or Nuru, Nt-si , , Ni-keru , having attributive. Gerund Local Ni-te, iSP- passing away. Nureba, on pas- sing away. Future. gone away . gone away. Namii, -f l. , Nuramu, Ni-ken, shall Ni-keran , Nan, mi. shall go. Nuran, shall he going. have gone away. Ni-kerasi, 4* ^ , shall have gone away . Conditional form .... Naba, ^ j|)J , if it go. Nuraba, if the passing away shall be. Nikeraba. 16 230 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 84. The auxiliary verb Ni, Nu , Nuru (to go away) is distinguished from the substantive verb Ni (to be) in-as-much as the latter has the appositive definition what something is, before it in the form of a noun. (See § 100. I.) Remark 1. Attention must be paid to the three forms of the future nan, nuran and niken. From their derivation, as it appears in the synopsis , the logical result is, that they must have the signification there noticed: and this conclusion is confirmed by the definition which the Wagun Siwori gives of the three forms. 1 . Nan va mi-raiwo kakete ivu kotoba nari, i. e. Nan is a word used with a view to the future. 2. Ran va gen-zai wo utagavu no kotoba nari , i. e. Ran (= Aran) is a word which brings the present into doubt (should it be?). 3. Ken va hva-kowo utagavu no kotoba nan i, i. e. Km is a word which brings the past into doubt (should it have been?). Remark 2. Since r -+- n by assimilation becomes nn, Owari-nu (= it ends) passes into Owannu , A V > % , being the auxiliary verb nu ( * ) with a view to this example , called Owannu no Nu or the Nu of Owannu. Instead of Ari-nan (there shall or may be), in the dialect of Yamato Ara-nan also occurs for euphony. Examples of the use of the auxiliary verb ni, nu. [Nu.] Fatova takani bwdrete Sjakson-no fudokoro-ni tobi-iri nu, the dove, pur- sued by the falcon, flew into S’akya’s lap. — Soreyori Sadove tsuki- nu. Mata zyun fuu arazareba , ni zyu ji-meyo touriu-su , thence they came to the island of Sado. As again there was no favorable wind , they stayed there till after the 20th day. — Umi-nite kazeni aterare, kwan-gun ri wo usinaviUe , Zin-muno mi iroje san nin Jt| St A 7 ) tokoro dokoro nite usc-tamavi nu , as they were overtaken by wind at sea, and the government’s troops lost the advantage, Zin-mu’s three elder brothers were lost at different places. — Kami-agari-si masi- nu, he (the prince) has gone on high (died). Agari, going up; Si, do. — Ko-zinno ivensi, mo samo ari- nu besi , also what the ancients have said, will have been so. [Nuru.] Ygu-sanwo set-soo ( 7 ^ ^ ) no waza kokoroye-nuru jito mo aritiu besi, it may be that there were people, who considered the breeding of silkworms a murderous occupation. — Fisdsikn kai-dei ni fanberi - nuru aida, „ during my long stay at the bottom of the sea,” the beginning of a speech by the sea-god. when he showed himself before the other gods. CHAPTER VIT. THE VERB. § 84 , 85 . 231 | Nan. | Midzukara matsurooi-sitagavi-navau, or: MidzUkdra mdtmr6vi-ndm.il (gf - . Hi ), one will come under subjection of oneself '). |Naba.] M'mava fikarr- naba, asiki mitsi ni mo iri-nu best , if the horse is led, it may have turned into even a bad road. |Nureba.| Fide-yorimo Tsiyau-zen sUddni yabure- nureba, sadamete Dai-Min yori sukuvdn-koto wo omdnhakdnte , Fide-yori considering that, when Tschao-sien should at last have been brought under subjection, help would certainly come from China |Nuran. | Fiiruki ivaya iku-yo /e-nuran? the old stone house, how many ages may it still last? ^ From the Chinese translation annexed, it appears that by fe-nuran the future (may last) is intended, whereas by fe-mken the fat. exactum (shall or may have lasted) would be indicated. The poet, instead of nu, uses yuku (ff?), = goes, probably to fill up his verse, e. g. J fukisi fatake.md sibomi kare yuku , even the corn land, where one has sown, goes to fade (and) to dry up. § 85. ..tsu, . .tsutsu (7 o 7 > ): ..tsur)i, u, eba, future an, an auxiliary verb of time proper to the Yamato dialect and the narrative style, and as such, grafted on the root, as well as on future-form of a verb, it expresses the going away of an action, or of a condition, and characterises the past time absolute. Tsu, tsuru passes as a variation of nu, nuru l 2 ) (§ 84). As predicate closing-form of a proposition tsu (or mostly dzu , '7 ) is in use by preference, in the dialect of the districts from Owari to Yedo 3 ). Tsutsu, as a doubling of tsu, implies the repetition (iterative form), omdvi- tsUtsii being made equivalent to omdvitsu-omdvitsu , = 1 thought and thought. Tsuri, continuative , = has been; tsuru, - having been; tsurdn ( tsurdmii ), = shall have been. In the old rebus-writing tsuru lurks under the character , which means tsudzuru , = to sew to ; Mi-tsuru , to have seen , is denoted by M jgf; Kiki- tsuru , to have heard , by j^j . — Most common are the expressions { L 7 , l ) Nippon- M. -) Tsuru is also considered as a modification of te-aru. — „ Te-aru , t e-are’ wo tsudzumete n /suru , isure” to ivu , i. e. contracting Te-aru and te-are , one says tsuru, isure. Wayun Siioori under Tsuru. 3 ) Wa-yun Shcori , under Tsu. Vol. 16. p. 1. recto. 232 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 85. lit sU, said; £ ' y , Mi tail , seen; ^ , Kikitsti, heard; omdvitsu , thought ; Bt 7 f , Kurd si, tsu , become dark. Examples of the use of these forms. f® 35. 7 * *=!=» zA MS ffii o lit Kova kegare wo nikumi-tamavu mi-tama ni yorite ndri masi tsu , this (goddess) has arisen , as an emanation from the spirit detesting uncleaness. Remark. In the same author, instead of nari-masitsu (= has arisen), nari- maseri , nari-maseru navi , and nareru nari alternately occur. (Compare § 80). Inuru tosi NN. ni tovaresi koro , kasiko no fun-do wo kiki tsu , when , last year inquiry was made of NN., I heard of the manners and customs of that country. — Kono Kami no mi sudzi simoni sir d si tsu or also siruseri, = as to the pedigree of this Kami, one has made mention of (it) below '). — Dasa yosasi tokoroni yuite , Ten-wau no sono tsuma ivo tsukavasi tsuru koto wo kikite , tastiki ivo moto- mento omdvu J ), when Dasa, going to the place of his destination, heard, that the Emperor had had his wife sent to him, he begun to think of seeking help (for her). — Fototdgisu 11 naki tsuru kdta w6 11 nagamureba , Tdda dridkeno 11 tsuki z6 nokoreru * 3 ) , If I look towards the side, where the cuckoo has called, Then , there only the moon has remained shining by clear daylight. Nokoreru fdna va 11 kevu mo tsiri tsutsu , Ware mo ukitaru 11 yo ivo sugusi tsutsu. The remaining flower, has been strewed to day (leaf for leaf). Oh 1 too have passed the floating time of life (step by step). Fuzi no takd-ne ni 11 yuki vd fun tsutsu. On the high top of the Fuzi it has snowed (repeatedly). Remark. In writing, tsutsu is frequently expressed by , a sign used for N agora , = in the midst of, while (Chapter VIII. III. 2). Probably some identify this tsutsu, with the dzntsu , = at a time, treated in § 35, p. 145. ') Sudzi , the object of the transitive sirusi, to mention, is, by inversion, placed before the verb 3 ) Nippon- ki , 14, 12. 3 ) ^ lliyaku-nin issu , N°. 81. Imperative = Vocative Terminativc Instrumental, Modal (Gerund). Isolated Concessive With suffixes definitive of time. Local, isolated Concessive Terminativc . . . Local, isolated, CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 86. 233 3 86. SYNOPSIS OF THE INFLECTED FORMS. Nondeilccting conjugation. Deflecting conjugation. ROOT-FORM, declinable. AKE, open. MI, see. YUKI, go. Ake, open. Yuke, go! Akeyo, „ Mi yo, see. Yukeyo, „ Akei, „ - Yukei, „ Ake ro , „ Mi ro. Yukero, „ Akeni, to opening, to Mini , to seeing , to sec. Yukini, to going, to I open. go. Akete, bg opening, Mite , bg seeing , seeing. Yukite (Yuite), by opening. going, going. Akete va, 1 as one Miteva, | as one Yukite va, | as one ' Akete wa , J opens. Mite wa , J sees. Yukite wa, f goes. Akete nto, though one Mite mo , though one Yukite mo, though one opens. sees. goes. Akete kara, | Mite kara . | Yukite kara, l after . 1 after the „ yon, J . „ yori. \ a fi er '1"’ „ yon, > the „ notsi , 1 0 P enim J- „ notsi, | mm 'J- „ notsi , J going. Ake ba Ake — {— in — {— Yuke ba (= Y like + ni va), as one opens. + va), as one goes. Ake domo (= Ake -f- ni Y uke domo (= Yuke + tomo), though one ni + tomo) , though opens. one goes. INDICATIVE CLOSING-FORM. Aku, one opens. Miru, one sees. Yuku . one goes. SUBSTANTIVE AND ATTRIBUTIVE FORM. Akeru or Akuru , 1. the' Miru , 1. the seeing , 2. 1 Yuku, 1. the going , 2. opening , 2. opening \ seeing. \ going. Akeru va,|f/(e opening , Miruva, the seeing, that jYukuva .the going, that Akuru va, J that o. opens. one sees. one goes. „ mo, though opening. Miru mo, though seeing. Yuku mo, though going. Akuruni, to the opening, to open. Akuruni va . on the opening , as one opens. Akureba, as one opens. Miruni, to the seeing, (Yukuni, to the going, to see. | to go. Miruni va, on the see- Y ukuni y a, on the going, mg, as one sees. Mireba , as , or if one sees. as one goes. 234 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 86, 87. Nondeflecting conjugation. Deflecting conjugation. Concessive Akuredomo, though one open. Miredomo, though one see. Akuru to ledomo , Mini to ledomo, though Yuku to ledomo, though one opens. one sees. PRETERIT. though one goes. Akeki, he opened. Mild, he saw. Yukiki, he went. Attribut. and declina- ble substantive form. Ake si. Mi si. Yukisi, Yukesi. Continuative Ake ker)i , u , has opened. Miker)i, u, has seen. Yukiker)i, u, has gone. Yuker)i, u, eba. F uture Ake ken , shall have opened. Mi ken , shall have seen. Yuken, shall have gone. Aketar)i, u, Mitar)i, u, Yukitar)i, u, A Aketa, has opened. A Mita, has seen. FUTURE. A Y uki ta , Y uita , has gone. Ake mu ( old Jap.) Mi mu. Yulia mu. Aken, shall open. Min, shall see. Yulian, shall goo. A Akeo, shall open. A Miu, also Miyoo. A Yukao, A Yulioo. Aken to s)i, u, to he Min to s)i, u, to be Yulian to s)i, u, to be about to open. about to see. about to go. Aken tote, syncope of Min to te , syncope of Yukan to te, syncope Aken to site, being Min to site, being of Yukan to site, about to open. about to see. being about to go. Conditional Akeba (= Aken -f-ni-f- va), on being about to open , if one open. Yukaba (= Yukan -|-ni -\- va) , on being about to go, if one go. CAUSATIVE OR FACTIVE VERBS IN Si OR Se. § 87. The causative verbs, which denote a causing to take place or a car- rying out of the action, such as our raise (make rise), drench (make drink), are formed by means of the deflecting verb si, su, future san (^^), to do. In nondeflecting verbs in e or i this si is suffixed to the root, by which the derivative forms esi or hi (or sometimes instead of isi , osi arid usi) arise, whereas in deflecting verbs their termination i at the same time passes into a (or some- times, for vocal harmony, into o, see $ 7b), by which the derivative forms asi or osi are obtained; e. g. Yuki , to go; Yukdsi, make go. Noki , to go hack; Nokosi , to make go back. — The verbs, which have ori or uri as continuative form (see § 88), have osi or nsi as their causative form. In § 103 it’, to do, is treated as a substantive verb. Sometimes nondeflecting se, suru, future sen, takes the place of S’)/, u. Si- passes for a syncope of sim)e, uru, future en, - have do. See § 88. lease, have say, Kikase , have hear, are at least in the Manyo sin, explained by — i" and ^ as- 4* The following may serve as examples of the l. Kdy)e , era, to return, v. 2. M)i, iru, Jt, 4 . to see; 3. N)i , iru. to resemble ; 4. Yuk)i. u. to go: 5. Ugok)i, u » wj b to move, v. i.: 6. JYom)i, u to drink ; 7. YdsUm)i , to rest, v. i.; 8. Si, to go away; 9. sy, u, to do ; 10. Kudz)i, uru, aa , to : fall, descend. Kuddri , frh g° from above to below; a line of Japanese writing. derivation of causative verbs: Kayes)i, a , to make turn back, to return, v. tr. In Yedo: Kairu , Kami. Mis)e, era, uru, to make see, to show. j\ r is)e , era, uru, to make resemble, to imitate. Yukas)i, u , to make go. Ugokas)i, a, to move. v. tr. to make move. Nomas)i, a, to give drink ( F'ituni rni- dzuico, water to somebody). Yasumds)i , a ; also e, uni, to rest, v. tr.; contracted Yasunz)i, u. Sas)i , u , to make go away, to send, to dispatch (a mesenger). Sas)e, uru , to make do. Ne-sase, to make sleep. Kudas)i, u, to make fall, to precipitate. v. tr. 11. Av)i , u, > t° unite, v. i.; 12. Tob)i. a, to soar, fly; 13. JL«o6)i, a, y , to play, to ramble. 14. JSfi , to be; JS r ar)i, a, to be conti- *1 cas)i, a; e, uru, to unite, v. tr. Tobas)i, u, to make soar or fly. .[sobas)i, u, to make ramble, to amuse, to please. Nas)i , a , to make be, to produce. 286 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 87. 15. Nas)i , it, to make; 16. Nary, u, to sound, v. ?.; 17. Ter)i , it, tjjl ^ > shine; 18. Dzi *), {j^j ^ , = ulz)i, it, to come out of; 19. Ni, = , burden, load. Nor)i , it, to be a burden; to ride, go in a carriage ; 20. K)i, uru , to come; 21. Ok)i , iru , %, to get up, to rise; 22. Nok)i, it, jfl to go back, to re- cede, retreat; 23. Ots)i , iru , itnt, to fall; 24. Ov)i , itnt, to wax, grow; 25. Ov)i, u ( 0)i , it) , to bear (on the back); 26. Uruv)i , it, y[yj v, to get moist; 27. Or)?', irit . to descend; 28. Or)i, u , fijjf), to dwell; 29. Kor)i, it, to clot; Kor6s)i , it, to kill; 30. 7, to go away. Yor)i, it, to be going away; 31. TsUk)i , int, w, to get ex- hausted or consumed; Remark. If we do not, as Japanese ') The root -? is preserved in the family name H The change of "P into is very common. = ) H'ngun Sitoori , under Nasi. Nasas)i , u , to make produce. Nards)i , it, to make sound. Terds)i , it , to make shine , to illuminate. Das)i , it, or idas)i, u , to make go out off. — Fitnewo iddsU , to make a ship start. Nos)e , itnt, to make ride, to carry, to convey. Kos)i, u , to make come. Okos)i, ?t, to raise. Nok6s)i i, ?t, to make go back; ill ? , to leave behind. Ot6s)i, it, to make fall, to fell. Ovos)i , it, 4TW , to make tv ax or grow. Ov6s)e,uru , or 06s)e, uru , |1[J £ , obsol. ^ yl^, to burden ; a charge. Uruvos)i , it, to moisten, quicken. Ords)i , it , 2 , to make descend (? Au- nico , to throw out the anchor). Ords)i, it, ^ , to make dwell. Kords)i , it , to make clot ; to kill , 1 ' . Korosds)i, it, to make kill. Ybs)e, uru, to make go away, to send. Ts?tkits)i, it, ^ to exhaust, to con- sume. etymologists 2 ), reduce Nasi (- to cause E Hi f ' 111 5> Fi si yama, ~ sunrise mounlain. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 87. 237 to be, to give existence to anything) to Xa (^ r ), - name, but derive it from Xi , = to be, the soundness of such a derivation is pleaded for, not only by the analogy of the Latin factivum /ado, which comes from jio, or the Sanscrit bhd- vayami derived from bhu, to be; but the Japanese causative verbs themselves concur in supporting it. Thus we are of opinion also, that Asobasi (- to please) is a causative form, whereas the Japanese philologists ') see in it a contraction of Asobi - 4 - masi ( ml ^ ), - to be pleasing oneself; an opinion with which we could agree, if the passive form Asobasare, - be pleased, an ordinary expression ot politeness, did not make us suppose a causative Asobasi (- to please), as a logical necessity. The causative verbs derived from intransitive verbs have the object, which is made active, in the accusative before them. Tsukiva giro wo terdsu, the moon makes the castle shine, enlightens it. Examples of the use of the forms. Tsitsi korcwo nasi, ko kore wo ndbu i ), the father originates it, the son con- tinues it, — Kind taka ico tobdsu, the prince lets the falcon fly. — Is-seki wo motte korc wo tsnkwri nasi-tdn, one has made this out of one stone. — Tomiva dkn wo Uruvdsi, toktiva mi wo urucosu * 3 ), riches moisten (quicken) the house, virtue, the person. — Zin-siyavd sai wo matte mi wo okdsi, fu-zin-siyava mi wo motte saiwo okdsii 4 ), the humane man uses his fortune to exalt himself, the inhumane man his person to push his fortune higher. — Miclare, sidzumarazaru wo yasunzi otdsu, he quiets and subdues those , who behave disorderly and unquietly. — Seki-si ico yasunzuru ga gotdsi 5 ) , it is as if one quieted a suckling. — Kind ni tsukuyuru toki va sunavatsi indtsiwo tsUkdsu, when (1 my) prince serve, then it is with all my life. — Kotobawo tsdkusu, to exhaust his language, i. e. say all that is to be said. — o iSono kotoba wo tsukusu koto wo ezu (pron. edzu) G ) , he does not get (he does not succeed in) exhausting his reasonings. ') Wagxin Siicori , under -hub as u. Yatnato Ku/ubo , II. 42, r. 3 ) Tschung gang 13. 3 ) Dai Gain. VI. 2. 4 ) Dai Gaku. X. 20. s ) Ibid. IX. 2. s ) Ibid. IV. 1. 238 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 88. CAUSATIVE VERBS IN Sime. ( ' r % ns =y ? , Ge-dzi-suru kotoba.) § 88. The causative verbs in sime denote that an order, or in a less com- manding tone, inducement is given to do an action or realise a condition. They are formed according to the same rule as the causative verbs in si, i. e. the causative si or se is superseded by the verb Sim)e, u, uru, ureba, gerund Simete (contracted site), future Simon, to charge, ^ ^ Ake , to open ; Tairag)e , uru , to subdue; ...s)e, uru , do (termination of verbalized Chinese words); Nasas)i , it, to have made; Ye,-sas)i , u, to cause to get; Ari , there is; Nakari, there is not; Mdtsuri , wait upon , to worship ; Ake- sime, to make open. Tairage-sime, to order to subdue , to make subdue. ...se-sime, to charge to do, contrive that one does, have done. Nasa-sime , to order one to have made. Ye-sasime, to contrive to have gotten. Ard-sime, to order that there be. Nakard-sime , to order that there be not. Matsura-sime , to order to worship. When Sime unites with the causative verbs in si a syncope takes place: from Kavisi -f- sime comes Kavesime , to have sent back: from Yukdsi + sime , Yukd- sime, to order to let (him) go. Examples of the use of the forms. Kurd wo tcurage- simu, he orders the country to be subdued. — Tstikam wo kave- simu , he orders the ambassador to be sent back. — Kava-kami korewo mite, itsil- kusiki omul narito dmuvi, tddzusdvete is-syuku ( — ^ x i.) sc-simu, Kava- kami, seeing him, he thinks that he is a beautiful maiden, leads him by the hand, and charges him to stay the night. — Yase-kiiuo nivakdni sei-teu- (mm) so-simen to te, koydsiwo tsttydku-su bekardzu, to make lean trees grow quickly, one may not manure too strongly. !i * .At %■> 9 U 3 B5 1 }' ( hidregd mi wo tassento hvssUrebd Mddztt tci-nin wo tasse-sime yd. Will you advance yourselves, First let others help themselves forward. CHAPTER YU. THE VERB. § 88. 239 Fit 6 ni yeki ( ^ ) «m-simurii wd sen-itsi ( — •) to .sit, to manage that there be much advantage for others, I consider the only object. — Kiivandki wo kirn koto ndkard-sime , order that the chopping of mulberry-trees do not take place! Kami wo mdtsitri , to worship a Kami; Kami too malsurd-sunu . he gives order to worship the Kami. — Tor)i , it, to take; Tord-sime , to have it taken. — Sore takava karini mot si rite , tori wd tord-simuru tori nari , the falcon is a bird , that is used for the chace, and (by which) people have birds caught. — 1'akdri . to consider; Fakard-sime , to charge to consider. — KUmdoso wo titsii koto wo fakara- sime ') tamavu , the Emperor has it taken into consideration to beat the (hostile) Kumaoso. Ni, to be; Nas)i, it, to make be; to produce; Nasdsi, make produce; Nasd- snne, charge to have made. He, who orders, charges a second person to have something done by a third. That then is the reason, why Nasasime plays so important a part in the courtly style; it is the same as if it were said that a prince gives order, to take measures that something be done. — Kdkti- teiwo nasdsimcri to dri , it is (said) that the Emperor N. has given order, that the wrestling games be held. — Tsurugi wo sadziikete , Ten-kwau wo korosasimen to su , handing him a sword, he will have the Emperor murdered. Remark 1. The object, which precedes the verb in sime in the Accusative. Dative or Local, is, as appears from the examples quoted , the object of the action ordered, not the person who is ordered. If the latter is admitted into the sen- tence then the old style allows him, as a remote definition, to precede in the Accusative, e. g. Sukune wo fakdrti koto wo okonavdsimu, (the prince) orders Sukune to hold council. The new style uses the turn of phrase: „by ordering Sukune he has council held,” and supersedes simete (ordering) by the syncopated form site; thus Siikune wo site (- simete) fakaru-koto wo okonavdsimu. — Ten-wau Nunaki Iri- fimeu-6 site X.N. kamiico mdtsurdsimu, the Emperor charges the Lady Nunaki and has the god N.N. solemnly whorshiped. J.O ^Eir-Al v Ten-kano J itd wo site., sai-si ni tsukavu matsurasimu 2 ), the people of the realm are let pay their respects at the feasts. *) Not fakarisime , as in the original state. ■) Tschuny-yauy. XVI. 240 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 88 , 89. Seu-zin wo site , koku-ka wo osame-simurebd , sai-kai narabi itdrii '), it one let a man of mean character govern the country and people , calamity and misfortune rise to the top. Tsoo zu (-^5 i ) 110 nioto-wi wo v/e-sasimon tame, to manage that one gets the foundation of a long life. — N . . . ivo tsukavasite Idzumo no Oho-ydsiro nt osd- muru tokorono kan-takdrawo tadasdsimu , (the Emperor) sends N. .. and lets the Kami-treasure be inspected, which is kept in the Great chapel of Idzumo. - Tami ni takavesi uyuru koto wo osivesimu , he (the Emperor Shin-nung) lets the people be taught ploughing and planting. Remark 2. Site , = simete , is also superseded by mei-zite ( ^ P 7 ) or rei- site ( ^ y 5s 7 ) , = giving order to ... , with a precedent Dative. — M. . to ivu Dai-siyau-ni mii-zite N..wo utdsimu , giving order to the general named M. . he lets N. . be beaten (battle be given him). — JFfcF Jjl f — ^ ^ 5s 7 dJ U 2 9 dJ 5s I 9 , (the prince) giving order to the people, lets silkworms be bred. THE PASSIVE FORM. § 89. The Japanese language expresses the idea of „to be rewarded” by an active form, Avhich answers to „get reward” and by means of the nondeflecting verb e - to get, appropriate) forms derivative verbs, which signify the appropriating of an action coming from without. The Japanese passive verbs, thus, in nature and form, are derivative active verbs; therefore mention can be made only of the manner in which they are derived, but, by no means of passive forms of inflection, for e follows the nondeflecting conjugation. According to their derivation the passive verbs are arranged in three classes: I. 1. All deflecting transitive verbs in i can become passive, when their verbal element i is superseded by e, u, eru, urn, e. g.: Yald , A* , to burn; trans. YakS, -Y^i to be burned, to burn oneself. Kiln , * ' » to hear; KikS, to be heard, to sound. Said , to tear; SakS , to be torn. ') Dai Ga/ru. X. 23. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 80. 241 Yomi, 3 1 , to read; Umi, 7 1 , to bear, bring forth; Ari, T •) , to exist; Nan, f- ') , to be; On , t •) , to break, v. tr. Uri , 7 9 , to sell ; Tsitkitri , 7 7 <) , to make; Yome, 3 7 , to be read. Lime, < , to be produced or born. Are, 7 to become. Nare, 7 u', to become. Ore, t to break, intr. i/re, 7 to be sold, to be for sale. Tsfikitre , ? ? is, to be made. 2. The nondeflecting transitive verbs in i, chiefly monosyllabic, attach e to their root-vowel, either with or, according to the dialect ofYedo, without inter- position of the y. The writing has x, x , x x n/; forms, which are fre- quently confounded with ^ , 7 , ^ >u . 7 n . Mi, 1 {Merit, Mitt), to see. 1 , # (iru , # »s ; ' tie , # 7 ) . to shoot. Ni, — (Niru, — >u) , to boil; trans. — Tsyawo niru. boil tea. Miye, L X {Miyu, 1 x; Miyurii , i x iu ; Miycte, ixx; Miydtari; or J/t)e, «, ?x, to become existing. 6jr /u'H , 4 •> , to hear; Kikdye, to be object of hearing. Jbjj' . Thence Koye, the sound, voice. Omdvi, ^ t L ( Omdi ), to think; Omdvoye, tix ( omdoye ). to be thought of or cogitable. »r*- Inflection, regular: Kikoy)e , w, imt , etc, efar* etc., efca, future umn (= urw + (iran) , thus Kikoyuran , to avoid Kikoyen , which too much resembles the ne- gative KikoyenU , not to lie heard. — Kikoye, km ( M A ^ ) ’ ii: wil1 have become loud. Remark. The substantive forms Ivdyuru , Sirdyuru, KikdyUru, Omdvoyurii mean that which has been said, called, heard, thought, Arayuru , that which has gotten existence, that which appears, and exists. Used attributively , they are equivalent to our passive participle of the past time. Sirdyeru mono is, what has been brought to knowledge. — Kono mi fasira no kami vd ivdyuru Save no kami ndri , these three Kamis are the so called Leading-gods. — Ano tera no kane ya kokomade kikdyu (in the spoken language kikoye-masU ) , the bell of that temple is to be heard here. — Arayuru mono , fitd , Hotdke , the things, people, Buddhas that exist, = all the things, people etc. The forms quoted, Ivdyuru , Sirdyuru , ArdyUru agree perfectly with the Chinese expressions : i! /So im , /Sd , hh TC /So yen. 111. The most usual derivation of passive verbs is effected by means of the nondeflecting verb Ar)e, u , eru , writ, efe etc., = to become, which is suffixed to tbe substantive form of a transitive verb, by which its weak termination u is elided; thus: Ake , to open; AkerU , opening; passive Akeru-\- are = Akerdre. to be opened. J/7 , to see; Mirit , seeing; „ T/iVr -f- dre-Mirdre, to be seen. /'Y/a, to draw; Fiku , drawing; „ /'YU; -f - are = Fikdre, to be drawn. ') The etymological dictionary Wagun fHwori, vol. B7 |). 2 recto splits siraye into si and raj/e , declares ray e as a lengthening of re, and siraye ns a lengthening of sire. What the lengthening means, the author does not ay. CHAPTER VII. THU VERB. $ 89. l!4; According to this rule the passive verbs following are formed. X on deflecti n Ag)e , eru, to hoist, raise, lift; Wak)e, eru , to share; Tat)e , eru , to erect; eru, to touch, hit; Sadam)e , eru, to define; Sim)e, eru , to charge, to let; 7r)e, eru, to receive; 7, 7ru, to shoot; Defle /, u, verbal element, to be; A T )i , u , to be; Nag)i, u, to throw anything forward at its full length. — Kuna wo nagu , to mow grass, Nuk)i , u, to draw out; Kog)i , u , to burn , scorch : Nas)i, u, to cause to be, to produce; Idas)i, or Das)i , u, to bring to light, produce ; Kudas)i , u, to drop; trans. to let fall; it, to press; Kor6s)i , u, to cause to clot; to kill; Watds)i , «, to set over; Iran*. Fanas)i, u, to loosen; trans. Otos)i , u, to make fall; to fell; Fanats)i ( tsi = ti , ), u, to loosen; Ws)i , it, to beat; Mots)i , u, to catch hold of; /«)?, u (7t, 7u), to say; to be called; Ov)i , u, to pursue; Kdv)i, v (Kai, Kau), to change, barter; Agerar)e , u, uru etc., to be hoisted. Wakerar)e , u, to be shared. Taterar)e , u , to be erected. Aterar)e , u, to be touched. Sadamerar)e , u, to be defined. Simerar)e , u, to be charged. Irerar)e , u, to be received. Trar)e , u, to be shot. ting. u, uru, to get existence, to become. A'a?’)c, u, to become. Nagar)e , u, to stream. Kara, fata rnt- gdrfi , the river, the banner streams. j\ T ukar)e, u , to be drawn out. Kogar)e , u, to be burnt. Nasar)e , u, to be produced. I dasar)e , u, to be produced. Kudasar)e , u, to be dropped, to descend. (lsar)e, u, to be pressed. Korosar)e , u, to be killed. Tkatasar)?, it, to be set over. Fanasar)e , to be loosened. Otosar)e , u, to be felled. Fanatdr)e , u, to be loosened; to be banished. Uidr)e , u, to be beaten. Motdr)e , it, to be held. Tvdr)e , ?t, to be called. Ovdr)e, u. to be pursued. Kavdr)e , u, to be or may be changed. 244 CHAPTER VJT. THE VERB. § 89. Kuv)i, u , to eat; Usinav)i , u , to lose ; Okdnav)i , u, to act, treat, perform, commit ; Yob)i , u , to call ; Musub)i , it, to knot, to tie; Yom)i, u, to read; Um)i , it, to bear; Nom)i , it , to drink; £7r , )i , it , to sell ; Kir)i, it , to chop, to cut; 5tV)i, it, to know; Kuvdr)e , w, to be eaten, to be eatable. Usinavdr)e , it, to be lost. Okonavdr)e, u , to be treated, performed or committed. Yobar)e, it, to be called. Musub6r)e , it, to be tied, to be knotted together. Yomdr)e, it, to be read. Umdr)e , it, to be born. Nomdr)e , it, to be drunk, to be drinkable. Urdr)e , it, to be sold, to be for sale. Kirdr)e, it, to be cut. Sirar)e , it, to be known. Remark 1. Has the Japanese passive verb a potential force? Implicit, yes, but not explicit! Just as our expression: „ vegetables that are eaten,” includes the idea, that they are eatable, so the Japanese verb, especially its attributive form, may, in the idea of the speaker, have a potential force, and Kuvareru imo, = a •turnip being eaten, may mean that it is an eatable one. Compare the Sanscrit AmitdVa , = immensa vita , unmeasured and unmeasurable life. Thus when the proposition : „ Cloths imported from foreign countries , can be sold cheaper than those made in Japan” ')> translated into the Japanese spoken language is: Nippon de ts'kuremas'ta tam-rnono yori , gai-kdku kara watarimas'la tam-rnonowa yasuku ur&re-mas’ 2 ), it declares, that cloths, which have come from foreign countries, are sold cheaper, than cloths which are made in Japan, and the Japanese text has a fact in view, that includes the possibility, whereas the English „can be sold” speaks of the possibility merely. „Not understanding any thing” the Japanese says: Wakari-masinil , = I don’t understand it; not being able to understand it, he says Wakdri deki-masenti. Remark 2. The language of courtesy, which gives to the predicate verb the passive form , although logic requires the active (in treating tin* forms of courtesy , ') r. brown , Colloquial Japanese, |>. 8. N°. 00. 3 ) Why not rattier: Gai-kokii kara re atari -mas' la lam-mono wa Nippon dr tsiihire mas'/a /am -mono yori yasuku urdre-mas' . CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 80, 00. 245 we shall discuss this question further), gives a passive form to intransitive verbs also. Verbs of that character resemble the Greek Middle voice, or even the Latin Deponent Verbs; names, however, with which we shall not embarrass the Japanese. To the passive verbs derived from intransitive verbs belong, e. g.: I, iri, iru <«*). to dwell, stay; passive Irar)e , uru. Mairar)e. ArUkar)e. Nerar)e. Wakar)e , uru, to be divided. Mair)i, u ( fgg ? ) , to enter; Aruk)i , u ( to step; Ner)i, u to sleep; Wak)i , u ( ^), to become divided; Remark 3. Our method of deriving the passive form, first made known in 1857, and afterwards (1803) adopted by Mr. u. brown, does not agree with the original Japanese method, according to which for ages a verb Rarnru (i. e. Rar)e. , u , uru), has been imagined and been inserted in the dictionaries of the country, as equivalent to the Chinese verb p't. ON THE GOVERNMENT OE THE PASSIVE VERB. § 90. 1. The object, which suffers an action, is subject (Nominative), and the verb passive, its predicate, e. g. Midztt ugdkasdru , the water is brought into motion. 2. The verb passive is considered impersonal and the object undergoing the action, remains as object to the action, in the Accusative, thus Midzu wo u g6kasa.ru . 3. The verb passive stands in its substantive form and has its complement, as a genitive, before it: Midzu no iigdkasdruru , the becoming moved (the move- ment) of the water, or even that of the water, which is moved, which gets movement. 4. The object, from which the action proceeds, precedes as complement, cha- racterized by the termination ni , or by ... no tame ni , = in behalf of, for the sake of 5. The definition of the material, from which any thing derives its existence or origin . assumes the genitive or even the ablative form in yori or kara. Examples of the use of the passive forms. Midzu vd figdsiye nagdru, the river Hows eastwards. — Sonong de wd ur$- 17 246 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. § 90. masenu , for this price it is not sold '). — WatukUsi kono sindwo sdnd nedandewa uri masenU , I do not sell these goods for that price. — Kaviko umdre-tari , the silkworm is hatched. — UmdretarU or Umaresi kaviko , silkworms hatched. — Sirusaretaru mono , things made known. — Kono mitsi sakdn ni Okonavareru to miyitdri , it seems that this way is much practised; Okona)vi, vulg. i , to practise; exercise; Mi , miru, to see; Miye , to appear, seem. — Wau-ziva idaki torite, ma- nukaretari , the prince is taken into the arms and saved (from the fire). Manuk)i , u , to draw out. — Asdgavo asani umdrete yubeni sisU , = the morning-face (the flower of the winds) is born in the morning and dies in the evening. — Umdre from timi, to bear. — Fit6 wo moto-kuniye tsukdvasaru , = the man is sent to his own country. — Mika wo tsukdvasaru besi to sata art , it is reported that the prince will be sent. — Ziyau mon ( m v pit ) wo yaburdruru toki , tou-siya (TJtm s ) nite fUsdgu nari , when the gate of a castle is broken by assault , it is shut by means of a scythed chariot. YabUr)i , w, to break. — Mukdsi va taka wo rnigini siiesaresi to nari , it is a fact, that formerly the falcon trained to sport was made perch on the right hand. aSm)c, uru , to roost; Sues)!, u, to make roost; Sursarje , u, to be set up, placed high. — Toga-nin no kubiioo kirn , to cut a criminal's throat ; Kubi wo kiraretaru (or kirareta ) mono , one whose throat is cut. O >u is r Aku-fuuni fanatarete tsdku-gan-si-taru yosiwo tsin-fgo-su , the report has been spread, that (the ship) has been set adrift by an ill wind and driven on shore. Fanatsi , set free. Fitdni tasinameraru , he is vexed by others, ( J.Ail IS) , = /’do ni nan-gi wo serdru , = difficulty is caused by others. — Tcn-wgu ni korosdrit ; , he is killed by the emperor. — Inuni kamaretdril f do , a person bitten by a dog; Karn)i , w,, to bite. — KazSni on’ru take no ko , a young bamboo cane, which is, or can be , broken by the wind. — Kore ni ydtte . . . Ji-you ni idsii. Mata jiyaku-siygu ni yadoivarete , ta-suki , kusd-kari , ine-karite , do-min no mononi aid onazi , there- fore (the Bonzes of Corea) go out at day-wages. And while they, hired by any one, plough the Helds, mow grass, cut rice, they assimilate themselves to the husbandmen. Yadov)i, n , to hire. — Fatova taka ni ovarete Syak'-son no fudokdro 4r It f¥ is *" r ') Shopping- Dialogues , page 4. CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB, t? 90, 91. 247 ni tobi-irintt , the dove pursued by the falcon, flew into S’akya’s lap. Ov)i , ?/ , to pursue. — Mimana tsuini Sim' a no tameni forobosdru , the state of Mimana is at last demolished on behalt of ( by and for) Sinra. Forob)i , u , to perish; Fo- robosji, u , to demolish. — Fo no tameni yakaretc simt , burnt by the tire, he dies. ^ S k J9f 'W > r ak)i, u , fra;!*, to burn. — Ao/io f itd kanardzn oni no tame ni madovasarento ivaku , it is said that, that man will certainly be misled by the devil. Madov)i, n , to err, to wander; Madov6s)i , w, to make err; Madovasar)e, u , to be brought so far, that one errs or wan- ders. — o s — A -7T J'L, A = )9r Sivo-nawa no /.on nariru sima , an island caused by the clotting ot sea-foam. — Aota Fino-kami no tsi no nareru nari , this (spirit) is produced out of the blood of the Fire-god. THE NEGATIVE FORM OF THE JAPANESE VERB. § 91. I. Theory of the Derivation. In the negative sentence, the Japanese language attaches the negative to the predicate word. It denies that an action or state exists ; but it does not deny the existence of the subject or object, while the action or state, in which both are concerned . is existing as positive . as in : ., no one comes ; he hears no- thing." Therefore it unites the negative element, n, with the verbal element i or si (see § 98 and 103) and thereby gets the forms n + i - NI and n + si = ZI , it^ pronounced as ndzi or dzi; two root-forms, of which the former is proper to the spoken, the latter to the written language. These terminations, in nondeflecting affirmative verbs, are immediately added to the root (Ake-zi , y '? ^ , Mi-si., L , whereas in deflecting ones in i, this i at once mutates into a ( Yuki , to go , Yukdzi , it V>, not to go). Ni and si follow the deflecting conjugation, while the closing form { nu and X zu, at once serve for the substantive and the attributive form. The Niyori- mark , so necessary to distinguish i y 7, from x y X (to make go) , is frequently omitted '). *) For instance, in the official publication of the Treaties concluded with Foreign powers. 248 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 91 . The root-form ni , which we are obliged to adopt as the basis of the negative conjugation, is not in use and, in poetry, appears to be superseded by ne. EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF NEGATIVE VERBS. Negative. Written. Spoken. Affirmative. Ak)e, urn, to open. M)i, iru, to see. Muku)i, yu, yarn ( nondefl .), to requite. Yuk)i, u, to go. Sik)i, u, so to be. Nas)i, u, to cause to be. Tats)i , u , to arise. Av)i , u , to meet. Sorovji, u, become equal. Soorav)i, u, to serve. A Sor)ai , o, „ Nukumji , u, to warm , v. i. Nukum)e, uru, to warm, v. tr. Ar)i, n, to exist, be. Akez)i , u, X'. Miz)i , u, L)i>, X- Mukuizji, u, L ? 'f ) x". not to requite. Yukaz)i , u , x p ) £? , X . Sikazji, u, X ')• Nasaz)i, u, -f If) Tataz)i , u , X ■» ) i>, X . Avaz)i, u, y X. Sorovaz)i, u, '/ o n) X. Sooravaz)i, u , 4f Nukumaz)i,u, X X ^) X Nukumez)i,u, X X ^ X" Araz)i , u, J >) X- [Akeni], Akenu, fXX- Minn , L X • Mukuinu , L ? 4 X • Yukanu, x#X- Nasanu, -fifX. Tatanu , X ^ X • Avanu, T^X- Sorovanu, Xo^X- Sooravanu , if X • Soravanu, X^/^X. Nukumanu , X X ^ X • Nukumenu, XX^X. Aranu, 7 5X- In the same manner, every affirmative verb, whether it be active or passive, may assume the negative form; there are, however, a few verbs which depart from the general rule of derivation, to wit: Ki, Kuru (nondefl.), to come; Dek)i, iru (nondefl.), to be achieved; Mits)i , uru (nondefl.), to be filled; Mds)i , u, (not Mas)e, uru), to be; Mi-mas)i , u, to be seeing, to see; Kdnu, at Yedo Kami, not to come. Delcinu , vulg. De.Mnil. Mitinu (for Mitsinu) , not to be tilled. Masinu, not to be; — thus also: Mi-masenu , not to see. ■> CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 91 . 249 II. INFLECTION OF THE NEGATIVE VERBS. Synopsis of the negative forms of inflection, compared with the affirmative. YUK)i, -u (deflecting), go; YUKAZ)i, -u, not to go. Affirmative. Negative. Written. Spoken. YUK) YUK A) YUK A) Root- form. . . -i, <70. -zi , x ij £?, not to go. -ni, -ne. Gerund -ite, going. -zite, not going. -llite, not used. by elisiou. . . Yuite. Yukaide, x# - f 7-" Yukaide. (*) Closing- form . -u, goes. -zu, x#x, goes not. -nu, x^X- Subst. andattr. -u, the going. -zu. -nu. Subst., isolated -uva, A -uwa. -zuva , A -zuwa. ,, declined -uni , -nniva , on -zuni, -zuniva, -zunba, on going , in order to go. not going, for not going. Gerund -ute, bg going. -zunde, x ^ X ^ T , -nude , x ij X T. x X X"i contr.from -nde, x# > T (t)- -zunite, bg not going. Y ukade , x gj 7'. -zu-site. -nu ni oitewa, on not going. Causal- aud -eba, as one goes. -zeba. x^t''’ 1 *, os one -neba, modal-form. e/oes not. Concessive. . . -u torno , qlso the -zumo, -zutomo. going. -e-dorno, though one -ne-domo, also goes. Yukademo. -u to ledomo. -zu to ledomo. -nu to iedomo. Suppositive -aba, contract, from -zuinba. -ndeva, x # form. -an ni va, if one goes. -zunba, x ^ X' & rf,contr. Yukadeva, x# 7"^. from -zuniva, if one goes not. -nunaraba (Yedo). (*) Akezite and Mizite, derived from the nondeflecting Ake and Mi , likewise, in the dialect of Mivako. pass into Akeide , 7 >7 d 7", not opening, and Miide , L- i T , not seeing. (f) Just so Omovanu te ( iffi ) passes into % dmbvade , pr. bmovande, not thinking. Ardnu -+- te <$ rfn) „ 7 > 7' ', Arude, pron. Arande, not existing. 6a (= si/ca) rami -+- te ffn) „ fr 5 7", Sardde , pron. Sarande , not being as... 250 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 91, 92. Tordnu -+- te passes into 5 > 7 , Tordde , pron. Torande , not taking. Sena, te Sede , pron. Se-nde , not doing. Oruuuoyenu -f- te „ „ 7t" x 7"" » Omovoyede , pron. 8m6voyen.de , not being thought. CONTINUATIVE FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 92. 1. The written language supersedes the termination zi by zar)i, u, which is considered a fusion of 4- an. vl/c m , not to open , becomes Akezdri , Mizi, not to see, „ Mizari , Yukdzi , not to go, „ Yukazdri Masdzi , not to excel, „ Masazari Sikdzi , not to be so, as „ Sikazdri , 7 ^ if 9 , not to be opening. >) , not to lie seeing. , i ^ df ij , not to be going. , vf- if i) , not to be the better. ^ 9 , continually not to be so. The forms for the moods and tenses are the same as those of ari; thus: zar)i , u , uni , t'5(r, edomo; Future cm; Condit. aba; Preterit zari)ki , at, Aen, Ax'ru , keruni, kereba , ker edomo; Future keran , /ken ; Condit. keraba. 2. The written language attaches ar)*, to the negative gerund zi-de and opposes to the affirmative form AJce-te-ari , to be opening (§ 78) the negative form Ake-zi-de ari, which, in the spoken language, passes into Akeido ar)i, u, to be in the not opening. 3. The spoken language uses its negative gerund ...nu-de in connection with ar)i , u. AkmU-de ari , 7 i7 % 7 " 7 j) , commonly pronounced as Akende ar\ Minii-de ari , i. X 7" 7' 9 , „ „ „ Minde ar\ YukanU-de ari , 7 9, „ ,, „ Yukande ar\ From this derivation arise the very common Preterit Minu-de arita, pron. Minde atta , has not been seeing , and the Future Minu-de aran , A Min-de aroo , will not be seeing. 4. The poet supersedes the negative termination nit with naki, A nai, naku (- without, see page 108); thence Ave-naku Avenu , without daring; Omova- naku '), = Omovanu , without thinking. The dialect of Yedo alike, and that by preference, uses nai ( nasi , naki , ') Might nut these he forms, connected with § 107. 2.P CHAPTEH VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. >5 02, 00. 251 without) and the thence derived continuative form Nakdri and Xakeri, as nega- tive auxiliary verb, and supersedes A kind , Mina and Yukunu with the forms Ake- nai , Ake-nakdr)i, u ; — Mi-nai , Mi-nakdr)i , a; — Yuku-nai, Yuka-nakdr)i , a, to he without opening, without seeing, without going. Thence A Yukanaide for Yu- kdzUni, without going. With the derivative form nukari the negative verb follows the affirmative conjugation, as appears from the examples following: Ake-nakdrebd , as one is without opening. „ nakaraba , if one is without opening. Deki-nakareba , as it does not issue or proceed. ,, nakereba , as it was without success. „ nakaraba , if it is successless. „ nakeraba , if it was successless. Mi-nakatta, he was without seeing. „ „ kara y as he was without seeing. Mi-nakattdrabd , if one has not seen. Si nmva-nakatta kara , as or after one has not finished; from Simavi (vulg. Simai), to finish. Tsuke-nakatta , one has not applied: from TsUke, to apply. De-nakatta, he did not come out; from 7>c , deni , to go out. Toba-nakatta , did not fly ; from Tobi , to soar, to fly. The written language opposes to the forms 1'suke-nakatta and Toba-nalaitta the forms: Tsiikeru koto nakatta and Tobu koto nakalta , i. e. the beginning and the flying did not happen. Compare Sore futd-tubi kitdru koto nan , it does not happen (nasi), that he appears for the second time. FORM OF THE FORBIDDING IMPERATIVE. § 93. 1 . The Forbidding Imperative consists of the substantive form of the affirmative verb, followed bv the forbidding na (- Lat. ne) or more emphatically nayo '). Compare § fi9. Akeru, the opening: Silru, the doing; Wasururu , f< irgetting ; Tatdku , striking ; Nasdru , making ; Kiku , hear ; Miru , see ; Su, doing, from Si; Akeru nd or Akeru nayo, don’t open! Siiru nd , don’t do ! WasuriM'U nd , don’t forget ! Tatdkti nd , don’t strike ! NasdrU nd , . don’t make ! Kiku na , don’t hear ; Miru na , don’t see ! Su na ( ^ ) , do not ! ') f 5 ^ X ^ F V 7 7\ IV ■* f Wa-gun Siwori. — Compare 252 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 93, 94. 2. If the idea of continuance is associated with the forbidding, then, instead of na or nay 6, Nakare, -f 'Ji u' ( 49 . # ), the imperative mood of Nakdri , = not to he (§ 92. 4), is used. The action which is characterized by nakare as one that may not be, precedes as subject proposition characterized by koto (= thing) ; thus : Utagau-koto nakare ( ^ ) , let the doubting not be ! , for : do not doubt! 3. The forbidding proposition begins with Na (= Lat. ne) , the predicate verb being in its affirmative root-form, followed by so (compare § 69). Na ivi so , say not. tyj] g[| o iji g[| . — Na yurusi so , grant not ! j|jC ^ . - Na atasi tokoroni i so, go not elsewhere. — Na motome so , n’acquerez pas '). — Na nakdri so, pron. Na nakdsso , not without! = it must be! — Nakar)i, u, to be without 4. The forbidding becomes a wish (optative), when so is superseded by kasi (= Lat. quaeso). — Na ivi kasi, may he not say! Politeness does not allow a person bluntly to use the imperative to his equals or superiors. Instead of Miruna , see not, expressions such as Mi-nasdrund , or Mi- nasdre-mdsu nd , = let there not be seen, are used. — Kamaina , = let it not come under notice, is superseded by 0 kamai kudasdriina 2 ); forms, to which we shall return in our illustration of the language of courtesy. Appendix to Chapter VII. FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE PRETERIT. § 94. 1. The negative termination nu becomes nanda, -f 2 / Akenti , not to open; Akenanda , not to have opened. D&nti, not to go out; Denanda, not to have gone out. Samenti, not to awake; Samenanda , not to have awoke. Minti, not to see; Minanda, not to have seen. YukdnU , not to go; Yukananda , not to have gone. MasenU , not to be; Masenanda , or, in the vulgar language of •Yedo, Masinanda , not to have been. Mi-masSnu , not to see; Mi-masenanda , not to have seen. TsUre-datsite modorananda, they have not come back together ( 7' rn i!>- Modori, to come back. — Fin wo sirananda , he has not learned to know poverty <7*n©)- Siri, to learn to know. ’) ItoiMUUutz , jmgt BO. •) Shopping - Dialogues , )>. 21. CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 94, 95. 253 2. The spoken language of Yedo uses the forms Ake-nakdtta , Mi-nakatta , Yuka- nakdtta , = was without opening, without seeing, without going, derived from Ake-nakdri , Mi-nakari and Yuka-nakdn. See § 93. 4. 3. The written language employs ..zari)ki, si, kori etc., the preterit of the negative continuative form zari (§ 92. 1). — Osikarazari si inotsi '), the life which was not agreeable. — Ostiki , agreeable. FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE FUTURE. § 95. 1. The spoken language, which employs the continuative forms Akenii- de-ari , Minu-de-ari , Yukdnil-de-ari , cited in $ 92. 3., makes use of the future of ari, thus arau (T ? or aroo, and says: Akenu-de-arau , Minti-de-arqu , YukdnU- de-arau, he will not be opening, seeing, going. 2. 1) The written language employs ..zaran, f ^ y, the future of the con- tinuative zari (§ 92. 1), or, instead of zaran , ..zu to nan, . .zu mo aranan (com- pare § 75. II, 3), and forms from Akezari the future Akezaran , or Akezu to nan , not to be about to open. Wizard „ „ Mizaran , or Mizu to nan , not to be about to see. Yukazari „ „ Yukazaran , or Yukazu to nan , not to be about to go. 2) The written language, moreover, has a negative future in ..mazi, ~r from which by elision of the z, the vulgar form mai, d , has arisen (comp. Yukazide and Yukaide, § 91. II). Ake-mazi , vulgo Ake-mai , shall not open Mi-mazi , 9? Mi-mai , ,, see. Yuku-mazi . ? ?? YukU-mai , „ V go. Aru-mazi , 9? Aru-mai , „ be. From these examples it is evident that, in nondeflecting verbs, mazi is joined to the root, and in deflecting verbs, to the attributive form. Since the power to indicate the future, is not to be sought in zi, but must lie in ma , I consider this the substantive ma , which signifies room, space, used also with regard to time , as it appears from the expression : Ikari wo orosu ma mo nakU-site , kazeni makdsete yuku , = as there is not even (mo) time (or oppor- tunity) to cast out the anchor, they abandon themselves to the wind and pass on. — The action now, for which there is no time or opportunity, as it appears l ) Hiyahi-nin , N°. 50. 254 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 95. from the example, is something that is not yet happening, or has not yet hap- pened (Mi-mi), but no real future. — With regard to the negative form zi joined to ma — it may be considered as an elliptical form of nasi (n + si = nzi, si, V), or what is more probable , a fusion of the negative element n with the derivative form siki, siku, sisi or si (§ 1(3) (n -f- siki = ziki , l >* ?) — it only denies, that time or opportunity for something exists, and consequently mazi too, is properly a present. The Japanese custom of passing masi for mazi must therefore be dis- approved of. Inflectional forms of Mazi , vulg. Mai , are: the adverbial form mazikiivd , vulg. maikuvd, and the modal mazikini, vulgo maikini, maini, no opportunity being; mai toki, if, or as, there is no opportunity; rnai tomo , even if there is no oppor- tunity. Tenses and moods are expressed by the auxiliary verbs navi, to be, and ken, have been. Mazikinari ( A Mai na); Maziki nar)eba; -edomo, -edo; -aba ( A Ma- zda nava); Maziki nar)au , /\-ao, -oo. Mazi ker)i , u, (A Maiker)i, u); Maziker)eba; -edomo; Maziken. Examples of the use of the negative forms. When, as it will appear from some of the passages following, not only the subject, but the object also, or even the appositive definition of a negative verb , is isolated by va, A wa op mo, it is intended to bring out the negation with more emphasis. [Root-form.] Ame tsdtsi firdlcesi yori ko/io kata tmd no toki f odd dai-fei-ndrit koto arazi ; nisi va Kikai Yaku no sima yori jigdsi Osiyu no Sotoga-fdvia made ggo- reino yuki-toddkazdru tokdromd nds'i, since the development of heaven and earth a state of peace so general as at present, has not existed. To the AVest, from the Yaku-island, which belongs to the region of ghosts, to the farthest shore of the Eastern Osiyu, there is not even one place, to which the authority of the Go- vernment does not reach. Firu/cesi, preterit of Fir/rke , to open itself , *to unfold. — Arusi, negative root- form, = not exist, used here because, the connection of the sense is coiirdinative. — Todokasaru, attributive negative form of Todok)i , u, — reach to. S0n6 moto rniddrete, me osamdru mbnovd arazi; sono atsdusurfi tokdro no mono iUsdit-site, sikdusite sono ittsu sUril tokdro no mono dtsitki koto irndda kore &razu ( Dai Galea, § 7), - something (mbnovd), of which the top is regulated, while the root is in disorder, does not exist; neither, is that, which lias been made thick , thin , or that which has been made thin , thick. — CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. $ 05. Yahe mugura 11 sigereru ijado no 11 sabisiki ni Fito koso miycne 11 a kina ki-nikeri '). In the solitary cell, where the plant Mugura has sprung up luxuriantly, no- body is to be seen ; — Autumn has come. Mtgene , the negative root-form of Mige , to appear. — Aki, autumn ; light. [Closing-form.] Ki-sin no tdkit-tdrit koto, sore sakdn ndrU kd ! Korewo mite mizu ; kore wo kiite kikkzu ; mono ni tei-site nokosu bekark zu * l * ), „how abundantly do spiri- tual beings display the powers that belong to them. We look for them , but do not see them; we listen to, but do not hear them; yet they enter into all things, and there is nothing without them.” Legge, Chinese Classics. Vol. I. p. 261. Mite and Kiite, gerund of Mi, to see, and Kiki , to hear, for which in another edition of the text the concessive forms Miredomu and Kikedomo , are used. — Bekar.izu = may not, from the adjective Beki (page 109, N°. 73). .X is HU A) IP If A H? til v X" pi i. >'//) Sono kiyo-riu-ba no siu-i ni mon siyou too maukezu. Ide-iii zi-zai-ni-sn best 3 ), around this abode shall neither gate nor fence be placed. In going out and coming in, people shall be free. o X' m W r III': K m ns m :> „ Yama-nuka ni kuro-ki no go-si go teo tsuhiri, ken-gaknivo motsivi, tamiwo rgu-se-sirnezu '), in the building of a palace of barked timber in the mountains (the prince) considers economy, and does not permit the people to drudge. [Substantive form.] fit * ttl Hi H 7 ftlJXt >f* F c Z' Jfit • v 9 =■ u Tarazdru, = the not being, the the not being able, from Atdvi. Wgu no wau tarazkru va se-zara navi , atavazaruni ardzii s ), the king’s not exercising the Imperial sway, is because he does not do it, not because he is not able to do it. negative substantive form of tari , = te ari , § 78. II. — Atavazaru, l ) A hermit's farewell, N°. 47 of Hiyaku-nin is.su. — Yahe mugura is Galium, strigosum thunb. l ) Tschung-yung or the Mean, XVI. 1. 3 ) Netherl.-Jap. Treaty of 1858. Art. II. al. 10. ’) Nippon o dai itsiran, Vol. II. 1 r. 39th king. 5 ) Meng-fsze , Book I, Pt. I. § 7. 256 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. 8 95. Mitsi no okonavdre zaru , ware ) core wo sirdri. Tsv-siya va kore ni sugn ; gu-siya va oyobkzu *), that the path (of the Mean) is not walked in (literally: the not being walked in of the path), this I know. The knowing ones go beyond it, and the stupid do not come up to it. Okonavarezaru . , not being practised , from Okonav)i , u , to practise. — Sug)i , u , iru , wru , nondeflecting v. to overstep, go beyond. — Oyobdzu or Oyobdnu , not to reach, from Oyob)i, u. Sira-no to va urusi nite nwrazu-site , ji nite mo kogazavu wo ivu navi , concerning the so called pale arrow shafts, people understand by them, such as are not daubed with varnish , nor burnt with fire. Nur)i, u, to daub. — Kog)i, u, to burn. Sinserarezavu wo omonbakarazu ), what is incredible is not ta- ken into consideration. Sin-s)e , lira, to believe. — Omonbakar)i , u, to pouder. t A Watdkusi kareqa sono kotoivo osor ezu ni surunowo mi-tai mono de atta . I should like to see him do that business , undaunted. % k Ip Y X Osor)e , eru, nondeflecting, to fear. [ Attributive.] Onoreni sik&zhru monowd tomoto surd koto nakdre , make not a person , who is not your equal , your mate. Sikazaru , continuativc form of Sikazi, and this from Sik)i , a , to equal. Kono ri too s/'razaru fito , someone who does not know this law. Mata strazaru tokdro ari , there is what one does not yet know. — Mata ydku- sezdru tokdro ari 2 ), there is what one does not yet do well. Sir)i, u , to know. — YoIcu-s)e, uru, to do good. — Sen, not to do; thence Sezar)i , it. Yura no to wo 11 wataru funa-bito 11 kadziwo tave! Yukuyemo st’ranu 11 kovino mitsi kana 3 ). Skipper, sailing over the month by Yura, let loose the helm! Oh! it is a way of love, that does not know whither it goes! A Me ni miyenu, kutsini ivarenu fodo ki-meo ( v jtp £) na koto , a matter so uncommon, that it is not to be seen by eyes, nor to be spoken by any mouth. A k'ito ni sirarenu yauni sura , so to act that it be not remarked by others. [Gerund.] Taka ra deni sokonozxi-site , aku ivi sokonuru mono nari, = the hawking- 1 iu * t" ') Tschuny-yung. IV. ■*) IJi/aku-nin , N°. 40. “) Ibid XII CHAPTER Vn. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 05. 257 falcon is something (mono) that suffers no harm by hunger, but is spoiled by surfeiting. A Fora ruzu-sitc tori-age mdsu-mai , without paying I shall not receive (the goods). — A Nedanga kavarkzu site, while no change in price takes place. Kun-si go wo nogarete, sirarezu-site , kulzu ■), the superior man, retired from the world and unacknowledged, is not grieved at it. Nog)i , u, to push back; Nog dr) e, eru , being drawn back. — Sir)i , u, to learn to know; Sirar)e , vru , to be known ; Sirarezu , not to be kuown. — Kui, nondcllccting verb, to be grieved at. [Time-defining Local.] Kokdro ardzarebd , mite mizu , Mite kikdzu , kUrdute so no adztvaiwd sirdzu 2 ), when the mind is not present, we look and do not see; we hear and do not understand; we eat and do not know the taste of what we eat. Compare legge, Chinese Classics. Vol. 1. p. 232. Kun-si ini to site , zi-tdkii- sezdru koto nasi. Zigau-lni ante ( dtte ), simowo sinoguzu. Ka-ini ante , kami wo f ikdzu. Unovbwd taddsiu-site , fitdni moto- f/H’zareba , sunavatsi Urdmi nasi; Kami Ten wo uramizU. Simo fitdwo togamezii. Karii ga gite ni Kun-si va gasilki ni write matte mei w6 mdtsu 3 ). It does not occur that ( koto nasi) the superior man having once entered on a fixed position, does not continue to be himself. Is he in a high situation, he does not contemn his inferiors. Is he in a low situation, he does not try to pull down his superiors. Rectifying himself and seeking for nothing from others, he has no dissatisfaction. Since he is not averse to Heaven, which is above him, and does not abuse the people, who are below him, so is the superior man always contented and abides his destiny. Zi-ioku , self-preservation. — Zi-tuku sezaru koto, = tbe not remaining what one is, is the subject to nasi (is not). — Sinogazu , from Sinog)i , u, to turn off. — Fikdzu, not draw or drag, from Fik)i, v. — Motomezareba , the time-defining local of Motomezari , not to seek for, and this from Motom)e , urn. Manabazaru koto ari , koreivo manande yo/tv/.-.sY'zareba , okazu. Tovazaru koto ari , kore wo tovute sirazareba , okdzu '•) , if it happens that he has not learned some- thing, and when he learns it, does not become master of it, he (the superior man) does not discon- tinue it. Is it that he has not examined something, and might he not after the examination understand it, he does not give it up. ') Tschung-yung . XI. 2 ) Dai Gaku. VII. 2. 3 ) Tschung-yv.ng . XIV. 4 ) Ibid., XX. 20. 258 CHAPTER VH. THE NEGATIVE VERB. £ 05. [Concessive.] Mi-kari no toki fakarhzu mo taka ivo tobdsa , at the time of the princely hawking the falcon is let fly even without design. Fakardzu mo — fakardzu-site mo from fakdr)i , u , to consider, to design. Nippon nite irisi zenniva arazaredomo , mare narazu, - although (this coin) is not a coin cast in .Japan, it is not rare. Irisi, preterit of Ir)i, u, to cast, to found. Jb * iml *5 1 il ¥ V 2^ t 7 1 X’ 9 u Aj>; i & Y ^ x 4* T \s~ r? U 1 \ - t J Jz ft ¥ g 7 A si' 2* U > X' if m It? f? m X U -f SI M IT x ™ _ ie 05 05 Kokdro makotoni korewo motdmebd (of mo- tomurebd ), atardzu to iutomo, tdokardzi; imdda kd wo ydsindu koto wd mandnde , sikdu- site not si totsugu (of kd-surti ) mono vd ardzu •), if (a mother) aims in uprightness of heart at it (towards the fulfilling of her motherly duty), then even though she do not hit it, she will be not far from it. There never has been (a girl), who first learned to bring up a child, and then married afterwards. Atardzu , not to hit, not to answer to , from Atari. Tookardzi , root-form , to he not far off, from Took i (p. 108). ° Nippon tsuu-you kin-yin to gwai-kokn no kin-gin va motsi-yuku koto kurusi- kardzxL to ledomo, Nippon ton-sen to kwa-heini kosirayezaru kin-gin va motsi- yuku bekarazu '*) . Japanese current gold and silver and foreign gold and silver, the export (of it) has no diffi- culty; but Japanese copper money and uncoined (not made into coin) gold and silver may not be exported. Siyau-bai-itdsU koto kurusikardzu tomo (or to ivdomd), Nippon kin-si no sina- monovd siyau-bai-itdsii hekardzn 3 ), - even if trade has no difficulty, concerning articles which are forbidden in Japan, in them no trade may be driven. Nandziga sei- ( ^j|J *>’) site mo , sei-sr zu tomo, karera yahari korewo sura dc argu. if you forbid it or forbid it not he will yet do it. Mata sarddnnd, even if it is not so. Sdri , contracted from Stkdri (page 109 N°. 71), to be so. J titi is 5- 4kl 410 V *) Dai Oaku, IX, 2. s ) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1858, Art. XlV, al. 4. *) Ibid., Art. VIII, al. 1. CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE YERR. § 05. 250 [Future.] Otoko asOkoni tsuru tokiva a wo wo >’■ zu to nan '). a boy, if he angles at that place, will get no tish. r ZX ik, Nandzi no kuni waga-kuni no tame ni yabUrdren koto Jtsdsiki y jg| ni aru-mazi, it will not last long, before your country will :A! J&1 *" S " M " ed mine. ) uku-silyc kardru-m&zi to sei-gon (^&^ =y f ) uo ^ 8uru koto, the taking of t •) an oath, that in future no change shall take place. m % " ; «i y ^ \ nr v fit + H v V m 1 m ft? m Kai'i-kata no ku-den u'o obdye , hon-foo wo motte yqu-iku-seba , naka-naka zi-son-zi uru maziki nari J ) , if one observe the oral communica- ■i o 9 tion with regard to the feeding (of the silk- worm) and rear it according to my pre- scriptions. it will then probably not happen that one suffers harm. On -ki-dzukdi - n am rfi maziku soro. there is (soro) no occasion for your care, i. e. don’t care about it ; don’t trouble yourself. — A Kdku-bitsU tai-zi-td koto ni mo ndru-mai, it will be no matter of extraordinary importance. A? ♦ Tai-zi-ta koio , a matter of importance. ’A , an abbreviation of >\y . If we take X instead of £, wc have to do with a fusion of y* 7 >u ■ Compare page 07, line 3. [Suppositive.] Kino He tomarite orizaruniva (or orizarv kuse araba ), when (the falcon) stays on a tree, and does not come off (or: when he has the bad habit of not coming off). Fokoico oivzunba (of or/zaru ni va) . itsn-made mo , ye wo kawazu-site, hanahdda UydsH besi , if (the falcon) does not come off his perch, one must, without baiting, let him suffer terrible hunger. Iye wo tsugi , tokuioo tsugi , te-icaza wo tsugu rui noradeva, motsivizu , if the ex- pressions are not such as: to propagate a family, to propagate the good, to continue some trade, then (the character ^ , equivalent to tsugi) is not used. Naradeva , the isolated gerund of Nardnu, not to be, used as suppositive form. Mosi fvtd wo osorete midzU wo noma zunba , in case (the falcon) shunning men , does not drink the water. •) Nippon o dai itsi-ran , Vol. I, p. 11. *) To-san-fi-rok , l'art d’e'levcr les vers a soie an Japon par ouekaki morikouni, annote et publie pat matthifc bonafous. Ouvrage traduit du teste Japonais par j. j. Hoffmann. Paris 1848. $ 22. 260 CHAPTER VII. THE NEGATIVE VERB. § 05, 06. The negation of a negation involves a strengthened assertion; e. g. Gau rei ( - 7 ^- ^ ^ y ) 110 yiiki-tod/jkazdru tokdromd nasi, there is not one place, to which the authority of the Government does not reach. See page 254. Sirazunbd aru-bekardzu ) for Sirdzn ni vd aril bekardzu , i. e. in the not knowing — one may not be, = one ought to know. Fagemi tsUtomezumba aru-bekarazu waza navi , it is an occupation in which one may not be without zeal and diligence, i. e. in which zeal and diligence are of the most importance. Faru aki va yasezunba aru bekardzu , in spring and in autumn (the hawking- falcon) must be lean. — Yas)e, uru , to become lean. In the oral language the use is very common of the time-defining local ...neba, followed by naranu (not to be), to express the ,, necessity.” — Sa- yan ni itasaneha nar&nu (in the Yedo street-dialect: Sayooni si-nakeri ya narane), one must act so. — SVneba naranu, it must happen. — S’eneba naranu koto , the necessity. — Tde-tatsi seneba naranu de atta, he was constrained to depart. — Fit 6 va Ten yori ukuru tokdro no negumi wo ari-gdtakara neba naranu , man must be thankful for the benefits he receives from Heaven. — Ari-gataki, adj., thankful. VERBS EXPRESSING THE BEING, THE BECOMING AND THE CAUSING TO BE. § 96. Ar)i, u, deflecting continuative verb, derived from I (= expire, go away), signifies being continually in a departing movement, to exist, to be ’). Its inflectional forms are: Ari, the root- and, by exception * 2 ), the predicate closing- form (= there is); Aril, the substantive form, which is also used attributively. Comp. § 11. — Ante , Anteva, pron. Atte , Attewa , gerund, being, or as one is. Areba, there or as one is; — Aredomo, although there is; — Aran, A Aran, Aroo ( 7>^ 0 T tJ £?), future, there will be; Aran koto kakuno gotosi ( If itu id )■ be it so! (the termination of an oath). — Aruba (- Aran ni -f- va) , conditional, if there is, might there be. ') The Japanese themselves seem not to know, that they have continuative verbs, nor that there is a connection between i and ari. They see, ns it appears from the lFa-gun Siwori , in Am a mere modifi- cation of Jiy, Nani, = to become, Lat ..fieri. 2 ) By this exception they prevent a confusion of the closing form of Ari with that of Are (= to become). which is Aru likewise. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB AR1. § 96. 261 Preterit. Ariki , there was. Arisi , substantive ami attributive form. Arisi-yite , whilst there was. Arisikaba , „ „ „ vljitarji , it, A Attan, At tarn, Alia , has been. Attar eba, as there has been. Attaredomo , though there has been. Arikcn , there shall or may have been. Attaroo, there will have been. Anker)i, «, contin. (see § 82), have been. Attar aba , il there has been. Negative. rti‘) ?■), pron. Otte, which in writing is expressed by f 7 , dwelling; thence the Preterit Oritar)i , ?<, A Oita (?f y %). — Ordzu , A Ordnu , not to dwell; — Ords)i , u, 1 make to dwell, to place; — Orasim)e, u, cm, ^ , to order to place. — Samurai u'o sironi orasimU, order is given to place soldiers in the castle. — Passive form, used in speaking, Ordr)e , u , cm. — Sokdni orare, = „hic sedeatur ,” for pray sit down, in speaking to one superior. Examples of the use of Ori. Utsi ni oru , or ori-masti , he is within , is at home. — Pino soba ni oru , he stays 264 CHAPTER VII. THE VERBS ORI, OSI , I, IRU. § 97, 98. at the side of the fire. — Sinra nisi no kani ni orisi yori , since the (people of) Sinra has dwelt in the western parts. — Kun-si Jcoreni 6rU '), the superior man stays there in (in virtue, as in his element). — Oruni bite sono bru tokbro ivo sirih 2 ), when (a bird some where) nestles, it knows the place where it is at home. — II ito no kimito ndttevd , zinni ori , ldt.6 no sin to ndttevd, kSi ni ori , .... kuni-tdmi to mazivdrebd, sin ni bru 3 ) , when he (the noble man) becomes the lord of others , he rests in humanity; when he becomes the minister of others, he rests in reve- rence (towards the prince) ; if he has to do with the people of the country , then he dwells in uprightness. — Here we have a succession of three propositions of which only the last has the predicate closing-form orit, whereas in both the preceding the indefinite root-form ori is used. Tube, to eat; Tabete brti, to he eating. — Tabes)i , u , make eat, feed; Tabesite oru , to be feeding. — Nom)i, u , to drink; Nonde brU , to he drinking. — Siri, to know; Sirite ori-mdsu , to be knowing. — Fanawo mite zasite brti ( J|r ^ ), he sits beholding flowers. — Rare ga ima-yauni kimono kite oru, he is dressed in the fashion. — Mottewa ore-domo fitoni misenti , although he has it with him, he does not let others see it. The causative Os)i, u ( m ), pron. bssti , which being derived from the root I (^j|' r ), has the original signification of to seat, make stay some where, includes the idea of our print, e. g. Moku ni imeo 6su, to print a mark in wood; Kamini katdtsiwo osu, to print a figure on or in paper; Kuraiwo dsU, to main- tain the throne. Employed as a substantive, it refers to something that presses, and characterises the word Nezumi-dsi the mousetrap as something that presses the mouse, and makes it stay. § 98. I (ft), Ite, Iru, nondefl. auxiliary verb, = to be in, a variation of Or)i, u. A pi wiJ r m d" Elf Kun-si va ydsilki ni ite mottd mei iro matsit '*) , the superior man is quiet and calm , waiting for the appointments (of Heaven). — lJzu-kin wo kaburazuni iru, to be without ha- ving a covering on the head. — 2'sikdra ndkit nardc iru, or A Tsilcara nao natte oru, to have become powerless. The root i or wi ( 4 0 # ) , scat, occurs in compounds as: Tori-wi or Tori-i, = bird-seat, the name of certain doors, which are at the entrance to Japanese ') Tschung-yung. X 3 ) Dai Gaku. III. 2 >) ibid, in a 4 ) Tschung-yung . XIV CHAPTER VII. NON DEFLECTING VERBS IN I, IRU. § 99. 265 temples. — Kitrd-i (^r 7 ), from Kura, saddle, thus a seat raised as a saddle, a throne. — Xawi or Nai , the old-Jap. name of earthquake, from na, = dis- , and i. — I-su , = seat-nest, the chair on which one sits with the legs crosswise. — I-toko , seat. — 1-ziri , bed. — lyi ( A , in Eastern Japan u/a , contracted yd, the house. — I-tsi, = seat-way, the market-place. NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I. § 99. As these, with respect to their conjugation, are connected with the verb /, Iru, to be, they are placed here ■). The conjugation of the non-deflecting verbs 111 i. Aorist. Continuative present. Preterit, pres. Future. Continuative Fut. Root-form. . . . i. [iri , uri , yuri.] itari, A ita. in , A iu. [inzi.] en. Imperative. . . i-yo. i-sai. Closing- form. . u. iru , uru , yuru. itari, A ita. inzu, A iuzu. Snbst.andAttr. iru , uru , yuru. itaru, A ita. A iuzuru. Gerund ite. itarite. Local ireba, ureba, yureba. itareba. A iiizureba. as, when. Concessive . . . ire- ure- yure- itare-domo. although. domo. domo. domo. Suppositivc . . . itaraba. in-va , A iba, if A iu-naraba. Causative: isi , osi , asi , tm. Negative: iz)i, u , Ainu, onu. Synopsis of nondeflecting verbs in i. I. Intransitives. 1. Si)i, yu, iru or yuru ^ ^) , to force, compel. — £ , Sivi. Causat. Siis)i , u, yfcfc f', to dispatch, send out l— 7< of the world. Compounds with Sii are: Me-sii , T|§ u, = to be eye-dead or blind; MesiitdrU , A Mesiita , has become blind. — Mimi-si)i , W ^ T , ?/w, mt, or guru, ite , = to be ear-dead or deaf. 3. K)i, to come. Imperat. iyo , oyo, o< , in Sikok ci; Gerund ite; Fut. en, old-Jap. om# , on, A oo , oo^w, oozuru; Negat. 6 nu , at Yedo amt. 4. I-ki, * *, = go and come; to breathe, live ( £ ). lk)iru; Ikite-iru , to be living; Fut. A lk)iii; Causat. as)?, «, to make live, to enliven. 5. De-ki, nr**, = to come out of, to procede, to be produced, to be achieved; Lat. procedere. Dek)i, iru , ite; Fut. A id; Negat. tmt, vulg. enu. Caus. Dekas)i , u , to produce ; thence Dekas' mono , a product. A variation of AkG is ideki. 6. Tsuki, to come to the end, to consume, v. i., to get exhausted or consumed. TsUk)i, iru; Negat. inn, not to become exhausted; Causat. Tsukusji , u, to exhaust, to consume; Pass. Tsukar)e, uru, to he in a state of exhaustion. It is to be distinguished from deflecting Tsuk)i , u, ^ % jf|] ■ to come to. 7. Oki, to rise,' to get up, se lever. Ok)iru, uru, ite , ita; Fut. A id; Causat. 6s)i, u, to make rise, to raise, to establish. 8. Sugi, pron. Su-ngi, ^ contracted from site -|- ni + ki , - to go (ki) on the top (of anything) , to rise above , to surpass , exceed. Sug)iru , uru , ite. Causat. 6s)i, u. 9. Fi, §£ dry. Firu , to dry, v. n. to ebb. Sico no firu toki, at low water. 10. Ni, ~ , to be like, to resemble. N)iru , ite, ite ari = itari; Negat, izu, not to be like; Causat. is)e, u, uru, eru, to make to like; to imitate. Nisc-mono , imitation. 1 L. Ori, Jk’p to descend. Or)iru, also uru ; ite, itari; Fut. in, A id; intosu, to be about to descend; Negat, izu, izar)i, u, not to descend; Causat. Ords)i, u, to make descend. 12. otsi, to fall down. 6ts)i , ite, itar)i, u, A ita; Closing-form Ots)u or i-mdsit; Attributive iru, also uru , (Otsurit isi, a falling stone); Fut. in, A 1 n > Condit. iba; Negat. izu. Causat. Otds)i, u, to make fall; to fell. 13. Mitsi, '^i*} f , to be filled. Mits)u, uru, ite. Negat. Mit&nu. 14. Ktitsi, to rot, v. i. to wither. Kuts)iru, uru, ite. 15. odzi, to be afraid. 6dz)u, iru, also uru. Causat. Odds)i , u, to make any one afraid. 16. Fadzi, J[*. to blush, to be ashamed. Fadz)i, u, uru, ite; Imperat. CHAPTER VII. NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I, IRU. § 90. 267 ii/6 ; Adverb, ilrdkflvd; Adj. Fadzitkdsiki , timid. Causat. Fadzukds\m)e , uru, to make blush , to shame. 17. Karab)i, v , iru, i-nuru , to dry, w. Kara, halm; Kav)e, urn, to dry up. 18. Kabi, mould. Kabiru , to grow mouldy; metaphorically: to be grieved. 11). Sab)i, uru, to rust; metaphorically: to be solitary and still. 20. Wab)i, iru, also uru, ite etc. m ir, intercession, to intercede, to excuse. 21. Nob)i, iru, ito, to stretch, to be extended. Nobdr)i, u , to be stretching, v. i., to go aloft, to ascend. — Kern vino nobdruico mini, to see the ascending of smoke. — Fi no nobdri, the rise of the sun. — Yamani nobdri , to go aloft on a mountain, to ascend a mountain. Fact. Nob6s)e, urn, to make stretch, or ascend. — Tsukaiwo Miyako i/c nobosete, despatching messengers up to Miyal io. — Yaki-monoico kurumani nobdsu, to work up pottery on the potter’s wheel. — Nob)c, uru, v. tr ., to stretch, to extend, to raise. 22. Kobi, jlj |j^, to flatter. Kob)i, iru, uru, ite; Imperat. iyo ; Fut. in, A id. - Fitd ni kobiru , to flatter men. 23. Korob)i, u, uru, abruption, decay, to pass toward destruction. Causat. ds)l, u, to cause to decay. 2k Fokorob)i, u, uru, to tear, to burst, intr., to rip as a seam, open as a flower bud. 25. Forobi, tr|. M’ to become destroyed, to perish. J'orob)i, u, i-nu; Fut. imu, in, A iu. Causat. ds)i, u, to destroy. Forobosdr)e, uru, to be ruined or destroyed. 26. Fotob)i (not Fitobi) , iru, uru, to soften, v. i. Causat. Fotobas)i, u, to make soft. 27. Furub)i, iru, uru, iu, to get old, to grow old (old, opposed to new). II. Transitives. 28. K)i, iru, ite, Fut. in, A id, ^ to put on (a dress). 21). Kovi, A Koi, longing for. Koc)i , u, iru, uru, to long after, to love. Causat. Kovos)i, u, to cause to love, to attract one’s love; Kovdsiki, char- ming, amiable. 30. Motsii, ^ > to use, to employ. Motsi)i , u , iru, or yuru ( x >v); itar)i, u (kt 'a I ). Fut. Motsi)in ; Condit. iba; Negat. izu or inu ( ?), izar)i, u; Pass, irare , to be used, to serve, v. i. We consider Motsi)i, iru the continuative 268 CHAPTER VII. NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I, IRU. § 99. form of Mots)i , u ) , to take hold of, seize , use , of which the Gerund Matte ( J^f) is equivalent to the word expressive of relation, with. Some, al- though incorrectly , also write if A fy etc. The predicate closing-form ■i: f- x generally passes for a passive (to be used , to be of use to) perhaps from the analogy of the form with the derivative lyu (to get a shot), from 1 (to shoot). See § 89. 2. On account of the important part, which this verb plays, some instances of its use follow here. Kore ico surti mono va toku , kord wo mdtsi-uru mono va sidzukd narebd , sundvdtsi sai t sum ni tdru ') , if those which produce them, are quick, and those which use them are slow , riches will ever be sufficient. — Sono riyau-tan wo toritc ( A totte ) , sono tsiuwo tamini motsivu 5 ), he takes hold of the two extremes (of good and bad) and employs the Mean of them in his government of the people. — Gu nisite midzukdra motsiuru koto wo konomu s ) , being ignorant he is fond of using his own self (his own judgement). — Omae kore wo nanini motsiiruka? or, mox'e politely: Andta kore wo nanini 0 motsii nasdrU ka ? for what purpose do you use this? 8'- I. It*, ^ , shooting. Tru , Ite , to shoot at, to hit. Mato too iru, to shoot at a mark. Toriico iru, to shoot birds. Yumi-iru , to shoot with a bow. Passive lye , lyu , to be shot, lyu sisi ( ^ ) , = shot meat , venison. 32. Mukui, 9 , 1. reflecting; 2. retaliation, retribution. Muhu)i , yu,yuru, to retaliate, to retribute; Negat. izu , izari, not to retribute. The recent ortho- r\ graphy 2, y u 0 L 1? V is erroneous. — Inuva on wo siri, ala m 9 9 wo mukuu, the dog knows favor and retaliates wrong. 33. A.lx)i , iru (not uru ), - to shoot with bath-water, to splash, to squirt, to cast water up or out. Yu-abiru, to sprinkle anything with warm water, to wash it. Midzu wo abiru , r, to squirt cold water. Since, as appears from this expression, Abiru has the word water for its object direct, it cannot mean to wash oneself or to bathe. 3t. M)i, iru, to see. Imperat. iyo; Gerund ite; Pret. itari, £± ita; Fut. in, A *«; Negat. izu, A inn. Pass, iye, iyu, to appear; irare, to become visible. Compounded with mi, to see, are: *) Dai Gaku . X. 19. ■) Tschuny-yung VI. ») Ibid. XXVI II. CHAPTER VII. NONDEFL. VERBS IN I, IKU. $ 00 . THE VERB NI , TO BE. § 100 . I. 200 . # t 35. Ur&-m)i, ite, u, uru, 'Ib?, to see backwards, to be disgusted with... Flit. imU, in, A id; Negat. izu. 36. Kangam)i, iru, / .= ^ , to look in the glass; to consider. 37. Kahori-m)i, iru, to look back. THE FOREGOING NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I, ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. Abi . N°. 33. Forobi. 25. Kabi . . 18. Kobi . 22. Mitsi . . 13. Odzi. . 7. Sugi. . . 8. Deki ... 5. Fotobi. 20. Kangami 36. Korobi 23. Motsii. . 30. Ori . . 11. Tsuki 6. l'adzi . . lfi. Furubi 27. Karabi. . 17. Kovi . 29. Mukui. . 32. Otsi . . 12. Uranii . . 35. Fi . . . . 9. I . . . 31. Kahcrimi 37. Kutsi . 14. Ni. . . . 10. Sabi. . 19. Wabi. . . 20. Fokorobi. 24. Iki . . 4. Ki. . 3. 2S. Mi . . 34. Nobi . . 21. Sii . 1. 2. § 100. I. Ni, = 0 ^ = i = to be, is; Gerund Nile , Fut. Nan , is equiva- lent to our copula, to be, when in connection with a precedent substantive it implies, that that substantive is a definition, which is ascribed to the subject of the proposition. Derived from the Local termination ni and from i (- to be, exist, § 0(3) the verb Ni means really an existence or being in. . . It is peculiar to the written language, and except the root-form, which is of use in coordination of propositions, only the Gerund Nitc and the Future Nan are to be met with, whereas for the further conjugation the continuative Nar)i , u is used (§ 100. II). Examples: [Root-form.] Kin to {vU fituva takiimi ni , Ninto ivu f it 6 vd tsuriwo yokti su '), one Kin is (or was) an architect, one Nin knows (or knew) how to use the angle. [Gerund.] Taneva mi-wake-gataki mono nite, ku-clcn oosi 2 ), the seed (of silk- worms) is a difficult object to judge of, and there are many oral traditions re- specting it. [Future.] The forms ..ni nan and ..to nan, the first preceded by a substan- tive, the second, by the substantive form of a verb, have a potential force, m- nan being a coupling of ni, to be, and nan, the Future of ni, miru (§ 84), whereas to nan stands for koto nan , or , as some will , for tomo nan also. Compare § 05. 2. 1). — Kono ori kara moliaya mina mina atavi tavarnure mote itondmu koto ni nan 3 ) . from this time all (the work) shall be a matter (koto) which shall be ') Das Buck von Tausend Wortern , aus dem Schincsischen , mit Beriicksichtigung der Koreischen und Japauischen Uebersetzung ins Deutsche iibertragen vou l)r. j. hoffmann. 1840. N°. 925 — 928. a ) Yoo-san fi-rotc. § 5. s ) Ibid. 270 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NARI , TO BE. § 100. II. done singing and playing. — Ezu to nan , they will not get. See page 259 line 1 . — Kevino Dai Miyoo-zin va Icono Ten-wauwo agame-mdtsuru to nan ‘), with regard to the great illustrious spirit of Kevi, this emperor will have been honored (as such). — Kono siu ni omd-muki-keru to nan 2 ), he will have been con- verted to this sect. Remark. In rodrigues’ Elam. § 54 lines 16, 17 the verb Ni here treated is mentioned with the words: n De , idle , site, Etant. — Ces trois mots s’emploient quclquefois an lieu du verbe substantif.” — Site is the gerund van S)i, u, uru, to do. Sec § 103. II. N&r)i, u (tfc Tj'), deflecting continuative verb, derived from Ni (= to be, § 100. I). It is immediately preceded by the definition, of what the subject consists, or what it is. Inflectional forms, the same as of Ari (§ 9G): Navi is the root- and, though by exception, the closing-form also; Ndru , A Na (§ 12), the substantive form, which is also used as attributive. Gerund Ndrite, A Natte; Causal Nareba; Fut. Naran, A Naroo; Condit. Nardba , in the spoken language generally abbreviated to Nara (see § 76). 1. Nari is used as closing-form in: Tdkuvd moto ndri; Sail'd site nari 3 ), virtue is the foundation ; fortune the top. — Fi no fikdri akirdka ndri , the sun- light is clear. 2. Naru is substantive in: Katdtsino madoka ndruwd Tenni atari , and no keta (or kaku) ndruwd Tsini narctu , = that the shape (of the Chinese copper money) is round, answers to the heaven, that its opening is square, is an imi- tation of the earth. — Arne ndru va in-ygu no ki ndri ( mi t!i As t ||j^£ ^ 7 * {{^ ^ ) , that which is rain (= the rain) is an emanation of the tellural and solar principle. 3. Naru is attributive in: Mata /a-naru rnayuwo tsUkuru kdiko ari , there are also silkworms, which make yellow cocoons. 4. The attributive form Naru , A Na, serves to derive adjectives from substan- tives and adverbs. (See § 12, page 115). lye no katavara naru haydsi , a wood at the side of the house. 5. The Gerund Narite , A Nditc , is generally superseded by Nite and Ni-site (§ 100, I), probably to prevent a confusion with Narite , - giving sound, or •) Nippon woo dai it sir an. I. 10. :i ) Dai Ga/cu. X. 7. 2 ) Ibid. VII. 46 recto. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NARE , TO BECOME. § 100. III. 271 with Narite , - Narete , - becoming. — Kok6ro-b6.se makoto navi. Kokdro-bdse ma- koto ni site, sikau-site notst kokuro taddsi '), the will is truth. The will being true, the heart is then rectified. rule, superseded by the analytical form ni-arhzu or ni-aranu. Waga kotoni ardzu, it is not my business. (See page 102. 8). 7. Nari, with its inflectional forms, particularly its closing-form, is in the written language, used periphrastically also, to lengthen or round off a period, and is preceded by the predicate verb proper in its substantive form. The spoken language of Yedo uses Mas)i , u for the same object (see § 101). Examples: Kono toki va kaiko Umare-idziiru nari , - it is at that time that the silkworm conies out. Ide , Idzuru , to come out. — Kaiko samtisdni tavezu , si-sura nari , the silkworm cannot bear frost, it dies. — Kiisdioo kUvdsu naraba, if one gives grass for food. — Anuta no hooni sobokuga arimdsu nara, sore mo kai-mdsoo J ), if you have sapan-wood, I will buy it too. — Ydsui nara, tori-mdsoo 3 ), if it is cheap, I will take it. — 0 kai nasaru nara, if you buy. III. Nar)e, u, eru, uru ($££), = to become, Lat .fieri, the passive of Ni, = to be (§ 100. 1). As there is a homonymous. Nai')e , u , eru , which being formed from another root Ni, means to be boiled, become tame, the form Nare, when it means to become, is not employed, but now generally represented by the active form Nar)i, u, and the immediately precedent, appositive definition, what or how any thing becomes, has to show by its inflectional termination to, ni or the adverbial ku (§ 9, page 111), that Nari is not used with the active signi- fication of to be, but supersedes Nare , = to become. Observations concerning the use of Nari, as substitute for Nare, - to become. 1. The apposition, what any thing becomes, when it is some thing concrete , characterized by the suffix to. Ame korite ytild to naru , the rain, congealing, becomes snow. — Ten-Tsino seki- in 4 ) atataka-ndru lokiva ame to nari, samtiki toki va guki to naru (or ndru nari) 5 ), the accumulated tellural matter of the heavens and earth , when it is warm , be- ') Dai Gaku. § 5. 2 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 40. 3 ) Ibid. p. 37. 0. The negative Narhz)i, u ( & 5 It ^), = not to be, is avoided and, as a °) Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i. I. 7. recto. 272 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NARE , TO BECOME. § 100. HI. comes rain, when it is cold, it becomes snow. — Since they are coordinate, the former of the two propositions closes with the root-form (ame to) nari, the latter with the closing-form (yuki to) naru. So, likewise, in: Kamova san-sen no ki nari. Tsi-ki noborite ( nobotte ) kumoto ndri, Ten-ki kuddrite ame to naru nari '), clouds are the exhalation of mountains and rivers. The exhalation of the earth rising becomes clouds, the exhalation of the heavens descending becomes rain, or, lite- rally: is becoming rain. — Motsiiru tokinbd , nezumimo tord to nari; rnotsiizdru tokinbd , tord mo nezumi to naru , it one make use of it (if one attach value to it), even the mouse becomes a tiger; if one attach no value to it, then even the tiger becomes a mouse. — F ltd no kind to ndtte vd , zinni 6rU 2 ), if (a noble man) becomes a prince over others, he has humanity for foundation. — Kara wakarete 1 # 2 futdtsu to naru , the river divides into two branches. — Kore naravasi to ndri-taru 3 3 12 nari, this has become a custom. 2. The apposition, what something becomes, characterized by ni; a con- struction peculiar to the classic language. Kuni tsu kami om'na- ( onna -) ni narite ( tk r n' 1 am mitsl ni mukaveri 3 ) , ' the god of that district became an old woman and came to meet (him) on the way. — Kova torini narerisi kami nari ( lit % .ft ffr it 2 W tfc ), this is a god changed into a bird. Narerisi , the attributive form of the preterit of Nari (compare § 80 line 1G). — Kova Fi no kami no mi-kabane ni nari- maser a nari, this (kami) has become the corpse of the god of fire. If ni were superseded by no (thus kabaneno ), an existence from the corpse would be meant, for the same writer says of another kami : Ko va Fi no kami no tsi no nareru nari akZf’ft ffctil). this is a production from (has arisen from) the blood of the fire-god. — Nami kaz/i mo tawoyaka ni narite . . . , also waves and wind becoming softer ... — Ken-go ( mt nr ) ni naru koto, becoming sound. 3. If the apposition, what something becomes, is an adjective in ki (§ 0. B. page 105), it stands in its adverbial form in ku. Kara-kane furuku. narite sono iro ct/oiku naru nari, the Chinese metal (an alloy of copper and silver) growing old, his color becomes red. — Aritaru mono no ndku naritaru koto, the annihilation of a thing that has been. *) Kasira-gahi kin-moo dzu-i. I. 6. verso. *) Nippon-ki. 14. 13 recto. 5) Dai Gaku. III. 3. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NASI, TO CAUSE TO BE. § 100. IV. 273 4. The materials from which any thing becomes, is put in the Ablative or Genitive, characterized by yori or by no. M'uhu yori naru mono , something that has arisen from water. — Ftno kamino tsi no nardrtt nari , it has arisen from the blood of the god of lire, = it is an emanation from the blood 5. The definition, by what a thing becomes, if it is a verb, is put in its root-form before Nari. Kono simava sivo-nau'ano kori-nareru nari , this island is a clotting of the sea-foam. 0. Nari, employed impersonally (without a subject, as in Germ, es wird ), and preceded onely by an appositive definition what it is to be, characterized by ni or to. Ni-gwats' ni nareba , = when it becomes (comes to) the second month. — Si- dzukani naru , it grows calm. — Mayuni (or Mayuto) nareba, itowo tordsimu, as cocoons become formed, one has the thread taken from them. — Notslni iro-irono yamdi to ndrU, or naru-nari, afterwards arise all sorts of illness. IV. 1. Nas)i, u, deflecting causative verb, = to cause to be; to make ( fio Vc o if )» from = to be (§ 10 °- >)• Fu-sen wo nasu '), to produce evil. — Fit 6 no zin-sai wo ndsU, originate clever- ness in others, make others grow clever. — Koreiuo ndsU besi, this must be done. — Korewo ndsil koto nakdre , do this not! (§ 93. 2.). — Ten no naseru ivasawai, cala- mities which heaven has caused. 2. Nas&z)i, u; Nasaz&r)i, u, negat. not cause to be, not produce. — Koreva nasazaru best, - as to this, one ought not to do it, this may not be done. 3. Nasas)i, u, causat., to make produce. 4. Nas&sim)e, uru, cause that one makes be, give order that one makes, to bring about. 5. Nasar)e, u, uru, become produced or done, to happen. Imperative Nasure, let there become done, sounding in the popular language of Nagasaki Nahdri, Nahai and Naherri too 2 ). The use, which courtesy makes of the passive Nasar)e, u, uru, will be illus- trated in the Appendix to this Chapter. ') Dai Gaku. VI. 2. J ) Observation by the late Mr. r. s he saint aiieaire, interpreter for the Japanese language. 274 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB MASI, TO RESIDE. § 101. § 101. Mas)i, u ( ^ J.), deflecting v., to abide, reside, originally imds)i , u, from mm, abbreviated ma ( f}JJ ' ) , = space, spot, or with reference to time, while, interval and s)i, u, to be active, do. Gerund Masite, by elision Matte also; Pret. Maser)i, u, Masik)i , eri , a; Masita , Mas'ta; Fut. Masan , A Masoo , pro- nounced as Masoo (see page 209, line 12). Negat. A MasenU, instead of Masdnu (see page 248). 1. In the elevated style Masi supersedes the commoner Ar)i, u, to exist, and Or)i, u , dwell, and just as it, is preceded by the definition of place, where so- mething is, in the Local. E. g. Kova Oki tsu miya ni mdsU kami nan '), this is a kami dwelling in the chapel of Oki. 2. Masi is used as an auxiliary verb, when an eminent subject is spoken of, and is preceded by the verb with which it is connected in the root-form ( a) Pre- sent or b) Future), or also c) in the Gerund. Examples: a) Ama-terdsU Kami, = the Kami enlightening all around, is also called Ama- lerasi-mksu Kami. [. . ni-mdsu.\ A., va B.. Kami no mi fava ni-masu, A., is the mother of the Kami B. . 2 ). ( Ni , Nite, to be, see § 100. I.) — Tamayori-f ime no mikotova Kamo no mi oyano Kami ni-masu 3 ), Her Highness Lady Tamayori is the Kami of the ancestors of Kamo. \. .nari-mdsui] Konomi fasirano Kami va mina f itori-cjami nari-masite , mi-mi too kdkusi-tamdmki '*), these three gods were gods standing alone, and kept them- selves hidden. — Kono f'imd no garni vd N.. Kamini mw/'ri-maseri, this goddess has matched herself with the god N. . (See § 80). — i, ^ ,ii. 3 Kono simavd ye to site umi-maseru nari, this island — t&'i ' ^ ^ x (the gods) have produced (it) as an alter birth. — Ma- . C , sent, the attributive form of Maseri, the preterit of rJB? %r' „ . , a „ Masi. (See § 80). [.. masi-masit , = to be being.] Tcnwau N. . no miyani masi-m6.su, the emperor is residing in the palace N. . — Buts zinva f itd no negavini yotte ka-go- ( u ) s i-md s i - m asedo m 6 , so no mi ma ) kavi-katani orosoka nare.ba, ikagava sen? s ) although Buddha and the spirits assist, complying with the wish of men: if, in the rearing (of the silkworm) one is negligent, what will it avail? — Siyuk-ke *) Kami-yono mi-sudzi. «) Ibid. 5) Ibid. 3 ) Ibid. 5 ) Yoo-san fi-rok. II. 11 recto. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB MASI, TO ABIDE. § 101. 275 ( jjj i ^ , pron. htklce) no nozdmi masi-masi-keredomo , t sit si yurusi tamamzu , lie wished to quit the paternal house (i. e. to become a monk), but the father did not grant it him. l>) | . . amasi . ] By grafting masi on the form of the Future, ..am, ..an, by which amasi is gotten, a periphrastic future is formed. Sin)i, urn, to go away; Jndtsi sinamasi '), life will perish. See § 75. 5. c) Masi in connection with a gerund, used as well in the elevated style as in the polite conversational. — Kona Kami va Susano wo no mikoto to tsikdra wo anasete masi -tamavu navi 2 ) , this Kami wrestles with the moon-god Susano wo no mikoto, literally: he is (masi) measuring his strength etc. — A Korewa yaburete imusU 3 ), this is torn. — Fitd mq,runi ikilra faitte imdsu kd '') , in a bale, how much goes in it? Fa-ir)i, it to enter. There is no verb of which the polite spoken language makes a more frequent use, than Masi , and as it, grafted on the root-form of verb, generally has to ex- press the inflectional forms, whereas the verb itself to which it is added remains unchanged, in its root-form, a knowledge of the conjugation of this auxiliary verb will be found without any other. The forms, which are in use in the spoken language, are limited to: Mdsu , A Mas' , is , being. MdsUka? is it? MdsUna ? is it not? A fuse, imperat. be! Afasite, A A fast e , gerund. Afasita . A A fast a. has been. Maseba, as it is. Masedomo, although it is. Afasiyoo , A Afasoo, it will be. Masu-nara, if it is. Afasenu, A Alaseng, it is not. The forms massru, maszreba , maszredomo , quoted by Mr. r. brown, Grammar XXIV, for masu , maseba, masedomo , I have neither found in any original Japanese writing, nor observed in conversations with Japanese. To what dialect do these forms belong? 4 Front the Shopping-Dialogues, published by us, which particularly come under notice as a faithful representation of the polite language of Yedo, it is obvious that Afasi is used as the final word of a proposition indifferently whether the speaker or the person spoken to or something else, is the subject of it. Thus it may, l ) Wi agun Siwori , under Sinu. - 1 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 24. ! ) Kami-yono mi-sudzi. *) Ibid. p. 34. 276 CHAPTER VH. THE VERB MASI § 101 , SORAI § 102. without the speaker’s attaching any importance to it, be used only to round off the proposition, and express our „please” just as little as „liave the honor.” Examples of the use of Masi in the spoken language, borrowed from the Shopping-Dialogues. Kono fitowa dare de ari-masu ka , = this man — who is he? Watdkusi no tsuki- yai de ari-masil , he is my bosom-friend. Anuta no 0 na tea nani to ii-masU ha ? your name — what is it called? Watdkusino nawa ... to ii-mdsu, my name is called ... {S.-D. 19). Sina wo miru-koto iva deki-mdsu ka ? The seeing of your goods — can that take place? (deki-mdsu na? cannot it take place?) Deki-mdsu, it can take place. (S.-D. 23). Andtawa too-sono fitode ari-masu ka? Are you an inhabitant of this place? Watdkusi ivd too-sono monode ari-masu , I am someone of this place. (S.-D. 20). Kono nedanwa ikura si-rndsu kd ? the price of it — to how much does it (amount)? (S.-D. 34). Soo-tsi si-masita, I have understood you. (S.-D. 41.) Miyoo-nitsi Go hen-too itdsi-masoo , to morrow I will give you an answer. (S.-D. 39.) Watdkusi wa korewo zonzi-masdnU , I do not know it. (S.-D. 26). Firu-maye ni wa mairi-yc-rnasmu , before noon I cannot come. (S.-D. 17). Rok-kinni atari-mu six na ? Is not that about six pounds? (S.-D. 8) '). Watdksa hanahdda Go dza-ma (ftp 3 ' Afe A HH ' ) de gozari-masen' kd? Am 1 not your disturber? Don’t I disturb you? the ordinary question of anyone who unasked pays a visit. jj ^ ^ § 102. Samurav)i, u <# A_7 ^ s . m.mm ), also Savurav)i, u, ASorai, closing-form Soro, t/] 1 a> = to he, is; in old-Jap. v, Sa-mo- ravi , from save , at the side, by, and moravi , guard. As noun Samurai ( A Sorai) answers to our ,,guarde” and is the old general name for people on duty at the court of a prince. Used as an auxiliary verb in the written language, particularly in the episto- lary style, it qualifies the being as a serving being and humiliates the speaker. If, therefore, in a proposition, of which the predicate verb is Soro , no subject is named, the unnamed, who speaks or acts, is the speaker not the person spoken ') Page 29 of the original edition: A new familiar phrases. Nagasaki 1S59 CHAPTER VII. THE VERR SORAI. § 102. 277 to, and we assign to those propositions the I or We as subject. With regard to the nse of Soro the following is to be noticed: 1 . The definition, what a thing is, when it is a noun, precedes in the Local, characterized by ni or nite, A do (not do) '). 2. The definition, how a tiling is, expressed by an adjective in ki , is placed in its adverbial form in kn. — Kdkuno gutulnn soro ( jaf ml m □), it is so 5 ). — Mansi agu-be ku * * 3 ) soro ( TfJ * 7 £ t X a) 1 = it is possible that I mention, = I shall make mention of it. — Naku soro , = Nasi, there is not. — Go-za soro ( ttjj n ^ □ ) , = A Gozari-mdsu , it is (See § 96 , p. 263 , line 4). — Sa-goo nite go-za naku soro, it is not so. 3. Soro, as an auxiliary verb, expressive of humility, grafted on the root- form of a verb, is appropriate to the familiar, as well as the official form of writing. — Fino sobani ori-svro, „I am by the fire” 4 ). — Yorosiku On agdri-soorde, eat heartily 5 ), literally: may your rise be good! — Kgoo-go mamorU-beki ka deo ai-tate-soro tame, to appoint the articles to be kept in future. — Bu-sata itusi-soro tokoro ni, while 1 make no mention of it. — Deo-ydkuivo tori-kivame soro, one draws up a treaty. — Sasi-yurusi-soro , I / agree to. 4. In negations as Agezu-soro, I do not raise, — Motomezu-soro , I do not try to acquire, — Ivazu-soro, I do not say, in deviation from the rule, zu is used instead of zi, the root -form. If soro be grafted on the negative form of the spoken language, the forms Agenii -b soro , Motomenu A- soro , harm -+- soro , are obtained, which forms may fuse into f J /y" 3 Agezoro, Motomezoro, Ivazoro, and are to be easily distinguished from the affirmative forms Age-soro, Motome-soro, Ivi-soro. Thus if in rodriguez EUm. page 71 line 10, it is said with regard to the negative form: „cependant on dit aussi motome soro, ivazou (sic) soro," then motome-zoro , ivazoro are meant. ml tk-' N| ir » #=• mA r? ‘) Here the example cited in rodriguez Elem. page 71 line 12: „Cbristam nite soro,” christianns sum, comes under notice. *) See page 109 n°. 70. 3 ) Beki , see page 109 n°. 73. 4 ) Nieuw verzaraeld Japansch en Hollandsch woordenb. door den vorst van Nakats. 1810. V. 55 recto. s ) Ibid. II. 40 verso. 19 278 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SORAI. § 102. SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS OF SAMURAI, A SOORAI , SORAI, TO BE. Present. Preterit. Root-form. . . . Sorai , A Sorai, Sorai si. A Sorai si. if ^ > -i • ZjM . Sorai ni. Closing-form . Soro, „ Soro, Sorai-ki. Sorai nu. Sorai tsu. if y o. A Soro tsu, y d y . Subst.audAttr. Soro, „ Soro. Sorai si. Sorai nuru. Sorai tsuru. Soro koto , „ Soro koto. Sorai si koto. A Soro tsuru. (rermid Soraite , „ Sorote, !A> ffii- lA rfo Local-, Causal Sorayeba , „ Soroyeba. Sorai-sikaba. Sorai tsureba. and Modalform Mi* Sorai-sini. A Soro tsureba. Soro ni , „ Soro ni woitewa Sorai tsuruni. „ Soro tokoroni. A Soro tsuruni. Concessive. . . . Sorayedomo , „ Soroyedomo. Sorai si to iyedomo. Sorai tsure domo Soro to iyedomo „ Soro to yutomo. Sorai si kadomo. Soro tsure domo Soro tomo , „ Soro tomo. Sorayeba tote. Imperative . . Soraye. Optative Sorayekasi „ Soroyekasi. Sorai si mono wo. Future. Periphrastic Future. Fut. preterit. Root- form. . . . Soravan [Soravanzi, Sorovanzi.] Sorobeku Soro bekeri if ^ > & A Sorovan Closing-form . Soravanzu A Sorozu Soro besi if ^ 5* ' ' & X Soro beku- soro SnbA. and Attr. Sorovan Soravan zuru A Sorovan zuru Soro beki koto A Soro zuru Soravan zuru- A Soro zuru- Soro beki- koto koto koto Local-, Causal- Soravan zureba A Sorovan zureba Soro beki ni Soro bekere- and Modalform • A Soro zureba ba Concessive. . . . Soravan zurumo A Sorozurumo Soro bekere- Soravan zuredomo A Sorovan zuredomo domo. A Soro zuredomo Conditional . Soravaba ASorovaba CHAPTER YU. THE VERB SORAI. § 102. 279 Future. Periphrastic Future. Fut. preterit. Conditional. . . Soravan ni woitewa A Soro ni woitewa Optative Soravan monowo A Sorovan monowo NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. Present. I Future. Root- form. . . . [Soravazi], not to be. Closing-form. . Soravazu '), A Sorovazu, it is not. Soro maziku soro , will not be. Subslant, and Soravazu , A Sorovazu , the not being , Soro koto maziku soro. Attributive. not being. Substaut., iso- Soravazu va, the not being. lated. Gerund Soravade , A Sorovade. Time defining Soravazu site , not being. Soravaneba, when it is not. Local. Concessive . . . Soravane domo , though it is not. Soro mai keredomo , though it Conditional . . . Soravazunba 1 might not have been. Soravazuba ( */ ?s not - Maziku soravaba. Maziku soravaba , if it should not be. § 103. S)i, u, uni to do. As we have already elucidated this verb, so far as it is used in the formation of causative verbs, in § 87, it is here noticed only in its other relations. I. The root-form Si occurs in compound nouns, 1. as chief word, indicating the person, who is employed with something, in which case it is equivalent to our termination er of tiler, potter etc. — Kavara-si , = a brick-maker; Mono-si , = Lat. opifex , maker; I-mono-si, metal founder; Kusu-si, ') The regular negative form of the deflecting verb Soravi is Soravazu. But the spoken language uses for it, Sdrovazu , and Sorovazu, which are more easily pronounced, on account of the rule, that the vowels of the subordinate syllables adapt themselves to that of the principal syllable. . 280 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. medicine-maker , physician; Nu-si (contracted from Nuru-si ), japanner, Si being generally explained by Hi *y, master; or 2. as definitive member before the chief word, as in Si-yoto , occupation, where it is generally indicated phonetically by ft ly, and even by ^ with the signification of which characters the pure Japanese root, Si, has nothing to do. Thus Si-yoto is met with under the form of ft f . — Sore va idzure ya si-waza ka ? ( ^ ft ~ M+f ), whose business is this? f,, Si-yoo, manner of doing ; ft ^ ^ , Si-hoo , manner of acting. Si-kata , it '"in. manner of handling, also tt ^ form of doing, gestures; Teniteno si-kata, gesticulations with the hands. Si-te, ft- ^ T , = work-hand, the hand, the person that accomplishes a thing. 3. The root-form Si further occurs in compound verbs as an adverbial prefix, to imply that the action expressed by the verb, is done, as a definite act. and, in itself, includes all the activity of the subject. Examples: Fiine v:o das)i, u , to clear a ship (compare page 236 n°. 18). — FUneno dasi-ba, = the place for the clearing of ships. - — ft 7 7 "ft ^ Uj ^ ' 7 7 Sono fiine no si-dasi-ba no mindto no na , the name of the port at which this ship is, or has been, actually cleared. — Tr)e , uru , to take in, to take up; Si-ire , ft A- the taking in, as exercising a calling, the buying in, purchase of merchandise. — ft ^ Si-or)i, u, to be busy; Mono-si-or)i , u, to keep oneself busy with one thing or another. — Nippon ni oit.e yebumino si-main ( ft ^ # ,( ) va sUdeni fai- ( j) ) sen ‘). in Japan coming up to the image- trampling has been already abolished. •ft ^ Si-utsi, the deed. Si-liardi, the payment, ft^ jtf’ Si-tate, erection, making. Si-tdye, perfect accomplish. flAitr , Si-naosi , polish. II. Acting as verb, S)i, u is nondeflecting. On account of the important part it plays, it is advisable that the explanation ol its use should be preceded by a *) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1858, Art. IV, al. 2. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. 281 SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS. Nondeflecting. Deflecting. Continuative. Root-form.. . . SI * ® H TO DO. [Sur)i , U , not in use.] . . SI , form- word of causative Imperative. . . Seyo, Sero, Sei, Sesai, do. verbs , as Nasi , to make Closing-form. . Su. Sdru. be; ..seyo, imperative; Subst. audAttr. jSuru, doing. ..su, closing-form. Terminalive . . Suruni, to doing. Local < Suruni , by doing. Suruni va. Seba. Sureba. . . seba. Concessive. . . . Suredomo, | if one Suru to iedomo, ( do. Gerund Site. PRETERIT. . . site , doing. Closing- form. . Seri, did. Sl-tari, A Sita, has done. ..sitar)i, u, A ..slta, has done. Substant. and Seru, the having done. Sl-taru , A Sita. Attributive. Sesi. Sesi ni , when one did. Sesinari, has done. Sesikaba, as he did. FUTURE. Sen, if a-', shall do; t A Seoz)u, uru. ^ \ 5?)X, ASeo, X . . su-be)ki , ku , si , Senzu. (p. 109 n°. 73. § 104). NEGATIVE. Root-form. . . . Sezi , if , not to do. vSezari, contin. Closing, Subst. »Sezu , A, Senu. Sezaru. and Attrib. Gerund Sezu site , A Sede , CAUSATIVE. . sas)e, ^ have done. . . sas)u , 282 CHAPTER Til. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103 . Nondeflecting. Deflecting. ..sas^ete, etari, A eta, Fut. en, A eo. Con- tin. uru , ureba, ure- domo. Neg. Sasenu. Se-sim)e ( E-), u, uru, . . sasim)e , nondejlect ., charge to do; Ger. Se- simete, contr. Sesite; Fut. Sesimen. PASSIVE. let do. have done. Serar)e, u, uru, nondefl. . . sar)e , u , uru , be- become done. come done. . . saserar)e , u , uru , WTJ" ’ 0rder is given to do. Serarezu , A Serarenu , negative , not to be done. Compounds with Si. 1. S)i, u, uru (to do) is used to derive verbs from Japanese nouns; e. g.: Kari, hunting; Kari-s)i , u , uru , to practise hunting; Firano farani kari- su, people hunt on the plain of Firano. — Tada Ji-kiire ni kari suru koto , hunting alone in the evening. — Yome-iri , = the entrance as a (married) woman, marriage. Onna va , — imada j/ome-m-sezaru wo dzyo ( ij ) to ivi , sttdeni yome-iri- si taru wo fu ( 7 ) t° ™ u - Yome-iri- sitemo fu-bo yonde musume to ivit '), = as to the woman, she who has not yet made her entrance as wife, is called dzyo (maid), she who has already made her entrance as wife, is called fu. Also if she has been married, her parents say, calling her musume (daughter). — In the same way, by means of si , verbs are derived from: Yorne-tori , to take to wife. — Kami-agari , the rising as Kami, the decease of a prince. — Katsi-watdri , a ford. — Kavatvo katsi-watdri-suru , the fording ot a river. — A, Muma no kasira ga figdsi-su , the horse’s head faces the east. Ono-ono nisiya Jigasi-su , each turns either to the west or to the east, every ') Kasira-gaki ldn-moo dzu-i. IV. 2. r. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 108. 283 one does this or that. — Kono kata ni tnukuite tane-maki sezu , - towards that side the sowing is not done. — .1 fainai serarizA, lie is not bribed. — Kono m- (lanwa tkilra si -indsAka (or ari-inusitka , or kakdri- manuka)? '), what is the price of it V — Go 2 u me si -mdsii, it is five taels. — *So«o katawa doo si -mdsii ka? 2 ), its form — how is it V 2. a. Chinese words also are verbalized by means of si: their number is leirion. Examples Rai-; >7. to come. T , Rai-teo-si. to come to court. ; Tai-s i . to be opposite to. ^ ; Fai-si , to greet, salute. ^ ) Fai-s i . to abolish. m Rau- si, to weary. ft? Rei-s i , to order. w* J/ > Si-si to die. Zi-si to allure with bait <« ■ > ). — Zi-serar)e, u, uru , allured with bait (bribed). ft? ‘m '1 * ^ iu-si, to keep abode. JBS * ^ , Kii/o- riu-si , „ ,, ft- Dziu •si , to dwell. ft* ft * y ^ , Dziu -sai-si. „ 6. Of the thus verbalised Chinese \v z)i, u , uru ( X , % >v ) instead of s)i tsr. An- zi , to remark (to distin- guish from , An-si. to bring to rest.) San-zi , to scatter. 3 ' j||^ £ Go-ran-zi , to please to see. l ) Shopping- Dialogues , page 3. 34. jj jfc ^ Z ; , Rio-kovsi . to travel. 4^ 1)1 j , Za-si , to sit. l , Tsuu-si , to go through... f, igP ^ , You-i-si, to provide... ® +? Aj) i ir > You-si n-si , to be attentive. , Tekisi, to be hostile, v * , TsakU-si , to arrive. ^ Py- f ^ , Tsdku-yan-si , to land. .y 2 . j las- si , to make known. J, ^ , Tes-si , to penetrate; un- derstand. 'n' * > > Gas-si , to fit , agree. 0t 'y ? , Nes-si , to be hot. Sis-si, to lose. y l' > Bos-si , to sink. ords some, by way of exception, have. . u , uru. The impure 2 occurs in: Kan-zi, to affect, stir, excite the feelings. Ken-zi , to offer. iJl t , Gen-zi , to appear. t Gen-zi, to lessen, to diminish. 5 ) Ibid. p. 11. 284 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. Ten-zi, 1. to make revolve; 2. to transform. Z*- 7, | Kassin-zi , to be hand to hand ( tekito , with the enemy). Gin-zi, to sing. Son-zi , to suffer damage. &m- 2 ras)z, m, to injure. Mei-zi , to give order. Zon-zi , 1 . to maintain; 2. vulgo, to think. Ron-zi, to discourse. Soo-ron-zi, to converse. qr v ^ , Soo-zi , to come forth , grow ; to produce. ¥$ £ Hoo~zi, to reward. Oo-zi , to answer to. Examples of the use of Chinese- Japanese verbs in si. Ken-bun v f^j v ) suru koto w0 kaki tomeru , to note down what one sees and hears. If suru be superseded by seru, it means to note down what one has seen and heard (remarked). — Fino toold tsikdkiwo ron-zu, = people speak of the far and near (of the distance) of the sun from the earth. — A 7§s. ^ - f $/•<* , Soo-tsi-si-mas'ta , I have understood! = very well. — A ^ y ^ I ^ , Soo-si-masoo , I shall do it, = I shall satisfy your desire. — Fisasiku siie-okite fanasazareba , dsi tsukdrete ycimai wo siyau ( 4 : v) , if the hunting falcon be kept long perched, and not let fly abroad, his feet get exhausted by weariness, and he grows sick. — Sore takava tsuneni nessuru ( >u) yileni sei-midzuwo konomu mono nari , the falcon, because he is continually hot, is very fond of fresh water. — JSSt'Rt= 2 ^t t> e ? ? t/ Is* Z-z? , charging all people (the emperor) has silkworms bred. — FUransi-koku no f'ito Nippon ni kio-riu- ( ^ ^ ^ !J , ) seva (read seba), sono f ito-bitoivo Nippon ni oite nengoroni atsilkdvu besi '), if the French remain in Japan, that people will be treated well. Remark. If the accomplishing of a thing, instead of the being occupied with it, is to be expressed, then itks)i, u ( l Ig x), to accomplish, is used instead -XV y 0 of si, both in Japanese and Chinese words. Itdsi has arisen by syncope from itardsi, which is the causative form of itdr)i, u ( -j* ft), = has gone (whither he would go) and as such signifies the accomplishment of an action. For the rest, the spoken language seems to use itdsi also, merely for euphony, as being more harmonious than the simple si. Examples : ') Franco- Japanese Treaty of 1858. Art. 1. a). 2. Ibid. IX. 2. XV. 1. 2. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. 285 tr 9 X * K l vfy * e* ” b t * m « o A 0 $ m 9. 1 ,MJ * =5? K? 2^ -C Nippon-zin Fransi-zin yori no saku-zai wo fara- vdzusite suppon itasitaru toki va , Xippon yaku- nin gin-mi itasi, fardi-kata itas&su besi '), when Japanese, without having paid their debts to Frenchmen, have taken flight, the Japanese authorities shall make inquiry and make them pay- Soo-bai-itasu koto kurusikardzu 2 3 ) , trade is not unwelcome, — it will not be thwarted. /■> X l' m ? /a. ^ t ? ■ y n ’ H I A Miyoo-nitsi Go hen-too itdsi-masoo ’) , to morrow 1 shall give you an answer. — A Go soo-dan tasi - (fast = itdsi) masoo, I shall speak with you about it. — A Sa- yoo itdsi masoo, 1 shall do so. — A O-itoma itasi-masoo , 1 shall take leave of you 4 ). III. ON THE GOVERNMENT OF S)i, U, UTU , TO DO. When this verb has an object direct, in the accusative, before it, it is tran- sitive, but when not, it is intransitive. 1. [..wo su.] The definition: what a person does, stands, as object direct, in the accusative. Examples: Kare va nani ivo sitaru ka f what has he done ? — Ware kore wo sezu ( ^ £ J6* JS* Zl £ ) s ), I do not do this, = this is not my business. — Zinivo suru mono ( lu one P rac tises humanity. — Tedzukdra kuwa wo torite ( totte ) ko-gai wo si -tamavu , = with her own hands (the princess) plucks the mulberry leaf, and practises the nourishment of children (the breeding of silkworms). 2. [. .ni su.] The definition of the state or of the quality, in which one is engaged or is (intransitive), or in which one causes a thing to be, what one makes of a thing (transitive), provided it be a noun, is put in the Local in ni, the form . . ni-s)i , it, uru , sometimes mutating to . . n-s)i , whence ..nz)i ( % x ) proceeds 6 ). From the Gerund nisite the form nite arises, by syncope. *) Franco- Jap. Treaty. Art. XVIII. al. 1. s ) Ibid. VIII. 1. 3 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 39. Ibid. p. 41. 5 ) Tscfiung-yung . XI. ®) The z in nzi — I have observed it myself, — is so softly pronounced, that one thinks he hears nyi instead of nzi, therefore even Rodriguez in Elem. § 29 has adopted the written -form ii. 286 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103 . Examples : a. Si , with an intransitive signification. — I-nakara ni site (or nite) itasi tsu I 'earn , the leaf, being in the sixth year, dries up. — Zai-wi ku-nen nisite (or nite) Ten-wan fou-zu , = being in the ninth year of his reign , the Emperor dies. — Norni yotsu kado nisite , sue toy am , the fruit is quadrangular, and pointed at the top. — Kono simava mi jitotsu n i s i t e omo yotsu ari , omo yotoni na ari , this island (Sikok, or the four countries) is one and has four faces; these have each a name. — Tatsi-tokoro ni site mdtsi tsu besi , W al rfij # ifc , standing on the point of departure he must wait. — - Saki . the point. Sakinzum tokinva (= sakini suru tokiniva) fitdwo sei-su , when one is at the point (is the chief), one leads the others ( % fVJ Still A ). — A. Fito fakoni nan gin irini si-ma- stika? ') , how many pounds shall I put in a chest V Fyak-kin irini nasdre , put a hundred pounds in. — Roono katawa doo si-masuka ? the shape of the wax — how is it? — Atsukavini sureba, musi , tsiisdku site , rnayumo tsiisakiwo tsu- kuru J ), by overfeeding, the (silk)worm will remain small and also make small cocoons. — Stkava mUmano yotoku ni site seo ( S) navi , the stag is much like a horse and is smaller. — Yama-inuva iroki ni site, fou siroku, wo nayasi 3 ), the wild dog, being yellow of color, has white cheeks and a long tail. b. Si, with a transitive signification. — Makoto, truth. So no kokoro base wo rnakoto nisu, he makes his meaning truth. — T6ku wo akirdkani su, he lets virtue shine. — Motowo hokdni site, site wo iltsi-ni sureba, t ami wo arasovdsimete, ubdvu koto ico hodokdsu '*), if one excludes the root (virtue) and includes the top (fortune), one teaches the people strife , and rapacity. — Futokdro , bosom , heart. Kore wo futokdro ni si-tsubesi, one ought to take this to heart. — Omote, face, front side. Nisiva yavaioo omote ni su, on the west one has a river in front. — Tail'd ka, level, smooth. Ten-ha -wo tairakani surU koto m sono kuniwo osdmuruni ari 5 ) < T- its ft m ) , the making the whole empire peaceful and happy depends on the government of his state. — Meateni sum, to set for aim. - Te-honni sum, set for example. — Uai-setsu ( ^ tyj ) ni sum, to consider im- ‘) Shopping - Dialog ties , p. 11. 3 ) The inversion: maguino tsiisaki instead of tsiisaki magutno serves to bring out /stisaki ( mall) with one may do it while sitting. — Fa, roku-sai ni site emphasis. 3 ) Knsira-gaki. XII. B r. q Dai Oaku. X. 8. s ) Ibid., X. 1. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103 . 287 portant. — Atataka ni sum, to warm. — Komakani sum, to make fine. — Tsu- mabirakani sum, to make clear. — Karo, light (of weight); Karonzi, to con- sider lightly, despise. — Omo , heavy, weighty; Omonzi , to consider weighty. To be distinguished from Karokusi, Omokusi, to make light, to make weighty. Sora, empty; Soranzi, to learn by heart. — Ama, mead, sugar juice; Amani su , or amanzu , to think sweet. — Fakoica soyeni site kuclasare '), please to give the chest into the bargain. — Oki-tokei tco fitdtsU soyeni si-masoo i ), I will give a time- piece into the bargain. 3. [. . kusu, ..usu.] If the definition of quality is an adjective in ki (§ 9), e. g. Xagaki, long, its adverbial form in ku (or merely u) is used to unite with s)i, u , uru, and the so formed compound (Xagaku-si) , as long as there is no object direct , expresses the mere carrying out of the idea of the adverb , and , as it appears from the examples quoted, is equivalent to the predicative closing- form Xagasi, - is long; if however an object direct is involved, then the verb s)i, u has its transitive signification (the causative form se-su = se-simu seems to lurk behind it). In the example quoted at page 269: Tsuriwo ydkii-su, he handles the angle well, yoku is a modal definition of the transitively used s)i , u, to do, handle. a. With an intransitive signification . .ku s)i, u, uru appear in propositions as: Wo nagaku site tooku tobu koto atavdzu 3 * ) , he (a certain bird) has a long tail and cannot fly far. — I)ava ... kubi nagaku site, dsi takasi, the camel has a long neck and high legs. — Sonoke un-kau ( f ni site, kitsuneno ke yorimo atataka nari; ndtsuva suzusi '•), his hair is warm and close, and warmer even than the hair of the fox; in summer it is cool. — [Tsikdki, near.] A., v a B.. ve tsikdkusite C . . to koto-nari , A., comes near B.. and differs from C.. — [Usuki, thin. Karoki , light.] A Kutsibiru usuva-site , kotoba kardu-su, if the lips are thin (if the tong is smooth), the word weighs light, — \Araki, rough, wild; Arakitsu, act wildly, behave wildly.] Ten-wau umdre-tsuki araku-site Jitowo korosu kotoieo kondmU, the emperor, fierce by nature , was fond of killing men. — [ Gotoki , like.] Kaku no gotoku sureba , when people are acting in this way. — [ Yasuki , easy.] Nokorazu 0 kai nasdru nard , yasttku-site age-masoo 5 ) , if you buy the whole ') Shopping-Dialogues , p. 12. 3 ) Kasira-gafci. XIII. 11. r. 5 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 36. 2 ) Ibid. p. 39. 4 ) Ibid. XII. 9. r. 288 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. stock, I will let you have it cheap. — [Naki, not existing. Nakusu (A T^X o fV~A pron. naosu ) , 1. to be wanting, to fail, 2. to think paltry (of no value).] 1. Yakusu koto naku site , Kami no tdsuke ari , medical treatment failing there is God’s help. 2. [\Fitdwo nandomo nausu, he considers others as of no value. b. With a transitive signification ..ka s)i, u, uru is found in propositions as: [ Takaki , high.] Me-atewo takaku suru , = to exalt one’s aim, not to give up one’s intention. — [Fikiki , low, humble.] Me wo jikikusite utsubukite miru, to cast the eyes dowards and look below. — [ Taddsiki , right, upright.] Sono mi wo osa- mento lidssuru mono va madzu sono kokdro wo tadasiu-su Sono kokoro wo tadasiu- sento hossuru monova mddzu sono kokorobase ivo makdtoni su ') , who ever will govern himself, first makes his heart right. He who will make his heart right, first aims at truth. — [ Matt aid , whole ; mattaku- ( mattau , mattou , A mattoo) su, to make whole, to perfect.] Zinwo suru to va sono kokdro no tdkUwo mattou suru yuen nari ( ), the practice of humanity is the means to perfect the heart. — [ Told , quick, ready.] Koreivo tokusu , he does it quickly. — [AtsUki, hot.] Atsuku or Atsuu suru , to make hot. — [Sirnt- siki, cool.] To wo firaki suzusiku su besi, you may open the door and let in the coolness. — [Fitdsiki ,. = one-ish , of one sort.] Koku ka wo fitdsiu su , he makes the country and people conforming to one mode. — [ Ondziki , identical.] Tomoni tsiu-kdkuwo ondziu sdzu , not having the middle kingdom in common. Tsiriwo onaziku senu , not having the dust in common, not staying at the same place with anyone. — \Fukdki , deep; Katdki, hard, fast.] Ne wo fukau si , fozo wo ka- tdku suru kUsd nari , = it is a plant, that shoots its roots deep, and makes its stalk hard. 4. [to su.] The appositive definition, what a thing is made, whether in fact or in imagination merely, is characterized by the particle to, = to, (see page 70. V). If an object direct is mentioned in the proposition, the apposition has reference to the object and si has the transitive signification of make (to), take for, consider as; on the other hand if no direct object is mentioned in the proposition, the apposition has reference to the subject, and si has the in- transitive signification of: to be actually. a. Appositions referring to the subject we have in sentences, like: ') Dai Gaku , IV, 4. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. 280 Fito to site kau nakivd (or naki mono va) tsikii-sauni kotondrazu , he who is a human being and is destitute of filial love, does not differ from the brute; or: he who as a human being is devoid of etc. — Avadsi no simavd ena to site umi maseru nan , the island of Avadsi arose (at the creation of the Japanese archipelago) as an afterbirth. — Fosi otsuru to ivuva fosini arazu. Fito no me ni fosi to suru nomi , concerning the assertion, that stars fall, they are not stars. Only for the eyes of men do they appear as stars. b. Appositions referring to the object we have in sentences as: Onoreni sikazdru monowd tomotd suru koto nakdtre , it may not be that (you) make any one, who is not as your self (who is your inferior), (to) your fellow. — Kono fau wo dai-itsito subesi, this rule must be considered as the first (the prin- cipal). — Fan to su ( ^ £^7 ,. ), make (to) a rule, consider as a rule. - Te-fonni su; meateni su. Remark. 1. The object that is taken for anything, is found as object still governed by a separate active verb, which most frequently gives the way in which it is made. — Ten wan ... jimewo tatete kisagi to si-tamavu , the emperor appoints Lady ... and makes her (to) consort. = the emperor takes Lady ... for consort. Remark. 2. Much used is the formula : A. . wo motte B. . to su , he makes A. . to B. ., considers A., as B.., has A., to B. — Waukiwo motte tsitsitosi , Bu- wau wo motte ko to su ■), he has Wangki for father and Wuwang for son. — Kuniva riwo motte. ri to sezU; gi wo motte ri to su 2 ), a government does not make advantage pass as advantage; it considers justice as advantage. Or: a go- vernment does not find its advantage in advantage; it finds its advantage in justice. — Rito suruni giwo mottesu 3 ), to use justice as being advantageous. — Remark. 3. By the omission of site, instead of ..to site , we meet with to alone. — Yuru guru , loitering , hesitating , by degrees. — Yuru guru agumi , to go step x m to judge of a foreign minister people take as stand him - ? y V ~tl jr whom he makes his host (him in whose house he stays). ^ | Ipj}^ Yen-sin wo miru ni va , sono sigu to suru tokoroico mottesu *), ') Tscliung-yung. XVIII. 4 ) Meng-tsze , Lib. II, Cap. III. $ 45. *) Dai Gaku. X. 22. 3 ) Ibid. IV. 5. 290 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO. § 103. for step (slowly). — Yuruyuru to suru, slowly, by degrees to do. — Yuru yuru to site (or Yum yuru to) fappoo ( /\ ) ve Jirogu , it spreads gradually in all directions. 5. If the appositive definition, what any thing is made (to), and that in imagination, is a verb with or without complement, it is put in the closing- form followed by to s)i, u, uru etc. Kakuru koto nasi , there is no want. — Kakuru koto i- ■‘W ^ ’ nasi to su , people think , that nothing is wanting. — A Kore yori Ut wa nai , there is nothing that surpasses that. Kore yori ubwa nai to su, people consider, that nothing surpasses it. — Itari , come to . . Itareri , is come to . . Ware itareri to su, I think to have come to the extreme, to have reached the topmost. — Faru-aki va kagewo tattomi , fuyuva jinatawo yositosu, in the warm season (spring — autumn) the shadow is prized; in winter the sunshine is thought the best. — Tada fkureni kari-sumwo yosi to sum nari, people think it for the best, to hunt only in the evening. 6. [en-, in-, an-to su.] The definition expressed by a verb with or without complement, to what purpose a person is occupied, is put in the Future followed by to s)i, u, uru; whence the forms: ..en to su, ..in to su, ..an to su (A eo-, iu-, oo to su) , = he is busy about.., he is about to.., he tries to..; Lat. in eo est ut, id agit ut. These forms are equivalent to the Lat. verbum rnedi- tativum ( moriturio ), and, as it, express an effort towards something. Kassenni yukdnto su, he is about to go to battle. — Yebisu domo noni Jiwo fandtte mikoto ivo yaki-koros&n to suru toki , mikotono faki-tamaveru fou ken midsu- lcara nukete , moye-kitaru kusawo nagi-faravu, when the savages setting the field on fire tried to burn the prince, the sword which the prince had girded on, unsheathed itself and mowed the burning grass away. 7. |’. .to site, = ..to te.J Instead of the gerund to site the syncopated to te is often met with. Examples: Kono aidani, Hayatomo sedo to ') te, sivo haydsi, being between them (between the two banks) the isthmus of Hayatomo , the stream is rapid. — Kono kokd Koorai- taka, Yezo-taka, Riu-kiu-taka to te, kuni-gunini ari, moreover there are, since ') In our opinion, to estimate to, rightly as it is here used, what has been said at page 70, V', respecting Fitolova, must he observed. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB SI, § 103. BEST, § 104. 291 the falcon of Corea, that of Yezo, that of Lin-kiu are met with, (falcons) in every country. — Kono sekiwo Fotokeni nitari to te, Buts-zau-siki to mo ivti , people call that rock , because they think that it resembles a Buddha , the Buddha-image- rock. — Ini wo tsumide ( A tsunde ) , siro to site . . . tatakavu , he heaps up rice- balls to a fort and fights. — Yase-ki ivo niwaka ni sei-teu- ( ^ £ ) se-simen to te koyasi wo tsityoku-su bekarazti , to make meagre trunks of trees grow , they may not be too strongly manured. — At t I-. = m Go koku no wau va Nippon wo semen to te su-man no nin ziyu wo watdsu , the king of the country U , intending to make war on Japan, sends a force of many tens I 7 of thousands thither. § 104. BesI, may, can, shall; Beki, adjective, Bikti , adverb possibly, expressed in Chinese by pf o jg* o Jfg . ^ 0 ^ . Sf . I. Derivation and signification. Be (^s:), after the old form of writing A-^i, mtibi (pronounced as mbe), also tibe and ^ S , time (pronounced as mme), is in Japanese dictionaries, called a word of assent ') and made equal to the Chinese ? 2 ). If, although this definition of the idea is practically sufficient, an investiga- tion of the origin of Be , is still required, it must be sought in the exclamation to, which, as our hem , implies that a person understands something, and in he, = our yes. The original form, m-he, according to the rule of euphony passes, in pronunciation, into mbe, expressed in writing by -<■, for which we write be, whereas in the month of a Yedo gentleman it sounds clearly as mbe. The old form a , Mtibe, occurs as a substantive with the signification of consent still, in expressions as Mtibe nari ( ^ r '))’ ^ i s granted, = one has the liberty to do, one may do; Mtibe narazti , it is not allowed, it may not be; whereas (be) , occurs as a substantive in the every day expression Su-be nari, it is possible, Su-be nasi, it is impossible. ') 7 7 A -i I- ij 'r , i. e.: Formerly the Chinese word (= consent) was trans- lated with V be or Time. „ suitable, proper, fit, becoming; ought, should.” Medhurst , Chinese and English Dictionary. 292 CHAPTER VH. THE VERB BEST, MAT. § 104. The forms derived from the root Be: the predicative best , the attributive adjective, Mki , and the adverb, belcu , thus include the idea of may, and of can, i. e. no external cause preventing the doing of a thing. A command to do something is not included in it, and we do injustice to the politeness of the Japanese, if we give to this word the signification of our ,,-one must, you must, you shall.” The idea of consent on the one side does not include that of obligation on the other (must), and can. at its strongest, only contain an inducement. II. Be belongs to the root-words treated in § 9. I. B., of which the so called adjectives in ki are derived. In accordance with the rule given there, Besi and Beki in the old-Japanese and in the popular language are superseded by the syncopated form Bei ( 1*J* ^ ) and the adverb Belcu by Beo ( Jj| ^ "' £ 7 ) , and that particularly in the countries east of the Hakone-pass, whereas in Sinauo Mei (*r j) is said, instead of Bei '). With regard to the inflectional forms , they cannot be better elucidated than by a systematic synopsis. The writer confines himself to those forms , which have actually come under his notice, and with regard to such as, according to the rule, may yet exist, he refers the reader to the Synopsis of the Inflectional forms of Nasi, § 106. INFLECTIONAL FORMS OF BESI, MAY, CAN. Aorist. Contin. present. Preterit. Root-form . . . Be, can. Bekti-si, may. Bekari , arisen from Belieri , arisen from Closing-form. . Best, A Bei, Mei, Beku-su. Beku -+- ari , is being able. Bekari, Benari. Beku + eri, has been able. Bekesi. Snbst. and At- it. can. Beki , A Bei , Mei , Bekusuru. Bekaru. Bekerh. tributive. Subst., isolated Gerund Local as, when, there possible. Beki va. BekH-sIte , contr. Bete. Bekaru va. Bekare ba. Bekere ba, when he could. *) tVa-gun Siwori , under Mei. Vol. 17. p. 1. recto. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB BESI, MAY. § 104 . 293 Aorist. Contiu. Pres. Preterit. Concessive. . . Bekaredomo. Bekeredomo. although . Adverbial .... Bekaraku. FUTURE. Bekar)an , A bo , Beken , it shall ha- oo. Bera ( S)' * §’). Bera nari, it shall be ve been possible. Conditional . . Beku ni. possible ( n] ). Bekaraba, if it be if possible. NEGATIVE. Be-nasi , old- Jap. Bekara)zu, A nu. NB. Page 292 line 9 may not. from the bottom for Sube-nasi , = it is Su-bekarazu , it is Beken read Bekeri ; not to be done. not possible. U-bekarazu, it is not to be obtained. line 7 for Bekeru read Bekesi , Be- keru. III. ON THE GOVERNMENT OF Besi. The verb, which, preceding Besi , expresses what one may, can, shall or will (do) is put, either in its root, or its attributive form. In nondeflecting verbs both forms are used, in deflecting verbs in i, only the attributive form in u or, instead of it, in the root, in i with nu or tsu as termination. Examples with nondeflecting verbs : Ake-besi, one can, may open. — Mi-besi, one can, may see. — Fiyori yokiwo mite , tane ico age- besi. Savo-nadoni tsuri, fkage-nite kavakasu-hesi , if you see, that the weather is fair, you may take out the seed (of the silkworms that have been put in water). Suspend it on sticks and dry it in the sun. — • A Wakerare, be divided; Wakerdruru-beki, divisible. — A Mi-u-akerare , to be distinguished at sight; Mi-wakeraruru-besi , it is to be distinguished at sight. — A Aravare, to be visible; Aravaruru-beki koto , visibility. — E, Ete (or Ye, Yete) U , UrU (get) becomes U-beki instead of Urbeki; ^ -n: ^ 4: E Ubcki mono , something one can get, something obtainable. — Sesime , have it done; Sesimu-besi instead of Sesi- 20 294 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB BEST, MAY. § 104. r ^ -- -m is 0 it % m y Ik & mur'besi , one can have done. — Tastike , help, save; Tasuku-besi instead of Tasu- kur'besi. — In a legend S’akya speaks to the falcon: Nandzi kono fatowo tastiku- bisi , spare this dove. — The falcon answers: Ware kono fatowo tdsukibd , ware unite si-su-besi , if I spare the dove, I shall die of hunger. Examples with nondeflecting verbs : Nari , to be. Kono sima kanarazu Okino-sima naru-besi , this island will undoubtedly be that of Oki. — Si, to do. Su- beki ), feasible. Su-beki koto ari , there is a possibility of doing (this). — Onna kono tewaza wo su-besi, women ought to do such work. — Korewa onna no su-beki tewaza nari , that is a work which women can or ought to do. Su-beki (being able, or about to do) is here conceived in an active sense, whereas the genitive onna no precedes as attributive definition. — Tomo ni ivu-besi ( ^J* Jfii. ) 5 people may speak with one ano- ther. — Nivakdni fusegu-beki ygumo nakereba , Kavatsiye nige-yuku , as in the hurry it was impossible to offer resistance, they fled to Kavatsi. — Koreva nasazdru bisi , with regard to this , it may remain undone. — Kore va nasaru bekarazu , with regard to this, one may not do it. The former allows, that something may not happen, the latter forbids that it happen. — Tsumabirakani su-bekardzu c* pT») , I cannot make it clear. The terminations nu and tsu occur in deflecting verbs, e. g. Ari, to be; Ari- nu-bisi, it may or can be. — Tri-nu bisi ( TH TV)’ one ma .Y g° in. — Itdri- nu-bisi ( a ), one may or shall come to. — hi. ( Ii ), to be called; Ivi-tsu- bisi, it may or can be called. — Tana-kokdro ni megurasi-tsu-bisi , one can make it run round on the palm of the hand. 1 refer both terminations not to the closing-forms tsu and nu, treated in § 84 and 85, but to -j=| 5< nu (a variation of no) and tsu, which, as cha- racteristics of the attributive relation, are derived from the old language. See page 67. IV. 1. The ability to do any thing is expressed by Yokus)i, u, uru, to do good ; iti Ii. H. 15. Negative Yokuse)zu, /y Yokusenu. From the ex- pression: Uru kotoivo ydkusu, = I am able to get, it appears that the definition what one is able for, precedes as object in the Accusative. Also used adverbially Yoku expresses the ability to do anything, e. g. Oinon- bdkdtte sikdusite notsl yoku u, by reflection is one able consequently to attain (his object). fj| . Dai Galen. I. 2. CHAPTER VII. THE VERBS ATAVAZI, AHETE. § 104. 295 ^ fife 3 ' j - r ^ il< ^ xl z ^ n ~ zln ytiku hit 6 wo ai-si , ydku Into wo nikumU koto r» r . wo sit the humane man alone is able to love others, fig a iftsgf if A -r y ^ w ^ ^ *" to hate others. — Sei-zin to iMomo, mata yoku -sezaru to- kdvo ari 2 ), even if he were a saint, there would still be something that he could not do. 2. The inability to do a thing is expressed by Atavkz)i, u (^^ v - = Lat. non valet , = Urn koto atavdzu , = the acquisition is not brought about. Atdvi, of which Atavdzu is the negative form, is composed of Ate, = equivalent, and at’)/, u, = to fit, or, after the Wagun Siwori , from Atekavi ( '|g‘ = to take the place of a thing . as an exchange , and means , substantively used , the value ( j) °f a thing; thus, as a verb, to be of value, to be worth (Lat. valeve). The Japanese language considers the treatment, and not the person treating, as that which is not of value, or cannot be brought about. ^ tj{j t f|fe S > Wave yamu koto atavdzu 3 ), = that 1 (halting half-way) should rest , is not brought about , = I can not rest. — Ken too mite aguvu koto atavazu , agete sakmzUrit koto atavazdrii vd met nan. Fu-sen wo mite siri- zdkurii koto atavdzu , sirizdkete tdosdgUrti koto atavazarU va ayamdtsi navi 4 ) , to see an excellent man and not be able to raise him; to raise him and not be able to promote him, is fate. To see a good-for-nothing and not be able to remove him, to remove him and not be able to put him away, that is a mistake. — Korewo motsiite tsukusu koto atavazaru mono avan 5 ), = that this (principle) be V. To dare, is expressed by Ahete, Aete (l|£^), the gerund of Ahe or Av)e, u , uru , = to answer to... — Ahete atavazu ( h e dares not attempt it. — Ahete kotowavi-ivu , he dares judge of it. — Ahete koto- wavi-ivdnu , he dares not judge of it. — Tavazdvu tokovo aveba, ahete tsutomezunba avazu 8 ), = if there is any thing that does not suffice (if he comes short of), he (the man of character) does not dare not exert himself, — he dares not be ne- gligent. ’) Dai Gaht. X. 15. *) Dai Gaku. X. 16. 2 ) Tschung-yung . XII. 2. 5 ) Tschung-yung. 3 ) Ibid. XI. 2. «) Ibid. XIII. 4. 296 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB TASI, DESIROUS. § 105. Remark. The negative AMzu or Ahbiu (T'M ) , joined to the root of a pre- cedent verb, means the not accomplishing of an action; it is made equivalent to Fatasazu ( ^ ^ 7 not to accomplish. — Omoi-, lvi~, Tori -, Nagare-ahezu or aMnu , mean: not continue meaning, saying, taking, flowing. VI. That an action or a state is fitting, or is as it should be, is expressed by Too-sen tar)i, u ( "H* * ^ ,,), = it is as it should be. Joined to it are also the ideas, that one is obliged or even entitled to it. The definition what is fitting, precedes as substantive proposition, and is characterized by koto (af- fair). — Oita.ru wo uyamau koto too-sen tari , that age is respected, is as it Nippon sei-fu yori . . . fune-bune ni . . . yaku-nin nori- kumasuru koto toosen tarn besi 1 ) , it will be proper that on the part of the Japanese government custom-house officers be placed on the ships; or, after the official translation: the Japanese government shall have the right ... to place. § 105. The desiderative verbs. I. Desiderative verbs are formed by grafting on the root of the verb, the word expressive of quality Ta, = desirous. Belonging to the adjectives in ki (see page 109 n°. 69) , Ta (ideographically expressed by phonetically by ^ ) , has all the inflectional forms common to them , thus Taki , the sub- stantive and attributive form, = desirous; Tasi, predicate, = is desirous; Tdku , adv. — The spoken language, which according to § 9 II. suppresses the k and the s, supersedes Taki and Tasi by Tai ( , for which ^ U is improperly written), and TakU by , Tgu , Too, for which inadepts also write ^ 7 . Mi-taki ( A Mi-tai ) , desirous to see; Mi-tdsi (A Mi-tdi), he desires to see; Mi-tdku (A Mi-tan, Mi-tao , Mi-too) , adv. — & — Mi- takuba , if he whishes to see. — Mi-taku (or Mi-too ) mo nai J ), he will not even see. From the adverbial form Taku, or Too, by means of the verb S)i, u , uru , to do (§ 103), is derived Tdku-si or Too-si, to desire; gerund TdkUsitt: or Too-siU , if * V lit B M m ^ I I A W 2 / 1 ') Regulations by which the Dutch trade iu Japan shall l>e carried on. Art II *) This is the „tomo nai, je lie veil* pas,” occurring in noon Elnn pag. 54 § 50 line 4 CHAPTEIi VII. THE VERB TASI , DESIROUS. § 105 . 207 in the spoken language passing by elision into Taku-ti or Too-te , - desiring; Takutetca or Tootewa , the gerund isolated by wa, = it one desires; Takutcmd or Tootcmo, though he wishes. The adv. Taku or Too is further used in compositions like Taku- or Too-yoza- ri-masu , is desiring: Taku- or Too-omou , or omoi-masii , - is desirous thinking, = desires; Taku-omoote ini, Taku-omoote ori-masti, roundabout polite form for: 1 desire; Tdkii-zon-zi-mdsH , l am desirous; Afairi-taku-zonzi-mdsit , 1 will go. 11. Continuative forms, 1) If according to 5; 10. to the adv. Taku or Too we join the verb An, to exist, we obtain the continuative form Taku dri or Too -+- dri , which in pro- nunciation, and in writing also, passes over to Takari, 'A'j? - continually to be desirous. Inflection, the same as of Ari (§ 90). Pi •es. Mi-takU ari, Mi-too ari, ATitakar)i, u, is desiring to see. Gerund Ali-daku-ar'ite, AYi-taku-atte , Mi-too-dtte , Mi-takarite, A Mi-takatte. Concess. Mi-taku wa aredomo, also Mi-tai-keredovio , though he desires to see. Condit. Mi-taku-ba , Mi-takereba , Mi-tai-naraba , if he desires to see. Future Afi-takaroo, he may desire to see. Pret. ATi-tooatta , Mi-takattd, he was desiring to see. ATi-takatta keredomo , though he has desired to see. Fut. Perf. Mi-takattavoo , he may have desired to see. Derivative verbs of this stamp are: Kiki-taki , desirous to hear, fg] t )j< ?• Yuki-taki, desirous to go. Si-taki ( ^ |) , desirous to do , = ready. — Si-taku- (si-tau)-suru , to be ready. ltdsi-taki ( ^ ^ | ^ h ) . desirous to bring about. Manabi-taki, desirous to learn. Nomi-taki, desirous to drink. d Fede-taki , desirous to love, in love. Ure-taki , desirous to mourn, = sympa- thetic. Nemu-taki , desirous to sleep, sleepy. — A Nemu-tai , 1 will sleep. — Nemu- taku nasi (A Nemu-tau nai ), I am not sleepy. — Ware mata nemu-taku mo nai (vulgo nemu-tau mo nai), also 1 am not sleepy. — Nemu-tasa, sleepiness. — Wa-takiisi, = selfish; the 1. § 10b. The leaving off of an action is expressed I. by the deflecting transitive verb Mak)i, u. From Ake , to open, Mi , to see, Yuki , to go, are derived by means of ATaki: Ake-maki, Mi-maki, Yuka-maki , 298 CHAPTER Vn. THE VERBS MAKI, YAMI, SIMA VI. § 106 . to leave off opening, to leave off seeing, not to go farther. From the examples given it appears, that, just as in the forming of the continuative , factive and passive forms, the weak i of the deflecting verb undergoes a strengthening. Mak)i , u means to roll up; thence the substantive Mala, a roll, or Maki- mono, a thing that is rolled. A roll of writing, that has been used, is rolled up again. Thence, improperly: Sitawo maku , to roll up the tongue, i. e. cease speaking , grow speechless. — Ito naki koto wo makite zi wo utavu , he lays the stringless harp aside and sings a verse. Joined to a verb with the signification of ceasing to do what the verb ex- presses, Mak)i , u is expressed by = to refuse, to retire, thus ji* m. Mi-maki , to cease seeing. — Sira-maki , to have done with a thing. pH % _:*!§. Kika-makU fos'iki, desiring not to hear more of. — If BS®:- MdtsUri-koto wo kikamaku fossu , he wishes to hear no more of bu- siness. II. Yam)i, u ( J^^), to become quiet, to come to rest, Lat. quiescere; to leave off . . . — Kaiko kuvd ico kuvi-yamu , the silkworm leaves off - eating. — Ktivawo furi-yame, leave off strowing food on the floor (to feed the silkworm). — Yami , as we see, with the root of a precedent verb forms a compound verb. III. Simav)i, u, ASima)i, u, "J* -=j, phonetically expressed by in my opinion, a distortion of Sihuavi , to retire to rest, perch as bird, thence improperly to have done with a thing, to leave off. It belongs more espe- cially to the spoken language, and generally has the complement of the action one leaves off', in the gerund in te or de , sometimes also in the verbal root, before it. Si-gotou'o site simdi-masoo , I shall finish my work. — Watdkusi wa sono siyo- («o) motsti wo mohdya yomi-simqvUta ( A simoota) , I have read this book through- out. — Kareva kunde simoota , he has left off eating, = he has eaten. — Kunde simaute aroo, he will have eaten. — Waki-stmauta sake, fermented beer. - Tmada ivaki-simavdzu ni oru sake, beer that has not fermented. — Kunde simae; nonde simad, leave off eating and drinking. — Un-narqute simau, to sell out. - 0 ya-siydku 0 simai nasare mase, may your supper be ended! - take your supper at my house! the action being represented as finished. '). ') Compare what \. remusaT in Elem . de la Gramm. Chinoise $ 352 says concerning liao . CHAPTER VII. ADVERBIAL FORM OF THE VERB. § 107. 299 SImavks)i, u, eausat., to make leave off' ... — WatakUsi ni madzu iute-swia- vaseyo, let me first have done speaking. Simavar)e, u, uru, pass., to be finished. — Kaki-sirnavaretaru soo-kan , a written (finished) letter. § 107. The adverbial form of a verb, as characteristic of modal propositions, like: as one thinks, as one says , is ..k-siku, ..k-sikuvk, = ..k-ku, ..a-kuvk. Of the verbals derived by means of siki, = ..like, treated at large in $ 1(5, 2), page 121 , some by changing siki into siku assume an adverbial character. From Omuvi , to think, to mean, is obtained Omovdsikti , = probably, as one thinks or means. This is the axiom. As nevertheless the si of siku, is suppressed, for shortness, . . a-siku passes into ..d-ku; from Omovdsiku is formed Ornovdku and with addition of the isolating va, Omovaku vd , = as one means. The same is good of: Iv)i , u , to say , to be called ; Si ni ivaku ( ^ ^ £ ) , - as it is said in the odes, according to the odes. Nori-tamdv)i , or No-tamdv)i, u , to bid, enjoin, command; Si no nori-tamavaku \p), = according to the master’s sentence, as the master says. Negav)i , u, to wish; A Negawdkuba , sa-yoo yorosii, - as I wish, it is good so, = so it should be according to my wish. Maus)i , it, to say; MausdkU , as people say. — Fos)i , u, now F6ss)i, u, to^ desire; Fosaku as people desire, as people will. Iveri , has said ; Iverdku va , as people have said. Ivikeri , has said; Ivikerasi , it is as if people had said (compare § 18); Ivi- keraku (^-£ 7 )i as people have said. — Sen-zi ( jip V, g ^) ni ivike- rakdva, as it has been said in a proclamation by the Mikado. Osor)e , uru , old- Jap. also Osori , to fear; Osordkuva (^ r\), as it is to be feared , as I fear ; a polite way of expressing doubt. Nan , to be; Nardku (= Narasiku), = as it is, preceded by a verb in the substantive form, e. g. Kiku-nardku , as one learns. — Miru-naraku , as people see. — Ivu-naraku, as people say. — Utayavu-nardku , contracted Utaggvu-raku , probably. Nardku is declared to be a contraction of Nari (to lie) and Kalm (= Sikaku , adv. so, compare § 17) '), and, while it is said that Naraku must I# pf S verbs. III. 51 v. , Zio-go sin-soo or Explanation of the auxiliary 300 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB MERI. § 108. be expressed by or people write j|f]* jf£| o W ? i&f or ^ % M, \ etc - Remark. Tlie derivative form siki , elucidated in § 10, predicate sisi , contracted si, whicli in connection with ari (to be) passes into ara-siki and ra-siki (§ 18), is also joined to verbs to express doubt '). Consequently Keri (= has been, § 82) passes into Kerasi , it is as if it had been; Ki-ni-keri (= is come, § 84) into Ki-ni-kerasi , it is as it were come. — Aki va ki-ni-keri 2 ) , the autumn is come. — Fdru sugite 11 ndtsu ki-ni-kerasi 3 ), the spring is passing away and it seems as if the summer were (already) coming. § 108. ...meri, = it is as if, it seems, an old-Japanese derivative form, which, a§ it is said, resembles Nari (- is) but expresses some doubt 4 ). It follows the indicative closing-form of a verb. Yebisti no kami no koto yo ni samazama ni ivu-meri 5 ) , with respect to the history of the God Yebis’ , people speak about it in the world, as it seems, in diffe- rent ways. Tsigiri okisi 11 sasemo ga tsuyuioo! 11 inotsi nite Avare! kotosino 11 aki mo inu-meri G ). Oh dew of the sprig, that is planted with promises! In my life, Alas! the •autumn of this year, as it seems, passes away (without seeing the promise made to me performed). — Inu , from In)i , u , uru , to go away (§ 84), not a nega- tive form of /, to be. As belonging to this category are cited: 7 ) Ah'nu-meri ( m A ), it seems to become day. Nagaru-meri ( & ) , Fatmu-meri A ) , it is as if it Hows away , as if it perishes. This form is to be distinguished from Tstibom-iri, Nasiismi-eri, being the pret. pres, of Tsubomi, to laid, and Nasdswie , to order to be made (see i; 80), as also from ..narneri or ..nanmcri, shall have been, Future Perfect, of Ni, to be (see § 100. 1.). ') Siikosi utagavu hotoba nari. Wot/ tin Siwori, under Hast. ■) lliyaku-nin , N°. 47. 3 ) Ibid. N°. 2. ’) ■f (I |> — gr A/* A 'A LI J • Y |< 4 9 . Wayun Siwori , under Meri. 3 ) Nimaze. II. 10 recto. ’’) lliyaku-nin, N". 75. ') Wa-gun Siwori CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NASI, NOT TO BE. $ 109. 301 § 109. Nasi, Naki, Niiku, in the ordinary manner of speaking and writing, by the suppression of the .s and k (see £ 9, II. page 112), Nai, Nai, Nau pronounced as Nao, whence the written form Noo, No and No), means not to exist not to be present, to be not at hand, in opposition to Ar)i, a ( , § 90) , = to exist. A general sketch in § 20, when treating of the derivative adjectives in naki , has already made us acquainted with this word. Here it requires to be elucidated in further particulars, concerning which all the dictionaries generally leave the student in the lurch. 1. The root Na, of which the sound n is the negative element (compare §91, I), occurs 1. as prefix, like our un, in compounds as: Na-yami , = unrest; Na-koto, nothingness; Na-uri (T#), Na-i (td), = un-seat, i. e. earthquake; Na-mi , the un-real, the nothing; whence Aru-fito wo nami-su , - Nai ga sironi su ( Jq ) , to esteem any one as nothing. 2. as the forbidding not, followed by an imperative, that closes with so. — Na-motome so , seek not ! — Na-si so , also Na-si zo ( ^/J ^ ) , do not ! — Na- ivi so , say not! — Na-nakare so , = Na-nakasso '), let it not be wanting! = it must be there. 3. In the spoken Jangnage na suffixed to the substantive form of an affirma- tive verb is the forbidding not, Lat. ne. Ageru na , raise not ! Kiku na ( ^ ^ ^ *") , hear not ! Mini na , see not ! lu na (-f say not! Aru na , be not ! Sura na , do not ! Ageraruruna , let it not be raised! Yomaruruna , let it not be read! This imperative is strengthened by the subsequent go. — Miru-nayo , you shall not see. — Wasururu-nayo , you shall not forget. 4. Na suffixed to the substantive form of a verb , occurs as characteristic of a negative question. — Man gin de wa hydku nitsi kakari masun a? for (the delivery) of ten thousand pounds are not a hundred days needful? — Rinimo iro-iro ari- masu soo na? there are also different sorts of miles, — is it not so? Shopping- Dialogues p. 31. ') Compare rodr. 56, line 12. 302 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NASI, NOT TO BE. § 109. II. Nasi, ANai, predicate: there is not. 1. Ato nasi , there is no trace. — Kizu nasi, there is no hindrance. — Urami nasi, there is no disgust. — I nasi , there is no meaning. — Yeki nasi, there is no advantage in it. — A Zeniga ') aruka? naika ? are there cents or are there not? = Is there money, or not? — En-rio nasini lianasu koto, to speak without forethought, not to care about what one says. 2. To bring it out with emphasis, the subject of Nasi is isolated, either by va, A wa, or by mo, = also, even. — A Fu-sokuwa nai, there is no want. — A Fit 6 koto mo nai , = there is not even a single affair, = there is absolutely nothing on hand. 3. [..koto nasi.] If the subject, the existence of which is denied by Nasi, is a substantive proposition, it is characterized by koto, affair. — Fit or i koreivo nasu-koto nasi ( iff ^ ) , = that a person does this alone , does not exist , no one accomplishes it alone. — Takava kureni sorete, mioo-tsoo ( BJj 4 5) ta ~ dzune yobu tokiva, f ltd wo mite, osore tonde tsikddzukU koto nasi, if the falcon has flown away in the evening, and one seeks and calls him the next morning, he becomes shy at the sight of people, flies around, and it does not happen (nasi), that he approaches. TsikddzukU koto nasi may for rounding off the period, stand for Tsikadzukdnu , not approach. — Sari todomaru koto nasi ( A • • koto ga nai) , /j: } he goes not , he stays not. — Sikareba kaiko va suzustki ni masi- ( ^ C ) taru h° to va ?msi 1 = that however the silkworm has grown in cool weather , this does not exist. — A Ndn no koto mo nai ) , there is absolutely nothing at hand. — A Ndn no ii-bun m6 nai , there is nothing to say. [..mono nasi.] A Koreivo yoku-suru mono mo nai, a person who can (do) such, there is not. — A Tanosimi-suru mono ga nai , there is no one people may trust. - A Me ni atdru mono ga nai , there is nothing that comes under notice. — Ohosiku za-sen ( ^ ^ ) to miyuru mono nasi, chiefly those (coins) are wanting which (mono) seem to be counters or model coins. [. . tokoro nasi.] Ki-suru tokoro nasi ( ^ ) , there is no support. A Nokdru tokdrowa nai, there is no more room, = every place is taken. — A Fito ni waruu yuwaruru (= ivdruru) tokoro wd nai, there is nothing, about which ill is spoken by others. ’) For ga, sec page 64. CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NASI, NOT TO BE. § 109. 303 4. If the definition that this or that is wanting, is predicate to a precedent subject, it is, for the sake of clearness, willingly isolated by va, Awa, thus separated from the predicate. — Iwaugasima f'ito nasi , the „ brimstone island” is without people, has no inhabitants. — Kono yumivd tsikdra ndsi , this bow is without strength, is powerless. 5. The appositive definition, what a thing is not, is put in the Local, cha- racterized by one of the terminations ni, do, ni wa or do wa. — /S Ri fat ni wa mu, it is not sagacity, it is stupid. — A Sono yau ni nai, it is not so. — A -.no yau ni nai, it is not so as... — A Kore fodo ni nai, it is not so much. — A Waga mama ni wa nai , it is not capricious. — A N a- koto do wa nai, it is no nothingness, it is even of importance. — A Waga koto denai, it is not my business; it does not concern me; I have nothing to do with it. — A Waga-tomo de nai, it is not we. — A Sorewa sayau de wa nai ka? is it not so? — A Sau (or Sou) dewa nai, it is not so. ( U „ x \ 7 ? )• — A Doko de mo sou de nai to ivu koto tea nai , it is nowhere said , that it is not so , literally: it does not occur anywhere that people say that it is not so. — A Kau de wa nai , it is not so. — A Sou sita koto de wa nai , it is not a busi- ness of that nature. — A Minu de wa nai ( ^ ) , one may not overlook ; one may indeed look to. — A Iwanu de wa nai ( ^ ^ ? one must speak about it. 6. [. .kunai.] The definition denied by Is Nai, in the easy manner of writing , also precedes as an adverb. — A Kono syok-mots ’ umaku nai , that meat is not tasty. — Umaku nai syok-mots, distasteful meat. Remark. The predicate Nasi is in compound words used as an attributive also', e. g. Na-nasi-yubi , the nameless (the fourth) finger, i. e. the finger, whose pre- dicate definition: na-nasi is at the same time its adhering attribute. III. Naki, A Nai (Tfii vulg. -jr L also), = ..less, the adjective form. 1. Used as a noun substantive, it means: nothing, and answers to Naki- mono and Naki-koto, i. e. a thing or a matter that does not exist. — Naki ni suru, to consider as nothing, to cipher away. — Fit 6 ivo naiga (vulg. -fit;#') sironi suru ( ) , to consider others of no value. — Kore wo nasumo yuve- nakini ardzu, = also that people make this, is not a „cause-lessness,” i. e. it is not without reason that this is done. 2. The attributive Naki, A Nai, = paltry, in the original signification of not existing. — Naki-fito, a person not existing, not present, i. e. a de- 304 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB NASI (NAKI, NAKU). § 109. funct. — Naki-mono , vulgo Nai-mono , a thing not existing, a nothing. — Aru fito no naki-koto wo kiku , to hear of' one’s not being (his being dead). — Naki-ato (tato , a trace effaced. 3. As attributive adjective (= without, Lat. absque , sine) Naki , A Nai has the definition, what there is not, as a genitive before it, either with or without the genitive termination no or ga. A Tsuiye-naki koto atavazu , continuance is impossible , = an end must come. - Tsikdra-naki yumi , a powerless bow, a bow without strength. — Tsikara-naki koto , power-less-ness. — Ato-naki nari , it is a thing without trace = it has dis- appeared , = Ato nasi , there is no trace of it. — Kiwamari no naki koto nari . it is a matter without limitation. — Kiwamari no aru koto nari , it is a matter that has limitation. — A Mi no oki-dokoro no nai mono , a person without a place in which he can settle, a wretch. — A Tsigaino nai yauniwa naranu , it is not of that nature that there should be no difference. — A Fei-sei no kokoro- gake ga nai, without a life’s exertion or care. — A Tanomini sura mono ga nai, without anything or anybody in which one has support. — A Kokdroni mono g a nai , having no evil in the heart, = Urami naki , without disfavor. Remark. To Rokuwo so-sinni tamavu , (the king Zin-mu) grants in- comes to his servants. As an auxiliary verb grafted on the root of another verb , it characterizes the action as proceeding from a higher person, whether divine or princely. It is expressed by anc l phonetically by p o , answers somewhat to the „ please” or „have the goodness” used by courtesy, German gerulien , is however, at least in tales, rightly left out by the translator. Examples: Tedzukara kiiva wo torite ko-gavi wo si-tamavu , (the princess) plucks mulberry leaves with her own hand , and feeds silkworms. — Sono notsi Tau yon taka wo ken-ze sikaba, Mi-kariwo moyovasare , sio-teoivo torasime-tamavu , when afterwards falcons had been brought as presents from China, (the Japanese prince) caused hawking to come more into fashion, and had all birds caught. Mayov)i , u, to come into fashion. Tor)i , u , to take. — N. . tatsimatsi mUndsiku nd.ru , N. . dies suddenly. — Tku-fodomo ndkit kano fimi mUndsiku nardse-tamavu , immediately after, that lady (a princess) dies. l ) Nippon- /a. s ) Nippon woo -dm itsi- ran. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 113. 315 O Kun-tsia nite mi mi icadzuravasiknsite fodo-ndkii fou-kiyo si-tamavu *), (the prince), while he is with the army, is taken unwell and dies shortly after. Old writers have Tab)i , it, = to give, instead of Tamavi also; thence: Osame-tabisi toki , = when N. . go- verned *). — For further examples see page 230 line 11 from the bottom. — p. 230 1. 8 from the top. — p. 274 1. 20. — p. 290 1. 9 from the bottom. II. Tamav&r)i, u, ATamauri, Tamor)i, u, the continuative form of Tamavi , which however supplies the place of the passive form Tamavare , = to be granted, not in use (compare Nari as substitute for Nare , § 100. Ill), and, like Tamavi , also as an auxiliary, is joined to the root, or to the gerund of a verb. Kore Ten no tamavdru nari , this is a present from Hea- ven. — Ko-zi-ki ni Izanagi no mikoto yori Amaterasu Olion kami ve mi kubi-tama wo tamavarisi koto too iveri , in the book of antiquity it is mentioned, that by (the god) Izanagi a necklace was presented to the goddess of the sun. — Kore wo mesite go i ni dziyo- ( ^ mm ) serare , ... no na ico tamavari, (the king) inviting him, raises him to the fifth rank and confers on him the name of . . — Nano -san-byaku-tan ico Hdku-sai kok-wau NN. ni tamavari ( ^ ) , ya zyu-man honwo ... ni tamavu , (the Jap. prince) gives three hundred pieces of silk to NN., king of Petsi, and presents (his minister) a hundred thousand arrows. TTke-tamavar)i , u . A Uke-tamori ( ^ ^ ) , to have the honor to receive (from a superior), or to hear. — Tsiydkuico uke-tamavari 3 ) ( ffij ) , to receive the king’s orders. — A Go i-ken ( j^p 3 ^ ^ £ ) wo uke-tamvatta or tamotta , I have had the honor to receive your advice. — A Saku-ya yuki ga furi-rnasita to uke-tamavari-masita , I have had the honor to hear, that it has snowed during the night. — Go sa-u ( ^) uke-tamavari-tdkU zonzi-masu , I wish to have the honor to hear, how you do. — Ka-roo ( fiinewo idasite ta- mavari-keri , we (skippers are speaking) enjoy the honor, that the secretary (of the governor) has our ships cleared. — A Midzu wo nomasete tamore , = have the goodness to let me drink fresh water. ') Nippon woo-dai itsi-ran , I, 10. 3 ) r, „ I, 16 . *) Wa-gnn Smori , under Tamavu. 316 CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 114. § 114. By MAtsur)i, u the speaker expresses the most profound respect for the object, be it a person or a thing, that he speaks of or to. As conti- nuative form of Mat si (# ^), - to wait (compare page 218), Matsuri (^'| o j») means continual waiting, solemn attendance, to show re- spectful homage. Thence Ten wo matsUri, Tsiwo matsuri , > , Sen wo md- tsuri , Kami wo matsuri , ,, people do homage to heaven, to earth, to ancestors, to Kamis,” by celebrating feasts to their honor, Matsuri being the feast itself. As qualifying auxiliary joined to the root of a verb, Matsuri unites with it the idea of reverential homage. One says : Futdri no kimi ni tsUkavuru ( A tsukoru ) koto atavazu , serving two masters is impracticable. — More respect is shown by the expression: Kimini tsUkavu (A tstiko) mdtsuru koto 1 ), to serve my prince with O V y respect. — Zo-tei ni tsUko-matsUru , to serve the Most High reve- L 1 -t? JjST v J 2 =' . # -v y >u rentially 2 ). When the excessively polite speaker says to his equals: 0 tomo tstikamatsuri-masoo , I will accompany you, or 0 itoma tsiikamatsuri-masU , I take leave of you, we may put down such politeness to his own account. The rule requires Tsilkai- or Tsitkae-mdtsUri , yet this , for ease in pronunciation , passes into Tsuko- ( f y ) or Tsukd-mdtsuri. Tate-mdtsuri , to offer respectfully and solemnly, from Tate , set up- right. Kono toki ama-bito fardkano uwo wo Ten-wau ni tate-matsuri si koto ari 3 * ) , it appears that, then, the divers solemnly presented a redbellied fish to the Em- peror. — I) era kuniyori lcavikowo kavu mono wo tate-matsuru ') , from the country of Deva persons, who breed silkworms, are solemnly presented (to the emperor). — Tsusimayori sirokanewo tate-mdtsuru s ), from the island of Tsusima silver is presented (to the emperor). — HakUsaino tate-matsureru te-fitd , artificers, whom Hakusai had presented (to the king of Japan). Tate-mdtsuri is joined to the root of a verb, as a qualifying auxiliary, to characterize the action as respectful, solemn. On na ) wo Yamato Take no Mikoto to mausi-tatematsuru ( besi 6 ), your name T must respectfully call Yamato Take no Mikoto (compare ') Tschvvy-yung XIII. 3 ) Yamato non dai. I. 21 v. s ) Ibid. II. 29 r. ») Ibid. XIX. *) Ibid. III. 4 r. ») Ibid. I. 22. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 115. 317 p. 228 line 8). — Ten-wquwo itmani tastlke-nose-tate-matsuri , Kavatsive nige-yuku '), they respectfully help the emperor to mount a horse and escape to Kavatsi. It is in earnest, not in irony, when the historian says: Makowano miko uka- gavi kitdrite Ten- icau too kordsi-tate-indtsitru ! ), prince Makowa, steals in and respectfully kills the emperor. Tate-matsurar)e, uru, the honorary passive, honoring, in the eye of the speaker, also him who respectfully offers or presents. If in the preceding example tate-matsitrarU were used, instead of tate-mdtsO.ru , the speaker would show his respect towards the murderer. The states and occupations to the qualification of which courtesy pays par- ticular attention , and the expressions of which , to be properly appreciated , must be understood also, are: 1. Being, existence; 2. Doing; 3. Seeing. Showing; 4. Saying; 5. Giving; 6. Going and Coming. — Explanation: § 115. BEING. 1. The spoken language, which leaves the use of Nari , to be, to the book- language, instead of it uses 1. Masi (§ 101); 2. Ari (§ 96), Ari-masi (§ 101); 3. Ori , Ori-masi (§ 97); 4. Gozari . Gozari-masi (p. 263 Hem.): 5. Soro (§ 102); 6. Fanberi and 7. Moosi. 6. Fanber)i, u, Famber)i, u, ^ ij 0 / ^ -n; )J , of old means wait upon <#. P& ) , stay or be somewhere ( 2E ) , it is expressed in the epistolary style by ^ (wait upon), and declared as equivalent to Samuravi , Sored (§ 102). A. B. sa-uni fanberite ( ^ ^ v ') 7 ) matsUri-kotowo tori-okonavu , (the ministers) A. and B. taking the places right and left (of the sovereign) , carry on the affairs of government. — Yumiva Zin-dai yori fanberi. the bow has existed from the time of the gods. Compare page 230 line 3 from the bottom. 7. Maus)i, u, A Moosi, f 7 ? | , 1. to show oneself respectful ; 2. ^3 , to mention. The way in which this word is used, requires the distinction of its two significations, although no attention is paid to it. by the Japanese, who use but one Chinese sign ( ^ ) for both. In the former signification, as definitive or as defined part of a compound verb also, it qualifies the action as submissive, respectful: Mausi-uke is to receive respectfully; Uke-mausi on receiving to show oneself submissive. The ') Nippon woo-dai itsi-ran. -)_Ibid. 318 CHAPTER Vn. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 115, 116. root Mau seems to be the same as occurs in Mau-k)i, uru ( ) , to come to court in solemn procession, Mesi-mquko- (not ka) simu ( ^ * ), to send for a person to court, and in Mairi, to make a solemn entry. Japanese philologers think that this Mausi, „ placed after the root of a verb, frequently passes into Mad" (§ 101) ')• Yamato Takeno Mikoto Ise Dai-zin- Guu yori fou-ken wo maud-ukete , Suruga no kuni made yuki-tamavu 2 ), prince Yamato Take receives respectfully from the temple of the Great Spirit at Ise the precious sword and departs to the country of Suruga. — A Kaki-tome-mausu bekiya ^ "prj* ^ ) , if I shall take a note of it? — Sa-yau naraba 0 wakare moosi- (= mad) masu , as it is so, I take respectful leave of you; the ordinary expression for our: Farewell! — Oriwo motte On tsikadztiki ni nari-mousi-taku-zon-zite , tada ima-made yen-in maud soro , wishing for an opportunity humbly to come in contact with you, I have only delayed it till now. — A 0 handsi-moud-soro hito wo mi-moud soro , I see the man of whom you speak. § 116. doing is expressed by 1. S)i, u, uru, to do (§ 103), Si-mas)i , u, to be doing (§ 101). 2. Itas)i, u, Itasi-m&s)i, u, to accomplish (p. 284 Rem.), more stately than Si. 3. Asobas)i, u, the causative form 3 ) of Asob)i, u pl & y» be amused {Saru yedani asobu, the ape is playing among the branches), and further the honorary passive Asobasar)e, uru ^j^), to take pleasure in any occupation, are used both for the qualification of what persons of rank do. See page 237 line 5. A Go ki-gen yoku asobasi-soro , His Honor’s disposition (cast of mind) is good. — Korewo obosimesi asobasi-soro , Your Honor means this. — Kono hooye On-ide aso- ^ |±j Y a b USarU soro ' ^terally : may your outgoing be to this n _. „ . side, for: please come to my house. — 0 noki asobasare! if'*’ F a u . f please to go back (or out of the way) ! Mt M *) MASU go-bini tsukete ivuva ohoku MAUSU no riyaku nnri. — Wa-gun Stic on , under Masu 5 ) Yamato nen dai. I. 22 v. 5 ) According to the Wa-gun Siioori , Asobasu is a contraction of ^ y, Asobi-masu. — „ Inisihe yori," so it adds, „ Ki-nin koto wo nasaruru wo kaku iveri," it is an old custom to designate by this word the doing of noble persons. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 117. 319 § 117. seeing and showing. 1. Mi, Mite, Miru (§ 99 n°. 34), to see. — Sinawo miru koto tea deki-masilka? can I see your goods? '). — WatdkUsi wa kdsukdni f tint wo mi-masu , I see ships in the distance. Do they say for it really in Yedo Watakusiwa kas'kani fune ga mie-masu or mieru? i. e. I — the ship comes in view. 2. Mis)e, eru, to show. — Bun-kovoo 0 mise! J ), let me see a desk, or in the more round-about language of Miyako : Bun-ko wo Go ken ( far Ji ?) se kudasare mase. I 3. Fai- (Hai-) ken, Mst> to *°°k on respect, with interest. — Kore too hai-ken itdsi-masu , or hai-ken tsukamdtsUri-soro , I have the honor to see it. 4. O me ni kak)e, eru, * ^|' = to bring a thing under Your Honor’s notice, to show a thing.. — Nani wo 0 me ni kake-masoo ka? 3 ), what shall 1 show Your Honor? 5. O me ni kakar)i, u, = to appear before His or Your Honor’s eyes. — Miyoo- nitsi 0 me ni kakari-masoo *), - to morrow I shall come under your notice, I shall let myself be seen by you , I shall call upon you. — Tadai ma hazimete 0 me ni kakari masita 5 ), it is for the first time that I come under your notice, = it is for the first time that 1 have the honor to see you. 6. Go-ran ), the glance of a noble person. Go-ran-z)i, u, uru, to honor with a glance. — Ten-wau no on fava sou-ziyau ico ik-ken Go-ran- ( — * 1 y ? |j|j] 3 ^ ^ ) zite , kokdro yoku , icaravi-tamavu 6 ) , the mother of the emperor, at the first glance upon the prior, becomes glad of heart and smiles. In the familiar style of speaking and writing the speaker applies Go-ran to his equals, to show them respect. — Kore wo Go-ran-zerare , or Go-ran nasare , please look at this. — Nani wo Go-ran nasdru ka ? 7 ), what are you looking at, what do you wish to see? the shopkeeper asks his customer. — Nanide gozari-masu ka? itte Go-ran nasare , go and see what it is. § 118. saying. The idea of saying is expressed by 1. Iv)i, u, I)i, u Ii-mas)i, u. — Anatano 0 nawa nanito ii-masu ka? what is your name ? — Watakusino nawa ...to ii-masu 8 ) , my name is . . . 5 ) Ibid. p. 2. 3) ibid., p. l. 6 ) Nippon woo-dai itsi-ran. II. 15 v. 8 ) Ibid. p. 19. ') Shopping-Dialogues , p. 23. 5 ) r. brown. Coll. N°. 1048. 7 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 1. <) Ibid. p. 18. 320 CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 118. 2. Nori-tamav)i, u, to order, when speaking of the master (see § 107, p. 299 1. 15). 3. Osiy)e, u, uru, peon. ossiy)e , it, urU , to teach, to communicate a thing (Jito ni koto wo) to a person by teaching , places him who makes the communication above him,- who receives it. — Ware ni (not ware wo ) osiye yo ( r&p is w ) , = teach me or communicate to me , sounds modest ; Andta ni osiye-mdsu , = I teach you or communicate to you , is considered presumptions. — Tamini takahesi uyuru koto wo osiyesimu '), (emperor Schin-nung) has the people taught ploughing and sowing. 4. Oos)e, uru, -fljl J , to charge (Jito wo kotoni, a person with anything), see § 87 n°. 25. Thence the passive Ooserar)e , uru, C > to be charged, in- structed. To a superior one says: A Anatawa sono toorini ooserare-mas'ta ka? have you spoken so? to an inferior: Omae sono toorini ittaka? — Oose-tsUk)e , uru (fp-ff ) , speak to , to address . . Thence the honorary passive 06se-tsUkerar)e , uru , — Nippon ye to kaiwomo oose-tsulceraruru aida, as or since (s. § 129, n°. 46) We (the sovereign speaks) have given orders to sail to Japan. — A Tono- sama korewo oose-tsukerareta , the master has said this to us, or charged us with it. 5. Kikas)e, eru, = Kikasime , to make people hear, from Kiki, to hear. — Ano 0 katani 0 kiki nasare , learn from him, ask him. — Kikasime, old- Jap. Ki- kame! ^ let me hear! tell me! speaking to a nobleman. — Watakusi ni 0 kikase nasare! let me hear! tell me. — Watakusi ni 0 kikase nasaru kotoga deki- indsil ka ? can you tell it me? — Vito no kokdroyeni naru koto wo ii kikaseru koto, to tell that which tends to the interest of others. Kiko-sim)e , uru , % , to let hear. Kikosimes)i, u, t^j f ^ * , to let hear, inform. 6. Maus)i, u, ^ is, AMoos)i, u, to speak respectfully to one's superior, to mention, declare; expressed ideographically by 0 . e. is. W W. 2 ). It has the definition of what is said as an Accusative, and, if it is a Substantive objective phrase, this with the particle to before it, whereas the more distant object, to whom or where one mentions, as Dative or Local ') Jap. Encycl. vol. 103. I r. Juy A- til * lin W 1 !» ffa-yun Siwori under Mausu. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 118. 119. 321 precedes. — Tsubusa ni sono koto too mausi-soro , I mention this minutely. — Zoo- tei ni mausu, v ^ J =, to speak to God. — Buts' ni mausite mau- sdku '), = as he speaking to Buddha says. — Mausi-tamavakuva, 57 ^ v ^ J ) , a (the prince to the emperor) says. — Nagaku Nippon no yatsilko to narite , midzitki-mono wo sadzuku besi to maosu , he declares that he will always be the servant of Japan, and pay tribute. — A Sore tea Nippon deica nanito moosi-masit kc? 3 ), what is this called in Japan? If Mausi is used as a root, on which another verb is grafted, it is expressed thereby, that the action is confined to the speaking or saying, e. g. Sadame , to define; Mausi-sadame , to defined with words; Age , to raise; Mausi-ag)e , urn , ±. = to say towards above, to communicate to a superior; Mood-ire , tf A , proposition to one’s equal. — Nandziye (or Nandzi ni) so-kan wo motte moosi-ire-soro , I have the honor to inform you by letter. — Yaku-ninye maud- tassu-besi , notice shall be given of it to the officers. § 119. giving. 1. As from courtesy the speaker places the person addressed above him, even if he is his equal, he qualifies his own giving as an upward movement, and the giving of another as a downward one: he uses Ag)e, uru, to reach up- wards. in opposition to the honorary passive Kudasar)e, uru, to be let down from on high, to descend (page 243 line 22), and since from this distinction it appears who gives, the speaker or the person spoken to, the express mention of a pronoun in connection with these and similar verbs is superfluous, as the following examples show: A Dai-kin wo age-mdsU kara , uke-tori-gaki wo kiiddsare '), after 1 have paid you the price give me a receipt. — Dai-kin wa agerarenu (or agerare-masenu ) * 5 ), = the price will not be reached upward to you by me , = I will not pay the price. — Dai-kin wa tadaima kudasaruka? 6 ), will you give me the money for the goods immediately? — Tadaima kudasaru koto tea deki-masenu ka? 7 ), cannot you give (it) me immediately? — Anata-sama yori kudasareta kane itd-pu mo tsukaiva itad- masenu , of the money given by Your Honor — it is a Japanese grisette who writes it — I have not yet spent one bu. ') Mansaku, see § 107. *) Shop/ big -Dialogues , p. 14. 2 ) Nippon-ki. Vol. VII. 14 r. 3 ) k. brown, Coll. N°. 366. 5 ) Ibid. p. 13. 6 ) Ibid. p. 13. ') Ibid. p. 13. 322 CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 119. 2. Sas&g)e, uru (from Sasi , to show, and Age, to raise), #. 1$. », holding a thing up, to present to a person in a higher station. Sinrano tsukai JV.N. kitatte mitsukiwo sasagu ') , N.N., ambassador of Sinra comes and solemnly offers presents (to the emperor). — Tanbano kuni yori kttrdki kitsUne wo sasagu 2 ), a black fox from the country of Tanba is offered (to the emperor). 3. Kudasare, joined to the root or to the gerund of a verb, characterizes the action as one proceeding from the person spoken to. It sounds more courtly than Nasare (§ 100. IV. 5). 0 kai kudasare (vulgo kudasai), or kudasare-mase , or 0 kai nasare! please to buy. — The chapman : San-byaku me de kudasare ! =t wi nr [a ^ 3 ) , please to pay 30 taels ! The buyer : Ni-byakU me de agemasoo , I will give you 20 taels. — Doozo mioo-nitsi O ide m* * nr ) kudasare! please to come to-morrow ! — Tsikadzuki ni 0 nari (IP' ^) kudasare! 4 ), please to approach him , = allow me to present him to you. — 0 kamai kudasaru na s ) , take no pains. — Mo sttkdsi ne-masite kudasare 6 ), please to set the price some- what higher. — Gok' yasUku-site kudasaru nard, nokordzu kai-masoo 7 ), if you give it as cheap as possible, I will buy all. Remark. For Kudar)i, u see § 87 N°. 10. 4. Tsuk)e, uru, to add to, expresses the idea of giving, without any boast. In A O tsUkS nasare! please give it me! Tsuke has reference to the speaker and the honorary passive Nasare to the person spoken to. 5. Tor£isim)e, uru, also Toras)e, uru. That the expression: „to give order to take” places the person ordered beneath the one who orders is self-evident. — Wi IM St Fyak-kwanni zin , gi rei , tsi, sin no fudawo torasbnete mono wo tamavU 8 ) , the emperpr orders the assembled officers to take tablets, on which one of the words humanity, justice etc. is written and thereby bestows gifts. 6. Yar)i, u, to cast, throw, send ( fitoni monoivo, to send a thing to some one) ; it humbles the receiver. — Tsukai wo O yari nasare , please send me a message. — Kono mononi kane itsipu yare! give that person one bu ! 9 t l $35 ml it?- l ) Yamato nen-dai. III. 3 v. *) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 19. Ibid. p. 86. 3 ) Ibid. III. 4 r. s ) Ibid. p. 21. *) Yamato nen-dai. III. 6 y. 3 ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 88. •) Ibid. p. 38. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 120. 323 § 120. going and coming are expressed by 1. Mair)i, u, solemn entry, to enter (a palace or temple) in solemn proces- sion. ^ o !H TV , ^ A # ^J- F roni Mai, Mau, to walk in procession, to hold a stately procession, and ir)i, u, to enter. The definition: whither one goes or where one enters, precedes, characterized by ye, ve or ni. Ten-mu unadzuite O-maeve maim '), prince Ten-mu, yielding, waits upon His Highness (the Mikado). — Kau-raimo . . Go tsin ( flip 3 ffjjt £ ) m mairite fei- fukil su ( *), also they of Corea come into the imperial camp and submit themselves. In the familiar style of speaking and writing Mairi is used iustead of Ki- tari, to come, if one’s own coming to the person spoken to is meant, even if one is on an equality with him. If the pronoun of the first person is wanting, by Mairi it is indicated that the speaker means his own coming to the person spoken to. — A Watdksa sinawo mini (or kai-mononi) maitta (^?^), I have come to you to look at (or to buy) goods. — Watdksa kono f it 6 wo tsurete maitta, I have brought this man with me. ( Shopping-Dial . 18). — A Firu-maye ni wa mairi ye- ) masenU, I cannot come before noon. ( Sh.-Dial . 17). 2. Mairar)e, uru, if it occurs, is used by the speaker, instead of Main , by way of an honorary passive, from respect towards the person who comes. 3. Mairas)e, uru, cause to anter solemnly, cause a thing to enter solemnly, i. e. to send a thing to a person in a high station, to offer a thing solemnly. m, m- The giver humbles himself, and raises the receiver. 4. Mairasar)e, uru (passive of Mairasi), to be admitted with solemnity. — An example from rodr. § 105: S. Joam Baptista Jesu Christoni Baptismawo sa- dzuke-mairasareta or Sadzuke-tatematsurareta , S. J. B. was solemnly admitted to the administration of baptism to J. C. — Here by Mairi the giver of the baptism is placed beneath the recipient, whereas the passive form mairasareta expresses the respect of the speaker towards the giver. 5. Ide, Idzuru ( |Jj f) , to come out of, to appear, and 6. Ag&r)i , u (± 7 pi to come up, rise, are applied only to a person beyond the speaker. The former points to the beginning, the latter to the duration of the action. Fi no ide is sun-rise, O ide (fjj|J^ }Jt|^), rising ? appearing of persons beyond the speaker, His or Your coming. — Oide nasaru ( l ) Nippon iooo-dai itsi-ran. II. page 4 r. *) Tamato nen-dai. I. 26 v. 324 CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 120. = Your or His rise takes place, i. e. you or lie comes. — Yoku 0 ide nasare, or nasare-mase , or, abbreviated, Yoku 0 ide! - be welcome! — 0 ide nasarei kasi! oh that he came! — Dokoni 0 ide nasariika? whither are you going? — A Kono mitsiwo 0 ide nasare-mase , go this way. — Idzuku ye (or Idzuku yori) 0 ide nasare-masu ? whither are you going (or whence are you coming? — Wa- tdkusi to isso ni ( — * iy pjfj~ \ - ) 0 ide nasare-mase , go with me. 0 ide also takes the place of the auxiliary verb Ari, Ori or lri (§ 96, 97, 98), in connection with a precedent gerund. — Tasikani sirite ( stte ) 0 ide nasare- masuka? ‘), do you, or does he know it certainly? — 0 kiwo tsUMte , mite 0 ide nasare! 2 ), fix your attention on it and see! — Atsirani matte 0 ide nasare! 3 ), wait there ! — Akari wo motte 0 ide nasare , bring a light. — 0 aydri iffl* ±p nasare , i. e. may your coming take place, says a merchant for: come in! (SL- Dialogues 1). Taken in an ample sense, by another’s coming the speaker understands a meeting, a concession to the speaker’s wish, e. g.: Sake wo age-masooka? may 1 offer you sake? — Ari gdtoo. no I thank you. — Nazeni 0 agari nasaranilkd? = why do you not rise? for: why don’t you concede, — why do you refuse? (. Shopping-Dialogues 21). Agarasar)e, u, uru, to be raised, from Agarasi , to make rise, and this from Agari, to rise. The passive form, for honor’s sake used in deference instead of Agari; also Agaraserar)e, uru. 7. Makarfi, u, evidently a continuative verb and as I think derived from Mak)i, it, = to leave off (§ 106), means a continual leaving off of work, i. e. to have furlough (Hd. Urlaub) or vacation, to be out of service for a time; to go on furlough '*). It was formerly used for people in service, who left the capital to go elsewhere for a time, on a visit. It is expressed by ^ o *|| o o o 0 . in) . 3i . ft . and must be distinguished from Makar)e , eru , to be sent away, the pass, of Mak)i , it. 0 v -v Yamdto f'tme mikoto ni makari-mousi-tamavite ivaku s ), (prince .w- h ~ v Yamato take) paying a visit to (the priestess) Yamato fime «[ 5 * A v 5 ^ (at Ise) says ... — A Watakusiwa omaeno kata ni makarau , mi I' — h $ ~ - 4 or makari-masoo . I shall come and visit you. ') r. brown, Coll. Jap. N°. 14. *) Ibid. N°. 34. *) MAKARU to va koto sumite sono ba too sirizoku koto nari. 3) Ibid. N°. 30. l ) Nippon-kt. VII. 16. r. CHAPTER VII. VERBS OF COURTESY. § 120 . 325 When the chapman says: Sono nedewa makdri-masenu , = for that price 1 will not come to yon, he declares that he is not willing to sell for that price. — Aru tokdroni makdri-arn , to be somewhere on leave, to be somewhere; to be there for a time , but not definitely. — Bu-zi ni rnakdri ari-masU , = he finds himself for a time at ease, it is well with him. — That Makari is, at the same time used for „to die” will, our derivation considered, not appear strange. Placed before another verb it seems to unite with it the idea „of furlough, on a visit only for a time.” — ^fioo-nitsi rnakdri idzu besi , possibly I may just call on you to morrow. — Makari therefore indicates discretion , politeness. 8. TsikA-dzuk)i , u, ft y , to come into the neighborhood. — Fiiru tomosiini tsikd-dzuku , the night moth comes in contact with the lamp-light. Thence Tsikd- dzUki , an acquaintance, one known. — 0 tsikddzttki ni nari-masU , I become your acquaintance , I make acquaintance with you. — 0 tsikddziiki ni nari-masite yoro- kobi-mdsit , it is agreeable to me to have become acquainted with you. The going out of the Mikado is called Mi-yuki-s)i, u, uru, or m Giao-gao-s)i , u, uru, or Giqo-gao-ari , = to spread happiness in going; on the other hand the going out of the Tai-kun, W * ° nari - Ten-icaii N. kuni ni giqu-gqu-su '), the emperor repairs to the country of N. — Ten-tsi Ten-wau aru-toki yama-sinaye giqu-gau arite , kaheri tamavdzu. Tenni no- bori tamavu ni ya? J ), the emperor Ten-tsi once went into the mountains and did not return. Should he have gone to Heaven? ) Nippon woo-dai itH-ran. II. 10 r. s ) Ibid. II 4 v. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 121. As the relation indicated by conjunctions, in which propositions stand to one another, is either a coordination or a subordination, Grammar dis- tinguishes coordinative and subordinative conjunctions. Consequently we arrange the Japanese conjunctions as follows: A. COORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. I. Copulative conj. 1. Mo, ..mo, ..mo. 2. Mata, ..mo mata. 3. Katsu, Katsu va. 4. Oyobi. 5. Narabi ni. 6. Kanete. n. Disjunctive conj. 7. Aruiva. 8. Matava. 9. ..ka, ..ka. | m. Adversative conj. 1 1 . Mottomo. 12. Nagara, ..ga (..nga), 13. Sikasi-nagara, Slkasi. 14. Sari- (San-) nagara. 15. Yavari. I Explanatory conj. 10. ..ya, ..ya. . . yara , yaran. IV. Conclusive conj. V. 16. Kono-y tie ni. Sore-kara. Kore ni yotte. 17. Sorede, Soredewa, Soowa. 18. So site, So gote. 19. Sate. 20. Sunavatsi. 21. Kedasi. 22. Tadasi. 23. Anzuru ni. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 121 , 122. 327 B. SUBORDINATIVE CONJ., GOVERNING THE ADVERBIAL PROPOSITION THAT PRECEDES. I. Conjunctions of place and time. 24. Tokoro, Baso. 27. Setsu. 31. Ma-ma. 35. Notsi. 25. Tokoro ni, 28. Migiri. 32. Aida. 36. Yori. A Tokoro de. 29. Utsi. 33. Uye. 37. Kara. 26. Toki. 30. Ma. 34. Mave, Maye. 3S. Made. n. Conjunctions of quality and manner. a. Comparative , b. Proportional conj. 39. Toorini. 40. Yauni. 41. Gotojsi, ki, ku. 42. Fodo, Fodoni. III. Conjunctions of causality, a. used in the notice of an actual cause. 43. Yueni. 41. Kara. 45. Niyotte, Aida, Tsuki, Tsuite. b. Conjunctions used in the notice of a possible , i. e. a future and thus an uncertain cause (Conditional conjunctions). 46. Naraba, Nara, in connection with Mosikuva, Mosiva, Mosi. IV. Conjunctions of the purpose. 47. Tame ni. 48. Tote. 49. ..mo. 50. ..tomo. 51. ..domo. V. Conjunctions of concession. 52. . .iedomo. 53. Sikaredomo, Saredomo. 54. Soredemo. 55. Sikamo. 56. Somo-somo. 57. Mamayo. The relative comparative of propositions. 58. ..yoriva musiro. Explanation. A. COORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. I. Copulative or coordinative conjunctions. § 122. 1. ..mo, adverbial suffix, = too, also, Lat. que , quoque, cha- racterizes the word which precedes, either subject or object of the proposition, as added to, or made equivalent to another subject or object already mentioned. Kore , this; Kore mb, this too; even this. Kore ico, this, him; Kore wo mo, him too. 328 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 122. As suffix to an interrogative pronoun it contains all that is included in the interrogative, as individuals together. — Dare, - who? (Lat. quis?) — Dare mo . - whoever (Lat. quisque). See page 102. It characterizes the concessive proposition. See § 131 n°. 50. ..mo, ..mo, = both., and.., as well., as also.., not alone or not only, but also.. — Kaze mo namimo sidzUmardzu , = both wind and waves do not abate, = neither wind nor waves become still. — Avugi ( A Oogi) va. Ziyun tsukuri-tamdvu to mo mata Bu-iuau tsuJcuri-tamdvu t6 mo iveri 1 ) , = concerning the fan , it is said that (to) Schun has made it, as also that (to) Wu-wang has made it. ft -<■ ml 7 Vft ? \ ZL , -v t 2. Mat&, X%. fth = twig, something that is double: as adverbial con- junction = too, and, moreover (sono Uyi) , likewise, or also, unites both coordinate names, and equivalent propositions, and refers to the word or propo- sition, that follows it. — Andta no kind-mono mata momen-mono it-tanno nag a fabawa ilcura ari-mdsUkd ? '-), what is the length (and) breadth of one piece of your silk- and cotton goods ? — Ke-ori wa kane-zak mata ken too motsii-mdsU 3 ) . for woolen goods the iron foot is used as also the ken (an ell of 6 feet). Mata (# ) refers to the predicate in propositions like: Mandnde tokini lcoreioo nargu mata yordkobasikardzu ya ? *) , to learn a thing (and) practise it continually, is this not agreeable too? ..mo mat&, = likewise. If the subject as well as the predi- cate of a proposition is made equivalent to the subject and pre- dicate of a precedent proposition , the sameness of the subject is expressed by the suffix mo. and that of the predicate by the adv. mata ( ) ; thence the formula ..mo mata.. Kono fittd fasirano kami mo matii... mi-mi, wo kdkitsi tamdtki , also (mo) both these gods kept themselves likewise (maid) concealed. Compare page 225. At the beginning of a proposition Mata points to the equality of its contents with that expressed in the preceding proposition. — Mata ( X ) andta no liooni sa-too ari-mdsu nard , sore wo kai-masoo s ), - and if you have sugar, I will buy it. ft* 3 ■ E2 1 ^ S'? ffiT . . i _ i ■ ft, Z l i Kasira-gaki. VIII. 2 r *) Lun-yu , Cap. 1. 5 ) Shopping- Dialogues , p. !53. 5 ) Shopping - Dialogues , p. 40 s ) Ibid. p. 23 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 122. 320 3. K&tsti, iU, isolated by va or wa also K&tsuvk, Katsu wk, = and also, moreover, Lat. quoque , continuative conj., characterizes the proposition or the part of the proposition that follows it, as an addition to the precedent clause. f JL % S V » K° n ~ s ‘ n katsu soo-bai '), friendship and trade. Jil jit? a? &L Fadzi anti katsu itaru ! ) . people grow ashamed and come to perfection. Katsu matk, jj , moreover also, than so much the more. Katsu-katsii, = moreover and moreover, all and all. 4-. Oyobi, = reach to. as conj. to and with, inclusive, unites two objects removed from each other, comprising the series of similar things between them. It is a synonym of ..ni itaru made or . .yuki-tsukite , = coming to.., and of Made mo. (See § 62. n u . 26). The stipulation that Japan shall appoint consuls and commercial agents abroad, is expressed in the Treaty of 1858, Art. 1 al. 4, by: 5. Narabini, T||if v _, besides, also, from Narab)i , u, to place oneself next, joins substantives and propositions. — Morokosi narabini Ban-yo ni dzuu-suru mono, a person versed in the Chinese as also in foreign languages. — Nippon no kome narabini Nippon no mugi 3 ), .Japanese rice and Japanese wheat. At the beginning of a proposition Narabi ni is met with e. g. in Art. VII al. 2 of the said Treaty, containing the stipulation: ..And these buildings shall not be injured." after the building of churches is conceded in the previous proposition. 6. Kanete, | jffl T 1 > at the same time, gerund of Kane, to take with or together, to comprehend, comprise, embrace, characterizes an apposi- tion. — N.N., Bunyo no Kami kanete Nagasaki Go-Bu-yioo, N.N., prince of Bungo and governor of Nagasaki. II. Disjunctive conjunctions, between propositions that reciprocally fxclude or may supersede each other. § 123. 7. Aruiva, Aruiwa, : u , contr. of dm ivu va, = as someone says 4 ). separates, with the signification of or, or also, substantives and propositions ') Netherl.-Jap. Treaty of 1858, in the beginning. 3 ) Lun-yu. II. 3. s ) Treaty. II. 19. h 1 J / '* ^ / t - V '-i > ^ g|| f / ||||^. tVa-gun itiwori, under Aruiva. 330 CHAPTER m CONJUNCTIONS. § 123. which may take the place of each other. — Kono fgiri aruiva sono i-zen nitemo '), at this date or earlier. Aruiva repeated has the power of exclusion. — Aruiva kono fgiri, aruiva sono i-zen , either at this date, or earlier. 8. Matava, Matawa, the mala isolated by va, = or also, then well. The „or” in ,, consul or consular agent” is expressed in the Treaty Art. I. al. 2 by matava. — 0 ^ $ t H* W E H w At- Nippon ki-kwan matava i-ninno yaku-nin 2 ), Japanese officers of rank or also commissioners. — Anataioa Egeres matava (Jran-mo-ziwo 0 kakika? 3 4 ), do you write English or Dutch? 9 . ..to, as suffix and pronounced with emphasis, original characteristic of the direct question; e. g.: Fitoka. f a man? ArUka? is there? Ari! there is! In alternative propositions repeated as a suffix, ..ka, ..ka, takes the place of our disjunctive either.., or.., Germ, entweder.., oder... — Yamaka? Kumoka ? touku-sile siru-koto nasi, = whether mountain? or cloud? being far off I cannot know it. — Soreka ardnu ka f ), is it so, is it not so? — &Sore ka, korelca koi to iye! tell that or this (one or the other) to come! *). Remark. In my opinion, ka gets its disjunctive power from its original qua- lity of an interrogative particle. Sore and kore are thus characterized by ka as undetermined points of interrogation. Besides the alternative question: is it so or not? is expressed by two coordinate questions, of which one as well as the other closes with the interrogative particle ka, thus Sa-yoode dri-mdsii ka ? Sa- yoode ari-masinil ka? = is it so? is it not so? The question: Is it silk or woolen stuff? sounds in the spoken language: Kina-mono de ari-masu kd? ke-oride ari- mdsitka? 5 ) = is it silk stuff? is it woolen stuff? If this alternative question is put , without any modification , dependent on the subsequent to dmdu (= to think that), or of to tovu (= ask if), the expression is obtained: to think that, or ask if it is silk or woolen stuff. Thus, when ..ka, ..ka answers to our dis- ■) Treaty. XT. 1. ! ) Ibid. IX. 0. 3 ) ojqiiv /j - lYutlotjur'S , p. 14. The original has 0 kalci lea for 0 kaki-musu ka. 4 ) Compare com, ado, p. 59 line 7 from tho bottom. „ Pedro ca Lean ca coi (o iye, die quod venint Petrus vcl Joannes.” s ) Shopphtg- Dialogues , p. 10 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 123. 331 junctive either.., or.., it is because the questions themselves are disjunctive or alternative. Since Ookata means „for the most part, in general” (see page 175 n°. 44), Ookata sayoo de gozari-masoo , odkata sayoo de gozdri-mdstl-mai of course also means „In general it may be so, in general it may not be so,” for which we are used to say: „It may be so, in general, or it may not.” Consequently the disjunctive character in those two propositions is not expressed by Ookata , but by the mere antithesis of the propositions themselves '). 10. ..ya, V, disjunctive suffix *), = or. Lat. r el, site. — Taya sonova fUru- bitdri , garden or field has become old; in the spoken language: Taya sono ga fdrubita. — Dzu-kin yd kdsa wo nuku , to take off’ kerchief or hat. — Stba yd dddro wo motte seki wo tsUkurU , to make mats of underwood or thorns. — Ha- nds), yd voardu koye , noises of talking or laughing. Also ya is, just as ka , properly the closing particle of a question, it may be simple or disjunctive, and as that about which a question is put, is uncertain, this particle is also called ivayuru utagainoya, i. e. the so called ya of uncer- tainty. — Ano fitowa kitdruya? is he coming? — SikdrOyd , inayd ? is it so, or not? — Mikado hei-anni mdsiiyd? inayd? * 3 ), = is the Mikado at his ease or not? = how does the Mikado? Kami ya Fotoke no inegumi aru besi. He who early and late does his duty towards his parents. Shall have the grace of the gods and of Buddha. Yara, properly Yaran, = Ya-\-aran, = if there shall be? — .. samaga kurude arau yara , watakusi va utagaute 6rU , I doubt if Mr. N. will come. — Idzureno koto yara sirarezu , it is not known what matter it is. — A Fit 6 yara tsiku-soo yara siranu 4 ) . whether it is a man or a brute — I do not know. though, adversative or properly concessive conjunction, originally Matte m6 >) Compare a. brown, Coll. Jap. LI. line 5 from the bottom suru fitowa m. Adversative conjunctions. § 124. 11. Motto mo (improperly expressed by Wagun Siioori, under Ya 4 ) Borrowed from collado, pag. 60 3 ) Nippon-ki. XXVI. 9. 332 CHAPTER Yin. CONJUNCTIONS. § 124. = with (this) also, modified for vocal harmony Motto mo, is put, in my opinion , elliptically for Sore wo mdtte mo , = with all this . . , though , on the Gun-yoo no so-buts va Nippon yaku-so no foka e urti-be- kardzu. Mottomo gwai-koku-zin tagai no tori-fiki va sasi- kamai-arU koto nasi 1 ) , munitions of war may be sold to the Japanese government exclusively. That fo- reigners take such from one another will not, how- ever be noticed. — By Motte as it appears from this example, the contents of the previous proposition are resumed, whereas the suffix mo stamps them as conceded. That the proposition following Mottomo contains an antithesis , is the logical consequence of the concessive character of the previous proposition. Compare § 74. The Japanese are accustomed not to distinguish the conjunction Mottomo from the adverb Mottomo , according to the old manner of writing pro- perly Mdtomd and ideographically expressed by or ^ , = „ utmost, by eminence” (see page 134), and also express the conjunction Mottomo by the cha- racter , by which it has become a stumbling-block for many a translator. As a proof it is necessary to cite the official Dutch translation of the above men- tioned article: „Oorlogsbehoeften zullen alleen aan de Japansche regeering ver- kocht worden en om dezelve aan vreemde natien te verkoopen is buiten deze be- paling.” — Of another article J ) also, in which the description of the tedious manner of examining goods is followed by: * ■%* >u -'S 2/, i. e. the examination, however, shall take place without any extraordinary waste of time, the Dutch translation drawn up by Japanese in- terpreters has „en” (and) instead of however, whence it appears that they, misled by the Chinese character, have misconceived the force of the conjunction Mottomo. Remark. The Mottomo occurring in Go motto mo de ari-mdsil ( T) ■=? x 3 ), You are right) of the everyday colloquial language, is evidently the adverb used as a substantive , and the phrase , which is elliptical . means : other hand. An example: o *) Treaty. II. 18. 5 ) Art. III. al. 5 of the Ki-soku or Tariff belonging to the Treaty of the 18 Aug. 1859. ”) Shopping - Dialogues , p. 13. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 124. 388 what you have said is incontestable. This expression is, by the by, also con- nected with a particular shrewd hero of antiquity, one Mr. Mottomo (^£), who had applied to himself the name of ;£§[ '' , Doo-ri , i. e. right, reason '). We leave this as we find it. 12. Nagara, = in the midst of, whilst, properly a word expressive of rela- tion, arisen by syncope from Naka guru, which for the sake of euphony has taken the place of Naka kara ( £). = from the midst, and has a verb in its root-form before it. Ne-nagdra, in the midst of sleep, not: as long as one sleeps. I-nagdra urn-mono is a person who sells, sitting; Motsi-yukite urn mono on the contrary, a hawker. Nagdra is to be distinguished from Nakara m. * ), = the half. — Fino nakara , noon. If the subsequent proposition is an antithesis to the antecedent, Nagdra is m * -s’ 7 m t r 7 equivalent to: nevertheless, yet, e. g. So fukuwo ki-nagdra ma- tsUri-koto wo kiki-tamavU s ). though he wears mourning, yet he attends to affairs of government. — Kono kuni Dai-Min ni tsn- dzuki-nagdra , kisa ardzu , this country, though it borders on China, has (nevertheless) no elephants. The antithesis is more emphatically expressed by Nagdra mo. The spoken language, which contents itself with putting Nd in the place of Narii-ddke (if possible), also retains simply ga (at Yedo nga) of Nagdra , to which the force of but has been justly attributed 3 ). It is put, like Nagdra , at the end of the concessive proposition. — A no 0 katava kokorozasiva yorosiu gozan-mas'ta ga, matsigai-mas'ta *), though his intention was good, yet he has made a mistake. 13. Sikasi nagara, = since it is so, mostly simple Sikasi, , = it is so, exhibits the previous proposition as conceded, and is followed by a sentence containing a statement , which must be of value equal to or more than the antecedent proposition. It is equivalent to: although, though, yet, however, nevertheless. — Sinawo mirU-kotowa deki-radsu ka ? can I see your goods? — Deki-masu. Sikasi ( m ) koko ni te-lion-gire ga ari-mdsu kara , korewo Go-ran na- sdre 5 ), yes; however as I have patterns here, please see them. — Oke-gainiva fikage yosi; sikasi (-fi£) arnari samusa va asisi; mottomo do-mave dusi-kau-setsu va , *) Wagun Siwori , under Mottomo. 3 ) r. brown, Coll. Jap. LV. LXII. 2. 5 ) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 23. -) Nippon woo-dai itsi-ran. II. 1 v. <) Ibid. p. 41. N°. 313. 334 CHAPTEB VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 124, 125. fincitamo yosi ’), in the breeding (of silkworms) on tubs, shadow is good, but too much cold injurious, however as soon as (the silkworms) are brought out of doors and fed there, sunshine also is good. 14. Sciri-nag&ra or S&n-nag&ra ( $8 % 1 1>* 7 > vulgo ^ # 8 ). b y syncope for Sikari-nagara , = since it is so, is put at the beginning of a propo- sition, which contains an antithesis, and therefore is equivalent to: although it is so, notwithstanding, nevertheless. The antithesis is more decidedly expressed by Sari-nag&ra mo or SiMsi-nagara mo. — San-nagara is phonetically . but not ideographically, indicated by 15. Yav&ri, $8 « ifP > however , yet, nevertheless, still. — &Nan- dzi ga sei-site mo , sei-sezu tomo , hare va yavari sore wo suru de arau , whether you forbid him or not, he will do it nevertheless. IV. Conclusive conjunctions, preceding the proposition, which expresses a consequence. § 125. 16. The adverbial expressions formed with ..yueni, ..kara and ..niyotte: Kono yue ni , Karuga yueni , Sore ytihii, cr also simply with YUeni , there- fore. Sore-kara , A Soreda kara , Soosita kara , vulgo Soosite kara , thence, then. Koreni ydtte. Soreni ydtte , therefore. SikdrUni ydtte, or SarU ni ydtte, since it is so, therefore. Further elucidation follows in § 129, N°. 43, 44, 45. 17. A Sore de , Soredew&, so, thus, then, -niydtte. — A WatdkUsi dai-zina koto wo tdssu , sore de 0 kike! I communicate an affair of importance, thus listen! — tsSore de ivd kai-masoo 2 ), then (as it is so) 1 will buy it. ASoowa, a contraction of Sikakuva , Sikguxva , so. or in the opinion of Ja- panese , of ^ £ v , Sa-ygu wa. I >7 --*# •) Soowd makari-masenil 3 ), so I cannot consent to it. so it is not to be done. (For Makdri compare page 325, line 1.) 18. Soo-site, vulgo So-site, iL also Sosste written , contr. from Sikgu-site , = since it is so, thus, then. See Shopping -Dial, page 15. Comp. A'S'oo si-masoo , I shall do it. ') Yama-mayu Lai- foo hi-dcn. I. 1 ! ) Shopping Dialogues , p. 10. *) Ibid., p. 3 CHATTER Tin. CONJUNCTIONS. § 125, 126. 335 19. Site, Sitevi, so, thus, a fusion of Sikdntc , Sikatte, = (this) being so, according to some , also of ^ ^ ^ jffl ^ £<} n (Soo) site , which as far as the meaning goes, comes to the same thing, placed at the beginning of a proposition, expresses a consequence, even if the idea, from which the conse- quence flows, is not expressed as in: „So then the day approaches, on which” etc. — Sate is expressed by ft. sometimes also by «• 20. Sunav&tsi, modified for vocal harmony from Sundvo-tsi ( IE It JS). = the right way, adverbially: right, directly (Germ, geradenivegs) ; conjunc- tively: consequently, is placed at the beginning of the subsequent proposition, which expresses the consequence. It is also used with the power of videlicet . to wit. Hlj ® . 7jr . |g. ■0! . in H • * o mi Sen-kou-sUru tokdrowv sirebd , sUnavatsi mitsi ni tsikdsi '), if one knows what precedes and what follows (if one knows the cause and effect), then one is near the path of wixdom. — A? Sf I'+f the Vth year of Ansei, consequently the year 1858 J ). V. Explanatory conjunctions. § 126. 21. Kedasi, = namely, for. though, Lat. nam , at the begin- ning of a sentence, which explains the proposition preceding, mostly giving a reason. — Yun-dzuka wo nigiri to ivu. Ked&si tana-kokdro ni nigiru no tokdro nari , the hilt of a bow is called nigiri (hilt); it is the place at which it is held with the hand though. The shade of doubt ascribed to Keddsi by some philological Japanese is with justice, not admitted by others. 22. Tadasi, ui> - properly, devoid of other definitions, forsooth, is placed at the beginning of proposition , which explains a preceding assertion by a particular circumstance and generally confines it to that. It is to be distin- guished from the adv. Tada, = only (see p. 176 n°. 66). — Ygu-ginni liiyaku mai . taddsi gulden nari , European silver two hundred Mai , i. e. guilders. 23. Anzuruni, ^ T. = , = in my opinion, Remark, precedes that, which the writer has to remark on the saying of another. *) Dai Gaku , § 3 *) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. Art. XI al. 5 336 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 127. B. SUBORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS, THAT GOVERN ADVERBIAL PROPOSITIONS. I. Conjunctions of place and time. § 127. 24. Tokoro, j frjy 3 , or Ba-so, = place, it answers £o our adverbial conjunction of place where (see page 97). — A „Andta no sinuru tokdro de watd- ktisimo mata asdko ni sini-masoo, where thou diest, 1 too will die” J ). — Mina mina nige-sarisi tokdro ni vd (or ba-so ni vd) fitdri tatte-oru , alone to remain standing, where all have fled. — Kavi-tatento orndvu tokdro no do-ma s ) . a patch of ground, where people think of breeding (silkworms). 25. Tokoro ni, A Tokoro de, characterizes the attributive proposition by which it is preceded, also as an adverbial definition of time, and is equivalent to: whilst, as. — Mina mina ydrokdbu tokdro ni , sono yo nivaka ni oo-kaze fuki-kitdn-keri , whilst everyone (on board) was full of gladness, in that night a storm suddenly arose, = every one was glad, as a storm arose etc. — Sikaru tokdro ni, as it is so, it being such. 26. Toki, time; Tokivh, Tokini, Tokini vh = Tokinv&, at the time of, when. — Mono-kuu tokini monogatdri sdzic , at the time of eating (when one is eating) one does not talk. — Find kasa drU toki vd, Jiddri; tsUkino kasa arii toki vd , san nitsi no Utsi ame-furu to ieri , people say that the weather becomes dry , when there is a sun-hood (a circle round the sun) , and that it rains within three days , when there is a moon-hood. — Sono tate-mono wo ... siyu-fo nado suru koto aran tokiniva, Nippon ydku-nin korewo ken-bun suru koto tau-zen taru bdsi 3 ), when it shall happen that people repair buildings... etc., Japanese officers will have to look after them. — Soreivo sum nd ; sayooni ndru tokiva semerareru zo . do not do that! if it happen so, then you will be blamed, = do not do it, other- wise you will be etc. — A Yedoe yukimasita toki RokU-go gaivani midzUga masi- masita ''), when 1 went to Yedo, the water in the river Roliugo was high. 27. Setsii, fijj |>, division of time. (See page 158). Tadasi idzureno kaze nitemo kiravu nari; mottomo no-gai no setsu va kumsikarazu s ), properly one must avoid every wind; at the time of the breeding (of wild silkworms) in the open fields however, it does not matter. ') n. drown. Cull. Jap. LVII. •) Y avia- may u fi-den. III. I. , ) Noth.- Jiij). Treaty. II. 7. ’) r. nHowN. Coll. Jap. LVI. *) Yama-mayu fi-den. I. CHAPTER Till. CONJUNCTIONS. § 127. :W The rest of tlie words expressive of relation . which define time are used in the same way as Toki , i. e. they are preceded by the proposition governed by them in its attributive form. If they occur with a gerund preceding, they then belong, adverbially, to the subsequent principal proposition. 28. Migirl, , - street-cutting '). paving with Hag-stones, also the stones of a staircase; tig. step, space of time. Synonym of Sdtsn (n°. 27). — Fund no tsh/dktt-kan no migirini, on the arrival of the ship. 29. Utsi, j^J £ , Utsiwa, Utsini, within; while. See page 188. — A Yddoni ori-masita utsi ni , [on-siro no] kioa-ziga ari-numta * 2 ). there was a conflagration [in the palace], whilst I was at Yedo. 30. Ma , pi v , 1. space, interval: 2. opportunity. — fkariwo ordsu mamo nakil-site, kazeni makasete i/uku . not even having had time to drop the anchor, they drifted before the wind. 31. Ma-ma, p^ v Ma-mani, 1. at every place, wherever; 2. on every occasion, as often as, every time that. Repetition of Ma (see page 54), sy- nonym of Aida-aida. — Ko-tsi matava siya-tsiwo forite (fotte), ma-mani ki-sekiico uru koto ari. at the digging up of old soils, or ground on which temples have stood, rare stones are frequently discovered. — Kane wo utsu ma-mani , as often as the bell is struck. — Mono too torn ma-mani, as often as any thing is taken. Tabi-tabi ni , j)t£ J V ! = > j Tabi-goto ni, ^ , as often as. — Goto ni , 7- . Ya wo fandtsu tabi-goto ni (or Ya no tobu goto ni) koge too tatsuru , to call out at every shot of an arrow (or so often as an arrow flies). 32. Aida, ^ r , while. See page 189. 33. Uye, ±?,ab ove, upon, on. See page 186. 34. Mave, Maye, vulgo Mai, before. See p. 187. — „Watakusi?io kaeru maeni site simae , get it done before 1 come back” 3 ). — A ,, Watakusiwa mairanu maini sigotowo site simai-masoo , I shall finish my business before I return” 4 ), — properly: I don’t come: I first shall have done my business. •) Mi-giri, contracted from Mitsino kiri, way-cutting, or as some say, from Mina-kiri , = water- cuttiug, because the row of flag-stoues laid at short distances from oue another to step on in rainy weather is called Migin . - — Wa-gun Siwori , under Migiri. 3 ) r. brown. Coll. Jap. LVI. Ibid. N°. 161. 4) Ibid. LVI. 338 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 127, 128. 35. Notsi, , after. See page 187. 36. Yori, |rj ^ , since. — Ame tsutsi firakesi yori kono kata , since heaven and earth have developed themselves. — A Mairi-masita (vulgo masite ) yori , ano tokdrowa hirake-masita '), that place has been opened, since they came. 37. Kara, 2, after, see page 72. — Wataktisi-ni wa yomenu kara, tsuu-zi- kata ni tanonde , naosi-te morai-masu , I cannot read it and thus I shall request the interpreters to translate it. — A Age- mdsu kara uke-tori-gaki wo kudasare , after delivery by me , please give a receipt. Vulgo also with a gerund preceding. — A Tabete (for taleta ) kara yuki-masita J ), he went, after he had eaten. 38. Made, to, till. See page 192. ml T -<■ dn v Hra 3 5 ? t y EE. Conjunctions of quality and manner. § 128. a. Comparative conjunctions, equivalent to: like, just as, so as. 39. Toori ni, it* *. ,1. = in the way, on the passage of... (see page 191), according to, in the way that, properly a word expressive of relation. — #|J! r Reino toori ni, according to the law. — Andtano ostyuru todrini itdsi-mdsita , I have acted according to your direction (as you prescribed). 40. Yauni, AYooni, in the manner of, in the way that, so that, as if 3 ). — Omdvu yau , the meaning. — Fitd no siiku yau ni surd , to do as others would gladly have it. — Kaviko kUvd ni fanarenU yau ni su-besi , people must go to work so, that the silkworm be not removed from its food. — A ,, Ilitd-bitd no osoreru yooni okonai-masita , he behaved so, that people were afraid of him” *). 41. Goto)si, ki, ku, h j , to be like... (see page 109 n°. 7), is equivalent to „to be as if,” when it, used without a subject, has a proposi- tion before it, as complement. — Akuwo kondmtt monovd wazavaiico manikii; ta- toveba Jiblkind old ni od-suruga gotosi, whoever loves evil, draws upon himself adversity; it is, to use a comparison, as if the echo answered the sound. — Mosi *) R. BROWN, Coll. Jap. LVI1. *) Comp, page 85. JJono yau etc. and 131. =) Ibid. LVI. *) R. BROWN, LVII CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 128, 129. 339 sa-yquni yomu-beku naraba , in case one must read so. — Mosi sa-ynuni yomu- beki ga gotdkii naraba , if one ought to read so (which the speaker doubts). b. Proportional conjunctions, which express a proportion as: in propor- tion to, how, — so much the. 42. Fodo (A Hodo), Fodoni, jjvjp * , = in proportion to, for so far as, so much as, so much that. Comp, page 131. — Tsikara no oydbu fodoni , for so far as my strength reaches. — A Watakusiva kiu-sokii-si-tai fodo ni tsukarete oru, I am so tired, that 1 long for rest. — ..va .. to ivu fodono kotoba nari , .. is a word that says so much , as . . — Fisasiki fodo ooi ( A Hisdsii hodo ooi ) , = much in proportion to the long lasting, i. e. the longer, the better. — A Ooi hodo yoi '), the more, the better. — Fisdsi-kereba fisasiki fodo ooi , the longer, the more. — Ilayakereba liaydki fodo yoi , the sooner, the better. — Areva nomeba, nomU fodo kavakiga tsiiydkn narti , the more he drinks, the more thirsty he is. S&ru fodoni, yjqr ^ _ , arisen by syncope from SikarU fodoni , = for so far as it is so, is placed at the beginning of a sentence. Sari-fodoni is also met with. EH. Conjunctions of causality. § 129. a. Conjunctions of propositions, which notice an actual, past or present cause. 43. Yue, m ■ now commonly written = cause; Yueni, for reason of, because, as, whereas, while, with an attributive definition preceding, which is sometimes qualified as a genitive by ga. — Sore Nippon-gdku va Tsiu- kica no tsi yori f igdsi ni atarii yue ni Nit-tou to ivu , the country of Japan , as it from the middle kingdom (China) lies towards the east , it bears the name (there) of the (country) to the east of the sun. — Ten-kani keda-mono ooku , den-fatawo sokondvu yiieni fitdni kariwo osive-tamdviki , as many animals were upon the earth and did damage to the lands , he (a certain prince) taught the people hunting. — Ten-ka ni midzti oosi yue ni , as rivers are on the earth in great numbers. — Mukasi va kinu ni ■ mono ivo kakisi yueni, kamito ivu zi ito-fenwo kakeru 2 ), formerly people wrote on silk; thence the character indicating paper (^j^;) is combined with that indicating silk ( ^ ). — Yama takaki ga yueni tdttokarazu; ki ariiwo motte ‘) K, BROWN, LVII. •) Kasira-gaki. VIII. 1 r. 340 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 120. tattosi to sti , on account of its height , a mountain does not deserve honor ; that it bears trees, that makes it deserving of honor. — Fit6 kovetdru ga ytteni tdttokardzu ; tsi druwo mdtte tattosi to su, a person is not respectable on account of acquired bulk; having understanding, that makes him respectable. Compounds with Yueni ,. placed as illative conjunctions at the beginning of a proposition : Kono yue ni, ^ i , = therefore. — Kono yileni kun-siva madzu toktini tsUtsU simU ’), therefore the philosopher applies himself particularly to virtue. — A Sore yueni , z, = for such reasons, therefore. Karu ga yueni, by apheresis for Sikdru gd yue ni . = on account of its being so, since it is so, therefore, thence, Lat. ergo , is placed at the beginning of a proposition, which contains the consequence of a series of propositions prece- ding. — Karu gd yue ni kuni wo osamuru koto vd the wo totonouru ni ari 2 ) , therefore the management of a country depends upon the management of his own house. 44. Kara, thl. g , = from. Lat. ex (see page 71), as an illative conjunction peculiar to the spoken language of Yedo, it characterizes the proposition it go- verns as the cause, from which the subsequent proposition flows. It is sometimes also used alone with the signification of after. The verb de- pendent on Kara is used as a substantive. — Te-hon-gire ga dri-mdsu kara , korewo Go-ran nasare 3 ), as patterns are at hand, please see them. — A Kon-nitsi tea yo- hodo dsdi kara , miyau-nitsi kaheri-mastyoo '* ) , as it is too late to day, I shall return to morrow. Os6i stands for Osoki of the written language. — Ilosi wa tai-soo todi kara, tsiisaku miye-mdsU * * 6 ), the stars seem small, because they are more or less distant. — Kan-ben-si masiyoo kara , watakusi no sina mo 0 kai kudasdre 6 ) , = after you shall have thought of it, please buy my goods. — A Tabete (properly Tabeta) kara yuki-masita 7 ), after having eaten, he went. Compounds with Kara, placed as illative conjunctions at the beginning of a proposition : Sore kara, , vulgo Soreda kara, thence. A Soo site (properly Soo-sita) kara, thence, then. A Soo site , So site , then. ■) Dai Gaku. X. 6. 3 ) Shopping- Dialogues , p. 23 6 J Shopping- Dialogues , p. 39. 5 ) Ibid. IX. 5. 4 ) Ibid. p. 41. 7 ) r. brown, LVI. 5 ) R. BROWN, LVII. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 129. 341 45. . . ni yorlte , old-Jap. ..niyote, vulgo .. ni yotte , f e 0 if) > gerund of yori, = proceding from.., having its foundation on.., because of... It is preceded by the causal proposition, which it governs, in its substan- tive form with or without the suffix ni. — Kami no ktLddri n6 Avadzi no sima ydri Sadond sima made ya sima mddzu umi-maseru kuni ndru ni yor'ite Oo Ya- sima-kuni t6 (vu '), the eight isles mentioned in the preceding lines — beginning with Avadzi and ending with Sado are called the „ Great land of eight isles,” as they constitute the land first produced. — FiydkU-kokU w6 uyuru koto too yokU-su yotte mono wo tsukuru mono wo Nou-nin to ivu 2 ) , with respect to his ability (ydkUsu) in cultivating the hundred (= all) kinds of grain, the producer is called Nou-nin (husbandman). Compounds with ..ni yotte, as illative conjunctions placed at the beginning of a proposition : Koreni yotte, Sore ni yotte, therefore, Lat. iyitur. Sik&ru ni yotte , or S&ru ni yotte, as it is so, for such reasons, therefore, consequently. Remark. . . ni yotte is . in the official style , superseded by the words expressive of relation Aida, = between, while (i$ 62 n°. 14), and Tsuki, Tsukite, Tsuite, = respecting (§ 63. B. 3). At least, places have come under our notice, in which both words must have causal force. Compare page 320, line 14. b. Conjunctions of adverbial propositions, which indicate a future, possible cause (Conditional conjunctions). We may not pass them over in silence, because they are suggested by others although they do not really exist. We have alone to do with a time-defining local, and thus if, with a view to the spoken language, we confine ourselves to Nari , to be, with the form Naran-toki ni, - when it shall be, for which also simply Naru-toki ni , = when it is, is used, or, instead of it, with the suppositive form explained in § 76, thus, to stick to Nari, with 46. Naraba, A Nara, = if it shall be; it is preceded by a substantive or by a verb in the substantive form. — A Sa-yoo nara , or Sore nara, kai-masoo 3 ), if it is so, then I shall buy it. If the speaker intends to say: as it is so, then he takes Nara for a contraction of Nareba. — Firu maye ni wa mairi-ye-masenu. — *) Ko-si kei-dzu. I. p. 4 r. *) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 4. 2 ) Kasira-gaki. IV. 4 r. 342 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 129 . ..Sore nara , firugoni .” ')• I can’t come before noon. — ,,In the afternoon then.” A Nokorazu 0 kai nasdru nara, onazi nedande age-masoo J ), if you will take all. I will sell them at ( y") the same price. — A Nokorazu fei-kin nedan de 0 kai- nasare. — ,, Yasui nara , tori-masoo" 3 ) , = Buy all the pieces at one and the same price/ — ,, If it is cheap, I will take it.” If the mere possibility or probability of the statement is insisted on , then . in addition to Naraba. use is made of the adverb: Mosikuv&, or simply Mosiva, Mosi, = in case of, if. 15 fro M- — Jj ^ Man-itsi , one against a thousand. Its place is at the beginning, or even after the subject of a subordinate proposition, whereas the predicate verb of that statement . if it is not attributively connected with told (as Naru-toki ) , is put in the suppositive form ( Naraba ) or occurs as the gerund. Mosi sikdrii tokiva, in case it is so: ^ ^ ^ K , Mosi sikdrabd , if it might be so; Mosi sikdrite . in case it is so. As Sikuva is evidently the adverbial form of Siki, = ..ish. ..like, isolated by va (see page 109 n°. 71), only mo of Mo-sikUva . remains as the nucleus of this compound. If this mo is a variation of the ma (jijfj^). = actually, ex- plained at page 130, Md-sikitvd is equivalent to the Latin ven-similiter ; if it is an abbreviation of dmoi , - thought, then Mosi-kuvd means probably, likely. peut-etre. — Inuka rteko ka? dog? or cat? Jnuka? mosikuva neko kaf a dog? or perhaps a cat? — Ni-nusi mosi korewo inamu tokiva *) , in case the owner of the goods refuses such. Mosi ta no kdku-zio so-seino taka wo gen - suru toki va, Oranda-zin mo dou-yauni siyo-seraru best 5 ). if the amount of the import duty be lowered for another nation , the Dutchmen shall be placed on a like footing. Mosi gi-den-(deo)si gataKi toki vd , sono zi-gen wo ... sei-fu ni mesite slyo- tsi-se.simu bhi 6 ), if such may be difficult to determine, this question shall be brought to the knowledge of the government and (by it) be settled. — Nii- gata minato, mosi sono minatowo aki-gataki koto arava (read araba), Nippon nisi no kata nite betsuni f it 6t sit no minato narabini mUrawo ... aku-besi r ), the port of Nii- gata — in case a difficulty might arise about opening this port, a harbor and town shall be opened elsewhere on the West-side of Nippon. - Mosi siyau-zen ') Shopping- Dialogues , ]). 17. 4 ) Noth. -Jap. Treaty. III. al. 8. 7) French- Jap. Treaty. III. al 2. 5 ) Ibid., p. 36. ») Ibid III al. 7 s ) Ibid. p. 87. •) Ibid. II. al. 9 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. 8 130. 343 san kin i-ziyqu wo motsi-wataraba 1 ) . in case a merchant vessel might import more than three pounds (of opium). Afosi yo-yi naki si-mi arite, kono ki-yen tsia fon- siyo tori-kayesi summit domo . deu-ydku no omnmtiki ra kono ki-yen yori tori-okonavu- bdsi *), if there might be some trilling matter, which cannot he avoided, the spirit of the Treaty shall be acted upon, even if the ratification of the document (containing the Treaty) within the fixed term shall not have taken place. IV. Conjunctions of the purpose. § 130. 47. Tame ni, of 7 dine, purpose, aim, end, for, on behalf of, is properly a word expressive of relation (see page 292 n°. 24), and has, when it is used as a conjunction, the verb in its substantive form with or without ga, as suffix of the genitive, before it. — Ki-sdkii wo siyun-siu-sesimuru ya tam&ni ... siyo-riki-su besi 3 ). in order to have the rules followed, aid will be given. Uru tame ni . for sale. Tsutsi sitna ye ni fukaranu tame , kazewo kirqvu besi , take care to shelter the place from wind, to the end that earth and sand be not blown on the food (of the silkworms). The verb dependent on Tame ni is put in the future with or without the ge- nitive termination ya , when the attainment of the o*bject is considered as still belonging to the future. — kono okite wo katukusen tame ni , in order to carry out this clause, there shall etc. — Kagamiva sUydta no yosi-asiwo mirurno. kokoro no kiyoku-tstydku wo taddsi u rat amen ga tame navi , = with regard to the mirror, its object is not alone to see if the countenance is beautiful or ugly, but also to rectify and reform the wrong and the right (i. e. the moral nature) of the heart. 48. Tote, the syncopated to site, of to. = to. and site, the gerund of s)i , u , uru. to do. Preceded by a verb in the future , ..to su means to be active to carry out the object, which still belongs to the future. (Compare § 103. 6. 7. page 290). Motomen to su is thus = acquisiturus est. he is about to get; Motomen to site or Motomen to te. - being about to get, i. e. for the purpose of getting. — Siu-fu to ivu mono fu-zino yUsuri wo motomen tote Nippon ve ivatariki, a certain Siu-fu came to Japan to search for a remedy against death. ') Neth.-Jap. Treaty. III. al. 5 Ibid. XI al. 2 3 ) Ibid VIII al. 2 344 CHAPTER YU!. CONJUNCTIONS. § 131. The spoken language supersedes Motomen by Motomeo (see page 209), thence the expressions: Motomeo to sum tokoroni, on the point of acquiring; Motomeo to suru mono , some one who is on the point of acquiring; Motomeo to te , that he may acquire. § 131. 49. Mo, = also, properly an adverbial postposition (see § 122), racterizes it, as one granting that something is real or possible, whilst the state- ment thus conceded is limited or revoked by a proposition immediately following it (adversative proposition). The verb dependent on mo, as it has been already noticed -in § 74, is put in the substantive form with the local termination ni or also in the gerund. / \lka-yauni nasi te mo, however it be made. — A 0 kai nasaretemo, 0 yame nasaretemo, kono uy& wa deki-masenu *), you may buy it or not; I cannot go further. 1 don’t care; take it or leave it. 50. ..tomo, ffc . also, with a verb preceding in its substantive form. Akuru- tomo , Miru-tomo , Yuku-tomo. — Idziire no kata y6ri mairu-tomd 2 ) . it does not matter from which side he may come. 51. . .domo, K’-T: , = ndomo, contr. from ni, Local, and tomo. Comp, page 207. Opposed to Akeba 7 >-/<', the fusion of Akeniva, is Akedomo 7 >? likewise a fusion of Akenitomo, and opposed to Arebd is Aredomo, = though there is. Prom Aranedomo, = though there is not, and Saranedomo, - though it is not so. come Arademo and Sarademo. Compare page 258. 52. . .ledomo, = though it is said, though it is called, though... with a pre- vious appositive definition characterized by to. See page 208. V. Concessive conjunctions. when it is put after the predicate verb of a subordinate causal proposition , it cha- Akuru ni mo , Miru ni mo , Yukit ni mo. Akete mo , Mite mo , Yukite ( A Yuite) mo. r rdmu to i£ddm6 , mddzusiki wo u'dsUruru koto nakare! 4 Tdttosi to iklomo , iydsiki wo wdsitruru koto nakare. a Though you are rich, do not forget the poor! £ Though you are honorable . do not forget low people ! ) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 39. s ) French-Jap. Treaty. III. 13. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 131. 345 0 5 Sen-riyau no ko-gane w6 tsumil td iedomd , itsi-nitsi no gdku niva sikdzu , though gold is heaped up to the amount of a thousand ounces , it is not equal to one day’s study. — . . koto wo md yurusu best to iddomb , ..kotova kessite nazarU best '), though — '% PPh; this also be granted , it may not certainly happen that. . . 53. Sikaredomo, , syncopated Saredomo, = though it is so, the con- cessive form of Sikar)i, u, = to be so, root si (see page 109 n°. 71). 54. Sore demo, = also then, the modal of Sore, - such, followed by mo, antithesis of the conclusive Sore de wa (see - page 334 n°. 17). 55. Sik&mo, fflj | , = but; abbreviation of Sikaredomo. — Hitdno gen-set naru , sikamo kore ni taggute , tsuu-sezdrasimU -), to oppose men. although they are accomplished and wise, and not allow their advancement. 56. Somosomo, ¥v *). -or, explained by the Japanese themselves as concessive * 4 ) , concedes the antecedent statement , however introduces an adver- sative clause. It means properly „so as so as,” is a fusion of Sikamo, and this of Sikdku mo (just as Sosite of Sikdkii site . see page 334 n°. 18). and stands with the adversative force of Taddsi (see page 335 n°. 22) or of Sikdsi (see page 333 n°. 13). Some Japanese etymologists think Somosomo an abbreviation of Sore mo sore mo , others of Sate mo. sate mo , which . so far as the meaning goes . approaches our derivation. In the beginning of a speech it serves to announce that which is to be said, as an opposition of other opinions. In this quality it is stamped as an intro- ductory word ( ly ^ 7 ; , Fat-go no kotoba) . and will approach most nearly to an expression like: „However it may be” 5 ). a* M* Kore wo motomuru ka ? Somo somo kore wo atavuru ( atooru ) w ka? 6 ), does he strive for it? or does one give it to him? a* *) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. II. al. 6. Dai Gaku. X. 14. 3 ) „ Yih , a particle demiting or, either, ako a commencing particle as moreover.’ - siedhurst, Chinese and English Dictionary . 4 ) ^ ^ u / . 6 ) The sense we assign to Somo somo does not agree with that attributed to it in goschkewitsch Yaponsko-Russkii Slotcar. ®) Lun-yu. I. $ 10. 346 CHAPTER VIH. CONJUNCTIONS. § 131 , 132. w\ J 32 1 13 o -f-' mi a! ijft Z y 7 i&t m a lei *^r fit y > Z' o ? fhl ft a| Y'i 57. Mamayo, — in case Si-ro kiyoo wo tovU. Si no no-tarnavaku , nan-foono kiyooka? foku-fauno kiyooka ? somosomo nandziga kiyooka ? '), Tsze-lu asked about energy. The Master said, „Do you mean the energy of the South? the energy of the North? or your own energy? core que , quoique " 2 ) — for in Japanese writings I have never yet met with this word, it must, to have a concessive force, be reduced to the form of Ma-ma mo (see page 337 n°. 31) modified for the sake of euphony, and thus mean „ however often,” being equivalent to Toki-tokimo or Tabi-tabi mo. The expression: „How- ever often he tries it, he does not succeed in it,” would thus be equivalent to Kokoro-miru mama yo deki-masenu. Remark. The suffix mo gives to all the conjunctions definitive of place and time, or properly words expressive of relation, cited in § 127, a concessive force , i. e. it characterizes the antecedent proposition , w r hich the word expressive of rela- tion governs, as concessive, while the subsequent proposition comes out with an adversative force 3 ). The relative comparative of propositions. § 132. 58. Musiro, = in preference, rather, Lat. potius , as an ad- verb , it is put at the beginning of a subsequent proposition . to the contents of which preference is given above that expressed in the antecedent proposition. As starting point of the comparison the antecedent statement is characterized by yori va. Next to „Yuku yoriva yukanilga mdsu , - it is better not to go than to go,” cited in Remark p. 131, is Yuka (or Yukan. Future) yori va musiro yukuna yo! - rather do not go , than go ! Whereas the state or action . to which the preference is given may be represented as one commanded or future, the state or action of the antecedent proposition may be a present, or likewise a future one, as appears from the following saying of Kung-tsze (Lun-yu , Cap. III. Pd-yi , § 4). of which we give three Japanese translations, which lie before us. ') Ttchung-yung. X. 1,2. s ) Rodriguez $ 83. 8 ) According to gosciikewitsch Yap. -Russ, slovnir, Mam ago signifies WproUchom (besides) CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 132. 347 I. 1 • |M| R i -r 'lil Si?. ') /\ Jt? -t& * J" 7 * 7 *T V t r 7 II. 1 BlS t: Sil 9 lt'1 M > i - tii V 7 £ „ As to festive ceremonies , be rather sparing than extravagant; as to mourning, be rather grieved than pay attention to observances.” In the translation 1 and 2 the subsequent pro- position is taken as Imperative, in 3 as a wish, in the Future, whereas in 1 the antecedent pro- position is conceived as Present, in 2 and 3 as Future. In Mr. j. legge’s excellent version of the Chinese text this passage runs: „In festive ce- remonies, it is better to be sparing than extra- vagant; in the ceremonies of mourning, it is better that there be deep sorrow than a minute attention to observances.” Remark. 1. Japanese etymologists see in Musiro a variation of Mosi ( m> = in case of, see § 129 n°. 46), and explain ro as an „ auxiliary word” '); an explanation that does not preposses us in its favor. Should not Musiro much rather be equivalent to the syncopated form of Masu-siro and thus mean „more price” or „higher value” J ). Used as an adverb, a word with this signification, at least more than any other, would be equivalent to our ,,by preference." With regard to the so called auxiliary word ro , the Wa-gun Siwori teaches us. that in the eastern Japan it supersedes the termination wo. In Japa- nese Dictionaries the signification of [\,Sou-si-tai and Kau-si-tai , i. e. to desire to do so or so (see § 105), is given to Musiro and (ning . willingly); it is plain that the writer aims at the optative proposition , which is introduced by Musiro. Remark 2. The spoken language supersedes Musiro with Naka-nakani , = almost, rather, and Nengoro ni , = willingly, rather; and makes use of other expedients too. — Si-sen yori wa naka-naka ni nokorazu sute-oken . I will rather give up all , than die. — Watakusi wa yuku yori yuki-masSnu hoo ga yorosii to zon-zi-mdsu 3 ) , I think . that it is better not to go , than go. I would rather not go. — „ Fito wo gai-suru yori wa fit6 ni gai-seraruru ga mdsi to omoi-nasare ! Suffer wrong rather than do it” 4 ); literally: think, that it is better to be injured by others, than to injure others! l ) Wa-gun Siwori, under Musiro. Compare Nai ga tiro , worth nothing. $ 109. I. 1, s ) r. brown, Coll. Jap. N°. 419. 4 ) Ibid. N°. 873. 348 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 132 . ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUNCTIONS TREATED. Aida ... N°. 32. j Mata va. . N°. 8. I Sate .... N°. 19. Toki ni . . N°. Anzuru ni . . . 23. Mave, Maye . . 34. Satevd 19. Toki ni va. . . . Aruiva . . . Rn.fin . . . 7. Mai 34. Setsti 27. Told.nva . . 24. Miqiri 28. Sika mo 55. Tokdro . . domo . . . . . 51. «7 Sikaredomo. . . 53. Tokdro de. . . . Fodo .... . . 42. ..TOO, ..TOO. . . 1. Sikdru ni yotte . 16. Tokdro ni . . . . Fodo ni . . . . . 42. ..too mata ... 2. Stkasi 13. . . to mo ■■9 a . . 12. Mosi 46. Sikdsi-nagdra . 13. Todri ni Gnt.d ni . . . . . 21. MosikUva .... 46. Sikdsi-naadramo 14. . .to te Got6)si , ki, leu. 41. Mottomo .... 11. Somo-somo . . . 56. ..tsuite TJndn ni . . . . . 42. Musiro 58. Soo-sita kara . . 16. Utsi . . iddomd . . . . 52. Nag dr a 12. Soo-site kara . . 16. Utsini Jc.n hn . 9. Soo wa 17. Utsi wa Kanete . . . . . 6. ..narabd .... 46. Sore da kara. 16, 44. uye Kara. . 16, 37, 44. Narabi ni. ... 5. Sore de 17. . . ya , . .ya . . . Kartiya yw ni. 43. . . nga 12. Sore de mo .. . 54. ■ ■y ara Katsu. . . . . . 3. ..ni ydrite . 16, 45. Sore dewa ... 17. . . y aran Katsu va . . . . 3. . .ni yote . . 16, 45. Sore-kara . 16, 44. Yau ni Keddsi . . . . . 21. ..ni yotte. . 16, 45. Sore ni yotte . . 16. Yavari Kono yu& ni Kore ni yott . . 43. Notsi 45. Sosite 18. loo m e. . 16. Oydbi 4. Sosite kara. 16, 44. Yori Ma . . 3. San-nagdra. . .14. Save domo. ... 53. Sunavatsi . . . . 20. Yotte Made. . . . . . . 38. Tabi-goto ni . Tabi-tabi ni. . . 31. Yui Ma-ma . . . Sdri-nagdra . . 14. 31. Yue ni ... 16, Ma-ma ni. . . . 31. Sdri-nagdra m6. 14. Tadasi 22. Ma-ma yo. . . . 57. SarU-fodo ni . . 42. Tame ni 47. Mata . . . . . . 2. Saru ni yotte . . 16. Toki 26. 26. 26. 26. 24. 24. 24. 50. 39. 48. 44. 29. 29. 29. 33. 10 . 10 . 10. 40. 15. 40. 36. 16. 43 43. A P P E N D I X. The three dialects, those of Jlun , LJ and 'Fang, mentioned and elucitated at pp. 30 and 31, are, according to a statement, since come to onr knowledge, from a Japanese man of letters '), the dialect of Hang-chow ( M), capital of the province Che-keang , that of Fuh-choiv ( jjjg ^J4 ), capital of Fuh-keen , and the Official language ( g A Kwan-gin ) , by others, also called Kwan-hwa or the Mandarin. A correct instruction in the Official language is extremely rare, the more so, as both the other dialects are generally in use. As this statement furnishes a satisfactory answer to the question concerning the presumed historical value of the Chinese dialects extant in Japan, we con- sider ourselves required to quote the original expressions of this statement also. *5 ffi — til O m y tn * IU t 9 i 9 •i its 99 j * J tr 1$ w # * * □fe. 0 tv t 9 M 7 tit iW h a n •» ■) 0 Si-sei kai-kwan, — a round to elucidate the four tones, by Kav-mon Sen-sei, 1 S04 ; reprinted in 1858. Preface, p. 1 verso. ADDENDA. Page 157. Tlie year-name Gen-dzi (1864) is succeded by ^ J[|i Kei-oo 5 : 7C 1865 - Page 250, § 92. 1. Remark. If zar)i, u, is preceded by a substantief in the Local or by an adverb in ku, it stands as a substantive affirmative verb and is a fusion of the particle zo and ar)i, u. Thus Fdnani zarikeri stands for Fdnani zo arikeri , = a flower has it been; Sumtiku zarikeri , for SdmUku zo arikcri , = cold has it been. ERRATA Page 294 line 5. For: nondeflecting Read: deflecting PL533 .H71 A Japanese grammar Princeton Theological Seminary-Speer Library 1 1012 00072 7992